Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
CONFERENCE PROCEEDINGS
(TECHON 2015)
First Edition
First Printed 2015
TECHON 2015 (TECHNOLOGY AND INNOVATION NATIONAL CONFERENCE
PROCEEDINGS)
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
Kuching, Sarawak
Jun 9 11, 2015
Editors:
ii
ii
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
14
24
33
50
60
74
83
iii
iii
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
96
10
108
11
119
12
13
139
14
152
15
175
16
185
iv
iv
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
17
203
18
212
19
221
20
231
21
242
22
250
23
266
v
v
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
24
281
25
297
26
318
27
335
28
347
29
359
30
368
31
378
vi
vi
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
32
389
33
402
34
423
35
439
36
454
37
467
38
479
39
493
40
506
vii
vii
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
41
523
42
537
43
551
44
563
45
574
46
593
47
601
48
607
49
614
50
620
viii
viii
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
51
631
52
642
53
652
54
672
55
686
56
696
57
706
58
726
59
740
ix
ix
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
60
753
61
768
62
779
63
794
64
815
65
831
66
850
67
869
x
x
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
68
871
69
892
70
908
71
THIXOFORMING OF A NOVELAl5%Si0.8%Cu-1.2% Mg
ALUMINIUM ALLOY
M.A.M. Arif, M.Z. Omar , M.S. Salleh
919
72
928
73
938
74
948
75
959
xi
xi
ORAL PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
76
JUN 2015
xii
xii
975
POSTER PRESENTATION
ISBN: 978-967-13157-5-0
JUN 2015
77
986
78
987
79
988
80
989
81
990
xiii
xiii
ORAL
PRESENTATION
xiv
Politeknik Mukah
ABSTRACT
The purpose of this study was to identify the perception among PMUfm Radio
Announcer or also known as deejay (DJ) on the effectiveness of the Campus
Radio
implementation
in
Polytechnic
Mukah
which
focusses
on
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Radio in general, are becoming more and more popular in providing general
educational opportunities, as familiarity with their use improves, new ways of using
them are revised. It is possible that these media in the near future will take the brunt
of the educational burden as it reaches out to more people at ones with minimal effort
and costs involved. Polytechnic Mukah has taken this acknowledgement of radio
broadcasting purpose to help its students and staffs to learn through radio station by
initiating its own campus radio. One of the objectives of teaching English in
polytechnic education system is to enable the learners to communicate fluently,
independently and being able to use English Language in everyday life as well as
preparing the students for the real working world.
There are many ways of how one can learn English Language. Among others
are watching English drama or movies, listening to English songs, or the one method
where one could do more than just listening to English songs but also talk shows and
small talks is through a radio station, more particularly, an English medium Radio
Station. Furthermore, campus radio broadcast English program aims to assist students
and staffs to develop further the necessary language skills which enable them to
improve their spoken and written English. It also aims to improve their command of
the various sentences structure, vocabulary, various grammatical errors, structures
encountered in primary English language and widening their horizon and scope in all
subjects (Bates, 1984). Being able to be involved with a radio station with the
production team will not only enhance one creativity and self confidence, but also
help to improve communication skills and developing English Language skills.
PMUfm Campus Radio provides a few hours of daily airing with special
programmes lined for the listeners. The first part includes the general interest
programmed which is beamed out at the general group of listeners. These include
weather reports, news items and commentaries on events happening around the
campus or even around the district and state. The second part is the educational
broadcast of a high educational content which is beamed at a specific audience. These
include broadcasts for students and broadcasts for staffs in general, or any other
specific groups. These programmes, while being mainly for educational purpose may
also entertain as the campus radio tagline says Enjoy the infotainment ride!. The
programmed are planned accordingly aimed to help not only to provide students with
knowledge, learn through its segments and small talks, but also at the same time being
entertained while learning.
PMUfm Campus Radio it a nutshell is hoped not only to educate the listeners
of a larger scale, but it is especially aimed to help its own radio announcer to improve
themselves in a few areas such as self esteem, communication skills and most
importantly providing them a platform to practice and develop their English language
skills. Even though the campus radio broadcast in 100 percent English language, the
selection of the campus radio announcer is solely based on their interest in
broadcasting, and does not require them to acquire a certain level of English
Language proficiency. It is believed that one could learn at their best when they have
the interest in learning and passion in doing it.
The radio announcers, which are students of Polytechnic Mukah who came
from various levels of English Language proficiency are taught the basics of
becoming not only the radio announcer (deejay/DJ), but also exposed and taught of
the radio production works. They are taught on how to find news and articles, doing
their own editing as well as topics for their own radio programmes, they would then
have to come up with a creative way to write their scripts, discuss and read their
scripts in an interesting way so it would attract the listeners to listen to their
programmes, plan interviews, activities and quizzes to involve the listeners, and also
handle events with the listeners and the local communities, so more people would
benefit from the campus radio instead of the radio announcers themselves. Among the
daily live airing programmed are weather reports, news updates, PMU Happenings;
3
where the deejay shares about events happening around the campus, BBC Learning
English; where the deejay shares English words or idiom of the day as well as
inspirational English quotes by famous people, PMU Beats; where the deejays share
about lifestyle, useful tips and entertainment industry, and also one occasional
programmed called PMUfm 101; where the deejays get to interview other people to
talk on certain topics that interest the listeners. All these activities and programmes
are aimed to develop the students involved in their self esteem, communication skills,
and most importantly help them to improve their English Language proficiency from
time to time through their involvement. However, the use of radio has been widely
argued to be capable of motivating learners to develop self-confidence to learn and
communicate effectively in English language. This includes listening to radio, as they
talk and pronounce different words correctly. This helps listeners to set up pattern of
speech, phrase and sentence pattern through distance learning (Odera, 2006).
The objectives of this study as a matter of fact support the objectives of the
campus radio initiation objective itself, which is to measure whether the students who
are involved as the radio announcer (DJ/deejay) in PMUfm Campus Radio had
improved their abilities in three main focuses, namely the communication skills, selfesteem, and English Language skills.
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
Using radio as a mean of education is not a new method. It has been used
widely around the globe for many years. Strictly educational broadcasts can be used
in all forms of education. As has been suggested, their use in developing countries is
one of the few ways in which any real impact can be made on their large scale
problem of educational provision. Educational broadcasts cannot stand on their self.
But they can be usefully integrated into distance education courses and regular class
meetings). Students from different respective study major in Polytechnic education
only get to learn three levels of English for Specific Purposes, which are known as the
Communicative English I, II, and III throughout their diploma. Having a campus
radio could provide them continuity to practice and learn English not only regularly
but also more consistently, which contributes to acquiring the language skills. There
are many other countries which are using this method to reach out to more people to
4
educate them, especially those in rural areas that they could not reach. For example,
The Allama Iqbal Open University in Pakistan uses radio and television widely in
their teaching and learning process. Established in 1974, the radio programmed are
broadcast in national and 21 regional languages. The services for foreign students are
also provided in 16 foreign languages. The radio programmers for different classes
are being broadcast for Pakistani students living abroad. Pakistan Radio Broadcast
net-work is very enormous and covers nearly 98 % of population. It spread over 80
percent areas of Pakistan. FM radio service was started in 2002. Now only 8 FM
stations are providing 101 services. FM radio channel was used by the University for
its Courses Transmission from the transmitters of Pakistan Broadcasting Corporation.
The broadcast time for each course is of 15 minutes duration.
The enormously increased in students enrollment compelled the university to
increase the course related broadcast which was not possible through PBC during its
limited time. The university took a decision to establish own FM channel. Now-adays it is working successfully and FM transmission can be listened, live on internet
also (Ali, 2013). Communication skills on the other hand come together through
practices, and PMUfm Campus Radio provides the students a platform to practice
their communication skills. The teaching of communication as an outcome, along
with expert content, is important as it prepares students to communicate better
through their assessment, enter into dialogue with peers and academicians, formulate
questions to further their learning, etc. It is also integral to preparing for various
professional environments and develops skills that are important as graduates, and
sought after by employers.
The activities and programmes done through PMUfm Campus Radio are
aimed to help its deejays and the listeners to develop in all three skills as mentioned
above; English Language skills, communication skills and self-esteem. The deejays
are given equal opportunities to get involved and show their creativities, ideas and
talents through the activities and programmed. Since the initiation of the campus radio
in 2013 to date, a significant development can be observed among the deejays in all
6
those three elements through the activities and programmes organized, which leads to
this study to measure the students developed skills and abilities in the criteria
mentioned earlier. According to Odera (2006), writing on the use of school radio
program in schools, noted that radio technology is viewed by teachers as a useful tool
for teaching and learning languages like English, French, German and Kiswahili at all
levels of education. Language programmes on radio helps to increase the students
mastery of vocabulary and pronunciation as students learn to imitate the radio
presenters. She further noted that if this learning resource is carefully selected and
used, then learning becomes more interesting effective and meaningful.
3.0
4.0
Sex
Age
Semester
Department
Duration
(%)
Male
17
39.5
Female
26
60.5
Total
43
100.0
18-20
13
30.2
20-=22
24
55.8
22-24
11.6
24-26
2.3
Total
43
100.0
15
34.9
15
34.9
11
25.6
4.7
Total
43
100.0
Civil Engineering
18.6
Electrical Engineering
2.3
Mechanical Engineering
11.6
It
7.0
Commerce Department
26
60.5
Total
43
100.0
1-6 Month
9.3
7-12 Month
16
37.2
12-18 Month
17
39.5
>18 Month
14.0
Total
43
100.0
Table 2: Mean and Standard Deviation (SD) for PMUfm radio campus in PMU.
Item
Mean
SD
4.488
0.703
4.535
0.550
4.372
0.618
4.000
0.900
4.070
.799
4.000
0.787
4.070
0.736
4.163
0.754
Communication Skills
Your involvement with PMUfm Campus Radio helps you to
improve your communication skills.
I can communicate better with friends, lecturers and the
society after I became PMUfm deejay.
conversation.
I ask for clarification by asking the best question to invite the
best answers from others.
4.140
0.861
4.047
0.871
4.445
0.796
4.581
0.587
4.488
0.768
4.442
0.881
4.140
0.804
4.419
0.852
4.000
0.724
4.140
0.804
4.210
0.709
4.070
0.856
PMUfm.
I think that Im a person of worth, at least on an equal plane
with others.
in groups.
English Learning
I am satisfied with my English ability I have acquired
4.465
0.767
4.814
0.450
4.790
0.466
4.651
0.482
4.674
0.474
4.744
0.441
4.790
0.466
4.720
0.548
4.535
0.550
4.279
0.854
practice my English.
Attending PMUfm activities (e.g. discussion, pair or group
work, live airing, etc.) is very helpful in learning English.
Through learning English with PMUfm ,you can appreciate
more programmed such as TV, radio, internet, etc.
You wish your English lecturers can provide you
opportunities to show your language abilities as much as you
had on PMUfm.
124.500
Wilcoxon W
277.500
-2.441
.015
Sum Of rank
Mean Rank
11
Male
277.50
Female
668.50
Male
16.32
Female
25.71
Refer to the Table 3 above, the Z value = -2.441 significant at the .002 level
(refer to the row Asymp. Sig. (2-tailed). These results indicate the value of p (.015) <
(.05). As the value of p is smaller than the alpha (), then the results revealed that
there were significant differences between the two variables. The results are in favor
of the group female respondents, where the average English learning for female
respondents better compared to male respondents.
5.0
CONCLUSION
This study had proven that the involvement of students as the deejay or radio
announcer had helped them improved in all three criteria focused on English
Language learning, communication skills as well as self-esteem. The finding shows
that all deejays had improved in their self esteem and communication skills
throughout their involvement in the activities and programmers organized by PMUfm.
They had also improve their English Language proficiency and they strongly believed
that PMUfm had helped them not only flourish their English Language learning
interest, but also improved their English language skills throughout their duration of
participation as they could now not only felt they could communicate freely in the
language but the bonus is that they are also having the awareness that they should and
could help other students (the listeners) to improve theirs too, through the
programmed organized by the Campus Radio.
12
have improved in all language criteria; namely writing, listening, reading and
speaking- or just some of them.
REFERENCES
Ali (2013). Radio for Equitable Education to All, VFAST Transactions on Education
and Social Sciences.
Deakin University (n.d.). Communication skills, pp. 1-15, retrieved 23 February 2015.
13
Politeknik Ungku Omar, 3Politeknik Sultan Abdul Halim Muadzam Shah, 4Politeknik
Port Dickson.
zyreena@yahoo.com, izwahismail@gmail.com, norlizaabu@yahoo.com,
munirah.nujid@yahoo.com
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENGENALAN
Faktor persekitaran memberi kesan utama terhadap produktiviti pekerja dan juga
sesi pembelajaran pelajar. Kriteria persekitaran yang boleh diambil kira termasuklah
suhu, pencahayaan dan keselesaan terma. Adrian-Constantin (2014), ergonomik
ditakrifkan sebagai mempertimbangkan keadaan persekitaran dan kekangan pada
sesebuah organisasi dengan menggunakan pengetahuan berkenaan had dan keupayaan
manusia. Tujuan ergonomik ialah mereka bentuk operasi, alatan, sistem teknikal dan
tugasan bagi mempertingkatkan keselamatan manusia, kesihatan dan tugasan, keselesaan
dan pelaksanaan (Dul & Weerdmeester 2008). Bekerja dalam keadaan yang tidak selesa
dalam jangka masa yang panjang akan memberi kemudaratan kepada kesihatan badan
dan boleh mengundang kecelakaan serta menyebabkan produktiviti terjejas maka objektif
pembelajaran dan pengajaran tidak akan tercapai.
Merujuk kepada keadaan ketika ini, masyarakat mula menyedari dan mengambil
kira kepentingan ergonomik dalam kehidupan seharian terutamanya bagi memastikan
keselamatan dan keselesaan dalam tempat kerja dan persekitaran. Faktor ergonomik amat
penting dalam mempengaruhi persembahan dan produktiviti sesuatu organisasi, kilangkilang pengeluar dan juga syarikat-syarikat servis (A.R Ismail 2009). Pencapaian kerja
yang rendah sememangnya dipengaruhi oleh keadaan persekitaran tempat kerja dan juga
peralatan yang digunakan adalah tidak bersesuaian. (Hollnagel, 2013) telah menjelaskan
bahawa pembangunan kajian kendiri dan kajian secara terperinci untuk menyahut cabaran
dan menyumbang sesuatu yang lebih baik adalah salah satu sumbangan ergonomik.
Kajian ini menjelaskan keputusan pengukuran faktor-faktor ergonomik yang dijalankan
di bengkel kimpalan yang bertempat di Politeknik Ungku Omar, Ipoh. Tujuan kajian
pengukuran ini dibuat adalah untuk mengkaji kesan faktor-faktor persekitaran seperti
suhu, pencahayaan dan keselesaan terma sepanjang sesi pembelajaran dijalankan di
15
2.0
METODOLOGI
setor
Scrap
box
F
A
H
C
5
4
Meja
kerja
11
12
Stesen
8 kimpalan
13
gas
9
14
10
16
17
18
19
15
Silinder
gas
Oksigen
20
Silinder
gas
karbon
dioksida
Jadual 1 di bawah menunjukkan jadual jumlah pelajar yang akan menjalani kerjakerja kimpalan pada dua sesi iaitu jam 10.30am-12.30pm dan 2.30pm-4.30pm yang mana
setiap sesi mengambil masa selama dua jam.
16
KELAS
JUMLAH PELAJAR
JUMLAH PELAJAR
LELAKI
PEREMPUAN
10.30am-12.30am
DEM 1
37
2.30pm-4.30pm
DKP 1
30
Suhu
Pencahayaan
Bunyi
Kelembapan
Tekanan
Karbon dioksida
17
3.0
KEPUTUSAN
Rajah 4 menunjukkan graf hubungan antara karbon dioksida melawan masa dan
juga pencahayaan melawan masa. Graf menunjukkan jumlah karbon dioksida tinggi pada
jam12.20 tengah hari ketika sesi 1 pembelajaran. Manakala ia semakin berkurangan pada
jam 4.30 petang. Bagi graf jumlah cahaya pula, pencahayaan berada pada keadaan
maksimum ketika jam 2.50 petang diikuti jam 11.30 pagi. Ini menunjukkan pencahayaan
berada dalam keadaan baik.
18
19
Rajah 6 di bawah menunjukkan graf suhu melawan masa. Suhu dicatatkan berada
pada keadaan paling panas bermula daripada jam 2.00 petang sehingga jam 4.30 petang
iaitu sebanyak 32o Celsius. Bagi keadaan suhu keadaan tertutup pula ia mencapai suhu
sehingga 35o Celsius pada jam 2.00 petang hingga jam 4.30 petang.
4.0
PERBINCANGAN
20
Daripada Rajah 7 di bawah, didapati hampir 100% pelajar tidak berpuas hati dan
tidak mencapai keselesaan di bengkel kimpal. Jika dibandingkan dengan skala keselesaan
ASHRAE nilai yang diperoleh adalah melangkaui julat 3 dan ini menunjukkan bengkel
tersebut terlalu panas.
Keselesaan terma memberi kesan yang besar terhadap produktiviti dan kepuasan
hati pelajar terutamanya bagi mereka yang berada di tempat yang tertutup dan agak padat.
Untuk mendefinisikan keselesaan terma itu sendiri amat sukar kerana kita perlu
mengambil kira keadaaan persekitaran dan factor peribadi apabila mengambil kira faktor
suhu dan pengalih udaraan yang boleh memberikan kesan kepada keselesaan. (Ismail,
2009). Tanpa pengalih udaraan yang sesuai, tempat pembelajaran akan mendatangkan
masalah disebabkan udara panas yang berkumpul serta pencemaran udara dan
mengakibatkan ketidakselesaan. Ketidakselesaan yang berpanjangan dan berlarutan akan
menyebabkan produktiviti pelajar di dalam bengkel terganggu dan secara tidak langsung
objektif pembelajaran tidak tercapai.
21
4.1
Cadangan Penambahbaikan
Rolling door
Rolling door
Rolling door
Rolling door
Rolling door
setor
P
Scrap
box
F
A
Meja
kerja
11
16
12
17
Stesen
kimpalan
gas
13
14
10
15
Silinder
gas
Oksigen
Rolling door
Rolling door
Rolling door
H
C
18
19
20
Silinder
gas
karbon
dioksida
ringkasnya
ianya
boleh
dipecahkan
kepada
dua
faktor
utama
iaitu
penambahbaikan terhadap bengkel itu sendiri dan yang kedua penampilan pelajar yang
terlibat (Kleiner, 2006) Merujuk kepada cadangan plan penambahbaikan antara perkara
yang boleh dilakukan ialah menambah saluran pengudaraan gas karbon dioksida yang
lebih fleksibel. Tingkap yang sedia ada boleh digantikan dengan pintu gelongsor supaya
senang dibuka bagi tujuan pengudaraan yang lebih berkesan. Pencahayaan perlu diambil
kira dengan menambahkan lampu yang lebih terang iaitu di antara 1000 hingga 2000 lux.
Bagi mengatasi panas yang melampau kepadatan pelajar juga boleh dikurangkan supaya
pengalih udaraan boleh berlaku dengan meluas.
Bagi tujuan mengatasi tekanan akibat kepanasan, air minuman perlu disediakan di
dalam bengkel tersebut. Waktu rehat juga perlu disediakan dan masa bagi pelajar untuk
berada di dalam bengkel tersebut perlu di hadkan selama 2 jam sahaja. Kipas perlu
dipasang dengan lebih banyak supaya terdapatnya perolakan udara. Bagi pelajar pula
22
perlu memakai pakaian keselamatan bengkel yang bersesuaian serta tidak terlalu tebal
supaya pakaian yang digunakan tidak merangkap terlalu banyak haba di badan.
5.0
KESIMPULAN
Hasil kajian mendapati persekitaran di bengkel kimpal amat panas dan ini
menyebabkan ketidakselesaan pelajar dan pensyarah. Keputusan kajian ini telah dibuat
dengan mengambil kira faktor persekitaran serta penampilan pelajar itu sendiri. Oleh itu
perubahan perlu dilakukan untuk mencapai reka bentuk yang lebih ergonomik bagi
membantu proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran berjalan dengan lancar dengan merujuk
kepada pelan penambahbaikan struktur bengkel kimpalan dan juga penambahan pintu
gelongsor bagi tujuan pengaliran udara yang lebih baik.
RUJUKAN
Adrian-Constatin Achim. (2014) Risk Management Issues in Policing: From Safety Risks
faced by Law Enforcement Agents to Occupational Health, Procedia Economics
and Finance 15 ( 2014 ) 1671 1676.
23
Agnes anak Buda, Marcus Kho Gee Whai, Bibie anak Neo
Politeknik Kuching Sarawak
agnes.b@poliku.edu.my, marcus.k@poliku.edu.my, bibie.n@poliku.edu.my
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Therefore, to help them with the skills needed, the advancement of technology
was incorporated with the additional knowledge about oral presentation skill to
develop a new teaching aid. In this research, software called iSpring Presenter was
used for that purpose in order to provide them with additional information needed to
know more about oral presentation skills. Thus, the aims of this paper are to enable
students to learn oral presentation skills through software, i.e ISP and also to obtain
the effectiveness of ISP usage.
2.0
needed in oral presentation, software called iSpring Presenter (ISP) is used. ISP is an
authoring tool used for rapid e-learning users. ISP integrates with Microsoft
PowerPoint and this will allow anyone to convert existing notes into self-study
material with just a few clicks. ISP will appear as an add-in in Microsoft PowerPoint.
It provides full access to impressive e-learning features that can swiftly build a
complete course or an assessment. ISP publishes learning materials to all devices
using an innovative Flash+HTML5 format. So, it allows anyone to create professional
e-learning courses for web and mobile devices (Android, IOS and window phone).
Most importantly, its content is compatible for any Learning Management System
(LMS) which includes Curriculum Information Document Online System (CIDOS)
that is being used in polytechnic.
ISP also allows the students a more engaging way of studying as any
presentation can be enhanced with voice overs, YouTube videos and Flash movies.
Any course created with ISP instantly adapts to screen size and orientation ensuring
the learners experience is consistently optimized for their screen of choice. Apart
from that, ISP enables quizzes and surveys to be conducted. Therefore, it allows
anyone who accesses the notes to test their understanding at the end of the session.
However, the process does not stop there as any answer given will be assessed
immediately. In other words, it is an interactive quiz as ISP provides room to design
26
quizzes that seamlessly integrate into the course. Through ISP, the lecturers for
example have other options than the normal Microsoft PowerPoint. ISP makes
learning content and topics become even more engaging and spring to life with video
explanations. The lecturers can record or import video, sync it with slides and
animations and produce effective video lectures. Figure 1 below shows the preface of
the quiz provided in ISP.
Apart from being useful to the students, ISP, at the same time give way to the
lecturers to continue to educate even after the class has finished by uploading it in
CIDOS. By doing so, students are given more knowledge and time to discover oral
presentation skills outside of their normal class hours. In other words, it encourages
student-centered learning process. When students involved directly with the learning,
they will understand the skills better. It is hope that they could also overcome their
fear of presenting in front of the others and build better confidence.
3.0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
The survey on the use of this innovative approach was carried out in
Politeknik Kuching Sarawak. A total number of 30 students were involved in the
research. These students are semester one students of Kuching Polytechnic, majoring
in Diploma in Accountancy. They are also taking a course on oral presentation skills
namely Communicative English 1 (DUE1012) which require them to conduct an
27
4.0
28
Not only that, the result also indicated that students can improve their
understanding in the topic better as it fitted their learning styles. Prensky (2001) study
on Digital Natives said that Our students today are all native speakers of the
digital language of computers, video games and the Internet. Therefore, ISP fitted
perfectly in the way students nowadays studied. In term of assessment given using
ISP, the students were satisfied and 80% of them agreed that the assessed elements
were appropriate for the learning objectives, given 30 minutes as the time allocated to
perform the task. Overall, the students believed that they can improve their
understanding on Oral Presentation Skills with the help of ISP. Table 1 below shows
the overall result of the finding.
29
Table 1: Mean values for each statement on participants perception on the use of ISP
Statements
Mean
3.20
3.03
3.17
3.17
3.07
3.20
ISP provides me with enough information about Oral Presentation Skills. 3.20
ISP makes learning Oral Presentation Skills more interesting.
3.20
I find having Oral Presentations Skills taught in this way is very useful.
3.27
5.0
CONCLUSION
The positive feedback from the students had proven that the usage of ISP was
indeed a very useful tool in making them understand Oral Presentation Skills better.
Students were more attracted to this approach as they were very close to the usage of
technologies in their daily life including studies. Oblinger (2005) for instance portrays
a vision of technological utopia, something that supposedly exists today, where
students are proactively using their iPods to learn, snap photos everywhere they go
and use these tools for impromptu study meet-ups. Therefore, these students found
ISP as very interesting and willing to learn more about the topic on their own. It is
highly recommended that English lecturers should incorporate ISP as one of their
teaching tools because it can make the learning environment more interesting and
enjoyable.
30
Besides that, it is not impossible for the students to perform better in the topic
through the help of ISP because they themselves believe they understand the topic
better. At the same time, continuous monitoring from the lecturers should be done so
that they can keep track on the students performance and assistance needed. Hence,
the collaboration between lecturer and students is essential in determining the success
of implementing learning activities using ISP. It is also recommended that further
studies be carried out, focusing on the lecturers perceptions on the use of ISP in their
teaching activities.
REFERENCES
31
Kho, M. G. W., & Chuah, K. M. (2012, July 17-18). Encouraging ESL discourse
exchanges via Facebook: A study on engineering students. Proceedings of 2nd
Innovation Conference and Exposition 2012, Shah Alam.
Kho, M.G.W. (2014). A study on the areas and causes of academic oral presentation
difficulties faced by Malaysian polytechnic students. (Unpublished Masters
research project report. School of Educational Studies, Universiti Sains
Malaysia)
Prensky, M. (2001). Digital natives, digital immigrants part 1. On the horizon, 9(5),
1-6.
32
aqes_80@yahoo.com.my,alvy_79@yahoo.com.my
ABSTRACT
Good road comfort for road users. Road surface texture is very important for
road users, to prevent road accidents from happening. There are many tools used
to measure the slip road surface as seen on highways. Tools such as the British
Pendulum and Griptester are often heard used to test the slip road surface. Both
tools are traditional tool and modern equipment, each with different way of
application, but with the same purpose of which is to measure the slip road
surface. The main objectives of this study are to find relationship between British
Pendulum and Griptester, and to develop an evaluation model to predict the grip
number using British Pendulum value. However, the tests conducted were only
done on one type of surface material composed of ACW20 on the Express Road in
Selangor and State Road in Melaka. Both tools were applied for each location.
After the data has been obtained from the tests plotted to see the difference or
relationship between these two devices, it can be indicated that there is a very
weak correlation of R2. From the analysis, this study shows that the correlation of
R2 is below 0.19. The study recommends further investigation on more testing on
different types of surfaces to improve the understanding on the correlation
between the British Pendulum Value and Grip Number.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Road has played an important role in the trade and transportation system
throughout the world, and it becomes rapid increase in the pavement infrastructure
development in Malaysia. Gazzette roads under Federal Roads Ordinance are usually
33
roads linking the state capitals, airports, railway stations and ports.
Currently,
Malaysia has more than 80,300 km roads. The road is divided into three main
categories namely toll expressway (1,700 km), federal roads (17,500 km) and state
road (61,100 km) whereas their life spans are between 10 to 15 years (Zakaria and
Hassan, 2005).
Various testing and environment factors can affect the skid resistance.
Understanding the factors that exist is important when trying to relate the result from
different devices (Wallman and Astrom, 2001). There are many devices used to
measure skid resistance based on different surfacing material. However for this
paper, two devices namely British Pendulum Tester and Griptester are used to find
relationship between and value effect.
Other more recent and automated devices used tires that rotate at rates less
than that of the tires of the vehicle they are attached to, resulting in a braking or
sliding action. The braking rate may be fixed or varied and the tire may be straight or
set at an angle. Recording of test results is now automated allowing for greater
quantities of data to be collected and more easily analyzed. Testing can be done
using smooth or treaded tires, but for better and more consistent result, the smooth
tire is preferred. Automated testing within the Transport Services Division utilizes a
Griptester (Figure 1.1).
Based on Table 1.0, process monitoring such as the network laser texture
surveys or visual analysis is recommended at minimum level of testing for low skid
resistance demand zone. As for medium skid resistance demand zone, targeting
34
testing is suggested for minimum level of testing. For instance, there are portable and
towed devices such as British Pendulum, Griptester and ROAR. Besides that, network
monitoring such as SCRIM is recommended for minimum level of testing for high
skid resistance demand zone. Also, high density urban zone is suggested to use
SCRIM or Griptester as minimum level of testing for inaccessible sites.
Low skid
1.
resistance demand
2.
Medium skid
resistance demand
3.
High skid
resistance demand
4.
urban
High density
Sub-grade, sub-base, road base and the surfacing which consist of binding
course and wearing course are generally the road pavement structure classified. The
35
wearing course is the exposed topmost layer that provides the travel path, skid
resistance, safety and comfort to the road user. Categories of bitumen pavements
involved in this study are Asphaltic Concrete Wearing 20 (ACW 20).
2.0
BACKGROUND OF STUDY
A lot of research work has been conducted with the aim of investigating, and
establishing the mean texture depth, skid resistance, the roughness index of various
asphalt surfaces and their correlation. The surface texture depth is an important factor
used to determine the resistance of skidding of a road surface. The surface texture
depth is referred as a measure of the macro-texture of a bituminous pavement surface.
The assessment of the skid resistance and macro-texture of various types of
bituminous road surface became of the utmost importance as it relates to the safety of
the road.
Skid resistance refers to the frictional properties of the road surface measured
using a specified device under standardized conditions. According to Buatos et. al.
(2004), road agencies usually use different devices to compare friction measurement.
Most of the studies focused on friction measurement and the correlation between road
friction and traffic safety. Some of them correlate with the devices that are unfamiliar
in Malaysia with a known device like the British Pendulum. The primary goal of this
research is to determine whether the friction measurements made with the Griptester
and the British Pendulum correlate, and, if they do, how strong they correlate.
2.1
PROBLEM STATEMENT
36
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
In relation to friction
measurement, every country has instruments and methods of its own, and the friction
values reported from different international investigations are therefore not directly
comparable (Wallman and Astrom, 2001).
2.1
The correlation between British Pendulum Tester and the GT was studied in
Australia and the results were presented at the 2005 International Surface Friction
Conference in New Zealand (N. Kym, 2011). A limited number of data show a
correlation between measurement of the two tester when GT was either towed at 50
km/h (30 mph) or pushed at 5 km/h (3 mph), as shown in Figure 1.2. This paper
however, did not give the details of the data, such as the pavement surface type and
the test temperature.
Figure 1.2: Griptester Towed versus British Pendulum Correlation (M. Grant, 2005)
37
Two SCRIM vehicles were invited to attend, and skid resistance was
measured using these devices on the same surface. A correlation between mean
SCRIM Coefficient and Grip Number has been calculated and is presented as SC =
0.89 X GN.
previous versions. The conversation should be used with caution and only in
conjunction with thorough review of local skid resistance policies (Dunford, 2010).
38
Based on the results obtained from the correlation between texture depths,
pendulum test value and roughness index of various asphalt surfaces in Malaysia, it
can be indicated that there is weak correlation between the texture depth and the
roughness index of the SD road surfaces. As for the SMA and ACW surfaces, it is
weak or in other words, there is no correlation as the coefficient of variance (R2) is
relatively less than its unity. However, the general trend shows that the higher the
texture depth (TD), the higher the roughness index (IRI) and the pendulum test values
(PTV) (Suleiman et. al., 2012).
2.2
Skid Resistance
Skid occurs when the available friction between the pavement surface and the
tire is insufficient to respond to the maneuver a driver is attempting to make. This
happens when the vehicle is maneuvered by the exerted forces at that stationary area
where the friction between the tire and the road surface opposes to the maneuvering
force. A dry road surface condition produces high road and tire friction for normal
driving maneuvers while the wet road surfaces decreases the friction effect
significantly causing skidding accidents (Kokkalis et. al. 2002).
When an asphalt road surfacing is newly laid, the aggregate and mortar are
covered with a film of bitumen binder. For some years it has been suspected that new
asphalt surfaces may exhibit different skid resistance properties compared with roads
that have been in service for some time. Any effect have probably always been
present but until recently, there has been no suitable equipment available to
investigate them and help determine what impact they might actually have on
accident risk (P G Roe and R Lagarde-Forest, 2005).
39
2.3
equipment.
Other more recent automated recent used tires that rotate at rates less than that
of the tire of the vehicle they are attached to, resulting in braking or sliding action.
The braking rates may be fixed or variable and the tire may be straight or be set at an
angle. Examples of automated devices that are familiar in Malaysia are the Griptester
and Sideways-force Coefficient Routine Investigation Machine (SCRIM).
40
The British pendulum tester (Giles et. al., 1964) is one of the simplest and
cheapest instrument used in the measurement of friction characteristic of pavement
surfaces. It is extremely versatile in its applications to many test situations and has
received acceptance worldwide. The test device measures low-speed friction (about
10 km/h) and is commonly used to assess the micro-texture of pavement surface. The
pendulum has rubber slider attached to the end, as slider moves across the pavement
surface, the frictional force reduces the kinetic energy of the pendulum. The loss in
kinetic energy and thus the magnitude of the frictional force in the pavement can be
measured from the difference in the height of the pendulum before and after the slider
crosses the pavement (Henry, 2000).
The TRL SCRIM (Figure 1.3) was used to obtained basic measurement of
low-speed wet skid resistance. SCRIM measures skid resistance continuously using
an angled, smooth tire test wheel and records a SCRIM Reading for each 10 m
length of the road. This is the ratio between the measured average sideways force and
200 kg vertical load, multiplied by 100. Measurement is normally made at standard
test vehicle speed of 50 km/h, in the nearside wheel track. Because the test wheel is
41
set at an angle of 20, the effective slip speed at which the tire contact patch over the
surface is approximately 17 km/h.
2.4
Correlation analysis is one of the most widely used and reported statistical
methods in summarizing medical and scientific research data, the reported correlation
(r=0.92) between echocardiographically and hemodynamically derived mitral valve
areas was statistically significant (Martin R P et. al., 1979). Intuition and empirical
observation may indicate that certain variables are linearly related, but in its most
basic sense the coefficient of correlation measures the degree to which the two
variables are related (Weber J C and Lamb D R, 1970).
A correlation
42
stronger is the existing association indicating a more linear relationship between the
two variables.
3.0
OBJECTIVE OF STUDY
This objective of this study was to find relationship between the British
Pendulum and the Griptester, and to develop an evaluation model to predict the grip
number using the British Pendulum value.
4.0
SCOPE OF STUDY
The study investigated the different devices between the British Pendulum and
the Griptester of the various bituminous surfaces in Malaysia, which includes flexible
pavement ACW 20. The study involves field survey on the pavement surface in
Selangor and Melaka. The study investigated the relationship between the British
Pendulum and the Griptester through its data obtained from the tests conducted.
5.0
METHODOLOGY
43
Site test road in Selangor is four lane express ways data collected involve on
road increasing and decreasing. The data collected for both ways. But site test in
Melaka is two lane state roads and data collection for increasing road.The skid
resistance value (SRV) is the mean of five readings or the constant of three reading.
As the stiffness of the rubber slider will vary with temperature a correction has to be
made if the temperature is not 20C. Use the temperature curve Figure 3.3 and Table
3.1 for this purpose.
Table 1.2: Correction of Pendulum test value (PTV) when the test is Carried Out at
other than 20C
Measured Temp.
Correction to
measured value
40
+3
30
+2
20
15
-2
10
-3
15
-5
processing. The target water depth was 0.25 mm. According to the manufacture and
standard, a water flow rate 10.4 liters/minutes will archive this water depth 50 km/h.
6.0
After removal of data outside the target speed range, measurement from each
individual Griptester were collected. Using the location reference markers input for
British Pendulum Tester, section were segregated. Measurements were plotted, and
using known chainage of the section, contiguous measurements were selected from
which average values for each section.
From the data recorded, for this survey on ACW20 surface, a very week
correlation between the British Pendulum Tester and Grip Number. There was no
correlation for skid resistance for ACW20. For site test in Selangor, highest BPN skid
resistance recorded as 62 and lowest 53, while Grip Number 0.71 highest and 0.54
lower number has been taken. However for 20 km test site, the Griptester have
recorded 0.40 as lower and 0.74 higher Grip Number. This higher Grip Number
came from a new pavement that lay on this site area, and this point is not matching
with the British Pendulum Tester point that involve for this survey. To get Grip
Number on point British Pendulum Tester, interpolate calculation implement on
Griptester data. Interpolate calculation involve data chainage on Pendulum Test
Value to Griptester data. Interpolate formula are using as below;
Melaka survey data were recorded 65 and 44 for the higher and lower PTV.
Grip Number on Griptester recorded 0.62 and 0.49 for higher and lower data. Type
of surface pavement is ACW20 same with Selangor site test. Figure 4.0 below shows
the correlation between the British Pendulum Tester and Grip Number on the ACW20
in this study. These data was plotted by British Pendulum Tester as dependent
variable and Grip Number as independent variable to archive the objective of this
study, to develop evaluation model to predict the grip number using British Pendulum
value.
45
Figure 4.0: The correlation between Grip Number and Pendulum Test Value,
Selangor Site test
Figure 4.1: The correlation between Grip Number and Pendulum Test Value, Melaka
Site test
The results obtained from two site investigated showed that the correlation
of the combine average skid resistance as can be seen in Figure 4.2:
46
Figure 4.2: The correlation between combine Grip Number and Pendulum Test
Value.
From Figure 4.0, 4.1 and 4.2 we can see a very week correlation for the
ACW20 surface with British Pendulum Tester and Griptester having a very week
correlation. This result cannot develop any prediction equations.
For a pendulum overall the average of skid resistance value (SRV) from the
survey is 58 which is in acceptance criteria for motorways, trunk and class1 roads
with heavily trafficked roads in urban areas (carrying more than 2000 vehicles per
day) source TRRL 1969.
7.0
CONCLUSION
could be made from this study is the result obtains from this study indicates a very
weak correlation. For Selangor site, result for linear equation R2 = 0.1878 and R2 =
0.1911 for longitudinal equation. Melaka site, result for linear equation R2 = 0.116
and R2 = 0.1262 for power equation. But for combination data for this two site, the
relationship value for linear equation R2 = 0.0049 and R2 = 0.0326 for power
equation.
REFERENCES
A Dunford (2010). Published Project Report PPR497. Griptester Trial October
2009 Including SCRIM comparison.
Cenek, P.D., Carpenter, P., Jamieson, N., Stewart, P. (2004). Prediction of skid
Resistanceperformance of chipseal roads. Transfund New Zealand Research
Report No. 256.114 pp.
Cohen, J. (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nded.).
(Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum).
48
Haron, S. (2004). Highway and Traffic Engineering (1st ed.). Universiti Teknologi
MARA, Perlis.
NCHRP
correlation between road friction and traffic safety. Swedish National Road
and Transportation Research Institute, 2001.
49
Politeknik Mukah
fardillah@pmu.edu.my, habsah@pmu.edu.my
ABSTRACT
The purpose of this study was to identify job satisfaction level among
academic staff in Polytechnic Mukah including, promotion opportunity and
working condition and also to measure the degree of job satisfaction of female
and male academic staff. The data were obtained using survey method and
analysis with SPSS 21 including descriptive and Mann- Whitney U test
analysis. A total of 187 lecturers had participated in the survey. The female
lecturers were consist of (56.1%), and male lecturers (43.9%). Overall, the
job satisfaction among lecturers in Polytechnic Mukah is moderately high.
The Mann-Whiney U test also indicates that female staffs are more satisfied
than their counterpart.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
that can compete with the regional countries in terms of human capital capacity or
production of products hoped to be able to turn the nation towards a high-tech
country. Furthermore, the capability of educators to deliver quality in education that
can hardly change the way people live better, produce knowledgeable human capital
as well as a platform towards measuring a development country by 2020. While there
have been several job satisfaction studies, very few of them focused on the job
satisfaction among the polythecnic lecturers, in general with different factors. In the
education sector, most public educators do not have the opportunity for promotions,
even for those who had served for long time, and had implemented successfully
executed the assigned tasks and bring honor to the organization. Not only promotions,
the working environmental also plays an important part. Workplace environment
plays important role in motivating staff such as cleanliness, and aesthetics. Location
of working place needs more attention in terms of cleanliness, color selection, layout
and space.
There are also educational institutions that are not well maintained in
terms of infrastructure, equipment, tools and machinery. If this is not taken seriously
it could affect the concentration of lecturers and students during the teaching and
learning process.
In this paper, we are going to present our research findings about the level of
job satisfaction factors (promotion and working condition) among the lecturers of
Mukah Polytechnic Sarawak (Polytechnics Mukah Sarawak or PMU) and also
measure the degree of job satisfaction between the female and male academic staff.
This paper is organized as follows. Firstly, it provides an overview of relevant
literature, followed by description of the research design and methodology. Lastly but
not least, it presents and discusses the research findings, and provides a conclusion for
the study.
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
about the job satisfaction level of the staff academic in Bahawalpur Colleges, Pakistan
found the six factor can affect the staff academic satisfaction level thats work itself,
salary, promotion opportunities, working condition, job security and co-workers.
Support by research have been made by Crossman & Abou-Zaki, (2003) found that
job satisfaction among staff not encouraged by specification or work aspect only.
Background education factor can be encouraged job satisfaction where staffs
academic that have higher education level have higher education level of job
satisfaction. Indirectly, employees that have higher level of education received the
higher rate of salary.
salary and vice versa with lower education that has effect or lower level of
satisfaction. Research by Toker (2011) about job satisfaction among staff academic:
An empirical study in Turkey had found that job satisfaction levels of the
academicians were to be moderately high. The results of the study showed that
professors reported a higher level of job satisfaction compared to research assistants.
The results also show that there were some variable which could influence the job
satisfaction among the staff academic that age and length of services.
Another
research on higher institution Mustapha & Yu Ghee (2013) makes the research
Examining Faculty Workload as Antecedent of Job Satisfaction among Academic
Staff of Higher Public Education in Kelantan, Malaysia showed that there was
negative major connection between daily faculty capacity and job satisfaction. The
institute must reflect the capacity of workload reasonable with daily load to determine
the satisfaction of academic staff. High job satisfaction between academic staff
enhances organizational nationality and trust worthiness. Followed by Fausiah
Noordin (2009) research about level Job Satisfaction amongst Malaysian Staff
Academic found that from seven public Universities in Malaysia has a moderate level
of job satisfaction.
refer to the ability in terms of job requirement, situation factor and Candidate
qualification (Kellogg, 1975). Furthermore, promotion opportunities may also occur
based on seniority or ability or both. Seniority is measured by the length of time
served in the organization and is also seen through the date of service, department or
unit specific and specific types of work (Kleiner & Systems, 2001). There are several
methods that can be used to promote the advancement of workers being job ladder,
occupational restructuring, research management news, job postings and career ladder
(Gruenfeld, 1975). However, the manager can decide promotion through
recommendation by the employee's supervisor, records appraisal, experience,
company objectives and education background.
3.0
and length of services. The second section consists of 20 items focusing on job
satisfaction, promotion and working condition. For these 20 statements, this study
used Likert scale of 1 for strongly disagree to 5 for strongly agree. The
questionnaire was developed in English.
4.0
4.1
A total of 187 respondents participated in the survey. The survey response rate
is 94%. Table 1 presents the respondents demographic profiles. As shown, the
majority of our respondents were female (56.1%). Male respondents were (43.9%)
with (50.3%) married and the rest (49.7%) still single. Overall, about (36.4%) of the
respondents were between 36 until 45 years old and about (32.6%) of them reported
to have teaching experience less than five years. Total of (57.8%) have first degree
level and the remaining (5%) have PHD.
In this study, we further performed descriptive test to examine the level of job
satisfaction among the lecturers of PMU. Table 2 presents data about means and
standard deviation values for three identified variables in this study, namely: job
satisfaction; promotion and working condition. Table 3 shows the findings from
Mann-Whiney U test to measure the degree of job satisfaction of female and male
academic staff.
54
(%)
Male
82
43.9
Female
105
56.1
Married
94
50.3
Single
93
49.7
26 until 35 years
60
32.1
36 until 45 years
61
32.6
Above 46 years
18
9.6
Below Rm2500.00
23
12.3
43
23.0
47
25.1
above RM4501.00
74
39.6
Diploma
16
8.6
Education
Degree
108
57.8
Level
Master
62
33.2
PHD
.5
68
36.4
6 to 10 years
65
34.8
11 until 15 years
21
11.2
Above 16 years
33
17.6
Sex
Status
Age
Salary
Length of
Svc
As shown in Table 2 below, the level of job satisfaction among the lecturers at
PMU was moderately high, with mean values are ranged between 3.50 and 4.49. For
this category, the highest (mean = is 4.27) which are related to satisfy by the
evaluation method implement by the organization. Promotions methods used by the
organization and classroom/labs/workshop provided by the organization both (mean=
3.94) still is moderately high. Overall, the majority of the respondents agreed with
opportunities for promotion based on organizational problem solving. With regard to
promotion the mean values are ranged between 3.50 and 4.49 still in moderate high.
The lowest mean in this category was I was given opportunities for promotion based
on working experience (mean = 3.85). For Working condition the highest mean 4.05
whereby staffs academic are provided with adequate teaching aids such as laptop,
55
projector, machines, and technical equipment and so on.(mean = 4.05) and the lowest
mean in this category was teaching and learning equipment is enough.(mean = 3.79).
Table 2: Mean and Standard Deviation (SD) for job satisfaction among lecturer in
PMU.
Item
Mean
SD
4.27
0.907
4.03
0.935
3.98
1.037
3.94
1.040
3.94
1.108
4.02
1.060
3.96
1.490
3.98
1.510
3.98
1.070
4.12
0.922
4.10
0.992
3.97
0.999
4.02
1.029
3.85
1.159
3.9
1.169
3.92
1.186
4.05
1.089
3.98
1.128
3.79
1.144
3.96
1.072
Job satisfaction
I am satisfied with the valuation methods implemented by the organization
(SKT).
Promotion
I was given opportunities for promotion based on organizational problem
solving.
Working Condition
Management offer quality facilities among staff academic.
Staffs academic are provided with adequate teaching aids such as laptop,
projector, machines, and technical equipment and so on.
Management has effort to increase the teaching and learning facilities from
times to times.
56
Refer to the Table 3, as the two gender groups were not normally distributed,
Mann Whitney U test was performed to test the relationship between gender and job
satisfaction with each facet. The result indicates significantly higher satisfaction
among female compare to male with higher mean rank but not statistically significant.
Mann- Whitney U
3656.000
Wilcoxon W
7059.000
-1.773
.076
Mean Rank
4.0
Male
86.09
Female
100.18
Male
7059.00
Female
10519.00
CONCLUSION
The primary objective of this study was to identify the level of job satisfaction
factors (promotion and working condition) and also measure the degree of job
satisfaction among female and male lecturers of Polytechnic Mukah. Overall job
satisfaction levels among them are moderately high which scale from 3.50 and
4.49.The academic staff seems really satisfied with the valuation methods
implemented by the organization by using Key Performance Indicators (KPI) stated
by Polytechnic Education Department based on staff performance and evaluate by
Head of Department and supported by director. Secondly, Mann-Whitney U test
result showed that female staffs were more satisfied with all the facets than their male
counterparts, this seems that women enjoyed their working environment. This finding
is supported by Alam (2005) indicates that academic staff of the colleges is more
satisfied with the work itself, pay, working conditions and job security. Second
objective, support by Noordin (1991) whereby current status, marital status, age and
salary appear to have significant impact on the respondents level of job satisfaction,
proved by female who staff are more satisfied than their opposite. Since the research
instruments are based on questionnaire, biases might have occurred. Some of the
57
questionnaire did not return back to the researcher due to time constrains and costs.
Total up 200 questionnaire distributed to respondent among lecturer in PMU from
difference of education background. Only 187 respondent or 94 per cent returns back
the questionnaire within the allocated time.
REFERENCES
Baloch, Q.B., (2009) Effects of Job Satisfaction On Employees Motivation & Turn
over Intentions. Journal ofManagerial Sciences Volume II, Number I.
Crossman, A., & Abou-Zaki, B. (2003). Job satisfaction and employee performance
of Lebanese banking staff. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 18(4), 368
376. doi:10.1108/02683940310473118
Kleiner, B. H., & Systems, P. (2001). How To Manage Promotion Decisions, 24(3),
109113.
Saba, I. (2011). Measuring the Job Satisfaction Level of the Academic Staff in
Bahawalpur Colleges, 1(1).
Santhepparaj, A.S, and Alam, S.S., (2005).Job satisfaction among academic staff in
private universities in Malaysia .Journal of social sciences 1 (2):72-76.2005.
Assurance
in
Education,
19(2),
156169.
doi:10.1108/09684881111125050
59
Politeknik Mukah
ananthi.poli@1govuc.gov.my, ramarao.poli@1govuc.gov.my
ABSTRACT
60
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Objective
The main objective of this study was to identify the hardness level changes of
the 2024 aluminium alloy when a precipitation-hardening process conducted at three
different ageing temperatures. The optimum temperature, which gives the best
hardness level for this 2024 aluminium alloy was identified by conducting
the
hardness test.
1.2
Scope of Research
a) To conduct precipitation-hardening process on 2024 aluminium alloy
samples with a solution treatment temperature of 540oC and three different
aging temperatures of 150oC, 200oC, and 300oC for a fixed time period of 1
hour and 30 minutes.
b) To conduct the hardness test on the precipitate hardened samples of 2024
aluminium alloy at three different ageing temperatures. The sample that
61
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
2.1
Aluminium Alloy
Aluminium alloys can be divided into two major groups, wrought and casting
alloys, depending on their method of fabrication. Aluminium is miscible in the liquid
state with many metals, but solid solubility of alloy elements is typically only a few
percent. Inter-metallic compounds form and become a phase in the structure of the
aluminium alloy. No element is completely soluble in aluminium in the solid state.
More often, the inter-metallic compounds that form with large alloy additions are hard
and brittle. They often have a deleterious effect on the mechanical properties.
The percentage of alloy elements in useful aluminium alloy does not exceed
about 15%. The most important alloying elements in aluminium alloy systems are
copper (2XXX), manganese (3XXX), silicon (4XXX), magnesium (5XXX) and zinc
(7XXX).
2.2
Component
Copper
3.8 4.9
<= 0.2
Magnesium
1.2 1.8
Total Other
<= 0.15
Manganese
0.3 0.9
Titanium
<= 0.15
Ferrum
<= 0.5
Chromium
<= 0.1
Silicon
<= 0.5
Other Elements
<= 0.05
Zinc
<= 0.25
Aluminium
Remainder
62
: 73000 MPa
Poisson Ratio, v
: 0.33
Density,
: 2790 kg/m3
: 475 MPa
: 290 MPa
Melting Point
: 640 C
Thermal Conductivity,
: 121 W/mK
(Henkel and Pense, 2002)
Among the applications of 2024 aluminium alloy are in the high strength
fabricated or machined items in aircraft industries, general engineering, machinery,
military equipment, truck wheels, screw machine products, rivets and structural
applications.
2.3
Precipitation Hardening
1994). But when a coherent precipitate forms, the planes of atoms in the crystal
structure of the precipitate are related to or even continuous with the planes in the
crystal structure of the matrix (Figure 1b). Now, a widespread disruption of the matrix
crystal structure is created and the movement of a dislocation is impeded even if the
dislocation merely passes near the coherent precipitate. A special heat treatment, such
as age hardening, may produce the coherent precipitate (Askeland, 1994).
64
2.4
Hardness Test
The
Rockwell Hardness test is a hardness measurement based on the net increase in depth
of impression as a load is applied. Hardness numbers have no units and are commonly
given in the R, L, M, E and K scales. The higher the number in each of the scales
means the harder the material.
2.5
Journals Review
Enver, A., Kacar, H. and Meric, C. (2003), studied the effect of precipitation
hardening conditions on wear behaviors at 2024 aluminium wrought alloy. In this
study, wear behaviors of 2024 aluminium wrought alloy were investigated in different
tribological conditions based on its ageing conditions. For this purpose, the alloy aged
in five different temperatures and periods (at room temperature for 1 week, at 120C
for 24 hours, at 150C for 18 hours, at 160C for 16 hours and at 200C for 2 hours)
was worn in pin-on disc model wear test apparatus using different abrasive grit size (5,
11, 18 and 30 m SiC papers). The maximum wear resistance was found to be that of
65
naturally aged specimen at room temperature for 1 week. Furthermore, the effects of
different sliding speeds (0.078, 0.156, 0.208 and 0.338 m/s) and loads mass loss of the
specimens increased with load and the abrasive grit size. The depth of the wear traces
was more or less at the specimen, which was naturally aged at room temperature for 1
week than the specimen, which was aged at 200C for 2 hours.
From the
66
3.0
METHODOLOGY
3.1
Conduct of Research
3.2
Methodology Flowchart
Sample Preparation
67
3.3
After the specimens have been prepared, nine specimens are solution heattreated at 540C of temperature in the furnace. This temperature is chosen because it
is between the solvus (500C) and the eutectic temperature (548C). The temperature
of the furnace is first elevated to the desired temperature. Only after the temperature
reaches the 540C, the specimens are put inside the furnace and closed. The time is
then set for 1 hour and 30 minutes, after which the specimens are removed from the
furnace and quenched immediately.
The quenching of the specimens is done after removing them from the furnace.
The specimens are dipped inside room temperature water. The process is done rapidly
to cool the specimens.
Three
specimens are aged per temperature. The temperatures chosen are 150C, 200C and
300C. During aging, hardness and tensile strength increase, reach maximum and then
decreases. The decrease in hardness and tensile strength happen due to overaging.
These transformations happen at different stages of aging temperatures. Thats why
the above three temperatures are chosen. The aging time is also set at 1 hour and 30
minutes. Again the furnace temperature is first elevated to the desired temperature
before putting in the specimens.
68
3.4
Hardness Test
The hardness test conducted is the Rockwell Hardness test using the Wilson
Rockwell Tester. The hardness tests are done onto the specimens that have been made
flat and smoothed by using the file, at the suitable surface. The type of indenter used
is the 1/8 steel ball with a load of 100 kg.
3.5
Speciments Labelling
The specimens for the tests above are labeled as in the table below for easy
identification.
Description
Identification
Scontrol1
Scontrol2
Scontrol3
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
10
S7
11
S8
12
S9
69
4.0
The hardness test is conducted on 12 specimens that have been used in the
tensile test. These specimens are cut and polished in order to make it easier to load
them on the hardness test machine. The specimens are circular in shape with a wellpolished surface. Three readings are taken for each specimen. The indentations are
done at three different places on the polished surface for accurate reading. Sufficient
distance is maintained between two indentations to avoid overlapping. The data
obtained are given in Table 3.
HRE2
HRE3
Average
Scontrol1
78.03
86.75
89.06
84.61
Scontrol2
89.73
86.89
85.76
87.46
Scontrol3
88.36
86.56
86.89
87.27
94.2
97.09
93.43
94.91
S2
94.56
90.05
95.06
93.22
S3
90.03
91.85
92.84
91.57
98.22
97.03
97.04
97.43
S5
97.68
98.24
98.44
98.12
S6
98.34
97.65
98.44
98.14
82.5
85.12
78.4
82.01
S8
85.68
71.51
73.08
76.76
S9
80.56
78.12
83.87
80.85
In the table above, three hardness value readings are obtained for each
specimen. From these three readings, the average value is calculated. The average
values obtained above are represented in the Figure 4. From the chart, it is noticed
that the highest value of hardness number, 98.14 comes from specimen S6. This is
followed by 98.12 and 97.43, obtained from specimens S5 and S4 respectively. These
specimens come from the specimen group aged at 200C. The lowest values of
hardness number come from the specimen group aged at 300C. The lowest value
obtained is 76.76 obtained from specimen S8, followed by 80.85 from S9 and 82.01
from S7. These three specimens come from the specimen group aged at 300C. The
specimen group aged at 150C shows the next best values of hardness number after the
specimen group aged at 200C.
specimens. But the control specimens values are still higher than the specimen group
aged at 300C.
120.00
100.00
HRE
80.00
76.76
80.85
60.00
40.00
20.00
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
Scontrol3
Scontrol2
Scontrol1
0.00
Specimen
Figure 4: The average hardness values readings are obtained for each specimen.
71
5.0
CONCLUSION
Aging at 200C for a period of 1 hour and 30 minutes has produced the
maximum hardness value. This can be associated with the formation of the transition,
, precipitate phase.
hardening process, several transition phases are first formed in a specific sequence. At
the initial hardening stage, copper atoms, form very small and thin discs, which are
not, regarded precipitate particles. With time and the diffusion process of copper
atoms, the precipitate particles are formed with increased size. These precipitate
particles, or the phase, coincides with the strengthening and the hardening effects.
These data leads to only one conclusion that is the specimens aged at 200C
displays good mechanical properties and better than the other specimen groups. This
is because the temperature is an ideal precipitation hardening temperature where
precipitates form and improve the structure of the material.
particles and bigger grain size. This will cause fewer obstacles to the movement of
dislocations and hence the mechanical properties start to decrease.
So, this
temperature and time combination is not suitable to improve the mechanical behaviors
of 2024 aluminium alloy.
Another significant point to notice is that the control specimens that did not go
through the precipitation hardening process, displays mechanical properties lower than
the specimens aged at 200C and 150C. This shows that the precipitation hardening
process indeed is a method of improving the mechanical properties of the aluminium
2024 alloy.
REFERENCES
Askeland, D. R. (1994), The Science and Engineering Materials. 3rd edition.
Boston: PWS Publishing Company
Callister, W. D. Jr. (2000), Material Science and Engineering. 5th edition. USA:
John Wiley and Sons Inc.
Henkel, D. and Pense, A. W. (2002), Structure and Properties of Engineering
Materials. USA: McGraw-Hill Co.
Enver, A., Kacar, H. and Meric, C. (2003), The Effects of Precipitation-Hardening
Conditions on Wear Behaviours at 2024 Aluminium Wrought Alloy. Journal
of Materials Processing Technology. Volume 142, pp. 762-766.
73
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The Sg. Imam is one of the brackish ecosystems located about 57 kilometer
fromTawau town, sabah. It is flowing from north to south, the first 300 meters of the
river consists of fresh water. While the last 50 meters, the river becomes an estuary
leading into the sea in Tawau. The Sg. Imam also one of the coastal forest (mangrove)
that is not under proper management in Malaysia. It is an one of the important
ecosystem due to it act as a buffer zone between sea and shoreline and it also absorbs
the shocks of waves and storms while filtering excess sediments.
74
that has more free hydroxyl ions is basic. The chemicals in the water can affect the
pH, therefore the pH is an important indicator of water that is changing chemically.
Since pollution can change a water's pH, which in turn it also can harm animals and
plants in the water (USGS, 2014).
2.0
a)
b)
To study the water sample from Mangrove Ecosystem of Sg. Imam in Tawau.
76
3.0
The study was carried out at Sg. Imam in Tawau, Sabah which is situated at
the east cost of Sabah within a day which is on 17 September 2014. The field work
was started from 10 am until 2 pm. This area is a brackish water which connected
marine water and freshwater water where the depth ranged from 3-5 meters. The
samples were taken at three station which is selected randomly.
The samples were collected at every 1 hour interval for temperature, pH,
Salinity and turbidity. Two liters of water was collected by using a water sampler at
each station from the jetty. A Yellow Spring Instrument, Inc. (YSI) model 650 MDS
probes was used to obtain field data on pH, temperature at each station. While the
reading of salinity was obtained by using salinometer and turbidity was obtained by
using secchi desk.
4.0
The averages for temperature, pH, turbidity and salinity are shown in Table 14. Average temperature increases from 1000 h to 1400 h at every station. While the
average pH and turbidity readings hold a steady trend from time to time. The average
salinity slightly increases from 10 am to 2pm.
77
for fish, on feeding activity of marine organisms and metabolism and growth of fish
(Zyryanov 2001).
However, the readings for the pH is slightly high than expected. The upstream
of the river is connected to a factory in Kampung Imam and the water is seriously
polluted. There are many houses along the way from the factory to the estuary of the
Sg. Imam. The continuous increment of anthropogenic carbon dioxide emissions may
cause ocean acidification happened and it can lowering the pH of the seawater
(Moulin et al. 2011). As the pH drops, marine organisms that produce shells and
carbonate skeletons will getting weak and die (Agardy 2006).
The water of Sg. Imam is very cloudy and muddy. This is may be due to the
clay, silt, sand, algae, plankton and other substances.
mangrove where wave and tidal processes may exert a strong control on the
morphology of coastlines and the distribution of different depositional facies (Nichols
2009) in the Sg. Imam. Water flow and turbidity are also closely related (EPA 2012).
High flow rates keep the particles suspended instead of settle to the bottom. When
freshwater meets seawater, the movement of water in and out of the estuary by tides,
causing the fine particles to mix and be stirred up, it may cause the highest turbidity
level (Waterwatch estuary guide 2007) in Sg. Imam. The increased turbidity may
decreased light penetration into the water and it may reduce the plant growth and
oxygen production. Lower the oxygen levels may increase the water temperature and
therefore, it may reduce breeding and survival of fish and other aquatic animals.
The average salinity of the samples were not high compared to seawater. This
is due to the fresh water input occurs at the sea surface that caused by the precipitation
and river flow (Talley 2002). According to Twomey 2004, the average salinity of
freshwater throughout the world is less than 0.2 while the brackish water salinity is
less than 25, whereas the surface water of the open ocean ranges from 33 to
37.however, estuaries display a wide spatial and temporal salinity range from 0 to 30.
Salinity is fundamental water quality parameter monitored by freshwater and marine
water ecologist because it may influence on the biota. Most of the aquatic organisms
are adapted to only a narrow range of salinity. This is due to they cannot maintain
their osmotic and ionic balance. Some of the species tolerate only intermediate levels
78
of salinity while broadly adapted species can acclimate to variable salinity ranging
from freshwater to seawater.
5.0
CONCLUSION
In this study, the water samples were taken to monitor the water quality of Sg. Imam.
Water analysis of pH and salinity are the most important parameters represent the
pollution status of the water. The pollutants are most probably due to release of
effluents from several sources into the estuary, which causes significant changes in
the water quality of the Sg. Imam and pose some deleterious effect to the mangrove
ecosystem in a long run.Heat fluxes, evaporation, rain and river in flow influence the
distribution of temperature of the salinity at the water surface. The density of the
water at the surface can be affected by the changes of the temperature and salinity,
which can lead to convection. As a result, more research is needed to monitor the
mangrove health in Sg. Imam, Tawau.
Table 1: Average for temperature, pH, turbidity and salinity for each station at 10 am.
Temperature (C)
pH
Turbidity (m)
Salinity (ppt)
Station 1
29.4
7.65
0.7
25
Station 2
29.4
7.64
0.8
25
Station 3
29.4
7.65
0.7
25
Table 2: Average for temperature, pH, turbidity and salinity for each station at 11 am.
Temperature (C)
pH
Turbidity (m)
Salinity (ppt)
Station 1
29.5
7.65
0.7
25
Station 2
29.5
7.65
0.8
25
Station 3
29.5
7.65
0.7
25
Table 3: Average for temperature, pH, turbidity and salinity for each station at 12 pm.
Temperature (C)
pH
Turbidity (m)
Salinity (ppt)
Station 1
30.1
7.65
0.7
26
Station 2
30.2
7.65
0.7
26
Station 3
30.2
7.65
0.7
26
79
Table 4 Average for temperature, pH, turbidity and salinity for each station at 1 pm.
Temperature (C)
pH
Turbidity (m)
Salinity (ppt)
Station 1
30.3
7.65
0.7
27
Station 2
30.2
7.65
0.7
27
Station 3
30.3
7.66
0.7
27
REFERENCES
Agardy,
T.
(2006).
Fish
Information
&
Services.
Retrieved
from
http://fis.com/fis/people/printable.asp?article_id=5&l=e.
EPA. (2012). 5.8 Total Solids. In Water: Monitoring and Assessment. Retrieved from
http://water.epa.gov/type/rsl/monitoring/vms58.cfm.
Frederick, J.K. (2003). What is pH, and how is it measured?, A technical handbook
for industry. Hach Company.
Gandaseca, S., Noraini, R., Ahmad, M.M.P. and Chandra, I.A. (2014). Effects of land
use on river water quality of Awat-AwatLawas Mangrove Forest Limbang
Sarawak Malaysia. Department of Forest Production, Faculty of Forestry,
Universiti Putra Malaysia. Vol.9 (17), pp.386-396.
80
Millero, F.J., Feistel, R.,Wright, D.G. and McDougall, T.J. (2008).The composition of
Standard Seawater and the definition of the Reference-Composition Salinity
Scale, Deep-Sea Res. I, 55, 50-72.
on
early
development
of
the
intertidal
sea
urchin
Nichols, G. (2009). Sedimentology and stratigraphy. Second Edition. WileyBlackwell. A John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., Publication.
Perlman, H. (2014, March). Turbidity. In The USGS Water Science School. Retrieved
from http://water.usgs.gov/edu/turbidity.html.
Talley, L.D. (2002). Salinity patterns in the ocean. Volume 1, The Earth system:
physical and chemical dimensions of global environmental change, pp 629
640.
Twomey, L.J., Piehler, M.F. and Paerl, H.W. (2004). Priority parameters for
monitoring of freshwater and marine systems, and their measurement.
81
Vicky, G., Mellissa, W., Glen, B. and Tim, G. (2009). The effects of physical and
chemical water quality parameters on the distribution of aquatic invertebrates
within the Carmans River on Long Island, New York.
Water estuary guide. (2007). Monitoring water quality in estuaries. Retrieved from
http://www.environment.nsw.gov.au/resources/waterwatch/estuaryGuide/2010
0685EstuaryGuide_S2.pdf.
Zyryanov, V.N. (2001). Physical properties of seawater, including its three phases.
Institute of water problems, Russian Academy of Sciences, Moscow, Russia.
82
bs.wee@poliku.edu.my, shaweibong2005@yahoo.com
ABSTRACT
This paper investigates the performance of modulation schemes for reliable
optical wireless communication channels. Optical wireless communication
has the potential for extremely high data rates of up to tens of Gigabits per
second (Gb/s).
1.0
INTRODUCTION
In recent years, the need to access wireless local area networks from desktop
to portable and mobile formats has grown rapidly (Hranilovic, 2005). Optical wireless
communication has emerged as a viable technology for next generation indoor and
outdoor broadband wireless application (Boucouvalas, 2005). The optical wireless
channel was limited by channel constraints such as the maximum allowable optical
power and available bandwidth. Modulation schemes well suited to conventional
channel were not necessarily perform well for the optical wireless channel (Trisno,
2006). The optical wireless channel can be easily affected by channel uncertainty. For
example, distance between transmitter and receiver, distance from ambient light
source or optical propagation path changes can result in bit error rate (BER) variation.
Optical wireless communications (OWC) has the potential for extremely high data
rates of up to tens of Gb/s (Yu, 2010). However, this capacity cannot yet be achieved
because of the physical limitations of optical devices and the channel which exhibits
path loss, noise from ambient light and the receiver, and multipath dispersion from
multiple reflections off walls and objects in the room (Tanaka, 2002). Due to this
constraint, adaptive Differential Amplitude Pulse-Position Modulation (DAPPM)
technique using fuzzy logic for optical wireless communication channels is proposed
to solve this problem.
In this paper, Section II presents the numerical simulation and discussion for
optical power and bandwidth efficiency. In addition, tunable DAPPM for reliable
optical wireless communication channels has been determined in Section III. A fuzzy
Logic control system has been set up for this tunable modulation system.
84
(1)
(2)
(3)
Where, N 0 = the power spectral density of the White Gaussian Noise and Qx = the
customary Q-function of digital telecommunication. The optical bandwidth and power
requirement equations of the PAM, PPM, M-n-PAPM and DAPPM were derived and
compared that shown in Table 1.
No.
Modulation
schemes
1.
PAM
BPAM
1
BOOK log 2 L
PPAM
L 1
POOK
log 2 L
2.
PPM
BPPM
L
BOOK log 2 L
PPPM
2
POOK
log 2 L
3.
M-n-PAPM
BM _ n _ PAPM
BOOK
4.
2.1
DAPPM(A=2)
n
log 2 nM
BDAPPM
L 1
BOOK
2 log 2 L A
PM _ n _ PAPM
POOK
2M 2
n log 2 nM
PDAPPM A( L 1)
1
( Log2 ( AL ))
POOK
( A 1) 2
L log 2 L
86
2.3
and the position of the pulse. It can be expressed as M-n-PAPM, where M is the
number of amplitude levels, and n is the pulse numbers within a clock cycle (Zeng,
Green, Sun, & Leeson, M. S. 2007). The adaptive M-n-PAPM modulation scheme
was a combined multilevel modulation scheme based on PAM and PPM (Yu, 2010).
In M-n-PAPM modulation, the largest bandwidth requirement point is achieved at M
= 2 and n = 32 with BM-n-PAPM/BOOK = 5.33, where M represents the number of
amplitude levels, and n represents the pulse numbers within a clock cycle as shown in
Figure 5. However, the lowest corresponds to M = 32 and n = 2 with BM-n-PAPM/BOOK
= 0.33. On the others hand, Figure 6 shows that largest point for power requirement
occurs at M = 32 and n=2 with PM-n-PAPM/POOK= 11.16 while the lowest is achieved at
M = 2 and n=32 with PM-n-PAPM/POOK = -6.90.
87
2.4
(A) will effect on the bandwidth and power requirements (Sethakaset & Gulliver,
2004). This gives an advantage of combining PAM with DPPM (Bong & Abdullah,
2012). Results obtained in Figure 7 shows that the normalised optical bandwidth
requirements for DAPPM, while Figure 8 shows that the normalised optical
requirements for DAPPM. The lowest bandwidth requirement for DAPPM,
BDAPPM/BOOK= 0.25, is achieved at A = 32, L = 2 and the largest one, B DAPPM/BOOK
=2.75, at A = 2, L = 32. Similarly, the lowest power requirement, P DAPPM/POOK
0.003, is achieved at A = 32, L = 32 and the largest one, PDAPPM/POOK = 0.5, occurs at
A = 2, L = 2. The analysis suggests that using DAPPM modulation techniques will
provide more advantages over OOK, PAM, PPM, M-n-PAPM. DAPPM will provide
better bandwidth and power efficiency. In addition to this, DAPPM also provide
88
lower average symbol length, higher transmission capacity and lower peak-to-average
power ratio.
2011). The block diagram of a Fuzzy logic (FL) controlled adaptive modulation
system is shown in Figure 9 while Figure 10 shows that the five primaries Graphical
User Interface (GUI) tools for building, editing, and observing fuzzy inference
systems.
90
If ceiling height is 1 and ambient light noise to signal ratio is 10, then
amplitude level (A) is low and differential pulse-position change (L) is slow.
(ii) If ceiling height is 2 and ambient light noise to signal ratio is 30, then
amplitude level (A) is medium and differential pulse-position change (L) is
medium.
(iii) If ceiling height is 3 and ambient light noise to signal ratio is 50, then
amplitude level (A) is fast and differential pulse-position change (L) is large.
The membership function of input Ceiling Height value in the range [1, 3] was
mapped into fuzzy membership function editor and defined in the group as 1m, 2m
and 3m. While another input membership function is Ambient light noise to signal
ratio and it is defined in the group as 10, 30 and 50. The amplitude level change
91
is an output of fuzzy logic and it is grouped into three categories as Low, Medium
and Fast. The output amplitude level value is in the range [1, 2]. While the
differential pulse position change is an output variable and it is grouped into three
categories as Slow, Medium and Large. The output differential pulse position
change value is in the range [2, 10]. The surface of amplitude level (A) versus the
Ceiling height and Ambient light noise to signal ratio is shown in Figure 11 while the
surface of Differential pulse position change (L) versus the Ceiling height and
Ambient light noise to signal ratio is shown in Figure 12. The fuzzy control method
was incorporated with the developed tunable DAPPM as a viable control process for
optical wireless communication channel.
Figure 11: The surface of amplitude level (A) versus the Ceiling height and Ambient
light noise to signal ratio.
Figure 12: The surface of Differential pulse position change (L) versus the Ceiling
height and Ambient light noise to signal ratio.
92
4.0
CONCLUSION
In this paper, the optical power and bandwidth requirement for various
modulation schemes were investigated. A detailed and general comparison between
PAM, PPM, M-n-PAPM and DAPPM were done. DAPPM is an asynchronous
modulation technique which is a combination of PAM and DPPM. Therefore the
symbol length (L) and the pulse amplitude (A) are varied to represent the information
being transmitted. As the result, DAPPM scheme is the most power and bandwidth
efficient over PAM, PPM, M-n-PAPM. Furthermore, this paper also introduced a
tunable Differential Amplitude Pulse-Position Modulation (DAPPM) with fuzzy
control technique in optical wireless communication channels. This control module is
applied for DAPPM to assist the adaption process. Thus, the surface of amplitude
level (A) versus the Ceiling height and Ambient light noise to signal ratio, and the
surface of Differential pulse position change (L) versus the Ceiling height and
Ambient light noise to signal ratio has been plotted and analysed. The fuzzy logic
control system can realise system adaptation with just three rules applied to fuzzy
interference process. This showed the simple yet powerful approach the fuzzy logic
method can provide for system design. The system can achieve self-adaptation by
using fuzzy inference methods, which benefited in a simple system structure
compared to other artificial intelligence systems. This system shows that the fuzzy
logic control module is very promising in controlling adaptive modulation scheme
process because a reliable communication system structure had been realised for the
optical wireless channel.
REFERENCES
Abdullah, M. F. L. & Bong, S. W. (2014). Adaptive differential amplitude pulseposition modulation technique for optical wireless communication channels
based on fuzzy logic. IET Communication, 8 (4), 417-432. Doi: 10.1049/ietcom.2013.0443.
Bong, S. W. & Abdullah, M. F. L. (2012). Adaptive Differential Amplitude PulsePosition Modulation Technique (DAPPM) using Fuzzy Logic for Optical
93
MathWorks
(2015).
Retrieved
from://
http://www.mathworks.com/products/?s_tid=gn_ps.
GLOBECOM
'04.
IEEE,
3,
1867-1871.
Doi:
10.1109/GLOCOM.2004.1378313.
Trisno, S. (2006). Design and analysis of advanced free space optical communication
systems. University of Maryland: Ph.D. Thesis.
Yan, G., Min, W., Weifeng, D. (2011). Performance Research of Modulation for
Optical Wireless Communication System. Journal of Networks, 6(8), 10991105.
94
Zadeh, L. (2008). Is there a need for fuzzy logic? Fuzzy Information Processing
Society, 2008. NAFIPS 2008. Annual Meeting of the North American, 1-3, Doi:
10.1109/NAFIPS.2008.4531354.
Zeng, Y., Green, R. J., Sun, S. B. & Leeson, M. S. (2007). Tunable Pulse Amplitude
and
Position
Modulation
Technique
for
Reliable
Optical
95
Wireless
Politeknik Kuching,Sarawak
zainal.abiddin@poliku.edu.my, huzaimi.h@poliku.edu.my ,
mdbilal.poli@1govuc.gov.my
ABSTRACT
Biodiesel can be defined as a substitute for diesel fuel which is derived from
vegetable oil or animal fat. In this project, fabricate, design and commission a
mini plant that produces biodiesel from used cooking oil (UCO). The highlight
of this research is the introduction of the Gingerize concepts during the first
step catalyzed process. Transesterification reaction is a reaction between oil
or fat with alcohol in the presence of strong base catalyst to produce
methlyester (biodiesel) and glycerol. Transesterification reaction is conducted
at an optimum condition of 60C reaction temperature, 30 minutes reaction
time and 400 rpm stirring. This reaction uses sodium hydroxide, (NaOH) as
the second catalyst and methanol, (MeOH) as the alcohol. The yielding
quantity of 15 liters plus the reactant result in generating 13 liters of biodiesel
which is equivalent to 90% production efficiency. 10% glycerol produce can
be used for other purposes. The product density and combustion are analysed.
The result shows that the density of the product is in a reasonable agreement
with ASTM 6751 and the product B100 combusted vigorously in a 3:1 low
compression spark ignition engine (Alternative Fuel Engine (AFE)).
96
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Nowadays the world is facing a crucial limited amount of crude oil for fuel
because the decreased in stocks. It is important to replace the fossil fuel for a new
alternative fuel. Biodiesel is one of the renewable fuels that considered being efficient
and safe for the environment. The benefit of using biodiesel is also clear and
unquestionable. Biodiesel which is relatively clean burning, renewable fuel
produced from new and used animal and vegetable oil (Canakci, 2007). Production of
biodiesel could be blended with portion of fossil diesel and thus can reduce the
ultimate used of the latter. Biodiesel is not a petroleum based fuel, which means by
using biodiesel would reduce the usage of the natural fuel. It is also produce
domestically, which means that using biodiesel will also create jobs opportunity and
contribute to the local and country economies. The major advantage of biodiesel is
that biodiesel is much cleaner than the conventional diesel; it produces less harmful
emissions that the fossil diesel when burned in a combustion engine. This alternative
fuels gives a lot of advantages towards all living things and creatures.
Most typical biodiesel feedstock (palm oil, soybean, peanut, olive oil and beef
tallow) cost is substantially greater than the cost of the petroleum diesel. Therefore,
alternative feedstock is being evaluated to identify less expensive materials that could
serve as feedstock for biodiesel production. One of the most promising biodiesel
feedstock is UCO. This is due to the fact that it is in favour of the environment and
economic as it is readily available as waste materials from restaurants and households.
However, UCO contain dirt, charred food, contaminants and also have high free fatty
acid (FFA) content. Thus, the oil is subjected to pre-treatment process which is odour
removal and filtration prior to processing into B100.
97
Vegetable oils used for cooking or frying generally display a higher degree of
saturation, higher viscosity, higher cloud and pour points, higher cetane numbers as
well a greater oxidative stability can be expected from biodiesel fuels derived from
these feedstock (Gerhard & Kevin, 2009). As UCO has unpleasant odour, to remove
the bad smell by using ginger and also act as initial catalyst. The two step catalyzed
process will provides a simple and economic method to produce biodiesel from UCO
(Monge,
Scheline,
&
Solheim,
1976).
Properties
of
ginger
produce
In this work, a new gingerize process concept being adopted for the
production of biodiesel. The first Two-stage process is by frying the slices ginger
together with fine filtered UCO to remove the unpleasant odour and also was
introduced to catalyze the esterification reaction. During the second step, sodium
hydroxide, (NaOH) as the second catalyst reacted with methanol, (MeOH). Resulted
product will be analyzed its density and combusted inside a Megatech Mark III
Alternative Fuel Spark Ignition Engine (SI).
98
2.0
METHODS
There are three main parts of this studies, firstly; design, fabricate and
commissioning of Mini Plant. Secondly; production of UCO B100 biodiesel which
will includes the availability of feedstock and the two-stage process. Lastly the
analysis of UCO B100 density and the engine test on Megatech Mark III Alternative
Fuel SI Engine.
2.1
Part 1 : Fabrication
The capacity of 15 litres Mini Plant being fabricated and took 6 months to
finish. Starting from designing the plant, fabrication takes quite sometimes to finish as
certain design need to be modified during the process. Figure 2 shows the schematic
diagram of Mini Plant which consists of main components such as Gingerize reactor,
transesterification mixer and washing components. The solid model of the plant as
shown in Figure 2.
99
2.2
Part 2 : Process
2.2.1 Materials
The samples of UCO were provided by a local restaurant, then being finefiltered to remove all the coarse contaminants. Local planted ginger or ginger root
sliced to 3-5 mm thickness.
2.2.2
Frying ginger will produce gingerol with molecular formula C 17H26O4 and
molar mass 294.38 g/mol. Cooking the ginger will transform gingerol into zingerone.
Chemically, gingerol is a relative of capsaicin and piperine. Capsaicin is soluble in
alcohol, ether and benzene but slightly in petroleum. Pure capsaicin is a volatile,
hydrophobic, colourless, odourless and crystalline to waxy compound. However
piperine is highly soluble in alcohol and ether. It is believe that with these
compositions as in Figure 4, during frying the ginger with UCO will exaggerate the
chemical reaction therein.
100
The chemical reaction that converts a vegetable oil or animal fat to biodiesel is
called "transesterification". In this transesterification reaction, an ester and an alcohol
(i.e. methanol) react to form a different ester. The three fatty acid chains (R1COO)
connected to the glycerol backbone are broken at their ester bond and react with the
alcohol to form alkyl esters and a glycerol molecule. Figure 5 shows
transesterification reaction.
101
2.3
Part 3: Analysis
= Approximate FFA %
Amount of catalyst
Amount of catalyst =
+ Titration Value
Volume of UCO to
be process
Conversion Analysis
Conversion Efficiency =
100 %
Density Analysis
Density, g/ml =
102
2.3.2
Engine Test
Engine testing was carried out on engine bed and was done in Petrochemical
Engineering Department at Politeknik Kuching Sarawak. The engine test was carried
out on Megatech AFE. This engine is a SI Engine with a low compression ratio of 3:1.
As illustrated in Figure 6 below, the engine comprises 2 main sections, that is the
engine block section and the dynamometer section. To combust B100 inside the SI
engine must be carried out carefully. Theoretically it is impossible to combust the
biodiesel inside a SI engine with a low compression ratio. Two fuel tanks were
provided on this engine with two intakes of fuel. Methanol being used to initiate the
combustion. Combustion happens when methanol was fed on lean condition until the
temperature inside the engine increased to 500oC-600oC. Adjustment on Fuel-Air
Ratio (FAR) makes combustion possible between certain Limits of Flammability until
it reach the Stoichiometric Ratio reaction. On the other tank B100 was fed by opening
the needle valve slowly, at the same time methanol are gradually reduced by turning
off the intake needle valve. Adjustment of these two valves must be carried out with
precise and simultaneous adjustment.
103
3.0
3.1
Plant efficiency
The yielding quantity of 15 liters plus the reactant result in generating 13 liters
of biodiesel which is equivalent to 90% production efficiency. 10% glycerol produce
can be used for other purpose. Duration to produce biodiesel was clocked for 30
minutes production. Four samples were tested to obtain the average Titration value of
3.0. Thus it gives the approximate percentage of FFA is 2.3%. An amount of 15 liters
of UCO being tested with 132g of NaOH (95% purity). First stage reaction by frying
500g of sliced ginger. Finally the plant managed to generates 13 liters of pure B100
biodiesel.
3.2
agreement with ASTM 6751. This is might due to the interaction with gingerol
composition during the frying of fresh ginger. Table 1 shows the differences of UCO
B100 density which is below the ASTM 6751 standards. Biodiesel that meets
international fuel standards ASTM 6751 has been accepted as an alternative for fossil
diesel due to its property compatibility and comparable performance to diesel engine
and most importantly because it is an environmental friendly source of energy [7].
Further investigation on the gingerol composition activity during the gingerizing
reaction should be emphasized due to the ability of its chemical reaction that reduce
the biodiesel density.
Biodiesel Standard
ASTM 6751
(Biodiesel)
0.87 0.89
0.815
104
Diesel
0.855
3.3
Engine performance
The product burns very well inside the AFE as shown in Figure 7. The engine
was a see-through or transparent high tempered glass cylinder wall, and the flashes of
flames can be seen clearly. The yellowish flames indicate that the rich mixture of fuel
combusted inside the engine. However smoke emission reduces when the RPM of the
engine is higher, this indicates the complete combustion of biodiesel took place inside
the engine during high RPM.
4.0
CONCLUSIONS
1.
Fresh slices ginger are believe can react with NOaH and methanol quite well.
For future research, dried and blended ginger to be considered as the amount
of zingerone are said to be more dense compared to the fresh one.
2.
The density of the product is 0.815 g/m3 and FFA in the UCO is 2.3%,
considered to be lighter than normal diesel and ASTM 6751 standard.
3.
REFERENCES
106
Steffen Arctander, Perfume and Flavor Materials of Natural Origin, pg. 280. Viewed
at Wikipedia:gingerol
Yong Wang, Shiyi Ou, Pengzhan Liu, Zhisen Zhang, (2007). Preparation of
biodiesel from waste cooking oil via two-step catalyzed process.
107
ABSTRACT
Key words: Black Pepper powder; Static electricity; Air velocity; Voltage;
Oscilloscope;
1.0
INTRODUCTION
108
Britton (1999) defines Powder is a generic term for subdivided solid material,
comprising pellets, granules and dust. In this study, Black/White pepper berries
powder produced in Malaysian Pepper Board (MPB) Kuching Sarawak can be
classified as a granular powder because the diameter of the powder is less than 0.42
mm but more than 1 micron.
Using steel pipe intermediate fitted with Acrylic transparent tubing material
categorized as Triboelectric series on negative side takes the author one step further
understanding on how static electricity is created. Two methods which powder can be
charged emphasized, which is between particles and other surface such as pipe walls
and by contact and separation between particles. When positive triboelectric material
rubs against on negative triboelectric, the positive material will tends to give up its
surface electrons and become positively charged whilst conversely materials on the
negative side of the series tend to gain electrons and hence a negatively charged.
Increase in rubbing speed and force will produce large negative charge by
taking this phenomena of pepper powders rubbing with air velocity against the
Acrylic transparent tubing during pneumatic conveying rises the intuition to find out
the property of triboelectric series of pepper powder. (Glor,) states most organic and
polymeric powders are poor conductors. By surface contact and separation of this
poorly conductivity powder which flowing in 2 inch pipeline can create static
electricity
109
1.1
Britton (1999) suggested that net charge is created in between pipe internal
wall and charging particles during flow. Accumulation of these charges is more
significant with the boundary layer of internal nonconductive pipe. Time function
under separation will create voltage breakdown resembles as propagating brush static
discharge. Effect of these phenomena in any industry is complicated. Recommended
to monitor the changes in material of the pipe, humidity value, and flow magnitude of
the air.
2.0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
110
The system is in closed loop with continues recycle the black pepper. The
major intention of this work is to investigate on the electrostatic discharge generated
during the process of flow of black pepper, in a 2 inch steel pipe in diameter
constructed and fitted horizontally to a fan blower model B.V.C division of D.D
Lamson England, driven by single phase electric motor 3000 rpm modified to regulate
the speed ranging from 16m/s up to 40 m/s desirable velocity. Four channels
Oscilloscope model GwInstek GDS-2104 Digital Storage Oscilloscope is portable
instrument and has the capability of storing data from 500 memory lengths up to 2500
memory length on each single waveform. The oscilloscope was tuned to measure DC
coupling to measure ESD, using x1 of magnification of the probe. The measurement
was programed to 1 channel with Vertical axis as 2mV; Volt per division and the
horizontal axis were programed to 1ns time per seconds.
The probe was calibrated according to the manual instruction before the
measurement stated. The oscilloscope was used in this experiment as advice to collect
the ESD in Voltage output by using the probe which will behave as antenna. The
output of the EDS will be observed in Voltage Maximum when the parameter in the
oscilloscope was programed to acquire peak detect.
The noise reduction was set to zero, to avoid the error during measurement,
with the triggering was set to auto to pick the readings for sampling period of 0.04 ns
During the experiment the probe was built as antenna attaches on the surface of the
111
Acrylic tube and the peak was monitored on the oscilloscope display. Figure 2 shows
the configuration of copper plate used as receiver antenna with attached to the
crocodile clip on it and given potential difference with ground cable, once the copper
picks up the ESD from the surface the ground clip will give voltage across the probe
which allows the probe to measure the potential differences across the tip of the
crocodile and the ground clip.
Operation begins with initial condition without the pepper powder in the
system, to let the system to stabilize with only air flow, during this stage the
temperature, and relative humidity will be recorded. Progressively the powder will fed
into the system through hopper and set the velocity of air flow from the minimum
value as 16 m/s gradually will increase to 40 m/s the maximum velocity.
Manipulation of the air flow velocity will be reference from the reading of the
anemometer fitted at the steel pipe. Air flow velocity will be recorded with the
temperature and humidity value.
112
2.1
RPM
1072
1189
1264
1386
1461
1607
1696
1808
1911
2020
Velocity (m/s)
16.8
19.7
21
22
23.2
27.3
31.5
33
36.4
40
3.0
3.1
Time.
By comparing with reference to the y axis, voltage (Mv) for each individual
velocity versus time, the experiment analysis covers collectively 10 waveforms, of the
10 different velocities, found 23 out of 5000 ns time division a repeatable pattern
electric field pulses.
113
Table 2: Collective of 23 specify time and its Electric Field Voltage Values,
respective to 10 velocities.
16.6m/
19.7m/
21m/
22.1m/
23.2m/
27.3m/
31.5m/
33m/
36.4m/
40m/
10 Mv
0 Mv
10 Mv
4 Mv
4 Mv
14 Mv
14 Mv
10 Mv
4 mv
10 Mv
14 Mv
14 Mv
10 Mv
0 Mv
10 Mv
4 Mv
0 Mv
10M
10M
4Mv
4Mv
4Mv
0Mv
4Mv
4Mv
20Mv
10Mv
0Mv
0Mv
10Mv
4Mv
0Mv
20Mv
0Mv
10Mv
0Mv
4Mv
4Mv
20Mv
4Mv
4Mv
10Mv
4Mv
4Mv
4Mv
10Mv
4Mv
4Mv
4Mv
4Mv
4Mv
0Mv
4mv
0Mv
4Mv
4Mv
0Mv
0Mv
4Mv
0Mv
10Mv
14Mv
10 Mv
0Mv
4Mv
14Mv
4Mv
20Mv
4Mv
14Mv
0 Mv
14 Mv
0Mv
4Mv
20Mv
10Mv
20Mv
0Mv
4Mv
10 Mv
14 Mv
4Mv
14Mv
10Mv
0Mv
4Mv
14 Mv
4 Mv
0Mv
20Mv
4Mv
0Mv
4Mv
10 mv
20 Mv
10Mv
-6Mv
4Mv
10Mv
0 Mv
4 Mv
10Mv
4Mv
4Mv
10Mv
4 Mv
14 Mv
0Mv
4Mv
10Mv
0Mv
4Mv
20Mv
4 Mv
14 Mv
14Mv
4Mv
0Mv
10Mv
4Mv
10Mv
14M
v
10M
v
14M
v
4Mv
20M
v
4Mv
114
v
10M
v
20M
v
20M
v
10M
v
10M
v
10M
v
4Mv
10M
v
20Mv
20Mv
20mv
20mv
10mv
0Mv
14Mv
-10Mv
0Mv
20M
Time
19ns
v
20M
31ns
v
30M
47ns
v
20M
67ns
v
24M
92ns
v
20M
115n
20M
157n
20M
182n
20M
185n
24M
273n
20M
275n
30M
283n
24m
289n
20M
296n
30M
311n
20M
341n
14 Mv
10 Mv
4Mv
0Mv
0Mv
10Mv
10Mv
4 Mv
4 Mv
4Mv
4Mv
4mv
20Mv
4Mv
10 Mv
14 Mv
4Mv
10Mv
4Mv
0Mv
4 Mv
14 Mv
10Mv
10Mv
4Mv
0Mv
10 Mv
4 Mv
0Mv
10Mv
4Mv
4mv
4 Mv
4 Mv
4Mv
4Mv
10Mv
0Mv
10 Mv
4 Mv
4Mv
10Mv
10Mv
4Mv
10M
v
10M
v
4Mv
10M
v
10M
v
0Mv
30M
v
4Mv
20M
v
4Mv
20M
v
4Mv
4mv
0Mv
4Mv
4mv
0Mv
20Mv
20Mv
30M
344n
30M
354n
20M
359n
24M
373n
20M
380n
20M
402n
20M
487n
115
4.0
CONCLUSION
4.1
The first part of the work deals with programming the oscilloscope with
required parameters to measure the dc voltage picked up by the probe as an antenna.
The reading which recorded from the probe as dc voltage during the process flow
from the surface of the acrylic transparent tube attached in between the pipe will be
analyzed.
116
Intention of the experiment clearly define by analyze every electric field pulse
recorded by the oscilloscope for 10 different velocities and been discussed throughout
the text. The conclusion summaries the main findings by referring to Figure 4 shows
that the velocity above 27.3 m/s for dense dilute phase material conveying system has
inevitable static electricity. Black pepper in this investigation shows remarkable
behavior under the range of velocities from 27.3 m/s onwards, with constant humidity
of 57% RH and 310C. Hereby with basic instrumentation of oscilloscope also proves
the capable of conducting the measurement of electrostatic discharge with proper
calibration on the probe.
REFERENCES
Armour-Chelu, D. I., Woodhead, S. R.(2002). Comparison of the electric charging
properties of particulate material in glass-solid flows in pipelines. J.of
Electrostatics. Vol 56: 87-101.
Glor, M.: Electrostatic Ignition Hazards Associated with Flammable Substance in
the
Form
of
Gases,
Vapors,
Mists
Dusts:www.thuda.com/display.cfm/102744/disp-type/elektrostatik_e.pdf
117
and
118
noraini045@perlis.uitm.edu.my, zainab500@melaka.uitm.edu.my,
noorazura@perlis.uitm.edu.my, hakimteam@gmail.com
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
sejarah, diantaranya fakta yang banyak perlu diingati, buku teks yang tidak menarik
untuk dibaca dan cara pengajaran dan pembelajaran (P&P) guru tidak membantu
pelajar mengingati fakta (Mansor, 2012). Justeru pelbagai langkah diambil untuk
menjadikan sejarah sebagai subjek yang diminati oleh pelajar. Diantara cadangan bagi
menarik minat pelajar ialah penambahbaikan buku teks yang digunakan di dalam
kelas, menambahkan koleksi buku sejarah dan novel penceritaan sejarah yang lebih
kreatif dan juga penambahbaikan pengajaran dan pembelajaran ilmu sejarah agar
lebih menarik dan bersifat interaktif
berlaku dalam pengajaran dan pembelajaran Sejarah Islam dimana pelajar kurang
meminati Sejarah Islam disebabkan oleh faktor-faktor yang sama. Justeru, kaedah
pengajaran dan pembelajaran serta bahan bantu mengajar untuk matapelajaran ini
perlu ditambahbaik.
2.0
perkenalkan sebagai salah satu bahan bantu mengajar yang bersifat interaktif untuk
memudahkan pembelajaran dan hafalan fakta-fakta sejarah di kalangan pelajar.
Permainan ini diinspirasikan daripada permainan UNO iaitu sejenis permainan yang
berkonsepkan warna dan angka. Walaupun begitu, sedikit inovasi dilakukan di mana
Sarjana Sirah adalah permainan kad yang berkonsepkan warna dan fakta-fakta
sejarah. Setiap fakta sejarah dibahagikan mengikut zaman dalam perkembangan
Sejarah Islam. Ia melibatkan dua hingga empat orang pemain dalam satu permainan.
Pelajar atau pemain mudah untuk mengingati fakta-fakta sejarah kerana setiap pemain
perlu membaca setiap kepingan yang hendak diletakkan dihadapan semua pemain
dengan suara yang nyaring dan setiap fakta yang dibacakan berkemungkinan akan
disoal oleh pemain dalam giliran yang seterusnya. Pemain yang terdahulu berjaya
menghabiskan kad akan dikira sebagai pemenang. Melalui permainan ini, penyelidik
berjaya mengetengahkan satu inovasi permainan kad untuk pengukuhan ilmu Sejarah
Islam dan telah dianugerahkan Silver Award dalam Pertandingan Inovasi, Research,
Invention, Innovation & Design (RIID2013) anjuran UiTM Melaka.
120
3.0
PERNYATAAN MASALAH
Kursus Pemikiran dan Tamadun Islam (CTU151) adalah kursus wajib bagi
pelajar semester 2, pengajian peringkat Diploma di Universiti Teknologi MARA
(UiTM). Berdasarkan kajian awal yang dibuat untuk mengkaji berkaitan minat pelajar
terhadap matapelajaran Sejarah Islam, didapati 55% daripada 40 pelajar mengatakan
mereka tidak meminati matapelajaran Sejarah Islam. Daripada jumlah ini 81.8%
pelajar mengatakan mereka tidak meminati matapelajaran ini kerana terlalu banyak
fakta yang perlu diingati. 68.1% pelajar mengatakan buku-buku Tamadun Islam
membosankan dan 45.4% pelajar mengatakan sesi pengajaran dan pembelajaran tidak
menarik minat mereka. Tambahan lagi, corak pengajaran konservatif chalk & talk
yang digunakan oleh guru sudah lagi tidak relevan kepada pelajar yang dahagakan
idea baharu lagi kreatif
penyelidik cuba mencari satu alternatif baru bagi meningkatkan minat pelajar dan
memudahkan pelajar mengingati fakta-fakta yang berkaitan dengan ketamadunan
Islam dalam keadaan santai dan lebih bersifat interaktif.
4.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
a)
b)
5.0
KEPENTINGAN KAJIAN
121
permainan ini juga, persepsi pelajar terhadap kesukaran mengingati fakta, pengajaran
dan pembelajaran sejarah yang membosankan dan sebagainya dapat diatasi.
6.0
SKOP KAJIAN
7.0
TINJAUAN LITERATUR
Menurut Garris, Ahlers & Driskell (2002), permainan yang dibentuk dengan
baik boleh menjadi alat bantu mengajar yang boleh memotivasikan pelajar untuk
terlibat dengan aktif dalam aktiviti pembelajaran. Selain itu, permainan juga adalah
salah satu cara untuk melibatkan pelajar yang pasif dan pendiam untuk melibatkan
diri secara aktif dengan rakan dan guru di dalam kelas (Curt Reese, 2007). Pelbagai
bentuk permainan telah dibentuk seperti permainan snake & ladders, permainan
berpapan (board games), puzzles dan sebagainya. Begitu juga dengan permainan kad.
Penggunaan permainan kad dalam memudahkan pengajaran dan pembelajaran
bukanlah suatu perkara yang baru.
pernah menemui permainan kad yang membantu mereka memahami ilmu Sejarah
Islam. Justeru, model permainan kad yang diberi nama Sarjana Sirah ini adalah satu
inovasi yang diharapkan dapat memenuhi kekosongan ini.
8.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
8.1
Persampelan
8.2
Pengumpulan Data
SKOR
Sangat Negatif
Negatif
Neutral
Positif
Amat Positif
123
TAHAP
1.00 2.39
Rendah
2.40 3.79
Sederhana
3.80 5.00
Tinggi
8.3
Metodologi
Kajian yang dilakukan ini melibatkan dua jenis sumber data iaitu data primer
dan data sekunder. Data primer diperolehi daripada soal selidik yang diedarkan
daripada responden, manakala data sekunder diperolehi melalui kajian perpustakaan
dan pencarian data melalui internet seperti buku, jurnal dan artikel.
8.4
Soalselidik
Satu set borang soal selidik telah dibentuk berdasarkan sumber rujukan yang
telah diperolehi. Ia terbahagi kepada dua bahagian. Bahagian 1 meliputi latar belakang
responden dan bahagian 2 meliputi pendapat pelajar secara khusus berkaitan
permainan kad Sarjana Sirah.
9.0
9.1
Latarbelakang Responden:
124
Frekuensi
Peratus
Perempuan
24
60
Lelaki
16
40
Jadual 4: Peratus Responden Pernah Bermain dan Tidak Pernah Bermain Kad
berkaitan dengan Sejarah Islam
Item
Frekuensi
Peratus
32
80
20
Pernah
bermain
permainan
kad 0
100
Jadual di bawah ini pula menunjukkan bahawa 87.5% pelajar ingin mencadangkan
permainan ini kepada rakan-rakan mereka. Manakala hanya 12.5% sahaja yang tidak
berhasrat mencadangkan permainan ini kepada rakan-rakan mereka.
Jadual 5: Peratus Responden ingin dan tidak ingin mencadangkan permainan ini
kepada rakan-rakan
Item
Ingin
Frekuensi
mencadangkan
permainan 35
Peratus
87.5
kepada rakan
Tidak ingin mencadangkan permainan 5
12.5
kepada rakan
Dapatan kajian berkaitan pandangan pelajar terhadap permainan Sarjana Sirah juga
menunjukkan bahawa nilai min yang tinggi melebihi 4.0 untuk kebanyakan item
125
berkaitan. Ini menunjukkan bahawa permainan ini dapat menarik minat pelajar,
menyeronokkan, mudah difahami dan dapat membantu pelajar mengingati fakta-fakta
Sejarah Islam dengan lebih mudah. Pelajar juga mencadangkan agar permainan ini
digunakan oleh guru di dalam kelas dan ia boleh membantu pelajar yang sukar
mengingati fakta-fakta sejarah. Berikut adalah jadual min pandangan pelajar terhadap
permainan kad Sarjana Sirah:
Jadual 6: Jadual Min Pandangan Pelajar terhadap Permainan Kad Sarjana Sirah
Item
Minimum
Maksimum Min
40
3.00
5.00
4.10
peraturan 40
3.00
5.00
4.00
40
3.00
5.00
4.16
3.00
5.00
4.16
3.00
5.00
4.10
3.00
5.00
4.22
3.00
5.00
4.20
3.00
5.00
3.89
2. Arahan
dan
ini
menambahkan 40
ini
sesuai
untuk 40
40
3.00
5.00
4.10
40
3.00
5.00
4.00
10.0
126
RUJUKAN
Curt Reese, T. W. (2007). Teaching Academic Discussion Skills With A Card Game.
Simulation & Gaming, 38 (4), (pp. 546-555)
Garris, Ahlers & Driskell (2002). Games, motivation, and learning: A research and
practice model. Simulation & Gaming, 33(4), (pp. 441-467)
Kamarudin, K. (2014, 02 04). Guru Punca Pelajar Tidak Minat Sejarah? Berita
Harian.
8.
Retrieved
from
http://search.proquest.com.ezaccess.library.uitm.edu.my/docview/
215577619? accountid = 42518
Rebecca Lyons, C.A. (2011). The Combat Medic Card Game for Emergency Medical
Procedures. Proceedings of the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society (pp.
1323-1327).
127
http://www.cikguhailmi.com/2015/03/idea-p-sains-kad-permainan-sistem.html
http://www.drmuda.gov.my/index.php/widgetkit/media-cetak/88-permainan-kadubat.html
128
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
130
for the realization of high-income economy (JPKK, 2012). All this is done to produce
a global class human capital in highly competitive and skilled (MohdAyop 2011).
2.0
PROBLEM STATEMENT
3.0
RESEARCH OBJECTIVE
131
4.0
RESEARCHMETHODOLOGY
4.1
Research Participants
4.2
Research Approach
In
particular,
this
study
uses
qualitative
interviews
with
two
4.3
Research Analysis
Thematic Analysis was conducted on after the data fromthe first round
interview were transcribed to generate themes and sub themes. These themes and sub
themes were used in order to survey questions using a Likert scale for the second
round of the Delphi technique. The data obtained were analyzed using Fuzzy Delphi
method to find consensus from the panel answered.
4.4
To ensure the validity and reliability, several measures have been carried out
as recommended by theLinconandGuba (1985)as confirmation of experts to interview
protocol, inter-rater process, triangulationof sourcesof 15 panels, Audit Trails and
long-term analysis.
5.0
This study has achieved its objective to explore the suggestions for
improvement of Community Colleges in terms of Lecturers, review panels agreed
132
community college lecturers should have the following capabilities for improving
teaching and learning (P&P):
5.1
5.2
133
Failure to master the skill in practical aspect will lead to other problems such as
monitoring the activities of student internship and susceptibility to explain in practical
projects. This will result in the student not receive input from the project or internship
that they doing and cause dissatisfaction may arise to them.
sometimes lecturers, during the practical time they let their students alone,
nobody wants to show how to do it, maybe because he was less skilled hands
(PK02)
5.3
Most students at the community college are always looking for the direction of
their future career. Education is very significant effect when these because they
reckoned lecturers as a people who know more than they (Mok Soon Sang, 2011).
Therefore lecturers should always be inspired and able to be a source of inspiration to
their students. They can be driven by past experiences and knowledge to the students
while in class.
There was a lecturer, Mr. ZaliWahil, he always shared his business
experience, I got a lot of inspiration to be a people like him (PK04)
This is something that is very meaningful to the students because they feel the
lecturer's close to their world. This makes them eager to succeed in their future
careers.Grima et al (2014) in his study of mentor who gives inspiration has proven the
power of inspiration in shaping the identity of a student. This will increase the
effectiveness if a lecturer is able to become a mentor who can inspire students.
For me..the most powerful thing is the inspiration given by our lecturers
(PK14)
I clearly know my strength when lecturers inspire me (PK05)
the words of their former lecturer stimulus is very effective in themselves. Most
assume it is drive their success and help them to a better person than before entering
college. It supports FatimahtulZaharah (2003) and Syed Mohamad (2010) studies who
found the significant of motivation to learn by teaching staffs are very helpful in
improving student learning motivation and career.
My former lecturer, Mr. Zainuddin always reminds me, we learn not only to
work but to open our minds, I always remember that message, we must always
learn... (PK04)
I still remember one of my lecturers, En. Idham..hegives me a lot of
motivation, he told me.. I have a great potential to success (PK06)
I remember HjZairon former GrikCommunity College director said, I do not
want my student to be a seamstress village level only, I keep the words and
now I prove my success (PK07)
5.5
Career planning is a very significant matter and many studies show that it is a
necessity (Amal et al, 2006). Hoppock (1957) insists one should have knowledge
about the job before making a career choice. Thus it is not surprising that students feel
the community college lecturer is the best reference point for information about their
career as lecturer knows more about a career.
I always refer to counseling lecturer...especially because they more access to
information about careers so we can ask them (PK12)
Lecturers are also expected to contribute ideas and suggestions to the students because
most students are so vague about the future of their careers.
Before, during studies, lecturers gave a lot of ideas, what career to be done
in the future (PK13)
I refer many lecturers, they asked, after I study where should going and
whetherit'sa appropriate work (PK15)
I think the lecturer should assist students in college...show direction, then
learn what we can do most of our own vague about the direction
They argue that a good relationship and cooperation between students and lecturers
can help students to build a community college career a more glorious future.
135
6.0
CONCLUSIONS
This study achieved its objectives for feedback to our system. Successful
graduates of community colleges to improve teaching staff in community colleges.
The result is a guide for community college lecturer reminded the quality of their
services and make a community college is comparable to community colleges in the
United States.This feedback should receive serious attention parties concerned to
further improve the quality of education in the community college system and fulfill
their aspirations as activator in 2020.
REFERENCES
Abdul
JalilLimat
(2011)
Sejauhmanakah
dapatmembantupencapaian
program
NKRA
PSH
dibawah
KPTM
Keempatnegara.
Azizi Yahaya and Fadhlina Mohd Azizuddin (2008) Tahap KompetensiGuru Sekolah
Rendah Terhadap PengajaranSains Dan MatematikDalam Bahasa Inggeris.
http://eprints.utm.my/5901/1/Aziziyah_math.pdf. (24 March 2015)
FatimahtulZaharah
(2003)
MengenalpastiFaktor
yang
MempengaruhiKerjaya.
ProjekSarjana. UNIMAS
Grima, F., Paille, P. & Mejia, J.H (2014)Exploring The Benefits of Mentoring
Activities For The Mentor. Career Development International, Vol. 19Iss 4 pp.
469 490
Iswaaniza Kamal (2012) Pengharapan pelajar kole jkomuniti dalam aspek kerjaya.
Tesis Sarjana. UniversitiTeknologi Malaysia.
JPKK (2011) Kajian Pengesanan Graduan Kolej Komuniti 2010. Jabatan Pengajian
Kolej Komuniti. KPTM.
JPKK (2012) Kajian Pengesanan Graduan Kolej Komuniti 2011. Bahagian Latihan
Industridan Alumni JPKK. KPTM
Krumboltz, J.D. (1979) A social learning theory of career decision making. in A.M.
Mitchell, G.B. Jones &Krumboltz, J.D. Social Learning and Career Decision
Making.Cranston, R.I: Carroll Press.
Krumboltz, J.D. (1996) A Learning Theory of Career Counseling. in M.L. Savickas &
W.B. Walsh (eds). Handbook of Career Theory and Practice. (pp. 55-80).
Palo Alto, CA: Davies-Black.
Anal
Bioanal
Chem.
http://serc.carleton.edu/files/NAGTWorkshops/earlycareer/ mabrouk_2006.pdf
(25 March 2015)
MOE
(2013)
Standard
Guru
Malaysia.
MohdAyopAbdRazid
(2011)
Agenda
Transformasi
:Kearah
Negara
Maju
Mohd Faisal Ishak and Wan IzniRashiddi Wan MohdRazalli (2010) Kajian
Pengesanan Graduan Kolej Komuniti 2010 :Penjajaran Isu Destinasi dan
Employability Graduan.Prosiding Pelestarian Pembangunan Pelajar: Seminar
Kebangsaan hal Ehwal Pelajar Kolej Komuniti 2010. 85-99.
137
NurulNadya
Abu
Bakar,
RohanaHamzah,
NadhirahRidzuan,
Muhammad
Sukri
PembentukanSemulaKurikulumTeknik
Dan
Siti
Nor
(2010)
AtiqahAbd.Padzil,
Peningkatan
Vokasional
UntukMencapai
Di
Dan
Malaysia
Self-Actualization.
Saylor, J.G., Alexander, W.M & Lewis, A.J. (1981) Curriculum Planning for better
Teaching and Learning. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston Inc.
Kalangan
Pelajar
Berpencapaian
Rendah.
Tesis
FakultiPendidikan, UKM.
138
PhD.
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Low-Energy
Adaptive
Clustering
Hierarchy
(LEACH)
(Heizenman,
2.0
2.1
TL-LEACH
2.2
C-LEACH
Centralized
LEACH
(C-LEACH)
was
proposed
by
(Heinzelman,
141
2.3
V-LEACH
3.0
RESIDUAL ENERGY
3.1
Overview
LEACH uses a distributed algorithm for the formation of the cluster head node,
each node make decision by itself without a central control. In this case, the cluster
head is selected randomly and nodes become the cluster head in turn when cluster
heads have the same initial energy. The reference indicator is the number of times for
each node to become the cluster head. However, after several rounds, the distribution
of energy in the network will be uneven and cluster head selection will become
unreasonable
improved the cluster head selection process by taking into account the residual energy
in each member node after each rounds while the steady-state is identical with
LEACH. Different from LEACH, we have three phases in this proposed algorithm
which include set-up phase, steady-state phase and pre set-up phase.
142
3.2
( )
( )
(1)
where p is the desired percentage of cluster heads, r is the current round number, G is
the set of nodes that have not been CHs in the last
( )
( )
where Etotal is the total energy of entire network. Using these probabilities, the nodes
with higher energy will become cluster heads rather than nodes with less energy.
143
Each node generates a random probability (pn) at the beginning of a new round
and computes the threshold value T (n) by using equation 2. If r = 1 (i.e. the first
round) and Eresidual for each node are same. In case of pn< p, the node is selected as a
CH. A selected CH broadcasts an advertised message over neighbor nodes. The
neighbor nodes collect advertised messages during a given time interval and then send
a join REQ message to the nearest CH. The cluster head receives the join-REQ
messages and builds a cluster member list and a TDMA schedule. Then broadcast
them over neighbor nodes. The member node receives and save the message for data
transfer.
to reduce the amount of data. Finally, each CH transmits data to BS along the CH-toCH routing path which have been formed during setup phase.
Before the last frame of a round completes, the CH sends BS the residual
energy value of each nodes that belong to its own cluster. BS collects all residual
energy values from CHs, finds the total residual energy value (Etotal) of the network,
and distributes Etotal back to CHs. The CH broadcasts Etotal over cluster nodes. Each
nodes save the value of Etotal for the next computation of T(n) and the current round is
terminated. Figure 4 shows a flow chart for pre set-up phase in modified LEACH
algorithm.
145
4.0
For the purpose of simulation, the simple radio model was taken
from(Heinzelman, Chandrakasan, & Balakrishnan, 2000). The described model in the
referred source assumes energy dissipation of Eelec = 50 nJ/bit to run the transmitter or
receiver circuitry and Eamp = 100 pJ/bit/m2 for the transmit amplifier to achieve an
acceptable Eb/No (Signal to Noise Ratio). The parameters used in the simulation are
described in Table 1.
146
Type
Parameter
Network
Network Grid (
Value
From (0,0) to 1) (500, 500), to 2)
(1000, 1000)
Base Station
Initial Energy
0.5 Joule/battery/node
25 bytes
25 bytes
Radio
Model
elec)
50 nJoule/bit
elec)
100 pJ/bit/m2
In this simulation, the network lifetime will be analyzed by analyzing the first
node dead (FND) and half node dead (HND) of the network. Lifetime is traditionally
defined as the amount of time between the start of dataflow in the network and the
time a certain percentage of nodes have run out of energy.
4.1
nodes and bigger network size, the network lifetime closer to each other but there is
still an improvement shows by Probability of Residual Energy algorithm..
60
40
LEACH
20
Res.Energy
0
50
75
Round Done
Round done
80
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
Res.Energy
LEACH
50
Number of Nodes
75
100
Number of Nodes
a)
b)
Figure 5: FND results for different nodes implemented in different network size
a) 500 x 500 m2b) 1000 x 1000 m2
4.2
148
80
60
40
LEACH
20
Res.Energy
0
50
75
100
Round done
Round done
80
60
40
LEACH
20
Res.Energy
0
50
Number of Nodes
75
100
Number of Nodes
a)
b)
Figure 6: Half node dead results for different nodes implemented in different network
size
a) 500 x 500 m2 b) 1000 x 1000 m2
5.0
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Ali, Q., AbdulMaowjod, A., & Mohammed, H. (2011). Simulation and Performance
Study of Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) Using MATLAB. Iraq J. Electrical
and Electronic Engineering, 7(2), 112 - 119.
Dietrich, I., & Dressler, F. (2009). On the Lifetime of Wireless Sensor Network. ACM
Transaction on Sensor Network, 5(1), 1 - 38.
Heinzelman, W., Chandrakasan, A., & Balakrishnan, H. (2002). An applicationspecific protocol architecture for wireless microsensor networks. Wireless
Communications, IEEE Transactions on , vol.1, no.4, 660-670.
Liu, Y., Xiong, N., Zhao, Y., Vasikalos, A., Gao, J., & Jia, Y. (2010). Multi-Layer
Clustering Routing Algorithm for Wireless Vehicular Sensor Network. IET
Communication, 4(7), 810 - 816.
Loscri, V., Morabito, G., & Marano, S. (2005). A two-levels hierarchy for low-energy
adaptive
clustering
hierarchy
(TL-LEACH).
Vehicular
Technology
Conference, 2005. VTC-2005-Fall. 2005 IEEE 62nd (pp. 1809- 1813). IEEE
Explore.
150
Tao, L., Qing-Xin, Z., & Luqiao, Z. (2010). An Improvement for LEACH Algorithm
in Wireless Sensor Network. 2010 5th IEEE Conference on Industrial
Electronics and Application (pp. 1811-1814). IEEE Explore.
Yassein, M. B., Al-zou'bi, A., Khamayseh, Y., & Mardini, W. (2009). Improvement
on LEACH Protocol of Wireless Sensor Network (VLEACH). JDCTA:
International Journal of Digital Content Technology and its Applications, Vol.
3, No. 2, 132 - 136.
151
ABSTRAK
simulasi ini ialah perisian Opera2d. Tiga rekabentuk motor dengan kombinasi
terbaik lubang alur per kutub telah dipilih iaitu 12 lubang alur dengan 10 kutub,
12 lubang alur dengan 14 kutub dan 12 lubang alur dengan 16 kutub. Simulasi
telah dibuat terhadap ketiga-tiga rekabentuk tersebut menggunakan analisis
unsur terhingga. Hasilnya dibentangkan serta dibandingkan. Perbandingan
dibuat berdasarkan ciri-ciri elektromagnet dan prestasi motor seperti daya kilas
pemungkahan, daya gerak elektrik balikan dan agihan fluks magnet. Keputusan
simulasi menunjukkan rekabentuk motor dengan kombinasi 12 lubang alur
dengan 10 kutub adalah yang terbaik kerana mempunyai nilai daya kilas
pemungkahan yang rendah, mempunyai ketumpatan fluks yang tidak tinggi dan
bentuk daya gerak balikan yang lebih trapezoidal di samping nilai voltan yang
lebih tinggi terhasil. Seterusnya memenuhi kuasa dan daya yang diperlukan.
Motor 12 lubang alur dengan 10 kutub ini akan dibangunkan sebagai motor
prototaip dan diuji. Keputusan ujian akan ditunjukkan bagi menilai adakah ianya
hampir sama seperti simulasi.
1.0
PENGENALAN
Perkembangan sains dan teknologi masa kini, turut membawa perubahan di dalam
bidang rekabentuk yang juga mempengaruhi bidang kejuruteraan dan sains.
Perkembangan ini amat berkait rapat antara satu sama lain. Bidang sains menentukan
ilmu pengetahuan asas manakala bidang kejuruteraan pula adalah penggunaan
pengetahuan ilmu sains tersebut.
153
Sesuatu rekabentuk adalah ilham awal yang dilahirkan oleh seseorang dan
kemudian ilham tersebut digambarkan di atas helaian kertas yang meliputi beberapa
bentuk sudut pandangan. Idea ini seterusnya diperbaiki serta diberi ukuran dan saiz
mengikut keperluan dan keadaan sesuatu bentuk projek. Keadaan mekanisma yang direka
itu berfungsi mengikut sistem yang dicadangkan dan dilukis dalam bentuk lukisan
kejuruteraan. Seterusnya idea tersebut disampaikan kepada umum dengan cara yang
ringkas, jelas serta mudah difahami dan dalam bentuk yang menarik. Menurut (Feirer,
1967). Model yang menarik dan menunjukkan ciri-ciri penggunaannya sudah tentu akan
menarik minat sesiapa yang melihatnya.
Pada masa kini permintaan terhadap kenderaan elektrik kian berkembang dengan
pesatnya. Ini berdasarkan kepada faktor harga minyak petrol yang kian meningkat dan
banyak negara mencari alternatif lain selain daripada bergantung kepada kenderaan
berenjin petrol dan diesel.
dan salah satu pilihan terbaik pengguna untuk beralih ke kenderaan elektrik. Basikal
elektrik bukan sahaja ringan tetapi senang dibawa malah harga dipasaran juga murah jika
dibandingkan dengan kenderaan automotif yang lain. Kos operasi juga hampir tiada
disebabkan oleh basikal elektrik memerlukan kerja penyelenggaraan yang sangat
minimum. Kebanyakan negara termasuk Malaysia, basikal elektrik tidak memerlukan
insuran atau lesen. Penggunaan kenderaan elektrik ini mampu mengurangkan
pencemaran udara yang disebabkan oleh asap kenderaan automotif dan industri. Basikal
elektrik merupakan kenderaan mesra alam dan menjimatkan. Disamping itu ia mudah
dibawa dan pengguna tidak perlu bimbang tentang kesesakan lalu lintas. Walau
bagaimanapun, penggunaan kenderaan ini amat terhad kerana ia sesuai digunakan untuk
perjalanan jarak dekat dan sangat sesuai untuk tujuan rekreasi (Ulrich, 2005).
Rekabentuk motor pada basikal elektrik adalah satu bidang penting untuk
meningkatkan prestasi, kecekapan dan mengurangkan kos. Fokus utama dalam projek ini
ialah merekabentuk motor bagi basikal elektrik pemacu terus jenis kelajuan rendah.
Motor yang dipilih ialah jenis motor arus terus magnet kekal yang mempunyai kecekapan
motor yang tinggi dan tinggi ketumpatan daya kilas.
154
Terdapat pelbagai jenis basikal elektrik yang terdapat dipasaran yang mempunyai
kuasa dari 150 Watt sehingga 500 Watt. Basikal Ini dibezakan dari segi spesifikasi atau
jarak prestasi yang bergantung kepada kegunaaan penunggang. Basikal yang berbeza
spesifikasi bergantung kepada kegunaan samada di bandar, kawasan pendalaman yang
berbukit, perjalanan jarak jauh dan juga basikal untuk berlumba. Untuk kegunaan di
bandar prestasi basikal memerlukan pecutan yang laju dan kekerapan untuk berhenti.
Kuasa purata jenis basikal ini ialah 150 Watt dan kelajuan purata perlulah mencapai 17.6
km/j. Basikal elektrik jenis kawasan berbukit perlulah mempunyai keupayaan daya kilas
yang tinggi dan mampu mempunyai kuasa maksimum 300 Watt pada kelajuan 12.8 km/j
pada masa yang cepat dan kawasan berbukit adalah dianggarkan mencapai 4%
kecuraman cerun. Basikal jenis jarak jauh biasanya direkabentuk khas untuk perjalanan
yang jauh dan panjang dengan kelajuan yang agak perlahan dan malar. Purata kelajuan
bagi basikal jenis ini ialah 16 km/j dengan purata kuasa 100 Watt. Pusingan kitaran yang
lain bagi basikal ialah basikal jenis memecut (Muetze & Tan). Basikal jenis ini biasanya
mempunyai keupayaan dan kelajuan yang tinggi. Ianya boleh beroperasi sehingga
kelajuan 20 km/j dengan kuasa perata 200 Watt. Menjadi kelaziman rekabentuk basikal
yang bergantung kepada satu-satu jenis operasi pusingan atau keperluan kuasa tertentu
lebih efisien, mampu mengurangkan berat, kos dan meningkatkan kualiti motor (Brand et
al, 2007).
sebarang
pelincir,
menggurangkan
155
sistem
yang
kompleks
dan
menghilangkan hingar akustik (Wrobet & Mellor, 2008). Pemacu jenis ini lazimnya
sesuai untuk motor jenis kelajuan rendah, daya kilas tinggi dan mempunyai kecekapan
mekanikal yang tinggi.
Hab motor adalah salah satu motor yang digunakan pada tayar yang
menggunakan aplikasi pemacu terus. Hab motor merupakan, rekabentuk yang banyak
digunakan dalam rekabentuk basikal elektrik masa kini. Motor jenis ini dibina dengan
kos yang agak tinggi disebabkan struktur motor yang rumit berbanding motor jenis lain.
Jenis hab motor ini biasanya lebih besar dan berat berbanding motor lain yang
mempunyai kuasa keluaran yang sama. Walaubagaimanapun hab motor tetap menjadi
pilihan disebabkan oleh kecekapan motor tinggi dan menjimatkan ruang. Motor jenis ini
sesuai untuk basikal jenis kelajuan rendah . Hab motor terbahagi kepada dua jenis iaitu
motor dengan berus dan motor tanpa berus.
Motor dengan berus masih terdapat dipasaran disebabkan kawalan yang ringkas
berbanding motor tanpa berus iaitu kawalan kelajuan, melalui kawalan arus armatur dan
penukar statik kuasa yang rendah kos (Gieras, 2008). Disebalik kos yang rendah pada
kawalan motor, motor ini memerlukan kos penyelenggaraan yang tinggi, hinggar elektrik
yang tinggi, jangka hayat yang kurang dan kecekapan yang kurang berbanding motor
arus terus tanpa berus (Boldea & Nasar, 2006 and Zhen et al, 2006). Motor tanpa berus
merupakan motor tanpa penyelenggaraan berus dan menggantikan aplikasi berus dengan
pensuisan elektronik. Kelebihan motor ini ia banyak digunakan dalam aplikasi kenderaan
elektrik. Motor yang diklafikasikan dalam keluarga motor tanpa berus ini ialah motor
aruhan, motor engganan tersuis, motor segerak magnet kekal dan motor tanpa berus arus
terus dengan magnet kekal. Motor aruhan lebih murah berbanding motor tanpa berus
jenis lain disebabkan teknologi motor ini telah matang dari segi pembuatannya disamping
pengeluaran tinggi terhadap permintaan yang tinggi tetapi mempunyai kelemahan dari
segi kehilangan yang tinggi pada pemutar dan memerlukan sisitem kawalan yang agak
rumit. Binaan motor yang ringkas dan lasak menyebabkan motor engganan tersuis makin
menonjol dalam aplikasi kenderaan elektrik. Walau bagaimanapun bentuk tidak rata atau
tertonjol pada motor jenis ini menjurus kepada masalah riak kilas yang kritikal dan ia
156
juga membawa kepada getaran dan tahap hinggar yang tinggi. Dengan itu motor
engganan tersuis memerlukan penukar yang istimewa dan litar kawalan yang mempunyai
mikropemproses yang kompleks menambahkan kos pada sistem motor.
Berbanding motor yang lain motor arus terus dengan magnet kekal tanpa berus
menjadi pilihan dalam rekabentuk disebabkan kecekapan motor yang tinggi dan tinggi
ketumpatan daya kilas (Xu et al, 2009). Disamping itu, motor ini juga mempunyai litar
kawalan yang ringkas dan dapat mengurangkan kos keseluruhan sistem berbanding motor
tanpa berus yang lain.
2.0
elektrik. Spesifikasi atau julat prestasi basikal elektrik ialah kitar pengendalian basikal
samada digunakan untuk bandar, kawasan berbukit, perjalanan jarak jauh atau basikal
kelajuan tinggi. Kelajuan maksimum dan kuasa yang diperolehi berdasarkan parameter
penunggang basikal adalah amat penting dalam merekabentuk sistem pemacu elektrik
untuk basikal. Rekabentuk yang dipilih dalam projek ini ialah basikal kelajuan rendah
yang sesuai untuk beroperasi di bandar dan kawasan yang tidak berbukit. Rekabentuk
juga masih mengekalkan kayuhan pada basikal untuk mengurangkan kuasa, kos binaaan
dan saiz motor. Pengiraan kasar prestasi dan julat kelajuan basikal diperolehi penting
dalam pengiraan dimensi dan pensaizan motor.
Proses seterusnya ialah memahami konsep sistem pemacu motor a.t. dengan
magnet kekal tanpa berus yang menghasilkan daya gerak elektrik balikan yang berbentuk
trapezoid dan memerlukan arus segiempat tepat untuk memastikan basikal elektrik
bergerak dengan baik.
Proses pemilihan lain yang penting dalam rekabentuk motor ialah pemilihan
bilangan nombor kutub dan lubang alur yang bergantung kepada keperluan pada aplikasi
basikal elektrik. Setelah lengkap proses pemilihan, langkah seterusnya ialah
pendimensian dan pensaizan motor berdasarkan ciri-ciri dan spesifikasi yang diperolehi.
Pensaizan merupakan analisis yang kompleks dan pengiraan analitikal secara amnya
dimulakan dengan beberapa andaian. Berdasarkan nilai kuasa dan daya kilas yang dikira,
pensaizan dan pendimensian motor dapat ditentukan dan diterangkan dalam bab ini.
A.
jalan. Daya beban jalan, FRL yang bertindak ke atas kenderaan secara amnya dapat
dilihat melalui persamaan 1.
(1)
FTR
Rajah 1:
B.
Rintangan Mendaki
Rintangan ketika mendaki cerun atau bukit (fhc) mempunyai tanda operasi positif
dan daya apabila menuruni bukit (fhc) mempunyai tanda negatif dan persamaan daya
dapat dilihat melalui persamaan 2.
fhc = m. g. Sin
(2)
Di mana :
159
B.
m -
g -
Daya graviti
Seretan Aerodinamik
Seretan aerodenamik ialah geseran yang terjadi antara basikal ketika bergerak
melalui udara. Persamaan bagi formula daya ini ialah :
Cd . . A . vr
Fad
(3)
Di mana :
Cd - Pekali seretan
A -
Luas depan
Ketumpatan udara
vr -
vr = vg + vw
(4)
Nilai pekali seretan, Cd boleh dikurangkan melalui bentuk fizikal basikal dan keadaaan
penunggang ketika berbasikal. Dalam kebanyakkan kes, nilai pekali seretan berbeza
mengikut kedudukan penunggang. Bagi penunggang postur yang hampir rebah, nilai
pekali seretan ialah 0.77 dan penunggang basikal yang postur tegak ialah 1. Ketumpatan
udara adalah berbeza mengikut ketinggian dari paras laut, suhu dan kelembapan. Luas
depan pada basikal merangkumi penunggang dan luas hadapan basikal dan biasanya
nilainya ialah 0.4meter persegi [11].
160
D.
Rintangan Guling
Rintangan guling ( fro) disebabkan oleh berat kenderaan dan geseran tayar pada
permukaan jalan [12]. Persamaan bagi formula daya ini ialah :
fro = Crr . m . g
Di mana :
(5)
Daya graviti
Crr
jenis
tayar basikal.
Crr
Di mana :
B
= A +
W
(6)
E.
Berdasarkan cirian beban jalan, kuasa diperlukan untuk memacu tayar basikal
bergerak kepada kelajuan yang dikehendaki. Kuasa jalan meliputi kuasa yang berjaya
menentang rintangan graviti ketika mendaki, menentang kerintangan tayar ketika tayar
berguling dijalan dan menentang rintangan udara atau aerodinamik ketika bergerak
melalui udara. Antara parameter yang penting dalam menentukan kuasa basikal ialah
161
kelajuan tayar, berat penunggang dan basikal, nilai kecerunan dan kelajuan angin. Kuasa
jalan yang diperlukan dapat diringkaskan melalui persamaan berikut:
= FTR . vg
(Watt)
(7)
vg = . rw
Di mana :
(8)
FTR
vg
rw
dv
FTR - FRL
= m .
(9)
dt
Apabila basikal dalam keadaan kelajuan tetap, dv/dt menghampiri sifar maka
jumlah daya juga sifar. Perejangan kuasa ketika keadaan ini merupakan kuasa yang
diperlukan untuk mengatasi kerintangan jalan dan tiada pecutan berlaku. Kuasa tarikan
pada basikal ialah kuasa ialah kuasa yang diperlukan untuk mengatasi kerintangan pada
jalan. Untuk menentukan kadaran kuasa pada motor, nilai kuasa yang dikira perlulah
mengambil kira kehilangan mekanikal dan elektrikal ketika motor berputar. Sebagai
permulaan dalam mendapatkan kuasa yang diperlukan bagi motor basikal elektrik. Kuasa
jalan perlu dikira dengan beberapa andaian dibuat seperti berikut:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Kuasa masukan pada pengayuh ialah rentapan pada tayar belakang yang
merupakan titik sentuh pada seretan aerodinamik.
162
Perkara
Nilai
Luas Hadapan, A
0.40 m
Ketumpatan Udara,
0.007
Kecuraman,
0 2%
Jejari Tayar, rw
0.66 m
1.00
1.197 kg/m
80.00 kg
Kes 1 :
Dengan berat 80 kg, daya aerodinamik yang terhasil pada permukaan jalan yang
rata, Kecerunan 0% ialah 6.8 N manakala daya guling ialah 4 N. Jumlah daya tarikan
ialah 11.8 N. Pada jejari tayar 0.66m daya kilas yang diperlukan untuk memutarkan tayar
ialah 3.894 Nm. Kuasa yang diperlukan untuk memacu kelajuan motor 200 pusingan per
minit ialah 81.38 W.
Kes 2 :
Apabila basikal melalui kecerunan jalan 2%, daya untuk mengatasi kerintangan
mendaki bukit ialah 16 N, daya seretan aerodinamik ialah 6.8 N manakala rintangan
guling ialah 4 N. Jumlah maksimum daya tarikan dalam kes ini ialah 26 N. Daya kilas
163
yang terhasil pada diameter tayar 0.66m ialah 8.58Nm. Kuasa untuk basikal berputar
pada ketika kelajuan basikal 20.9 rad/saat ialah 180 W.
Rajah 2: Kuasa yang diperlukan pada kelajuan berbeza untuk para meter penunggang
yang diberikan
3.0
Tiga rekabentuk motor jenis alur berperingkat yang dipilih untuk penyelidikan
bagi tujuan perbandingan prestasi ialah 12-lubang alur dan 10-kutub, 12-lubang alur dan
14-kutub dan 12-lubang alur dan 16-kutub. Ketiga-tiga reka bentuk mempunyai binaan
yang sama dari segi jejari luar pemutar, mempunyai ketebalan magnet yang sama dan
mempunyai panjang sela udara yang sama. Terdapat perbezaan dari segi jejari dalam
pemutar. Ketiga-tiga parameter rekabentuk yang telah dikira dapat dilihat dalam Jadual 2.
164
Motor 1
Motor 2
Motor 3
12-Lubang Alur
12-Lubang
12-Lubang Alur
10-Kutub
Alur
16-Kutub
14-Kutub
Pemutar
Jejari Pemutar Luar (mm),
50
60
60
- Ketebalan (mm), Lm
31
29
27
47
49
49
10.4
11
11
10
13
13.5
Panjang Paksi, L
60
60
60
Jejari aci, Rs
Rro
Ketebalan Besi Belakang
Pemutar (mm), Wrbi
Magnet Kekal
Neodymium Besi Boron
(NdFeB)
Pemegun
Jejari Pemegun Luar, Rso
Lebar Gigi, Wtb
4.0
DATA MASUKAN
Rekabentuk motor yang dipilih untuk analisa ialah motor 3 fasa a.t. tanpa berus
dengan pemutar luar. Pemutar mempunyai bentuk magnet kekal segmen membulat
dengan pemagnetan secara berjejarian, bahan magnet NdFeB dan pemegun mempunyai
tatarajah belitan dua lapis. Proses memasukkan data dalam aplikasi prapemrosesan boleh
dikategorikan kepada parameter mekanikal, elektrikal dan magnet.
165
I.
Parameter Mekanikal
II.
Parameter Elektrik
Parameter meliputi ciri-ciri elektrik motor iaitu bilangan kutub magnet, panjang
pengalir per belitan, bilangan belitan pengalir setiap fasa dan faktor peratusan pengisian
pengalir per lubang alur, voltan masukan a.t. , arus bekalan dan kadaran kelajuan.
III.
Parameter Magnet
Parameter merangkumi ciri magnet atau lengkuk BH bagi bahan magnet kekal
jenis NdFeB dan ciri lapisan berlamina keluli silikon. Rajah 2 (a) menunjukkan Graf BH
bagi lapisan keluli dan (b) graf bagi magnet kekal jenis NdFeB.
Rajah 2: Lengkuk BH bagi bahan magnet kekal jenis NdFeB dan ciri lapisan berlamina
keluli silikon
5.0
Analisa statik dalam opera2d ialah untuk mencari agihan medan magnet. Analisa
berlaku dalam keadaan litar buka atau tiada pengujaan arus dan daya kilas yang terhasil
dalam keadaan ini dikenali sebagai daya kilas pemungkahan. Analisa dinamik meliputi
sifat dinamik atau putaran motor apabila dimasukkan arus atau litar luaran. Analisa ini
meliputi kuasa dan daya kilas elektromagnet.
A.
Agihan Fluks
Ketumpatan fluks boleh diperolehi dari medan magnetostatik menggunakan
simulasi Opera2d. Agihan garisan fluks medan magnet semasa litar buka bagi 12-lubang
alur dan 10-kutub, 12-lubang alur dan 14-kutub dan 12-lubang alur dan 16-kutub dapat
dilihat seperti Rajah 2. Agihan fluks yang dilihat pada pemegun dan pemutar yang
melalui sela udara menunjukkan motor berfungsi dengan sela udara yang tepat.
167
a)
b)
c)
Rajah 3: Agihan Garis Fluks semasa litar buka. a) 12-lubang alur dan 10-kutub,
b) 12-lubang alur dan 14-kutub dan c)12-lubang alur dan 16-kutub
Berdasarkan perisian analisa unsur terhingga kontur ketumpatan fluks bagi ketigatiga model dapat dilihat dalam Rajah 3. Nilai ketumpatan bagi semua bahagian motor
adalah nilai penting dalam rekabentuk motor disebabkan nilai maksimum ketumpatan
fluks setiap bahagian adalah berbeza. Berdasarkan rekabentuk pemegung yang berlubang
alur nilai fluks pada gigi mempunyai had ketumpatan fluks 1.6 Tesla dan nilai berlebihan
akan menyebabkan arus pemagnet dan kehilangan besi akan menjadi berlebihan. Nilai
fluks maksimum yang diperolehi bagi 12-lubang alur dan 10-kutub ialah 1.83 Tesla, 12lubang alur dan 14-kutub ialah 1.64 Tesla dan 12-lubang alur dan 16-kutub ialah 1.57
Tesla.
B.
Berdasarkan gambarajah kontur iaitu Rajah 4.3 sela udara pada diameter setiap
motor warna kuning dan oren menunjukkan ketumpatan fluks sela udara dalam linkungan
0.82. Nilai purata ketumpatan fluks pada sela udara Bg dapat dianggarkan melalui
pengiraan teori melalui persamaan :
(10)
168
a)
b)
c)
Rajah 4:
169
Berdasarkan persamaan , nilai purata yang diperoleh melalui rekabentuk motor ini
ialah 0.84T. Rajah 5 menunjukkan gambarajah gelombang komponen jejari ketumpatan
fluks pada sela udara pada jejari 50mm bagi 12-lubang alur dan 10-kutub dan jejari
60mm bagi 12-lubang alur dan 14-kutub dan 12-lubang alur dan 16-kutub. Keputusan
simulasi Opera2d adalah ketika litar dalam keadaan buka. Dalam keputusan yang
ditunjukkan ketumpatan fluks maksimum 0.78 hingga 0.91 T dan nilai adalah sama
dengan pengiraan.
170
(b
(a
(c
Rajah 6: Gelombang Fasa d.g.e balikan bagi 12-lubang alur dan 10-kutub, 12-lubang alur
dan 14-kutub dan 12-lubang alur dan 16-kutub untuk 3 motor terpilih
171
172
6.0
KESIMPULAN
Rekabentuk motor magnet kekal tanpa berus secara amnya bermula dengan
pengiraan asas prestasi basikal pada cirian beban jalan yang meliputi kerintangan ketika
mendaki bukit, seretan aerodinamik dan kerintangan guling. Nilai kuasa jalan yang
merupakan kuasa untuk memacu tayar bergerak dan berdasarkan gred cerun jalan yang
berbeza. Keputusan kuasa jalan dibentangkan untuk menentukan kadaran kuasa pada
rekabentuk.
RUJUKAN
A.Muetze., & Tan,Y.C. Electric bicycles - A performance evaluation, IEEE
Industry Applications Magazine, 13(4), 12-21.
173
Brand. S., Bakhri. S, & Ertugrul. N. (2007). Electric assisted bicycles and
measurement of real-time performance characteristics for power management
strategies. Power Engineering Conference, AUPEC 2007, Australasian
Universities.
Feirer, John L, (1967) General Metal. New York : Mc Graw Hill Book Co
Gieras, J. F,. Wang, R. J,. & Kamper, M. J. (2008). Axial flux permanent magnet
brushless machines: Springer Verlag.
Ulrich. K.T. (2005). Estimating the technology frontier for personal electric vehicles.
Transportation Research Part C: Emerging Technologies, 13(5-6), 448-462.
Xu, W., Zhu, J,. Guo, Y,. Wang, S,. & Shi, Z. (2009). Survey on electrical machines
in electrical vehicles. Paper presented at the International conference on
Applied Superconductivity and Electromagnetic Devices. ASEMD 2009.
Zhen, D. Deng Y. Z,. & Luo, Y. (2006). Rising of Electric Bicycle in China. Journal
of Iron and steel Research, International, 13 (supplement 1), 378-382.
174
kellingwilliam@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
The purpose of this study is to identify the specific EAO of the Dayak
entrepreneurs and the extent to which such orientations have influenced the
performance of DE in Sarawak.The study employed a mixed research methods
and primary source of data collected through survey questionnaires.
Reliability and validity of the constructs were tested using exploratory factor
analysis (EFA) and confirmatory factor analysis (CFA) prior to examining the
relationship between EAO and DE performance.The findings indicate that
EAO constructs were strong, positive and significantly related to DE
performance. However, the population of the study has disallowed the
findings to be generalized. Future studies should use a bigger representation,
while considering a longitudinal approach.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Since the industrial revolution in the 17th century with Thomas Newcomen, Abraham
Darby in the 18th century, Andrew Carnegie in the 19th century to contemporary pioneers such as
Henry Ford in the 20th century, Bill Gates and Steve Jobs in the 21st century, entrepreneurship
appears to have been the driving force of business.
According to Herron and Robinson (1993), there is a need to identify what motivates individuals
175
to become entrepreneurs, why people take financial risks, leave a safer working environment to
pursue an uncertain future, and make personal sacrifices to start and grow a business.
Over the years, entrepreneurship concept gets more dynamic and entrepreneurial activities
have been changed constantly (Solymossy, 1998). Likewise, several
explanatory models of
entrepreneurship have been developed in order to identifying the factors that shape the
entrepreneurial performance (Shapero, 1982; Robinson, Stimpson, Huefner, and Hunt, 1991;
Krueger and Carsrud, 1993; Krueger and Brazeal, 1994; Davidsson, 1995) yet, no single
conclusion agreed by these scholars.
Miller (1983) and Robinson et al.,1991 study of entrepreneurial attitude has used the dimensions
of need of achievement, innovation, personal control, and self-esteem to measure entrepreneurial
activities. Findings by Miller had supported by Shanthakumar (1992); Lumpkin and Dess (1996);
Lerner, Brush and Hisrich (1997); Solymossy (1998), Rauch, Wiklund, Frese and Lumpkin,
(2004) which have identified these four dimensions as a major attitudes required in initiating new
business ventures.
In Malaysia, under the New Economic Policy (NEP) introduced in the early 1970s, the
government has given many initiatives to the Bumiputera community to participate in
entrepreneurial activities (Gomez, 2003). In Sarawak, the indigenous Dayak community group,
according to Tateh, Latip, and Awang (2014) does not fully gain from this policy. Nevertheless,
several studies on the Dayak entrepreneurship and their performance for instance by Hadari
(1991), Berma (2000), Morrison, Murray, and Ngidang (2006) and Tateh et al., (2014) had
indicated, to some extent EAO have engaged within the indigenous Dayak enterprise initiatives
and actions. Hence, the objective of this study is to investigate: the extent to which EAO affects
the indigenous Dayak entrepreneurs performance.
2.0
METHODOLOGY
This study considered to fall into both positivistic and phenomenological paradigms
(interpretivism). As argued by Perry (1998), researchers can rarely separate these two processes of
induction and deduction and both paradigms are interconnected and often run simultaneously
176
Entebang (2010). The primary source of data for this study is through survey questionnaires.
Three hundred and six active members of the Dayak Chamber of Commerce and Industry
(DCCI) have participated in the quantitative survey. To enhance the result, qualitative research
technique was deployed, although it had some arguments as it required a more subjective
interpretation (Denzin & Lincoln, 2005). Finally, to ensure reliability of the data or information
provided, only fifteen of the indigenous Dayak entrepreneurs was selected to take part in the
interview.
Prior to testing the relationship between variables using regression techniques, exploratory
factor analysis (EFA) and confirmatory factor analysis (CFA) were performed using AMOS
Graphic 21. Prior to the EFA, a reliability test was performed to check the consistency of the
items by employing the Varimax rotated method. Subsequently, the internal consistency of the
instruments was established using reliability analysis as suggested by Churchill (1979) with
Cronbachs Alpha procedure (see also Nunanlly, 1978). See table 1, a summary of Kaiser-MayerOlkin Measure (KMO), Barletts Test of Sphericity and Cronbachs Alpha.
Table 1: A Summary of Kaiser-Mayer-Olkin Measure (KMO), Barletts Test of Sphericity and
Cronbachs Alpha.
Barletts Test of Sphericity
Constructs:
Cronbachs
KMO
EAO
Chi-square
df.
Sig.
Alpha
Need of Achievement
0.845
480.883
10
0.000
0.840
Innovation
0.904
748.037
21
0.000
0.875
Personal control
0.833
517.894
0.000
0.871
Self-esteem
0.863
589.478
15
0.000
0.854
In order to determine the goodness of fit, a confirmatory factor analysis was performed in the
subsequent step. Based on VanVoorhis and Morgan (2007); Tabachnick and Fidell (2008), the
model fit criteria used the Chi-square (X), goodness-of-fit index (GFI), adjusted goodness-of-fit
index (AGFI), comparative fit index (CFI), Tucker-Lewis Index (TLI) and root mean square error
of approximation (RMSEA).
177
Following is the results of EFA for EAO factors and DE performance, the goodness-of-fit
of the constructs and the multigroup invariance testing were performed under confirmatory factor
analysis using SPSS AMOS Graphic 21.
EFA on EAO need of achievement (nAch) influence was conceptualized in a singlefactor model. The initial test for equality of variances and Chi-square means values of 39.684
with 9 degrees of freedom (p<0.000) and RMSEA of 0.046. The statistical test for goodness-of-fit
were CMIN/df = 2.9854, GFI = 0.873, AFGI = 0.796, CFI = 0.853 and TLI = 0.923. Based on
these results it appears the model is good and meets the minimum required index (Byrne, 2004).
The next is to examine tenability of the model under configural invariance measurement (CIM),
The Chi-square result was 33.226 with 6 degrees of freedom (p<0.000) and RMSEA of 0.047.
The statistical result of the test of fit are CMIN/DF = 2.006, GFI = 0.895, AFGI = 0.942, CFI =
0.913 and TLI = 0.941 respectively. It is suggested that the model is good. Test in metric
invariance measurement (MIM) the result for Chi-square at 33.226 with 6 degrees of freedom
(p<0.000) and RMSEA of 0.047. Goodness-of-fit, the data maintained as the CIM result with
CMIN/df = 2.006, GFI = 0.895, AFGI = 0.942, CFI = 0.913 and TLI = 0.941). This matric
invariance is supported. Based on the MIM result, a scalar invariance measurement (SIM) was
imposed where intercepts of the invariance factor loading were constrained to be equal. The
results indicate that there are no changes for Chi-square, degree of freedom and probability
respectively. At the same time, values of 0.942 and 0.944 were obtained from the relative fit index
(RFI) and incremental fit index (IFI) respectively and same as RMSEA 0.047. A consistent score
was obtained for CFI = 0.913 and TLI = 0.941 respectively. See table 2 Model of Fit and figure 1
Scalar Invariance for EAO nAch.
Chi-square
Df
CMIN/df
GFI
AGFI
CFI
TLI
RMSEA
MM
39.684
9.000
0.000
2.985
0.873
0.796
0.853
0.923
0.046
CIM
33.226
7.000
0.000
2.006
0.895
0.942
0.913
0.941
0.047
MIM
33.226
6.000
0.000
2.006
0.895
0.942
0.913
0.941
0.047
SIM
33.226
6.000
0.000
2.006
0.942 (RFI)
0.944 (IFI)
0.913
0.941
0.047
178
3.0
RESULTS
3.1
EAO (nAch) was regressed against DE performance, R was significantly different from
zero, indicating that there was an association between these two variables, F (107) = 78.489,
p<0.001, and R at .596. This suggested that 59.6% of the variation in DE performance can be
explained by having EAO (nAch) in the model. Therefore, EAO (nAch) positively and
significantly associated with DE performance () .337, p<.001.
EAO (innovation) was regressed against DE performance, R was insignificantly different from
zero, indicating that there was no association between these two variables, F (137) = 79.695,
p<0.001, and R at .542. This suggested that 54.2% of the variation in DE performance can be
explained by having EAO (innovation) in the model. Therefore EAO (innovation) insignificantly
associated with DE performance () .011, p<.001.
EAO (personal control) was regressed against DE performance, R was significantly different
from zero, indicating that there was an association between these two variables, F (703) = 76.506,
p<0.001, and R at .588. This suggested that 58.8% of the variation in DE performance can be
explained by having EAO (personal control) in the model. Therefore EAO (personal control)
positively and significantly associated with DE performance () .317, p<.001.
179
4.0
SUMMARY RESULTS
Description
Model
nAch
Innovation
performance
EAO (personal control) will positively associate with DE
performance
Personal Control
Self-esteem
performance
5.0
Regression Analysis
De Performance
DE Performance
DE Performance
DE Performance
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
CONCLUSIONS
This paper has enhanced our understanding regarding the role of EAO within the
indigenous Dayak entrepreneurship sector and to the extent it influences the performance of the
indigenous Dayak entrepreneurs in Sarawak. This study has revealed a series of entrepreneurial
attitude, namely; need of achievement, personal control and self-esteem applied by these
entrepreneurs in search of promoting the indigenous Dayak entrepreneurial activities. Continuous
observation and application of these characteristics will likely enhance the success of the
indigenous Dayak entrepreneurship sector. On the other hand, the study draws only on the Dayak
communities, with limited number of participants led to the limitation of the study. Hence, the
outcomes of the study cannot be generalized. Future studies should use a bigger representation of
the sector, while considering a longitudinal approach.
180
REFERENCES
Berma, M. (2000). Beyond the 1990s: Challenges and Opportunities for the Iban, in
Iban Culture and Development in the New Reality, (eds.) Dimbab Ngidang,
Spencer Empading, Robert Menoa, Kuching: Dayak Cultural Foundation,
ISBN:983-9257-06-4
Byrne, B.M. (2004). Testing for Multigroup Invariance Using AMOS Graphics: A Road
Less Traveled. Structural Equation Modeling, 11(2), 272300.
181
Herron, L. A., & Robinson, R.B. (1993). A structural model of the effects of
environmental characteristics on venture performance. Journal of Business
Venturing, 8, 281-294.
Krueger, N. F., & Carsrud, A. L. (1993). Entrepreneurial Intentions: Applying the
Theory of Planned Behavior, Entrepreneurship and Regional Development, 5
(4), 315330.
Krueger, N. F., & Brazeal, D. (1994). Entrepreneurial Potential and Potential
Entrepreneurs,Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 18 (3), 91104.
Lerner, M., Brush, C., & Hisrich, R. (1997). Israeli Women Entrepreneurs: An
Examination of Factors Affecting Performance. Journal of Business Venturing,
12(4), 315-339.
Nunnally, J.C. (1978). Psychometric Theory (Second Edition). New York: McGraw-Hill
Book, Company.
182
Robinson, P. B., Stimpson, D. V., Huefner, J., & Hunt, H. K. (1991). An attitude
approach to the prediction of entrepreneurship. Entrepreneurship: Theory and
Practice, 15(4), 13 - 31.
Tabachnick, B.G., & Fidell L.S. (2008). Using Multivariate Statistics. (Fifth edition).
Pearson, New York.
Tateh, O., Latip, H. A, & Awang Marikan, D. A., (2014). Entrepreneurial Intentions
among Indigenous Dayak in Sarawak, Malaysia: An Assessment of Personality
Traits and Social Learning, The Macrotheme Review, 3(2).
183
VanVoorhis C.R.W., & Morgan B. L. (2007). Understanding Power and Rules of Thumb
for Determining Sample Sizes. Tutorials in Quantitative Methods for Psychology,
3(2), 4350.
184
University of Malaya
brit284@um.edu.my
ABSTRACT
The aim of this paper is to evaluate the efficiency of different stone masonry
wall repair techniques and scenarios for historic masonry buildings in terms
environmental sustainability, based on embodied carbon expenditure.
Primarily, the objective of this paper is to gives insight on how Green
Maintenance concept and methodology associated with sustainable repair
approach of historic masonry buildings, within cradle-to-site boundary of
life cycle assessment (LCA). The concept and methodology of Green
Maintenance were developed based on mathematical formulation to enable
assessment of embodied carbon expenditure expended from different stone
masonry wall repair techniques and scenarios for historic masonry buildings
during maintenance phase. It is recognised that, Green Maintenance plays
an important roles in reducing embodied carbon expenditure, thus
minimising the Environmental Maintenance Impact (EMI), typically
associated with the deterioration and repair of stone masonry wall of historic
masonry buildings.
Key words:
185
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Of the large and expanding market in repair works to the built environment,
masonry contributes a significant cost. The Scottish Stone Liaison Group (UK) have
estimated that the cost of masonry repairs required over a 20 year period as
approximately 600 million (at 2010 prices) in Glasgow alone (SSLG, 2006).
Comparatively, other major cities with a tradition of masonry construction in Scotland
(such as Edinburgh) may also need similar levels of investment which benefits both
local and international businesses. In addition to the cost perspective, this kind of
investment not only provides significant advantage to the maintenance of the stone
masonry walls of historic masonry buildings, but also can reduce the carbon expended
in their repair. In 2007, the Scottish Building Standards Agency (SBSA) adopted a
mechanism to evaluate the release of embodied carbon (CO2 emissions) within
maintenance in the cradle-to-grave boundary of LCA (SBSA, 2007). Maintenance
of historic masonry buildings should not only appreciated in the protection of their
historic fabric and economic costs of existing built environment (through repair), but
also essentially to be widely recognised on its ability to address an emerging concept
and methodology of Green Maintenance.
186
1.2
1.3
100
Life Expectancy
80
60
40
30
25
20
20
0
Repla ce Na tura l
Stone
Re-pointing
Consolida tion
maintenance: namely, those repairs of high and low carbon impact respectively. The
cumulative effect of brown maintenance increases the total embodied carbon
expended far more quickly than green maintenance. Conversely, the former is
synonymous with less efficient repairs, which have lower longevity and higher
embodied carbon (more CO2 emission) compared to the latter.
188
Ce2
Optimal service condition
Ce1
Existing
structure
l
l
Ruin
Minimal acceptable
condition
0 +20
+50
+150
Longevity of maintenance intervention (years compressed time frame)
n2
n3
Ce
l
CO2 Minimal
0 +20 +50
+150
Longevity of maintenance intervention (years compressed time frame)
189
2.0
OBJECTIVES
a)
b)
c)
190
3.0
METHODOLOGY
The evaluations were made within the cradle-to-site of Life Cycle
Assessment (LCA) and the selected maintenance period. Using a set of unit processes
and workflows from each repair technique, calculation procedures were undertaken in
different stages, mainly during the maintenance phase of historic masonry buildings
(Figure 5).
Figure 5: Process map of the life cycle of stone for historic buildings
Source: Kayan, 2013.
3.1
191
(m2), within the cradle-to-site of LCA on yearly basis, for the selected maintenance
period. Cumulatively, the embodied carbon expended for each repair technique was
then calculated by multiplying the total area of wall repaired (m2) with their respective
generated functional units. Overall total of embodied carbon expenditure for all
undertaken repair techniques for stone masonry wall within cradle-to-site could be
calculated using Equation No. (2):
(
(
(
)
(
3.2
In this paper, four repair techniques and scenarios were compared based on
their EMI, including natural stone replacement, pinning and consolidation followed
by replacement, repeated plastic repair and single plastic repair followed by stone
replacement. They are diagrammatically represented in Figure 6. Comparatively,
details of different repair techniques and scenarios compared are explained as follows:
192
a)
Scenario 1: Replacement
b)
193
c)
In general, pinning and consolidation scenarios for the stone masonry wall
were assumed to require high-grade threaded stainless steel dowels, which should
ensure the survival of the historic fabric of the stone masonry wall for an initial
twenty-year period. In the case of this paper, high-grade threaded stainless steel
dowels (grade 304), as specified by Institute of Stainless Steel Forum (ISSF), that
were 100mm long and 6mm diameter, were used and inserted at an approximate
minimum of 100mm spacing or one hundred pieces in 1m2 stone masonry wall with
an average weight of 46g per piece (http://www.valbruna.co.uk/products/reval/dowelbar-details) (Valbruna, 2014a) and tied up together with stainless steel tying wire
(http://www.valbruna.co.uk/products/reval/tying-wire-details)
(Valbruna,
2014b).
After a twenty-year period the repair may fail and require further intervention in the
form of replacement of stone. As previously mentioned, this process requires the
cutting out of the defective masonry to a depth of approximately 100mm (0.1m 3)
and the building in of a new section of stone. The replacement stone will last beyond
the hundred years and so only 0.8 of its EMI was attributed to the selected arbitrary
periods.
d)
Under the repeated plastic repair scenario, the decayed surface of the stone
masonry wall was assumed to be cut back to a point at which a sound substrate was
reached and lime-based mortar was used to resurface the stone. The resurfacing of the
stone used lime-based mortar (with aggregates) materials for a 1m2 masonry wall
plastic repair with a minimum of 312mm depth (depending upon the thickness of the
joints) of undercut or cutback, with approximately 9mm thick layers (base coats) and
6mm finishes. Meanwhile, a minimum depth of 40mm were undercut or cutback with
an approximately 9mm thick layer (base coats) and 4mm finish (http://www.limemortars.co.uk/calculators/plaster) for multi-layer patch. Commonly, the intervention
was reapplied every thirty years (3.33 times in the 100 years period).
194
e)
3.3
influences of longevity of repair within the selected maintenance period (in this case
is within a hundred years period). This could be expressed as in Equation No. (3):
(
)(
4.0
kgCO2e/m2
(a) Indenting
lime Number
of 1
24.683
24.683
0.8
0.7
Total EMI
24.683
54.481
Indenti kgCO2e/m
ng
+ Number
of 1
dowels
+ interventions (n)
19.746
17.278
54.481
54.481
0.8
0.7
54.481
43.585
38.137
70.730
70.730
70.730
0.8
0.7
mix
(c) Dowels + kgCO2e/m2
Number
epoxy resin
of 1
interventions (n)
Total EMI
70.730
56.584
49.511
Repointing
Lime mortar kgCO2e/m2
Number
repointing
of -
1.641
interventions (n)
Pinning
Total EMI
+ kgCO2e/m2
6.564
and
consolidation
(a)Dowels
of -
interventions (n)
196
29.402
stone replacement
Scenario 5
Plastic repair
then
consolidation,
4
replacement
Scenario
stone
and
Pinning
Scenario 3
Repointing
interventions (n)
grout mix
(b)
24.683
Scenario 2
Stone replacement
Stone replacement
Scenario 1
Total EMI
(b)
Dowels
kgCO2e/m
29.402
epoxy Number
46.047
of -
interventions (n)
resin
Total EMI
46.047
Plastic repair
kgCO2e/m2
(a) Lime-
Number
based
mortar
6.489
6.489
of -
3.33
21.608
6.489
113.60
113.608
+ interventions (n)
aggregates
(b)
Total EMI
Lime- kgCO2e/m2
based mortar
multi-layer
Number
of -
plastic repair)
interventions (n)
Total EMI
3.33
378.31
113.608
5
Overall Total
149.494
EMI
6.564
195.364
399.92
225.023
197
Table 1 summarises the EMI [generated from Equation No. (3)], evaluated in
terms of embodied carbon expenditure, over the 100-year maintenance period for
different repair techniques and scenarios at the same sample properties (in this case is
22-30, Shandwick Place of Edinburgh). The results show that there are high
functional units (kgCO2e/kg/m2) in making repairs using the natural stone
replacement technique. Within a 100-year maintenance profile period, however, only
one intervention is undertaken with this technique, compared to three, four and five
interventions for plastic repairs, repointing and pinning and consolidation,
respectively.
longest longevity of repairs within the same period. It can be concluded that the
higher the longevity of repair (the fewer interventions undertaken) using the selected
repair techniques, the less carbon expended on repairs (less CO2 emissions). This is
parallel with sustainable repair approach of Green Maintenance concept and
methodology.
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
This paper successfully demonstrated that Green Maintenance has shown its
Green
Maintenance will be positively welcomed as our society moves towards low carbon
economy and materials and green procurement. As low carbon trading in building
industry becomes more prevalent, the sustainable repair approach of Green
Maintenance can be converted into a supplementary in maintenance decision making
process by substantiating the philosophical defensibility and sustainability of
maintenance and repair.
rigorous analysis of the disparity between philosophy and cost versus embodied
carbon expenditure i.e. CO2 emissions from repair. Significantly, sustainable repair
approach of Green Maintenance is parallel with increasing focus on the sustainable
development and universal in its nature.
198
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author would like to thank Dr. Alan M. Forster (Tenured Assistant
Professor) and Professor Philip F.G. Banfill of School of Energy, Geoscience,
Infrastructure & Society, Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh, Scotland, United
Kingdom for their valuable inputs throughout the completion of this paper.
REFERENCES
Ashurst, J. and Dimes, F.G. (1998). Conservation of Building and Decorative Stone,
Oxford and Woburn, Mass: Butterworth-Heinemann,
British Geological Survey (BGS). (2008). Directory of Mines and Quarries 2008 (8th
ed.)., Nottingham, UK: Author.
Building Research Establishment (BRE). (2010). The BRE Stone List. Retrieved from
http://projects.bre.co.uk/ConDiv/stonelist/stonelist.html
Crishna, N., Banfill, P.F.G. & Goodsir, S. (2011). Embodied energy and CO2 in UK
dimension stone, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 55 (12), 1119-1274.
199
Department for Business & Skills (BIS). (2010). Estimating the Amount of CO2
Emissions that Construction Industry Can InfluenceSupporting Material for
the Low Carbon Construction (IGT Report), London: BIS.
Forster, A.M., Carter, K., Banfill, P.F.G. & Kayan, B. (2011). Green maintenance for
historic masonry buildings: an emerging concept, Building Research &
Information, 39 (6), 654-664.
Forster, A.M., Carter, K. & Kayan, B. (2013). Greening Maintenance. RICS Building
Conservation Journal, December 2013/January 2014, 32-33.
Hammond, G.P. & Jones, C.I. (2008a). Embodied energy and carbon in construction
materials. Proceedings of the Institution Civil Engineers, Energy 161 (EN2),
87-98.
Hammond G.P. & Jones, C.I. (2008b). Inventory of Carbon and Energy (ICE), Beta
Version V1.6a, Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Bath,
2008. Retrieved from http:// www.bath.ac.uk/mech-eng/sert/embodied/
Hammond G.P., & Jones, C.I. (2011). Inventory of Carbon and Energy (ICE), Beta
Version V2.0, Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Bath,
2011. Retrieved from http:// www.bath.ac.uk/mech-eng/sert/embodied/
Hammond G.P., & Jones, C.I. (2014). Inventory of Carbon and Energy (ICE), Beta
Version V2.0, Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Bath,
2011. Retrieved from http://web.mit.edu/2.813/www/readings/ICEv2.pdf.old)
Historic Scotland. (2003a). Technical Advice Note (TAN 1): Preparation and Use of
Lime Mortars, Edinburgh: Historic Scotland.
200
Historic Scotland. (2003b). Technical Advice Note (TAN 25): Maintenance and
Repair of Cleaned Stone Buildings, Edinburgh: Historic Scotland.
Historic
Scotland.
(2007a).
Inform
Guide:
Cleaning
Sandstone-Risks
and
Ecological
Transport
Information
Tool
for
Worldwide
Kayan, B.A. (2013). Green Maintenance for Historic Masonry Buildings: A Life
Cycle
Assessment
Approach,
Ph.D.
Thesis,
Heriot-Watt
University,
Maintain our Heritage. (2004). Putting it Off: How Lack of Maintenance Fails our
Heritage, Bath, UK: Maintain our Heritage.
201
UK Green Building Council (UKGBC). (2013). Key Statistic-Fast Facts and Stats on
Key
Built
Environment
Issues.
Retrieved
from
http://www.ukgbc.org/content/key-statistic-0
Valbruna UK Ltd. (2014a). Focus on Stainless Steel Dowel Bars. Retrieved from
http://www.valbruna.co.uk/products/reval/dowel-bar-details
Valbruna UK Ltd. (2014b). Focus on Stainless Steel Tying Wire. Retrieved from
http://www.valbruna.co.uk/products/reval/tying-wire-details
Young, M.E., Urquhart, D.C.M. & Laing, R.A. (2003). Maintenance and repair issues
for stone cleaned sandstone and granite building facades, Building and
Environment, 38, 1125-1131.
202
ABSTRACT
203
1.0
INTRODUCTION
viability of supercritical extraction processes (Fonari et al., 2008). Cassel et al. (2007)
focused on steam distillation modeling for essential oil extraction process.
The main problem which needs to be addressed revolves around the issue of
creating a standard by which to evaluate and assess the quality of essential oil
produced from agarwood. Currently no applicable standard exists and prices as well
as the quality of oil are arbitrarily determined by traders and clients. Another problem
which is highly correlated to the problem of quality is the reproduction of a successful
formula. Current methods of producing perfumes and aromatic products from
agarwood essential oil depend greatly on experience and lack scientific backing and
suitably rigid procedures to ensure that a successful formula can be replicated. This
also brings to light the problems faced by law enforcement agencies and nature
preservation groups that are trying to stop indiscriminate felling of Aquilaria trees.
The woeful lack of information on agarwood and its essential oil has lead to exports
being approved with little information on the species and not knowing whether
exploitation is within sustainable levels.
2.0
OBJECTIVES OF STUDY
a)
b)
To extract the Agarwood essential oil using the hydro-distillation methods till
the end products will mix with water.
3.0
METODOLOGY
Main focus of our project is to design and fabricate a mini plant and find a
suitable process or mechanism for production of high quality essential oil from
agarwood. Our mini plant just to extract the essential oil using distillation process.
205
3.1
Fabrication
The capacity of 20 liters Mini Plant being fabricate and took 4 months to
finish.starting from designing the plant, fabrication takes quite sometimes to finish as
certain design need to be modified during the process. Figure 1 shows the schematic
diagram of Mini Plant which consists of main compenents such as burner, pressure
cooker, condenser, cooling tank compenents. The solid model of the plant as shown in
Figure 2.
3.2
Process
3.2.1 Materials
a)
206
Hose
Pressure
Cooker
Condenser
LPG
Cooling
Water Tank
Centrifugal
Pump
207
4.0
4.1
Extraction Data
The aim of this work was to find the condition providing the highest oil yield
recovery of aquilariamalaccencis inside the experimental domain explored. And the
result has been compared with essential oil composition obtained through hydrodistillation as shown in Table 1 and Table 2.
Solvent
Solvent
Gaharu
(min)
type(L)
volume (L)
mass (kg)
water
oil collected
collected(L)
(ml)
120
Water
20
1.2
1.125
240
Water
25
1.5
2.25
360
Water
30
1.9
3.375
Solvent
Solvent
Cendana
Volume
(min)
type (L)
volume (L)
mass (kg)
and
Volume oil
water collected
Water
20
1.2
0.9
240
Water
25
1.5
1.8
360
Water
30
1.9
2.7
The following tabulated data Table 3 and Table 4 showed the result of solvent
extraction on obtaining the gaharu and cendana extraction oil. The time interval was
set at 2, 4 and 6 hours for each solvent used at temperature range of 80-110 degC. 1kg
gaharu and cendana were used and mixed with 20L of solvent.
208
Type
of Solvent
Gaharu
Volume
solvent
collected (ml)
Water
100
10
0.0
0.0
Acetone
100
10
0.01
0.0
Water
100
10
0.01
0.0
Acetone
100
10
0.02
0.0
Water
100
10
0.02
0.0
Acetone
100
10
0.03
0.0
Type
solvent
of Solvent
cendana
Volume
Oil
collected
(ml)
yield
(ml)
1
Water
100
10
0.0
0.0
Acetone
100
10
0.01
0.0
Water
100
10
0.01
0.0
Acetone
100
10
0.02
0.0
Water
100
10
0.02
0.0
Acetone
100
10
0.03
0.0
The result provided that water and acetone produce 0.0% oil yield recovery.
This was determined both by observation made on samples and rotary evaporation
conducted on each sample where no presence of dark brown oil. As expected from
grade D gaharu woods.
The basis of this experiment, which used water as one type of solvent, had
provided insightful knowledge on the suitable parameters that should be applied upon
using water as solvent. The parameters need to be modified included the duration of
the experimental works and solid to solvent ratio. This indeed should be implemented
to all samples and solvent as well. The results of using water at 100oC had produced
0% oil yield, due to the observation made such as gaharu were not fully dissolved and
209
no aroma smell was detected. On the other hand, the usage of acetone provided quite
an interesting result on the essential oil recovery. The collected the essential oil is
about 0.01ml.
Steam distillation, as set up in Table 4 above was used as control. The mixture
of gaharu and water were steam-distilled for 6 hours. The distillate collected is about
1.2L, however the presence of essential oil was undetected. This show the original
time taken (6 hours) is not sufficient enough to extract gaharu essential oil. According
to Azah et.al (2008). The hydro distillation of gaharu was run for 16 hours using
Clevenger type apparatus. Thus, comparing the results, the extraction of gaharu oil
using steam distillation at 6 hours is not feasible.
5.0
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Azah M.A., N., Chang, Y., Mailina, J., Abu Said, A.,AbdMajid, J., SaidatulHusni, S.,
et al. (2008). Comparison of Chemical Profiles of Selected Gaharu Oils from
Peninsular Malaysia. The Malaysian Journal ofAnalyticalScience ,338-340.
Cassel, E., Vargas, R., Martinez, N., Lorenzo, D., &Dellacassa, E. (2007). Steam
distillation modeling for essential oil extraction process.
210
Fonari, T., Vazquez, L., Torres, C, Ibanez, E., Senorans, F. L,&Reglero, G. (2008).
Countercurrent supercritical fluid extraction of different lipid-type material:
Experimental and thermodynamic. The Journal of Supercritical Fluids,
Volume 45, Issue 2, June 2008, Pages 206212
from
aromatic
herbs:
comparison
with
conventional
Malaysian
http://eresources.perpun.net.my/repository/tabstractl.php7id-4238.
211
Theses
ABSTRACT
Engine oils are made from crude oil and its derivatives are mixed with other
chemicals (additives) for improving their certain properties. Lubricating oil
is used to lubricate the moving parts of engine, reduce friction, for wear
protection, and removing contaminants from the engine. Besides that, it could
act as a cleaning and cooling agent. Moreover, it could also act as an anticorrosion. The uncontrollable disposal of used engine oil may affect the
society by causing land and water pollution, which could possibly harm the
aquatic ecosystem. However, the invention of a new equipment could
probably help to overcome this problem. Used engine oil could be re-invented
by decolourising it since this process is more cost effective. In order to
achieve the objective, a preliminary test is conducted to check if the projects
anticipated outcome, which is to produce the base-oil, could be extracted
from the used engine oil. The processes involved to recover the base-oil are
extraction-flocculation, adsorption, filtration, distillation, and gingerization.
Result shows that the process of decolourization has changed the used engine
colours similar to the base-oil, for example yellowish and reddish-brown.
This is due to its reaction to the spent additives and metallic waste in the used
engine oil. The final product is accomplished as a result of the recovery
process, which is the extraction of base-oil from the used engine oil.
212
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Todays world is threatened with a huge amount of waste disposal such as the
disposal of used oil. The lack of efficient control concerning the disposal of used oil
wastage could lead to excessive oil dumping into the sea and river. This situation
could affect the aquatic ecosystem which could be hazardous in the future. In view of
that, a project which was concerned with oil wastage sustainability was carried out to
resolve the worlds pollution issues.
This project was carried out to experiment with the decolourization of used
engine oil, which was decided upon a collective consensus. The purpose of this
project was to prevent excessive disposal of used oil pertaining to its potential for
sustainability because it could be recycled and reused. Bridjanian and Sattarin, 2006).
After conducting a few diagnostic researches, the best type of adsorbent that was used
in these experiments was the activated clay for decolourization process. This was a
fundamental process which was usually involved for recycling purposes. Thus, it was
hoped that problems such as costs and the wastage of used oil could be reduced
following the accomplishment of this project.
1.1
Problem Statement
a)
Environmental Issues
213
b)
One of the main reasons which had contributed to a hike in oil prices was due to
the growing number of vehicles owners. In view of that, the oil consumption for
vehicles has demanded for a great supply to generate and lubricate the vehicles.
c)
1)
2)
1.3
The equipment were arranged properly to ensure for the launch process of this
project.
The sample of used engine oil was taken from the Department of Mechanical
Engineering (Automotive).
The gingerization process was important to reduce the density. Moreover, this
process was assumed as a viscosity modifier for oil lubrication.
2.0
2.1
Preliminary test
Figure 1: Flow chart diagram of the overall preliminary and prototype tests
215
Figure 1 displays the several processes that were conducted in an attempt to extract
the base oil. The processes consisted of:
1) Extraction-flocculation process using solvents. (Alves Dos Resis, 1991).
2) Decolourisation process using bleaching earth as adsorbent.
3) Heating process to decolourize the oil.
4) Filtrations process to separate the adsorbent from oil.
5) Distillation process to separate the solvents and recovered base oil.
6) The final process involved the gingerization process in which ginger was used
as bio additives and was added to the recovered base-oil to produce bio lube.
(Bhuiyan, Haque, Naimul and Eusuf, 1997).
2.2
Prototype
2.3 Analysis
This section presents the analysis of the preliminary and prototype phase.
Table 1 shows the exact quantity of chemical substances which were needed for the
test. Then, they were mixed with the used engine oil to undergo the extraction process
in order to extract and recover the base oil. (Martins, 1997).
Solvent (
2-Propanol (
n-Hexane (
4:1
800
480
320
200
3:1
600
360
240
200
3.0
The results of the tests that we had conducted in a chemical laboratory showed
a varied results based on the decolourization process. From the results and
observations, a comparison was made between those results in terms of solvent-oil
ratio. In the first test, a solvent-oil with the ratio of 4:1, which consisted of 2Propanol, n-Hexane and Potassium Hydroxide were used as solvent. The outcome of
the test showed that a much clearer colour of the oil was achieved. However, the
amount of the recovered base oil was too little. (Jesusa Rincn, Pablo Caizares and
Mara Teresa Garca, 2005)
Next, we switched the previous ratio of 4:1 to 3:1. With that, we managed to
accumulate more recovered base oil with a much darker colour. In the final test, we
experimented with similar ratio of 3:1. However, we added 1-Butanol as an additional
solvent during this stage. The result showed more amount of recovered base oil with
the required coloured which were yellowish and reddish-brown. Thus, the recovered
base oil was, then, mixed with ginger. Finally, it was heated to produce bio lube. The
tests results of the recovered base oil were construed based on the various
217
aforementioned ratios with different mixture of solvents and used engine oil (see
Table 1). Table 2 displays the comparison of base-oil recovery during the tests.
3:1 Ratio
3:1 Ratio
(2-Propanol, n-Hexane,
(2-Propanol, n-Hexane,
(2-Propanol, n-Hexane,1-
Potassium Hydroxide)
Potassium Hydroxide)
colour.
observation difficulty.
observation difficulty.
odour.
ratio.
density.
recovery use.
recovery use.
recovery use.
recovery.
recovery.
Used Engine/
Lubricant Oil
218
recovery.
3.1
Once the recovered base oil was obtained, we added it with ginger as a natural
additive. Ginger contained some natural chemical that could modify the viscocity,
density and odour of the recovered base oil.
So, our hypothesis was that using ginger as an additive could help to enhance
the oil lube performance. Moreover, we were adamant that it could increase the
engine performance, too. ( Evstafev, Kononova, Ya. Levin, Trofimova and Ivanova,
2004).
STORAGE TANK
(RECOVERED BASE
OIL)
MIXER
(GINGERIZATION)
STORAGE TANK
(BIO-LUBE)
4.0
CONCLUSION
In conclusion, the overall project of the recovery process which has allowed
for the re-processing of the used engine oil was totally achieved. This process was
found to be more cost effective where it could hinder unwanted wastages and disposal
219
of used engine oil. The result of the recovery process of base oil showed a clean
reddish-brown colour. The result revealed that the recovered base oil could be
certainly used to enhance the performance of lubricity system by adding an additive,
such as ginger.
REFERENCES
Jesusa Rincn, Pablo Caizares and Mara Teresa Garca, Regeneration of Used
Lubricating Oil by Polar Solvent Extraction , Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 44(12),
4373- 4379 (2005).
Martins, J. P. The Extraction Flocculation Re-refining Lubricating Oil Process using
Ternary Organic Solvents, Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 36(9), 3854-3858 (1997).
Evstafev, V. P., Kononova, E. A., Ya. Levin, Trofimova, G. L., and Ivanova, O. A. A New Dithiophposphate Additives for Lubricating Oils, J. Chem. Technol.
Fuels Oils, 37, 427-431 (2004).
Bridjanian, H., and Sattarin, M. Modern Recovery Methods in Used Oil Re-refining,
Petroleum & Coal, 48(1), 40-43 (2006).
220
ABSTRAK
pada
semester
pertama
sesi
2014-2015
untuk
melihat
Kata
kunci:
teknologi
pengajaran
dan
pembelajaran;
fonetik;e-
phonetic;kepuasan pelajar
1.0
PENGENALAN
Populariti dan kepentingan World Wide Web atau hanya dikenali sebagai Web
telah semakin meningkat dengan pesat sejak kemunculan awalnya kira-kira 25 tahun
yang lalu (Summers et al., 2005). Web ini ditakrifkan sebagai sistem maklumat dokumen
hiperteks yang boleh diakses melalui Internet.
221
Kemudahan dan fleksibiliti yang ditawarkan oleh sistem pendidikan begini sudah
menjadi mod pilihan pembelajaran terutama di dunia pantas hari ini. Lebih sedekad yang
lalu, semakin banyak institusi tinggi di seluruh dunia telah menggunakan bantuan
teknologi untuk diintegrasikan ke dalam sistem pengajaran (Sheppard et al., 1998).
Sekitar tahun lapan puluhan, teknologi telah dimanfaatkan dalam pendidikan bahasa
dengan menggunakan alat seperti filem, radio, televisyen, pita video, video interaktif dan
sekurang-kurangnya penggunaan komputer (Cunningham, 1998). Pada hari ini, dengan
perkembangan teknologi moden, selain daripada penggunaan laman web yang banyak,
blog, kumpulan berita (newsgroups) dan forum perbincangan (Sheppard et al., 1998), alat
teknologi bantuan khusus lain telah dicipta untuk meningkatkan keberkesanan
pengajaran. Antara alat teknologi bantu mengajar yang pernah digunakan ialah
penggunaan telefon dalam pembelajaran bahasa (mobile-assisted language learning MALL), sistem latihan berbantukan komputer (Computer-aided Pronunciation Training
System - CAPT) dan sebagainya (Liu, 2002; Lo, 2010).
Kesan daripada perkembangan teknologi moden pada hari ini telah membantu
kami mengorak langkah untuk mencipta suatu alat berbantukan teknologi yang dapat
membantu dan memudahkan pelajar mempelajari kursus fonetik di Universiti
Kebangsaan Malaysia. Bersesuaian dengan sifat kursus tersebut, suatu sistem yang
dinamakan sistem aplikasi fonetik atau nama khasnya ukm-ephonetic.commempunyai
kefungsian untuk mengeluarkan bunyi bagi setiap simbol fonetik. Sistem aplikasi fonetik
ini telah berjaya direka supaya dapat membantu pelajar mengartikulasikan dengan betul
semua fonem dalam carta International Phonetic Alphebet (IPA).Sistem ini juga telah
222
mula digunakan dan diuji ke atas pelajar kursus ini pada awal semester sesi pengajian
2014-2105.
2.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
a)
b)
c)
3.0
METODOLOGIPENYELIDIKAN
3.1
Pengumpulan Data
223
Seperti yang dapat dilihat dalam carta IPA baru di atas, semua konsonan Roman
telah diletakkan berdasarkan kepada daerah artikulasi (atau tempat keluarnya konsonan
itu) dan cara artikulasi (iaitu bagaimana konsonan itu disebut). Pengelompokan yang
sama juga telah dilakukan untuk abjad-abjad Arab.
224
Selain daripada pengumpulan data untuk membina carta IPA yang baru bagi
konsonan dan vokal, pengumpulan data untuk tujuan-tujuan lain juga dilakukan.
Memandangkan pembinaan sistem aplikasi fonetik ini mengambil kira output yang
diperolehi oleh pelajar hasil daripada pembelajaran kursus ini, maka data untuk slot
latihan dikumpulkan. Terdapat beberapa bentuk latihan telah dimasukkan ke dalam
sistem di mana pelajar boleh menguji pemahaman mereka dengan cuba membuat latihanlatihan yang ada. Data yang dikumpul untuk tujuan latihan ini adalah pelbagai
bergantung kepada jenis/bentuk latihan tersebut. Ada data yang berbentuk fonem
(konsonan atau vokal), gambar, perkataan dan sebagainya. Berikut adalah contoh data
bergambar yang telah dimuatkan dalam slot latihan pada sistem tersebut:
225
3.2
Kaedah Rakaman
3.3
3.4
Pelajar telah diminta untuk memberi maklum balas tentang pembelajaran kursus yang
dilaksanakan berbantukan sistem aplikasi fonetik. Untuk tujuan ini, dua bentuk soalan
maklum balas telah disediakan untuk pelajar menjawab: (1) maklum balas secara
langsung (live feedback) dan (2) soal selidik (questionnaire). Beberapa soalan ditanya
secara langsung kepada pelajar di dalam kuliah tentang output daripada pembelajaran
yang mereka perolehi. Pelajar memberikan jawapan secara spontan dan semua jawapan
tersebut telah dicatatkan oleh pensyarah sebagai bahan untuk dianalisis kemudian. Selain
itu, borang soal selidik juga turut disediakan dengan mengambil kira kebarangkalian
terdapat pelajar yang lebih selesa dan berpuas hatisekiranyajawapan daripada soalan226
4.0
Jawapan yang telah dibentuk dalam borang selidik adalah bersifat berskala, iaitu
terdapat lima tahap kebersetujuan di mana tahap 5 mewakili tahap kebersetujuan yang
paling tinggi dan tahap 1 mewakili tahap kebersetujuan yang paling rendah. Ini dapat
dilihat dalam contoh paparan borang selidik yang dibentuk melalui Google Forms seperti
di bawah. Pelajar hanya boleh memilih satu tahap kebersetujuan daripada kelima-lima
tahap yang ada untuk menjawab.
Berikut dipaparkan analisis yang telah dibuat berdasarkan kepada maklum balas
soal selidik yangditerima daripada pelajar berkaitan dengan kepuasan mereka terhadap
penggunaan dan pembelajaran menggunakan sistem fonetik:
227
[1]
62.5%
31.3%
6.3%
0%
0%
[2]
50%
50%
0%
0%
0%
[3]
43.8%
43.8%
12.5%
0%
0%
Berikut, dibincangkan pula maklum balas pelajar yang diterima secara langsung
daripada mereka di dalam bilik kuliah. Di bawah adalah antara komen yang diberikan
oleh pelajar tentang apa yang mereka fikirkan mengenai penggunaan dan pembelajaran
kursus fonetik dengan dibantu oleh sistem aplikasi yang dibina:
KomenNegatif
tanpa bantuan dari pensyarah ketika saat-saat akhir.Walau bagaimanapun, pelajar sedikit
bimbang jika mereka tidak berjaya mengakses sistem tersebut akibat daripada gangguan
capaian internet yang sering berlaku di kolej-kolej kediaman mereka. Walaupun sistem
aplikasi fonetik telah dilengkapkan dengan penjelasan penghasilan bunyi-bunyi fonem,
namun beberapa pelajar berpendapat mereka masih memerlukan penerangan yang lebih
daripada pensyarah kerana bagi mereka maklumat pada sistem masih tidak
mencukupi.Namun beberapa pelajar tidak mengalami masalah ini. Pelajar juga mengulas
bahawa apabila pembelajaran dilakukan berbantukan sistem, mereka cenderung untuk
menjadi kurang produktif kerana sebahagian besar daripada silabus kursusterdapat di
dalam sistem. Dengan kata lain, mereka mendakwa mereka mudah menjadi malas dan
tidak merujuk kepada bahan-bahan bacaan tambahan yang lain.
5.0
KESIMPULAN
Berdasarkan kepada perbincangan di atas, sistem aplikasi fonetik atau ukmphonetic.com yang dibina dengan tujuan khusus untuk membantu proses pengajaran dan
pembelajaran kursus fonetik yang ditawarkan di Program Linguistik, Universiti
Kebangsaan Malaysia telah dibangunkan dan diuji kepada pelajar dengan jayanya.
Ketiadaan alat bantu mengajar yang moden telah menimbulkan kesukaran dalam proses
pengajaran dan pembelajaran kursus ini selama ia diperkenalkan. Kesukaran timbul pada
pensyarah kerana menghadapi cabaran untuk memahamkan dengan terperinci kepada
pelajar bagaimana proses penghasilan sesuatu bunyi itu dihasilkan. Kesukaran di pihak
pelajar pula terjadi apabila ilmu yang disampaikan itu tidak dapat dibayangkan dengan
jelas bagaimana ia berlaku kerana penerangan hanya diberikan dalam bentuk penjelasan
mulut. Adalah lebih baik sekiranya penjelasan yang diterima juga diberikan dalam bentuk
visual. Segala masalah ini telah cuba ditangani dengan membangunkan sebuah alat
teknologi pengajaran moden ukm-ephonetik.com untuk pelajar yang mengambil kursus
fonetik. Pengajaran dan pembelajaran sulung telah dipraktikkan dan maklum balas positif
telah diterima daripada pelajar. Secara keseluruhannya, pelajar amat berpuas hati dengan
kaedah pengajaran dan pembelajaran yang mengaplikasikan sistem ukm-ephonetik.com
memandangkan kebaikan yang diperolehi daripadanya. Diharapkan dengan terbinanya
229
sistem ini dapat memberi manfaat kepada pelbagai pihak khususnya pelajar yang
mengambil kursus fonetik di dalam Program Linguistik khususnya dan kepada Fakulti
Sains Sosial dan Kemanusiaan umumnya.
RUJUKAN
Liu, M., Moore, Z., Graham, L., & Lee, S. (2002). A look at the research on computerbased technology use in second language learning: A review of the literature
from 19902000. Journal of Research on Technology in Education, 34(3), 250273.
Lo, W. K., Zhang, S., & Meng, H. M. (2010). Automatic derivation of phonological rules
for mispronunciation detection in a computer-assisted pronunciation training
system. In INTERSPEECH (pp. 765-768).
Sheppard, S. D., Reamon, D., Friedlander, L., Kerns, C., Leifer, L., Marincovich, M., &
Toye, G. (1998). Assessment of technology-assisted learning in higher
education: it requires new thinking by universities and colleges. In Frontiers in
Education Conference, 1998. FIE'98. 28th Annual (Vol. 1, pp. 141-145). IEEE.
230
ABSTRACT
The demand, high costs and health implications of using energy derived from
hydrocarbon compound have necessitated the continuous search for
alternative source of energy. Cow dung as a renewable source of energy
supply has been proven to be very efficient. This study investigated the
production of biogas using cow dung from cow field near the polytechnic. A
2ml/g of the cow dung was used in this study. The digestion was carried out in
a 10 L anaerobic digester at a temperature of 250C to 300C and uncontrolled
pH for a period of 1 month. About 23 cm3 of biogas was produced on the
22nd day. Thus biogas production from cow dung is a good and cheap
alternative source of energy. The use of biogas will not only serve as a source
of fuel but will also help in the management of waste. The biomass generated
after digestion can be used both as animal feed and to improve soil fertility. It
is therefore recommended that large scale production of biogas from wastes
should be undertaken by all as the wastes around you today can become your
wealth tomorrow.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Now a days biogas production is renewable source, mainly because of the
fact that those resources are inexhaustible and they can be found at lower prices on
231
the market then the fossil fuel. Anaerobic digestion is one of the effectiveness
processes to produce biogas. The raw material for produce the biogas, such as food
waste, cow dung and digested slurry can be used as fertilizer. Co-digestion of cow
dung or other feed stocks with low carbon content can improve process stability and
methane production. (Adeniran et al.,2014)
232
1.1
Benefits
1.2
Biogas upgrading
Raw biogas produced from digestion is roughly 60% methane and 29% CO2
with trace elements of H2S; it is not of high enough quality to be used as fuel gas for
machinery. The corrosive nature of H2S alone is enough to destroy the internals of a
plant. Methane in biogas can be concentrated via a biogas up grader to the same
standards as fossil natural gas, which itself has had to go through a cleaning process,
and becomes bio methane (Esan et al., 2008). If the local gas network allows, the
producer of the biogas may use their distribution networks. Gas must be very clean to
reach pipeline quality and must be of the correct composition for the distribution
network to accept. Carbon dioxide, water, hydrogen sulfide, and particulates must be
removed if present (Lopes et al., 2004). There are four main methods of upgrading:
water washing, pressure swing adsorption, selexol adsorption, and amine gas treating.
The most prevalent method is water washing where high pressure gas flows into a
column where the carbon dioxide and other trace elements are scrubbed by cascading
water running counter-flow to the gas. This arrangement could deliver 98% methane
233
1.3
Gas-grid injection is the injection of biogas into the methane grid (natural gas
grid). Injections includes biogas until the breakthrough of micro combined heat and
power two-thirds of all the energy produced by biogas power plants was lost (the
heat), using the grid to transport the gas to customers, the electricity and the heat can
be used for on-site generation resulting in a reduction of losses in the transportation of
energy. Typical energy losses in natural gas transmission systems range from 1% to
2%. The current energy losses on a large electrical system range from 5% to 8% (Baki
et al., 2004).
2.0
3.0
METHODOLOGY
3.1
Design
Three most common and most successful design for the biogas digester are the
fixed dome, the plastic covered ditch and floating drum, so we choose the floating
drum as our project design because the technology is simple and easy to reproduce
(Figure 1).
3.2
Floating drum digesters are operated by feeding manure mixed with water into
a digester inlet pipe. The slurry flows down the inlet pipe and enters the bottom of the
234
digester. There is a layer of bios lids on the bottom and a layer of liquid effluent
above that.
The bucket is mounted on the container with water jacket located outside the
digester, and as the pressure of biogas increases in the drum, the drum rises
accordingly. Therefore, we must put the heavier rock or brick on the bucket so that
the bucket would not fall off easily as the bucket rise. To reduce the construction cost
the floating gas drum can be replaced by a balloon above the digester, but in practice
problems always arise with the attachment of the balloon at the edge (Godi et al.,
2013).
4.0
Figure 2 shows the picture from this work and from previous research. As we
can see in figure 2 there are differences between actual and previous research. Blue
flames arent always hotter than yellow flames, because the color of light emitted by
the flame can depend on exactly which atoms and molecules are in the flame. Each
atom or molecule has certain special frequencies (colors) at which it absorbs and
emits light sometimes thats more important than the temperature of the flame in
setting the color. Some chemicals burn with a blue color; for example, so that if
235
burning some of these on an ordinary fire it will show color of blue. This does not
mean that the temperature of the whole fire went up, just that these chemicals made
the color change (Ukpai et al., 2012).
Figure 2: (A) the picture shows the actual result; (B) and (c) the picture shows the
previous research.
However, there are cases that follow the simple pattern, where the flame color
changes smoothly from yellowish to bluish as it gets hotter (Rabah et al., 2010).
Simple burners fueled by oxygen and propane typically behave this way. The key to
making sense of this turns out to be that the energy emitted into the light comes in
little packets, called quanta. High-frequency (bluish) light has high energy quanta and
low-frequency (reddish) light has lower energy quanta. Temperature measures how
much thermal energy is available to go into vibrating particles, including the particles
emitting the light. If the typical thermal energy of a particle is large compare to a
quantum of light of some color, that color of light is easily emitted. But if the energy
quantum is bigger than the typical thermal energy scale, those quanta hardly ever
come out (Okure et al., 2005). So as heating something up, first the lower energy (red)
quanta show up, then also middle energy (say green), and finally theyre joined by
blue quanta. This process makes no sense in classical physics, where there's no
packet-size for light waves, so it provided the first key to the modern physics of
quantum mechanics. The actual color is set by the mixture of different light
frequencies. Orange or yellow flames have fairly high wavelengths (low frequency) most of the light being produced is actually in the infrared range, which invisible.
Blue-ish flames have much lower wavelengths (high frequency) with a lot of the light
off towards the ultraviolet range (Richards et al., 1994).
236
Molecular Formula
mehtane
CH4
50 75
carbon dioxide
CO2
25-50
nitrogen
N2
0-10
hydrogen
H2
01
hydrogen sulphide
H2S
03
oxygen
O2
0-0
238
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
The result of this research on the production of biogas from cow dung has
shown that flammable biogas can be produced from these wastes through anaerobic
digestion for biogas generation. These wastes are always available in our environment
and can be used as a source of fuel if managed properly. The study revealed further
that cow dung as animal waste has great potentials for generation of biogas and its use
should be encourage due to its early retention time and high volume of biogas yields.
Also in this study, it has been found that temperature variation, PH and Concentration
of Total solid, are some of the factors that affected the volume yield of biogas
production (Webber et al., 2008).
REFERENCES
Hankisham, S and Sung, S. (2003) Cattle waste treatment and class. A biosolid
production
using
temperature
phased
anaerobic
digester.
Advanced
239
Esan, A.A . (2008) Developing Global Network for promoting renewable energy
policy and Legislation in Nigeria, Energy Commission of Nigeria, NATCOMUNESCO. The National Workshop on Creating Legislative Framework and
Awareness for Use of Alternative Energy for Sustainable Development in
Nigeria. Calabar, Nigeria. pp. 24-26.
Li, R., Chen, S and Li, X. (2009). Anaerobic co-digestion of kitchen waste and cattle
manure production. Energy Sources., 31:1848-1856.
Lopes, W.S., Leite, V.D and Parad, S. (2004). Influence of innoculum performance
on anaerobic reactors for treating municipal solid waste. Biosource
technology., 94:261-266.
Tyagi, T. H. (1981).
240
Rabah, A. B., Baki, A. S., Hassan, L. G., Musa, M. And Ibrahim, A. (2010).
Production of biogas using abattoir waste at different retention. Science World
Journal, 5 (4):23-26.
Richards, B., Herndon, F. G., Jewell, W. J., Cummings, R. J and White, T. E. (1994).
In situ methane enrichment in methanogenic energy crop digesters. Biomass
and Bioenergy., 6(4): 274275.
Webber, M. E and Amanda D.C. (2008). Cow Power. In the news: short news items
of interest to the scientific community. Science and Children.Gale., 4(6):1-2
241
ABSTRACT
242
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Electricity is one of those discoveries that have changed the daily life of
everybody on the planet. Electricity is the key component to modern technology and
without it most of the things that we use everyday simply could not work, and would
never have been created. Our mobile phones, our computers, the internet, our heating
systems, our televisions, our light bulbs nearly everything in the home would be
completely different. There would be completely different systems put in place in the
home to ensure that we can remain warm, and to ensure that we can live properly
every day.
In many countries electricity can only be used for a few hours a day which
effects many people around the world who live in these areas, there economys just
cannot afford to run their power plants for long periods at a time. Many of these
people have to use candles and oil lamps just to be able to eat or to read a book. We
have given away much of our technology to help many of these people, But there are
still thousands of cities all over the world that cannot afford to build such machines or
they cannot get the parts.
The study of application of seawater as an electrolyte for deep seawateractivated batteries have been done for many years (Shinohara M et. al. 2007; Shen P.
7 et al. 1994; Wales C. 7 et. al. 1975; Crompton T. 2000). Highly active anode
magnesium has been used in the cells in order to produce high power (Kobashi H. et
al 2013; Renuka R. 1999; Hasvold O & et al. 1997; Yu K. & et. al. 2011). However,
seawater is yet not being widely utilized as a source of power energy due to weak
electrolyte. Thus more studies are required to enhance seawater as a strong electrolyte
in electrical power production.
This is why we have introduced our new power cell. It is a cheap alternative
energy source for people to use. Even if they built small cheap water batteries, these
small batteries can still be used for low lighting which is better than nothing. We did
a few research and created new product about power cell in order to generate
electricity. Our main project is to produce new environmental friendly power cell
243
which will be tested in the small electrical powered car (Figure 2). Copper strip and
aluminium plate were used as electrodes and sea water as an electrolyte.
Copper strip acted as cathode (positive charge) and aluminium plate as anode
(negative charge). The chemical reaction was as follows:-
Cathode :- (Reduction)
Cu2+ + 2e-
Cu
Anode :- (Oxidation)
Al
Al3+ + 3e-
Overall:3Cu2+ +3(2e-)
Al
1.1
Cu
Al3+ +2(3e-)
= Al + 3Cu2+ 6e-
= 2Al + 3Cu2+
2Al3+ + 3Cu
Problem Statement
2.0
a)
244
b)
To determine that aluminium and copper can generate power with using sea
water as an electrolyte.
c)
3.0
METHODOLOGY
4.0
Figure 2 shows the results of voltage and ampere with different type of copper
and aluminium using sea water only. It shows that, the greater the size of copper and
aluminium, the greater the current. The voltage obtained is 0.4V (Table 1).
245
Current ( Amp)
0.025
0.02
0.015
sea water only
0.01
0.005
0
3 X 0.7
3 X 1.4
3X 2.1
Table 1: Voltage and ampere production with different size of copper and aluminium
The graph shown in figure 3 shows the Ampere production with different
volume of seawater. It shows that there is no different in the current and voltage
production by changing the volume of seawater (Table 3).
246
0.025
0.02
0.015
sea water only
0.01
0.005
0
5ml
10ml
Volume of seawater
The graph shown in Figure 4 shows the comparison of the electrolyte used
during the experiment in order to determine which electrolyte is more excellent. It
shows that, with adding small amount of copper (II) sulphate will increase the current
from 0.025amp to 0.065amp. The voltage production obtained by adding copper(II)
sulphate is 0.5V (Table 3).
247
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
3 X 1.4
3 X 2.1
5.0
CONCLUSION
beneficial in the development of seawater power cell. In the future, in order to earn
more reliable results, more experiments have to be carried out. With this positive
results, more experiment can be done in the future driving towards better power cell.
REFERENCES
Hasvold, O. et. al.(1997). Sea-water Battery for Subsea Control Systems. Journal of
Power Sources 65 : 253-261.
Shen, P. & et. al.(1994). Development of an Aluminium/ Sea Water Battery for SubSea Applications. Journal of Power Sources 47:119-127.
Shinohara, M. & et. al.(2007). Practical Application of Sea-Water Battery in DeepSea Basin Its Performance. Journal of Power Sources 187:253-260.
Wales, C. & et. al. (1975). Anodes Of Al Alloyed With Zn For Seawater Batteries.
Electrochimica Acta 20:895-901.
Yu, K. & et. al. (2011). Microstructure Effects on the Electrochemical Corrosion
Properties of Mg. Corrosion Science 53: 2035-2040.
249
ABSTRAK
perlaksanaan
pembelajaran
teradun
di
Politeknik
Kuching
teradun
di
PKS.
Kesimpulannya,
Key
Performance
CIDOS
2.5
khususnya
Jabatan
250
Matematik,
Sains
dan
1.0.
PENGENALAN
DePAN
menetapkan
halatuju
e-pembelajaran
di
seluruh
Institut
PengajianTinggi (IPT) Malaysia dan politeknik tidak terkecuali dalam usaha murni
kerajaan
ini(Malaysia,
2011).
Jerayawara
giat
dilakukan
dalam
usaha
Oleh yang demikian, pelbagai rangka dan perancangan telah dilakukan oleh pihak
Jabatan Pengajian Politeknik (JPP) dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun di
251
1.1
252
1.2
PERNYATAAN MASALAH
Subjek
Tarikh hebahan
12 Disember 2014
29 Disember 2014
27 Januari 2015
28 Januari 2015
i
l
1
.
2
.
3
.
4
.
seawal
bulan
Januari
iaitu
minggu
ketujuh
sesi
perkuliahan
253
1.3
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
1.4
HIPOTESIS KAJIAN
Objektif yang ketiga bagi kajian ini ialah mengkaji samada wujud hubungan di antara
dua pemboleh ubah iaitu bebas dan bersandar. Dua hipotesis ditetapkan
H0: Tidak terdapat hubungan yang signifikan di antara literasi komputer pelajar dan
penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun di PKS
Ha: Terdapat hubungan yang signifikan di antara literasi komputer pelajar dan
penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun di PKS
1.5
Kajian ini melibatkan hanya pelajar semester satu yang mengambil kursus
DBC 2012 Computer Application kerana setiap pensyarah yang mengajar kursus ini
mesti
menyediakan
platform
CIDOS
bagi
mencapai
KPI
yang
telah
ditetapkan.Terdapat hanya tiga orang pensyarah dan empat kelas sahaja yang terlibat
dalam kursus ini. Sesi pengajaran dan pembelajaran berlangsung di dalam makmal
komputer. Secara tidak langsung, pelajar lebih mudah untuk didedahkan dengan
penggunaan CIDOS 2.5 kerana kemudahan internet yang disediakan di makmal
komputer. Maka, populasi dan sampel kajian dapat mengeneralisasikan dapatan
kajian kerana bilangan pelajar yang mudah dikawal.
254
1.6
KEPENTINGAN KAJIAN
Kajian ini amat penting khususnya kepada pensyarah yang mengajar dalam
DBC 2012 Computer Application kerana hasil dapatan kajian dapat menyumbang
ke arah Continuous Quality Improvement (CQI). PKS juga mempunyai kepentingan
hasil daripada dapatan kajian bagi memberikan perkhidmatan terbaik kepada
pelanggan iaitu pelajar. Pihak JPP juga dapat membuat penambahbaikan yang sedia
ada untuk menjitukan lagi penggunaan CIDOS 2.5 di seluruh Politeknik Malaysia.
2.0
METODOLOGI
2.1
PERSAMPELAN
Populasi merupakan sampel kajian ini yang melibatkan 172 orang pelajar
semester satu bagi sesi pengajian Disember 2014 yang mengambil kursus DBC 2012
Computer Application. Sampel yang juga populasi dapat mengeneralisasikan hasil
dapatan kajian yang diperolehi dan menggambarkan keputusan yang lebih jitu.
2.2
INSTRUMEN KAJIAN
Borang soal selidik yang dibina oleh pengkaji merupakan instrumen kajian
yang digunakan. Terdapat empat bahagian dalam soal selidik iaitu bahagian A demografi, bahagian B -kelancaran internet, bahagian C - kemudahan internet dan
bahagian D - literasi komputer. Pemilihan jawapan adalah berbentuk Skala Likert 5
tahap (1-Sangat Tidak Setuju, 2-Tidak Setuju, 3-Tidak Pasti, 4-Setuju, 5- Sangat
255
KAJIAN RINTIS
256
3.0
Edaran borang soal selidik berjumlah 172, dikembalikan semula sebanyak 160.
Berdasarkan analisis deskriptif mengikut peratusan di bahagian A iaitu Demografi
Responden adalah seperti dalam Jadual 4.1.
Lelaki=31.3
Perempuan=6
Umur
a
18-21
tahun=93.2%
%
22-25
8.0% tahun=4.8%
Progr
DPM1S1=27
DPM1S3=26.5
Temp
am
Kamsis
Politeknik=93.2%
.2%
.0%
DPM1S2=19
DPM1S4=26
Luar
% Politeknik=4.1%.5%
at
Tingg
al
iaitu masing-masing 68.0% dan 31.3%. Majoriti umur responden adalah di antara 18
hingga 21 tahun dengan peratusan sebanyak 93.2% manakala hanya 4.8% melibatkan
pelajar yang berumur dari 22 hingga 25 tahun. Kursus DBC 2012 bagi semester
Disember 2014 hanya diambil oleh pelajar semester satu dari Jabatan Perdagangan
untuk program Diploma Pengajian Perniagaan (Pengurusan)(DPM) dan terbahagi
kepada empat seksyen(S), S1-27.2%, S2-19.0%, S3-26.5% dan S4-26.5%.
Keutamaan diberikan kepada pelajar semester satu bagi kemudahan kamsis, ini jelas
terbukti dengan peratusan yang tinggi bagi pelajar yang tinggal di dalam politeknik
berbanding di luar iaitu 93.2% dan 4.1%.
Secara keseluruhannya, purata min item penggunaan CIDOS 2.5 dari segi
kelancaran internet seperti yang dalam Jadual 4.2 berada pada tahap tinggi iaitu 3.67.
Jika diperhalusi dan diteliti nilai purata min ini hanya 0.01 berbeza dengan nilai akhir
pada tahap sederhana. Nilai ini dipengaruhi oleh item 2, item 4 dan item 5 yang
berada pada tahap sederhana. Namun begitu, nilai purata min yang berada pada tahap
tinggi menunjukkan bahawa tiada kekangan penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dari
segi kelancaran internet dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun di PKS. Oleh yang
257
demikian, dapatan kajian ini memberi peluang dan ruang kepada pensyarah seperti
yang dinyatakan oleh Caner (2010), pengurusan yang baik dalam pembelajaran
teradun menggalakkan pelajar terlibat secara aktif dalam perbincangan. Selain itu, ia
dapat mewujudkan suasana pembelajaran kolaboratif di antara instruktor dan pelajar.
Ini kerana jika wujudnya kekangan dari segi kelancaran internet dikhuatiri terjadi
seperti yang dinyatakan oleh Alebaikan dan Troudi (2010), perkembangan
pembelajaran teradun berkembang dengan perlahan disebabkan oleh ketidakstabilan
capaian internet di Negara Arab Saudi. Walaupun begitu, Negara Jepun yang
dilengkapi dengan teknologi moden dan canggih, penerimaan pembelajaran teradun
sukar dan tidak menggalakkan disebabkan faktor budaya ketimuran yang tinggi
(Tham & Tham, 2011). Hakikatnya, dapatan kajian ini juga mendorong ke arah
pencapaian KPI yang positif namun Yuen(2010) menyatakan pembelajaran teradun
perlu menarik minat pelajar dari segi pengurusan kursus dan penyampaiannya tidak
membosankan agar perhatian pelajar tidak beralih ke tempat lain.
Jadual 4.3 menunjukkan purata min keseluruhan berada pada tahap tinggi iaitu
3.94 bagi item penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dari segi kemudahan internet.
Kesemua item yang diuji berada pada tahap yang tinggi. Maka, nilai purata ini
menandakan tiada kekangan penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dari segi kemudahan
internet dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun di PKS. Ini jelas membuktikan
bahawa PKS sentiasa menyokong dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun
menggunakan platform CIDOS 2.5 dari segi menyediakan kemudahan internet untuk
menepati piagam pelanggan dalam memberikan perkhidmatan berkualiti. Selaras
dengan keperluan yang ditetapkan oleh Agensi Kelayakan Malaysia atau Malaysian
Qualification Agency (MQA) iaitu menyediakan kemudahan internet kepada pelajar
dalam proses pdp (Malaysian Qualifications Agency, 2014). Namun begitu, Tang dan
Chaw (2013) mendapati hanya pelajar yang mempunyai sikap positif dalam epembelajaran lebih mudah bersedia untuk pembelajaran teradun berbanding dengan
pelajar yang lebih berminat dengan pembelajaran konvensional. Alebaikan dan
Troudi (2010) pula menyatakan, walaupun pihak universiti atau institut telah
menyediakan platform bagi pembelajaran teradun, hanya segelintir staf sahaja yang
258
Item
Mi
1i
4.0
n
3.5
7
3.3
8
3.1
8
3.3
Identiti saya dapat dikenal pasti setiap kali log masuk platform CIDOS 2.5
4.0
Tempoh yang singkat untuk saya memuat turun bahan pengajaran dan
7
3.7
3.8
Saya perlu merujuk kepada Unit Teknologi Maklumat & Komunikasi (UICT)
4
3.7
Saya
yakin
kelancaran
platform
CIDOS
2.5 internet mendorong saya untuk menggunakan platform
3.7
Purata min
3.6
7
259
Jadual 4.3Item Penggunaan Platform CIDOS 2.5 Dari Segi Kemudahan Internet
Bil
1
Item
Kemudahan internet disediakan dalam makmal komputer untuk kelas
Min
4.13
Saya
diberi
peluang
menggunakan
makmal
komputer
yang
3.71
3.93
3.94
4.19
3.71
4.13
internet
di
Mudah
CIDOS bagi
2.5 saya untuk menggunakan platform CIDOS 2.5 sekiranya
3.84
3.88
10
3.94
Purata min
3.94
Literasi komputer merujuk kepada Kamus Dewan Edisi Keempat yang dicapai
melalui atas talian ialah tahu menggunakan dan mengendalikan komputer atau celik
komputer. Terdapat 10 item yang dibina dalam soal selidik di bahagian D untuk
dijadikan pemboleh ubah bebas dalam menilai literasi komputer pelajar seperti yang
ditunjukkan dalam Jadual 4.4.
260
Saya log masuk menggunakan platform CIDOS 2.5 melalui laman web
1
Item
Item
2
3
Item
Item
4
5
Item
penjelajahan sendiri
Item
7Item
Saya perlu bantuan daripada rakan setiap kali menggunakan platform CIDOS 2.5
Item
8
Saya perlu bimbingan dan tunjuk ajar daripada pensyarah setiap kali
9
Item
10
Manakala dalam Jadual 4.5 menunjukkan nilai kolerasi r = 0.735, interpretasi nilai ini
menyatakan wujudnya korelasi positif yang kuat antara literasi komputer pelajar dan
penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5. Ujian korelasi ini menunjukkan signifikan pada p<
0.01. Ini bermakna kajian ini berjaya menolak hipotesis nul. Maka, dapatan kajian ini
menunjukkan terdapat hubungan yang signifikan di antara literasi komputer pelajar
dan penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dalam perlaksanaan pembelajaran teradun di
PKS.
4.0
KESIMPULAN
Secara
kesimpulannya,
perlaksanaan
pembelajaran
teradun
yang
menggunakan platform CIDOS 2.5 di PKS dalam kajian ini memberikan gambaran
yang positif. Hasil dapatan kajian bagi penggunaan platform CIDOS 2.5 dari segi
kelancaran dan kemudahan internet mendapati tiada kekangan dalam melaksanakan
pembelajaran teradun. Kecenderungan dapatan kajian ini dipengaruhi oleh faktor lain
seperti waktu pdp untuk kursus DBC 2012 yang berlangsung selama tiga jam untuk
satu sesi dalam makmal komputer yang disediakan dengan kemudahan internet.
Situasi ini memberi ruang dan peluang kepada pelajar untuk sentiasa meningkatkan
kemahiran dalam mengunakan platform CIDOS 2.5. Tambahan pula, pensyarah telah
menyediakan platform CIDOS 2.5 bagi proses pdp kursus DBC 2012 menyebabkan
pelajar terdorong untuk menggunakannya. Literasi komputer di kalangan pelajar kini
tidak lagi menjadi isu kerana dunia menuntut mereka untuk seiring dengan
kepantasan perubahan kemajuan bidang teknologi maklumat. Pelajar yang celik
komputer mempunyai kemahiran yang sedia ada dalam menggunakan platform
CIDOS 2.5 dalam pdp. Maka dengan itu, KPI yang disasarkan oleh pihak JPP bagi
JMSK, PKS untuk kursus DBC 2012 dalam pembelajaran teradun berdasarkan
dapatan kajian dapat dicapai dengan jayanya. Oleh itu, implikasi dari segi kesediaan
bagi sampel kajian ini terhadap pembelajaran teradun pada semester hadapan adalah
amat baik.
262
RUJUKAN
Caner, M. (2010). A Blended Learning Model for Teaching Practice Course. Turkish
Online Journal of Distance Education, 78-96.
Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. (2015, Mac 29). Pusat Rujukan Persuratan Melayu.
Retrieved from dbp Web Site: prpm.dbp.gov.my
Jabatan Pengajian Politeknik. (2014, November 25). CIDOS. Retrieved from CIDOS
Web site: portal.cidos.edu.my
263
Mohd Sabri, N., Mohamad Sarif, S., & Yusof, N. (2015). Penggunaan Google Sites
Sebagai Medium Pembelajaran Bagi Pelajar JTMK, Politeknik Balik Pulau.
Interdisciplinary ICT Practise Conference 2015 (pp. 47-54). Ipoh: Politeknik
Ungku Omar.
Moidunny,
K.
(2013,
July 28).
http://kamaruzamanmoidunny.blogspot.com/.
Tang, C. M., & Chaw, L. Y. (2013). Readiness For Blended Learning: Understanding
Attitude Of University Students. International Journal of Cyber Society and
Education, 79-100.
Tham, K., & Tham, C. (2011). Blended Learning - A Focus Study on Asia.
International Jurnal of Computer Science, 136-142.
264
Yusof, N., Mohd Sabri, N., & Mohamad Sarif, S. (2015). Tahap Pendedahan CIDOS
dan Penggunaannya Dengan Media Sosial Dalam Pembelajaran dan
Pengajaran. Interdisciplinary ICT Practise Conference 2015 (pp. 55-63).
Ipoh: Politeknik Ungku Omar.
265
khayrunsalihaty@poliku.edu.my , zhushair@feng.unimas.my
ABSTRACT
Finding a complete solution for beacon collision in IEEE802.15.4/ZigBee
is still an open subject. Different mechanism had been introduced to
minimize or avoid the problem. In this paper, the most significant and
most up to date beacon collision avoidance for IEEE802.15.4/ZigBee
network in cluster tree topology will be reviewed. The review starts from a
brief introduction on Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) and the
IEEE802.15.4/ZigBee followed by brief information on the needs why
beacon collision problem needs to be avoided. Previous eminent
approaches in avoiding the beacon collision for the ZigBee network in the
cluster tree topology also have been carefully reviewed. The contradiction
on either having a cluster tree or mesh topology for ZigBee network is
also included in this paper.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) is a self-configured and disorganized
wireless devices, denoted as nodes which can monitor and sense the physical also
environmental conditions such as motion, sound, temperature and few others.
There are few options to deploy this WSN and one of it is the IEEE802.15
standard which is Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN).
IEEE802.15
Although beacon enabled network can be implemented in a star and peer-topeer topology, a cluster tree network; which is the extension of tree peer-to-peer
topology may suffer a beacon frame collision. A cluster tree network shown in Figure
1 contains extra Fully Function Devices (FFDs) which can act as coordinator (Zigbee
Alliance, 2011) and generate periodic beacon frames to synchronize nodes in the
cluster itself (Kouba et al., 2008). The collisions between beacons or even beacons
and data frames may degrade the network performance. Since beacons play an
important role during IEEE802.15.4/ZigBee communication, it is crucial to ensure the
beacon collision can be avoided during transmission.
In terms of beacon frame collision avoidance, this paper has THREE (3)
contributions and organized as follows: in Section 2, the types of beacon collision
introduced by the TG15.4b and its avoidance approaches will be explained. In Section
3, relevant and contending paper of mechanism for beacon scheduling in cluster tree
267
topology will be reviewed while the summary and future trend for the reviewed paper
will be done in Section 4. And finally, this paper will be concluded in Section 5.
2.0
n.d); had discussed few recommendations to solve the beacon frame collision
problem. One of the significant areas identified and discussed by the group is the
types of beacon frame collision and the approaches to avoid beacon frame collision
problem.
There are TWO (2) types of beacon frame collision: direct beacon collisions
and indirect beacon collision, distinguished by the location of the coordinators
(Sahraoui, 2012). Both of these collisions have different suggested technique to
handle the problem.
Figure 2 illustrate a direct beacon collision scenario where there are two
coordinators (or more) transmission range overlapped, too near with each other and a
child node (or more) of one of the coordinators present between them. Based on the
figure, the end device (N2) is a child for coordinator C2. But, if coordinator C1
transmits its beacon frame almost at the same time with coordinator C2, the end
device N2 will not be able to synchronize with its original parent, C2. Losing
synchronization means that the end device will not be able to do any data transfer
activity and keep listening to receive beacon signal and unfortunately none of the
268
coordinators are aware of the situation and continue the beacon conflict (Lee, Zheng,
Liu, Shao, Dai & Zheng, 2004).
Indirect beacon frame collision happens when two (or more) coordinators
does not realize the present of each other but have overlapped transmission ranges and
transmit their beacon frames almost at the same time. This cause the end device which
belongs to one of the coordinator cannot receive the beacon frame correctly due to
collision. Based on Figure 3, assuming end device N2 located in the overlapped
region of coordinator C1, C2 and C3, it will not be able to synchronize with its parent
C2 because of the existence of three other beacons that maybe conflicting with each
other.
TG15.4b had proposed different avoidance approach for direct and indirect
beacon frame collision. For direct beacon collision, two avoidance approaches were
presented which is: the Time Division approach and the Beacon only Period
approach.
In the Time Division approach, the time is divided so that during inactive
period of neighbor coordinators, the beacon frames and superframe duration of certain
coordinator can be transmitted. A coordinator will wake up during its own active
period and its parent active period. Each coordinator will use Beacon_Tx_Offset
which is the starting time to send their beacons and these starting times are different
269
for each neighbor coordinator and their parents. Although this proposed technique
may avoid beacon collision, but the lack of algorithms/mechanism to schedule the
beacon frames will give a challenging problem especially when the superframe orders
(SO) and beacon orders (BO) are different from one cluster to another. The
superframe structure is shown in Figure 4.
The second approach; Beacon only Period (BOP) considers a time window at
the beginning of each superframe for the transmission of beacon frames. Every
coordinator must decide its sending times offset by choosing the contention-free time
slot (CFTS) to ensure that the beacon frame does not collide with others. The
advantage of this approach is that the active period of different clusters can start at the
same time and therefore direct communication between neighbor nodes can be done.
On the other hand, the BOP must be efficiently dimensioned and like Time Division
approach, no algorithms/mechanism to schedule the beacon frame is provided.
Indirect beacon collision also has two avoidance approaches: the reactive
approach and proactive approach. These two approaches are distinguished by the
different time of the coordinator resolve beacon frame collision during association
with its parent. Reactive approach does not have any procedure to avoid collision
during association but will only start a recovery procedure once a conflict is found.
The recovery procedure may take quite some time and out of the scope in this paper.
For proactive approach, coordinators will try to avoid the beacon frame collision
during the association phase and each coordinator must have the ability to forward the
beacon frames time offset of the parent to its neighbour coordinators. This complex
approach is also out of the scope of this paper.
270
3.0
3.1
271
Simple Time Shift Scheme, STSS (Wong, 2012) introduces a novel beacon
frame scheduling mechanism which maintains the original 802.15.4 superframe
structure. The author had basically proposed to shift the beacon broadcasting time
point for each cluster coordinator during active period to avoid beacon frame
collision. Assuming the number of cluster coordinator is already been known, the
coordinators will only be allowed to transmit their beacon frames during the
calculated slot which is obtained by (1) where k and id represents the sequence of k-th
transmission of the beacon frame and the cluster identifier (CID), respectively. R is
272
the total number of cluster coordinators in whole network and BSmax denotes the
maximum number of slots for beacon frame broadcasting. The % symbols will define
the remainder of division.
(1)
Although the author had modified a little in the beacon frame format to
broadcast extra messages to nodes, the nodes will still be able to extract information
from its associated cluster coordinator. Based on the simulation result, STSS had
significantly improved the performance of the network throughput and decreased the
beacon collision. This results had led to less synchronization loss. Unfortunately,
despite the positive simulation result, this STSS mechanism does not have the
Contention Free Period (CFP) which allocates the Guaranteed Time Slot (GTS) which
is essential in a real time network. GTS is important as these slots will give the
exclusive rights over the channel for certain low-latency devices to transmit data. By
having a GTS slots, the low-latency devices will not need to compete with other
active devices to send data and this may contribute for a better packet delivery in the
network. The absence of GTS in a larger network will surely give a vast different
compared to a network which contains a GTS slot.
3.3
a. Cluster partitioning
b. Scheduling in the first timeslice
c. Calculation of the timeslice boundaries
d. Scheduling the cluster
273
In the first step, clusters will be partitioned into TWO (2) subsets, ST1 and ST2 ,
respectively. ST1 will contain the PAN-C and also clusters which can reach the PAN-C
in an even number of hops while the next subset which is ST2 will contain clusters that
has odd tree depth. Then, these subset will be splitted into two timeslice which is TS1
and TS2. The next step will schedule the superframes in the first timeslice to a time
zero starting time but in a different radio channels. After setting the starting time in
TS1, the third step will is to calculate the length of the timeslice boundary between
the first and the second timeslice. Then only after that clusters in the second timeslice
can be scheduled which is the last step of this approach. The last step will require
each clusters to calculate their starting offset (tstart) by using (2) in order to avoid time
overlapping between superframes in the other timeslices.( Ni refers to the number of
superframe instances of the ith cluster and Tm is the duration of the first timeslice in
the mth minor cycle). Only after that, the MSS algorithm will allocate the whole
superframe duration of the clusters in suitable minor cycle.
( )
(2)
Although multichannel may provide a great solution for the beacon frame
collision problem, unfortunately, this solution will require custom hardware to be
installed with the ZigBee devices. This additional hardware for extra transceivers for
each device may add up the cost of the producing a larger scale of Zigbee network.
Adding extra transceivers also will for sure means more configurations to the devices
and testing and troubleshooting on the hardware part will become another provoking
issue. Furthermore, other issues such as hidden node, deaf node and others (Soua &
Minet, 2011) also need to be addressed if multichannel is to become the solution for
beacon scheduling.
3.4
mechanism to avoid beacon frame collision which adopts the beacon only approach
introduced in (IEEE802.15 WPAN Task Group 4B (TG4B), n.d). The main
characteristics in this method is that TBoPs minimizes the number of coordinator that
will broadcast beacon in the network while maintaining the superframe structure for
274
all other nodes. The TBoPs approach can be divided into TWO (2) main stage:
Association and TBoPs procedure.
During the association, all the nodes will firstly listen for a beacon or a Hello
message. If the node receive the beacon, then it will synchronize itself and follows the
superframe structure and if otherwise, the node will send a HelloRequest and wait for
a period of time to get the HelloResponse messages. After collecting the
HelloResponse message, the node will select the best coordinator to be associated
with and become the father node. So, if the father has yet to become a beacon
broadcaster, the node will have to wait for the coordinator to find its beacon schedule
from the PAN-C before it can track the beacon. If no beacon schedule can be found
by the father, the node will have to disassociate from the current father to find a new
father. Also, if the association request from the node is not granted by the coordinator,
the node will have to choose another next best father to be associated with and the
procedure will keep repeating.
While the association procedure is running, the TBoPs procedure had actually
started when the HelloRequest was sent. After collecting time to get the
HelloResponse had expired, the SelectaBeaconSlot() procedure which will allow the
275
node to reserve a slot temporarily after a beacon had been found will be executed. The
reserved slot will be advertised and SelectaBeaconSlot() procedure will be repeated if
ConflictAdvertisement notification is received during the advertisement period. After
the advertisement time expires, the beacon slot should be assigned to the node or else,
if the assignment fails, the father will inform the node the result so the node can
disassociate with the current father and associate with a new father.
The TBoPs mechanism for avoiding beacon frame collision is very interesting
because it manages to maintain the original superframe structure and remove the
dependencies on PAN-C. But, despite that, the performance for this algorithm had yet
to be tested especially during association time. The advertisement time within the
SelectaBeaconSlot () procedure does not provide immediate actions for the node that
had already found the beacon slot, instead, it has to wait for a certain time before can
confirm to own the slot. The same goes to the node that fail to get a confirm slot; a
delay in disassociating with the current father will occur and this will provide another
delay for the next steps for association process such in Figure 7. This delay may slow
down the convergecast of the network. The convergecast; which is the collection of
data from sensors to the sink over a tree based network is crucial in certain application
that needs to receive data in a specific timeline (Durmaz Incel, Ghosh,
Krishnamachari, & Chintalapudi, 2012); for example: gas leak sensor where a very
small data delay may cause a catastrophe.
3.5
276
To use the SABTS algorithm, the number nodes in the ZigBee network need
to be defined first. Then, after the number of nodes are known, the BO and SO for the
PAN-C (denoted with BOPAN and SOPAN) in the network will be calculated. After the
BO and SO values has been recognized, the next step is to calculate the BO and SO of
the coordinators (denoted with BOcoord and SOcoord) in the network (if any) and lastly,
the BO and SO of the end device (denoted with BOdev and SOdev) will also be
calculated. The SO and BO value calculated will provide the value SD for
coordinators which will be used to find the beacon starting time for the coordinators
(TxOffseti). The different starting time for beacon transmission between the
coordinators in the network will reduce the beacon collision problem. The SABTS
process can be simplified through a flowchart as in Figure 8.
The SABTS algorithm is very straight forward and looks encouraging to avoid
beacon frame collision. But, the absent of Contention Free Period (CFP) in the active
portion of the superframe duration thus imply the missing Guarantee Time Slot
(GTS) may neglect nodes with low-latency device which needs to transmit data
packets without contention. Also, as the work in (Udin Harun Al Rasyid, 2012) only
consider a cluster tree with one PAN-C, three coordinators and nine end device,
277
4.0
FUTURE TRENDS
5.0
CONCLUSION
278
REFERENCES
IEEE Standard for Local and metropolitan area networks Part 15.4 (2011) LowRate Wireless Personal Area Networks (LR-WPANs). Retrieved from
http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.15.4-2011.pdf
IEEE 802.15 WPAN Task Group 4b (TG4b). (n.d.). Retrieved February 25, 2015,
from http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/15/pub/TG4b.html
Incel, O. D., Ghosh, A., Krishnamachari, B., & Chintalapudi, K. (2012), Fast data
Collection in Tree-Based Wireless Sensor Networks, Mobile Computing, IEEE
Transactions on, 11(1), 86-99.
Koubaa A., Cunha A., Alves M.,(July.2007). A Time Division Beacon Scheduling
Mechanism for IEEE802.15.4/ZigBee Cluster-Tree Wireless Sensor Networks,
in Proc. 19th Euromicro Conference. Real-Time Systems(ECRTS 2007), Jul.
2007.
Kouba, A., Severino, R., Alves, M., & Tovar, E. (2008), Improving Quality-ofService in Wireless Sensor Networks By Mitigating Hidden-Node Collisions,
Industrial Informatics, IEEE Transactions on, 5(3), 299-313.
Lee, M., Zheng, J., Zhang, J., Liu, Y., Dai, H., & Shao, H. R. (2004). Combined
Beacon Scheduling Proposal to 802.15. 4. TG4b, September, 16.
279
Lee, M. J., Zhang, R., Zheng, J., Ahn, G. S., Zhu, C., Park, T., & Ryu, J. S. (2010),
IEEE 802.15. 5 WPAN mesh standard-low rate part: Meshing the wireless
sensor networks, Selected Areas in Communications, IEEE Journal on, 28(7),
pp. 973-983.
Nefzi, B., Khan, D., & Song, Y. Q. (2012, May), TBoPS: a Tree based distributed
Beacon only Period Scheduling mechanism for IEEE 802.15. 4, In Distributed
Computing in Sensor Systems (DCOSS), 2012 IEEE 8th International
Conference.
Toscano, E., & Lo Bello, L. (2012), Multichannel Superframe Scheduling For IEEE
802.15. 4 Industrial Wireless Sensor Networks, Industrial Informatics, IEEE
Transactions on, 8(2), 337-350.
Zen, K., Habibi, D., Rassau, A., & Ahmad, I. (2008, May), Performance Evaluation
Of IEEE 802.15. 4 For Mobile Sensor Networks, In Wireless and Optical
Communications Networks, 2008. WOCN'08. 5th IFIP International Conference
on (pp. 1-5). IEEE.
280
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
.
A critical consideration in aquaculture farming is the need for maintaining the
quality of freshwater environment in the pond used for breeding aquatic organism. To
meet this challenge, we proposed to apply Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) as
monitoring tools for aquaculture farming. WSN have attracted a great deal of research
attention due to their ability to monitor a wide variety of environment, ranging from
remote geographical region to industrial plants, from office building to toxic urban
location (Culler, 2004).
281
282
2.0
AQUACULTURE MONITORING
283
2.1
The selection of suitable site always play a major role in aquatic farming, but the
ideal sites may not always available there are some of the limitations to a potential or
existing aquaculture facility include: soil characteristics, topography, quantity and quality
of water sources, potential flooding, and proximity to ecologically sensitive areas.
3.0
3.1
Temperature
Temperature is the important factor in the aquaculture. Temperature influences all
chemical and biological activities in the aquaculture pond (Joseph K. Buttner, 1993). In
fact, each of fish species adapted their body temperature with the water temperature for
their optimum body temperature. For the grass carp population, the optimum temperature
284
is between 21C to 30C (Masser, 2002). At this rate, grass carp consume highest rate of
feeding activities.
3.2
Dissolved Oxygen
Each of the fish species can tolerate with difference level of dissolved oxygen.
This chemical variable is very important and one of the critical element to the fish pond.
Oxygen level in the pond depends on the water temperature, stocking rate of culture
species, salinity and the amount of aquatic vegetation and number of aquatic animals in
the ponds ( Aquaculture SA, April 2003). For most freshwater fish, dissolved oxygen
concentration should be maintained above 3 ppm (mg/L). Grass carp is warm water fish
species; it does require dissolved oxygen concentration higher than 4 ppm (mg/L)
(Masser, 2002).
3.3
pH
The pH represents the acidity or alkalinity of a solution (Horiba, n.d.). Its
measure the concentration of hydrogen ion (H+) in the water or soil. The full scale for pH
is the range of 0 to 14 and to be said that pure water is neutral with a pH close to 7.0 at
25C (Wikipedia, 2010). The reading of pH less than 7 said an acidic and higher than 7
said to be alkaline. The optimal pH value for aquaculture pond is in the range of 6.0 to
9.0 depending on the species that inhabit in the particular pond.
3.4
Ammonia
Ammonia is a gas primarily released by organic wastes resulting in the
3.5
Alkalinity
Alkalinity is water's ability to defend against changes in pH and is a measure of
the total density of bases in pond water (www.noble.org, 2010). Alkalinity is expressed in
285
4.0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
There are three main components, the initial design, development and testing
where this stage is done on a site that has been identified. For the initial design, is very
important stage where all requirement for the study need to be taken in to the account.
This is because missing some information in early design stage will affect the next stage
286
and overall system design. Some of the requirements need to be clear which is site
details, sensors, network capability, available facility, power supply, sensing parameters.
Then, for the development stage, the identified parameters in previous stage will be
considered in design parameter. After development of the sensing device done, the final
stage is testing where it has been done on the real environment. A freshwater pond has
been selected as a PoC site for the practical evaluation and field tests activities in the
research in Kampung Janda Baik, Bentong, Pahang. Two freshwater ponds are available
for the purpose, one being a controlled pond environment where the ubiquitous pond
monitoring will be deployed, and another pond as a comparison, which will be left as its
current operation.
4.1
Our identified PoC site is located at Kampung Janda Baik, Bentong, Pahang,
Malaysia (3 19' 0" North, 101 52' 0" East) (Tourism Pahang, Malaysia, 2008). The
ponds located in the middle of the hill with fresh water sources. The selection of site at
kampong Janda Baik as a test bed because of this place met our requirement with the
excellence quality of EDGE network access, fresh water source, located higher than
flooded area, well established on-site infrastructure and logistical support and also
security.
For two ponds reserved for this project, pond one used for controlled
environment is a three time than an uncontrolled environment pond. As shown in Figure
2 is control environment pond together with the actual size of pond one which already
being measured. The overall size for the pond one is around 1429.14m2 and 1.5m deep.
The approximate volume of water is 2143.89m3. So, from the volume of this pond, we
can assume how much fish seed we can put inside.
287
Figure 3: CCS Ember Zigbee Development Kit: The Base Station(left) with the sensor
node
4.2
Sensor node used in this project is CCS Ember Zigbee Development Kit modules.
These module equipped by EM260which is a 2.4 GHz 802.15.4 radio transceiver
developed by EMBER Inc (Shown in Figure 2). The base station board has a
PIC18LF4620 running at 3.3V while the sensor node board have a PIC16F886 Running
at same voltage (Custom Computer Service, Inc, 2008).
288
Characteristic
Sensor
Temperature
pH
Dissolved Oxygen
Output: 4-20 mA
Output: 4-20
Output: 4-20 mA
Range: -58 to
mA
Range: 0-100%
+122 F (-50 to
Range: 0-14
Saturation, 0-8
+50C)
pH
ppm, temperature
Accuracy: 0.2F
Accuracy: 2%
compensated to
or 0.1C
of full scale
77F (25C)
Maximum Pressure
Maximum
Accuracy: 0.5%
Pressure: 40
of full scale
psi
psi
Maximum
Maximum Pressure
Operating
Pressure: 40 psi
(Online): 50 psi
Voltage: 10-30
Operating
Operating Voltage:
VDC
Voltage: 10-36
10-36 VDC
Current Draw:
VDC
Current Draw:
5.5 mA plus
Current Draw:
Same as sensor
sensor output
15.5 mA plus
output
Warm Up
sensor output
Warm Up Time: 5
Time: 3
Warm Up Time:
seconds minimum
seconds
10 seconds
Operating
minimum
minimum
Temperature: -58
Operating
Operating
to +212 F (-50 to
Temperature:
Temperature: -40
+100C)
289
+55C)
For the PoC purpose, 3 sensors has been selected and connected to each of sensor
nodes which is temperature, dissolved oxygen and pH as in Table 1. Each of sensor will
sent the raw data continuously through the sensor network to the sensor network gateway
by period of time set in program, i.e. in the experiment we set 1 minute per data. The base
station is responsible for conversion to user interpretation readable value data and
transmitting sensor data from the sensor nodes to a remote server via serial connection.
The server already installed with the serial listener to view the data received and stored
the data as log file. Figure 4 shows the propose network architecture at the field site.
`
Figure 4: Network Architecture at the Field Site
Point-to-point topology or star network has been used in the setup. The sensor
nodes perform the network and sampling to the application sensor. The sensor nodes
transmit the sampling data, ADC value to the base station via wireless sensor network
performed. Base station performs the general purpose computing and data received at the
290
remote server are already converted to the readable value. Finally, data received from the
base station can be viewed at the user interface using listener. In these case three types of
data produced with difference sensor which is temperature, dissolved Oxygen and pH.
Water quality sensors provided in this project are the current base output. Sensor
nodes are using microcontroller for computation and networking and read voltage input at
it analog channels. In this case, we designed sensor interface board to convert current
output into the relevant voltage signal that can be read by microcontroller. Figure 5
shows sensor interface board as a physical interface between sensor node and application
sensors
5.0
CURRENT RESULTS
Three sensor nodes are deployed during the testing on Janda Baik, Pahang. The
experiment was conducted for 11 month after grass carp seed put into the pond. There are
2000 1 month old grass carp fries with 7g weight have been release into the pond 1for
control environment meanwhile 600 fries release into pond 2 for natural environment.
The water quality samples in the pond were taken by the wireless sensor network each
month for the purpose of monitoring and records. For reference reading, we are using
291
chemical based sensor from Vernier to take the samples. This reference samples reading
are very important in order to compare with the wireless sensor nodes transmission
readings.
5.1
Packet data
Figure 6 : the sample data packets received at the remote server with wireless sensor
transmission
As shown on Figure 6, data received on sample taken from wireless sensor node
number 3001 assigned to pH sensor give the exact value for pH measurement. The time
received also collected by the remote server using Docklight 1.6. In the experiment, the
sampling was set every 1 minute per data to send packet at the sensor node. The setting
was done as this way because to determine the network and packet data not loss during
transmission. Data received from the sensor nodes saved on log file at the remote server for
the analysis.
292
Figure 7 shows the sample data taken at the remote server for pH value. The
reading was set to be taken for one minute per data. The overall data for water quality
element tested in Janda Baiks pond plotted in the graph as shown in Figure 8.
Parameter
65.5
65.5
26.9
27.4
27.4
27.4
28.9
28.9
28.9
26.6
27.3
26.6 26.6
8.4
8.4
7.2
6.8
6.7
6.6
6.6
6.5
6.5
6.3
6.3
May June July Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar
pH (0-14)
6.6
6.6
DO (%)
65.5
65.5 70.79 74.43 75.84 76.84 72.84 73.95 65.87 64.41 66.5
27.4
6.5
27.4
7.2
27.4
8.4
28.9
8.4
28.9
6.8
28.9
6.7
26.6
6.5
27.3
6.3
26.6
6.3
26.6
Figure 8: Water Quality Elements taken at Janda Baiks Pond from May 2009 to March
2010
6.0
DISCUSSION
The ultimate goal in this aquaculture monitoring is data collection without packet
loss; means the network performs will not drop and continuous send the packet data.
There are a few challenges occurred during the experimental period. However, the main
challenge is the power supply, and environmental instability.
6.1
Power Supply
In this experiment, the most challenging part in this project is the power
requirement. The application sensor required 10V-30V power supply to operate. This
brought us difficulties to ensure the sensors have enough power to operate and give an
accuracy reading during the testing. As a solution, this brought us to use car battery to
293
provide the application sensors to operate. For sensor node, to settle down the power
issues during the experiment at the site, we use Energizer 9V battery to supply sensor
node.
6.2
Environmental Instability
7.0
CONCLUSIONS
REFERENCES
Aquaculture SA. (April 2003). Water quality in freshwater aquaculture ponds, Fact
Sheet, FS No: 60/01. SA: PIRSA.
ZigBEE Alliance. (2010). Products/Overview. Retrieved March 2010, from ZigBEE
Alliance: www.zigbee.org
Culler, D. (2004, August). Overview of Sensor Network. IEEE Computer Magazine .
294
Custom Computer Service, Inc. (2008). Wireless Ember Edition Development Kit
Exercise Book. In I. Custom Computer Service, Wireless Ember Edition
Development Kit Exercise Book. CCS Inc.
D. Estrin, R. G. (1999.). Next Century Challenge: Scalable coordination in sensor
network. Mobile Computing and Networking, 263-270.
D.Estrin, L. G. (2001). Instrument the world with wireless sensor network. In.
International Conference on Acoustic, Speech and Signal Processing (ICASSP
2001). Salt Lake City, UT.
Delin, K. ( March 2004). Sensor Web for Spatio-Temporal Monitoring of a Hydrological
Environment. 35th Lunar and Planetary Science Conference. Texas.
Gibbons, B. (2003). IrisNet: Architecture for a Worldwide Sensor Web, . IEEE CS and
IEEE ComSoc.
Global Water Instrumentation Inc. (2009, 11 20). Global Water Instrumentation.
Retrieved
July
2009,
from
http://www.globalw.com/downloads/WQ/WQSensormanual.pdf:
http://www.globalw.com
Horiba. (n.d.). Ways of Measuring pH. Retrieved March 2010, from Horiba Group
Website: http://www.horiba.com
Joseph K. Buttner, R. W. (1993). An Introduction to Water Chemistry in Freshwater
Aquaculture. NRAC Fact Sheet No. 170.
Masser, M. P. (2002, July). Using Grass Carp in Aquaculture and Private Impoundments.
SRAC Publication No. 3600.
Ruth Francis-Floyd, C. W. (2012, July). Ammonia in Aquatic Systems. FA16, p. 4.
295
Tourism Pahang, Malaysia. (2008, November 13). Janda Baik. Retrieved August 2010,
from Wikitravel: http://wikitravel.org/en/Janda_Baik
Wikipedia.
(2010,
April).
pH,
Retrieved
from
Wikipedia:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PH
www.noble.org. (2010, April). Fish Pond Water Quality: As Simple as Chemistry 101.
Retrieved from http://www.noble.org: http://www.noble.org/AG/Wildlife/FishPond-Water/index.html
www.ornamentalfish.org.
(2010,
April.).
ornamentalfish.
Retrieved
http://www.ornamentalfish.org:
http://www.ornamentalfish.org/association/code/quality/ammonia.php
296
from
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
298
1.1
Tujuan Kajian
tahap amalan
1.2
Objektif Kajian
a)
b)
c)
1.3
HIPOTESIS KAJIAN
Ho1
Ho11 Tidak terdapat perbezaan yang signifikan tahap amalan kepimpinan teknologi
pengetua berdasarkan faktor lokasi sekolah.
2
Ho1
Ho2
2.0
KAJIAN LITERATURE
2.1
Kepimpinan Teknologi
Ini bertepatan dengan zaman atau era teknologi maklumat dan komunikasi
pada masa kini yang memerlukan pemimpin teknologi di sekolah menguasai
kecekapan dan kemahiran dalam menggunakan ICT terutama yang melibatkan
pentadbiran dan pengurusan serta kemandirian (survival) sesebuah organisasi dalam
menongkah arus globalisasi. Bagi membantu para guru dalam menguasai pengetahuan
dan kemahiran komputer, pengetua perlu membuat transformasi dalam setiap kerja
berdasarkan pengurusan maklumat ICT di sekolah. Ini merupakan satu aspek dalam
pengurusan, pengajaran dan pembelajaran yang efisien jika pendidikan ingin bersaing
dalam era globalisasi.
Menerusi kajian yang dijalankan oleh Kazi Enamul et al. (2012) didapati
bahawa 80% sekolah di Malaysia tidak mempunyai visi dan polisi yang berkaitan
dengan teknologi malahan kajian juga mendapati 88% sekolah di Malaysia tidak
mempunyai pelan perancangan yang berkaitan dengan pengintegrasian ICT di
sekolah. Chien-hsing Wang (2010) pula, dapatan kajiannya menunjukkan bahawa
wujudnya masalah dalam amalan kepimpinan teknologi terutamanya dalam kalangan
pengetua adalah berpunca daripada ketiadaan visi dan komitmen selain dari
kelemahan dalam pengurusan sumber dan ketiadaan empowerment (pengupayaan)
dalam pengurusan dan pentadbiran sekolah. Secara ideal, segala penyataan dan
penemuan di atas mewajarkan kupasan terperinci tentang amalan kepimpinan
teknologi pengetua selaku pemimpin teknologi dalam mengintegrasikan teknologi
terutamanya dalam pengurusan dan pentadbiran sekolah serta seterusnya dalam proses
pengajaran dan pembelajaran agar kecemerlangan organisasi dan peningkatan
pencapaian prestasi sekolah dapat dicapai.
301
2.2
3.0
METODOLOGI
Kajian yang dijalankan ini adalah kajian kuantitatif yang menggunakan reka
bentuk kajian tinjauan. Menurut Chua (2006), kajian tinjauan merupakan kajian yang
popular kerana cara memungut data yang cepat dan keputusan analisis dapat diperoleh
dalam masa yang singkat serta kajian jenis ini dapat di generalisasi kepada populasi
dengan tepat dan berkesan. Data-data yang diperlukan untuk kajian ini dikumpul
melalui borang soal selidik yang ditadbir oleh pengkaji sendiri.
3.1
4.0
DAPATAN KAJIAN
Dapatan dan perbincangan kajian adalah merujuk kepada hasil analisis data
yang dibuat dengan menggunakan SPSS Versi 22. Pengkaji menggunakan statistik
deskriptif dan statistik inferensi sebagai teras utama dalam proses penganalisisan dan
selaras dengan kehendak bagi mendapatkan jawapan kepada persoalan-persoalan
kajian. Menurut Kamaruzzaman (2009), penglibatan kedua-dua pendekatan ini boleh
menghasilkan inferensi dan generalisasi kepada pihak-pihak yang berkepentingan.
4.1
Profil Responden
Bahagian ini memaparkan maklumat asas mengenai latar belakang atau profil
responden terpilih secara keseluruhan mengikut faktor demografi iaitu lokasi sekolah.
Responden kajian dikategorikan mengikut lokasi sekolah iaitu bandar atau luar
bandar. Berdasarkan Jadual 1 responden dalam kategori sekolah bandar adalah
seramai 157 atau 46 peratus manakala kategori sekolah luar bandar adalah seramai
187 atau 54 peratus.
Kekerapan (n)
Peratus (%)
Lokasi Sekolah
i.
Bandar
157
46.0
ii.
Luar bandar
184
54.0
304
4.2
i.
Dapatan Diskriptif
Interpretasi
1.00 - 1.80
Sangat rendah
1.81 - 2.60
Rendah
2.61 - 3.20
Sederhana
3.21 - 4.20
Tinggi
4.21 - 5.00
Sangat Tinggi
305
Min
Sisihan
Interpretasi
piawai
Skor
Kepimpinan berwawasan
4.36
.423
Sangat tinggi
4.14
.432
Tinggi
Kecemerlangan
4.12
.468
Tinggi
Penambahbaikan menyeluruh
4.42
.433
Sangat tinggi
Warga digital
4.25
.446
Sangat tinggi
keseluruhan
4.26
amalan
profesional
ii.
Sangat tinggi
kompetensi pengurusan
dalam kalangan
pengetua di
SMK
Harian secara
306
Sisihan
Interpretasi
piawai
skor
Standard Pengetahuan
4.67
.373
Sangat Tinggi
4.79
.327
Sangat Tinggi
4.71
.358
Sangat Tinggi
Keseluruhan
4.72
4.3
i.
Min
Sangat Tinggi
Dapatan Inferensi
Skor
SP
Dk
Sig.
339
2.151
0.032
Min
Bandar
157
4.309
.371
Luar Bandar
184
4.221
.380
307
Skor
SP
Dk
Sig.
339
0.130
0.897
Min
Bandar
157
4.723
.323
Luar Bandar
18
4.719
.320
terdapat perbezaan yang signifikan, nilai t (0.130) dan p=0.897 (p>0.05). Oleh
demikian, hipotesis nol (Ho12) adalah diterima. Dengan ini, keputusan kajian
mendapati tidak terdapat perbezaan yang signifikan tahap kompetensi pengurusan
kurikuum pengetua sekolah bandar dengan sekolah luar bandar.
ii.
Ho2
Bagi
menentukan
kekuatan
hubungan
kedua-duanya,
pengkaji
akan
308
Tahap hubungan
+ 0.70 1.00
Tinggi
+ 0.30 0.69
Sederhana
+ 0.00 0.29
Rendah/lemah
Kepimpinan
Pearson Correlation
Teknologi
Sig. (2-tailed)
Kepimpinan
Pengurusan
Teknologi
Kurikulum
.483**
.000
341
341
Pengurusan
Pearson Correlation
.483**
Kurikulum
Sig. (2-tailed)
.000
341
341
5.0
PERBINCANGAN
309
dan Jaminan Kualiti (2010); dan Shariffah (2012) bahawa faktor demografi pengetua
seperti jenis atau lokasi sekolah adalah faktor utama yang memberi kesan terhadap
amalan atau gaya kepimpinan seorang pengetua ketika mentadbir dan mengurus
sekolah. Bagi mengatasi masalah perbezaan amalan kepimpinan teknologi ini, KPM
telah menghubungkan sekolah dengan akses jalur lebar melalui kerjasama
Kementerian Air dan Komunikasi (KTAK) serta merangkaikan infrastruktur dan
perkakasan ICT melalui rangkaian setempat atau teknologi tanpa wayar. Seterusnya,
cabaran KPM diteruskan lagi dalam RMK-9 dengan memastikan agar infrastruktur,
perkakasan, perisian dan latihan yang mencukupi terus diberi kepada sekolah-sekolah
di kawasan luar bandar yang didapati kurang terdedah dengan kemudahan teknologi
ICT. Semua sekolah di luar bandar akan dilengkapkan dengan makmal komputer,
bilik komputer dan perkakasan dan perisian yang mencukupi.
Akhirnya, kajian ini juga dijalankan bagi mengenal pasti adakah terdapat
hubungan antara kepimpinan teknologi dengan pengurusan kurikulum dalam kalangan
pengetua di SMK Harian. Analisis menunjukkan terdapat hubungan signifikan yang
sederhana antara kepimpinan teknologi dengan pengurusan kurikulum dalam
kalangan pengetua. Ini bertepatan dengan pernyataan Chen (2004) iaitu kemudahan
teknologi ICT dalam pendidikan merupakan faktor utama yang mempengaruhi
pendidikan sejak beberapa dekad yang lalu dan untuk menjayakan implimentasi
teknologi dalam pendidikan, pengetua perlu mengubah amalan kepimpinan sedia ada.
Seterusnya, dalam aspek pengurusan kurikulum Metcalf (2012) menyatakan bahawa
pemimpin sekolah menghadapi tugas yang mencabar dalam mengaplikasikan
teknologi dalam meningkatkan proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran dan para
pentadbir juga mesti menjadi role model bagi menggalakkan penggunaan teknologi
dalam pengajaran dan pembelajaran serta pengurusan organisasi pada abad ke-21 ini.
Akhirnya, Robinson et al. (2008) pula, dalam kajiannya menyatakan bahawa kesan
kepimpinan teknologi terhadap pembelajaran pelajar adalah tiga hingga empat kali
lebih baik jika dibandingkan dengan kepimpinan transformasi terhadap pembelajaran
pelajar.
satu visi yang dapat dikongsi bersama oleh warga sekolah untuk mengintegrasikan
penggunaan teknologi secara komprehensif dalam usaha untuk menggalakkan satu
suasana dan budaya yang mempunyai kesedaran dan wawasan terhadap teknologi.
Selain itu, selaku pemimpin teknologi di sekolah para pentadbir seharusnya
membangunkan susunan organisasi yang suportif dalam bidang teknologi terutamanya
dalam menstrukturkan penggunaan teknologi sama ada dalam P&P ataupun
pengurusan organisasinya.
6.0
RUMUSAN
Oleh demikian, pentadbir dan para guru perlu mengintegrasikan ICT pada
setiap kesempatan dalam pengurusan sekolah dan P&P di bilik darjah. Namun
demikian, pengurusan teknologi juga perlu menekankan pencapaian kecekapan
pengurusan dengan memastikan maklumat yang betul dapat diperoleh tepat pada
masanya. Untuk mencapainya, peranan teknologi sentiasa ditambah baik bagi
meningkatkan integrasi dalam proses pentadbiran dan pengurusan serta seterusnya
dalam proses P&P. Hakikatnya, teknologi ICT dapat meningkatkan komunikasi dalam
organisasi dan mewujudkan persaingan yang sihat dalam kalangan warga sekolah.
Oleh itu, perkembangan teknologi ICT perlu diteroka semaksimum mungkin bagi
digunakan dalam melaksanakan visi dan misi pengurusan.
312
RUJUKAN
Azlin Norhaini Mansor. 2006. Amalan pengurusan pengetua sekolah menengah: Satu
Kajian Kes. Tesis Phd. Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia
Beatriz, P., Deborah, N., & Hunter, M. (2008). Improving school leadership activity.
www.oecd.org/edu/schoolleadership.
Best, J.W. & Kahn, J.V. 2006. Research in education. Edisi ke-10. Boston:Pearson
Education,
Inc.
Brockmeier, L. L., Sermon, J. M., & Hope, W. C. (2005). Principals' relationship with
computer
technology.
National
Association
of
Secondary
School
313
Chua, Y.P. (2006). Kaedah dan Statistik Penyelidikan: Buku 1 Kaedah Penyelidikan.
Kuala Lumpur: Mac Graw Hill M Sdn. Bhd.
Dikkers, A.G., Hughes, J.E., & McLeod, S. (2005). A bridge to success: STLI. T.H.E.
Journal, 32(11), 20-24.
Gay, L.R. & Airasian, P. (2003). Educational research: Competencies for analysis
and application. Ed. ke 7. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
Gerard, L.F., Bowyer, J.B., & Linn, M.C. (2008). Principal leadership for technologyenhanced learning in science. Journal of Science Education and Technology,
17(1), 1-18.
314
Jabatan Pengurusan ICT & Multimedia. (2013). Kompetensi ICT pemimpin sekolah.
Institut Aminuddin Baki IAB Kementerian Pendidikan Malaysia.
Jackson, D. B. (2009). The reionship between principals technological leadership
and their
Kazi Enamul Hoque, Ahmad Zabidi Abdul Razak & Mosa Fatema Zohora. (2012).
ICT
315
Malaysia 2013-2025.
University.
Moktar Johar. (2011). Kepimpinan teknologi dan kompetensi ICT guru di SM Agama
di Daerah
Kepengetuaan, Universiti
Malaya.
Mumtaz Begam Abdul Kadir. (2008). Kesan integriti kepimpinan dan pengurusan
kualiti menyeluruh dimensi kemanusiaan terhadap iklim proses organisasi di
Institut Pendidikan Tinggi MARA. Tesis PhD. Universiti Kebangsaan
Malaysia.
Robertson, M., Grady, N. B., Fluck, A. & Webb, I. L. (2006). Conversations toward
effective implementation of information communication technologies in
Australian schools. Journal of Educational Administration, 44(1), 71-85.
Robinson, V. M. J., Lloyd, C. A. & Rowe, K.J. (2008). The impact of leadership on
student outcomes: An analysis of the differential effects of leadership types.
Educational Administration Quarterly, 44(5), 635-674.
Shariffah Sebran Jamila Syed Imam. (2012). Latihan profesional dan hubungannya
dengan treat personaliti, kemahiran mengurus dan memimpin dalam kalangan
pengetua dan guru besar novis di Malaysia. Tesis PhD Universiti Kebangsaan
Malaysia.
317
ABSTRAK
Kementerian
Pendidikan
Malaysia
melalui
anjakan
kelima
Pelan
1.0
PENGENALAN
319
1.1
Latar belakang
Secara ringkasnya, tugas dan peranan GKMP dibahagikan kepada empat (4)
bidang iaitu kurikulum, kokurikulum, pentadbiran dan tugas-tugas lain. Berdasarkan
waran tahunan perjawatan yang diluluskan, setiap sekolah menengah (BPSM, 2011)
diperuntukkan empat (4) orang GKMP yang dilantik untuk mengetuai bidang bahasa,
sains dan matematik, teknik dan vokasional dan kemanusiaan. Sememangnya sejak
mencapai kemerdekaan, bidang pendidikan sentiasa diutamakan sebagai agenda
negara. (Kementerian Kewangan 2013) iaitu sebanyak (21%) atau 38.7 bilion ringgit
daripada keseluruhan bajet meliputi peruntukan mengurus dan pembangunan. Walau
bagaimanapun, usaha tersebut tidak setara dengan pelaburan yang telah dibuat.
Kajian
lepas
yang
melibatkan
kompetensi
pengurus
sekolah
juga
mendedahkan atau mengenal pasti beberapa isu atau masalah yang dihadapi pengetua
yang memerlukan sokongan dan kerjasama padu GKMP dalam membantu
320
pengurusannya (Azlin 2005; Bity et al. 2010). Berikutnya, kajian oleh Amin et al
(2008); Rosnarizah (2009); dan Aminah (2012) pula mendapati kebanyakan pengetua
masih belum menguasai sembilan (9) bidang kompetensi seperti yang digariskan
dalam Standard Kompetensi Kepengetuaan Sekolah Malaysia (SKKSM). Impak dan
gambaran kajian-kajian tersebut menunjukkan perlunya satu standard atau piawai
perlu digubal kerana dikhuatiri akan membentuk lompang yang lebih besar
disebabkan terputusnya rantaian kompetensi di peringkat pertengahan dan atasan.
Kajian-kajian lepas juga mendapati GKMP masih keliru dengan tugas, kekaburan
fungsi dan tidak mengetahui perincian tugas (Lokman 1998; Schmidt 2000; Mayers &
Zepeda 2002) dan dalam pengurusan serta kepimpinan pengajarannya (Glover &
Miller 1999). Kajian Salamiyah (1995); Jaya Silar (1998); Julita (2002); dan Bennett
(2008) pula mendapati GKMP kurang berpengalaman, berpengetahuan dan dibebani
tugas lain yang perlu dilaksanakan.
Dari aspek kepimpinan, masalah yang timbul apabila GKMP tidak pernah
menghadiri kursus yang berkaitan dengan tugasnya (Zamzam 1999). Faktor tersebut
menyebabkan GKMP kurang berperanan dalam memimpin guru-guru di bawah
bidang seliaannya (Jaya Silar 1998; Sasuraja 1999). Ini disokong oleh kajian
Nurhunaini (2001) yang mendapati GKMP menghadapi masalah dalam aspek
pengajaran dan memerlukan kursus bagi meningkatkan pengetahuan, pengalaman,
kemahiran dan kepakaran dalam melaksanakan tugas pengurusan kurikulum dan
pengajaran. Secara keseluruhannya berdasarkan kajian Nasiriah (2001), GKMP belum
dapat berperanan sepenuhnya dalam jawatan yang disandang manakala tahap
321
kepakaran dalam pengurusan masih pada tahap yang sederhana (Wan Zulkifly 2003;
Mohammed Sani et al 2011).
1.2
Tujuan Kajian
1.3
Objektif kajian
ii.
iii.
322
1.4
Persoalan Kajian
Apakah
masalah-masalah
yang
dihadapi
oleh
GKMP
dalam
iii.
Adakah
terdapat
keperluan
membangunkan
model
standard
2.0
METODOLOGI
2.1
Kajian ini mengguna pakai reka bentuk dan pembangunan penyelidikan (DDR)
dalam menghasilkan kajian yang terdiri daripada tiga fasa utama. Menurut Richey &
Klein (2007), pendekatan DDR mampu menghasilkan sesuatu produk di dalam
sesuatu penyelidikan. Produk yang boleh dikeluarkan dengan mengaplikasikan
pendekatan DDR termasuklah model. Pada fasa analisis keperluan, kaedah
pengukuran yang digunakan melalui temu bual telah dipilih untuk tujuan kajian ini.
Data dikumpulkan dengan menggunakan kaedah temu bual berstruktur ke atas lima
orang GKMP, lima orang Ketua Panitia dan dua orang Penolong Kanan sekolah
menengah yang telah dipilih melalui teknik
323
3.0
3.1
3.1.1 Pengupayaan
Pernyataan ini selari dengan apa yang dinyatakan Penolong Kanan yang
menyatakan bahawa isu ini menimbulkan kecelaruan terutamanya dalam tugasan
harian GKMP. Malah pihak atasan seperti Penolong kanan gagal mengagihkan tugas
yang sepatutnya kepada kumpulan guru yang berkaitan.
masalah besar yang dialami oleh guru kanan ialah pengupayaan
agihan tugas maksudnya dia ada jurang sebab kadang-kadang kita
terkeliru adakah tugas itu perlu dibuat oleh guru kanan atau pun
Ketua Panitia(PK1)
Ketiadaan garis panduan yang jelas merupakan masalah yang telah dikenal
pasti sering dihadapi oleh GKMP. Ini menyebabkan berlakunya pertindihan tugas
terutamanya dengan guru Ketua Panitia.
324
bagi saya, kadang kala tidak tahu sangat skop dari segi
pentadbiran macam saya kadang-kadang ikut seperti yang diarahkan,
masalahnya kita kadang-kadang tidak jelas sangat(GKMP5)
Perkara ini juga menyebabkan Ketua panitia lebih suka merujuk sesuatu
permasalahan terus kepada guru Penolong kanan berbanding GKMP.
dari segi pengurusan, tidak ada garis panduan untuk ketua bidang
sangat umum sebenarnya jadi dia tidak tahu apa tugas dia
sebenarnya sebab kalau urusan Ketua Panitia baik diuruskan oleh
Ketua Panitia. Jadi ketua bidang tidak ada garis panduan(KP1).
3.1.3 Kompetensi.
Tambahan pula, setiap bidang di bawah GKMP terdiri daripada panitia dan subjek
yang berbeza dengan opsyennya. Di situlah persoalan kompetensi yang ditimbulkan.
Isu ini besar kemungkinan disebabkan GKMP kurang berpengetahuan, kurang mahir
dan tiada pengalaman
dalam konteks sekolah saya semua guru kanan yang ada setakat
ini memang langsung tidak ada pengalaman sebagai guru kanan dan
mereka menjalankan tugas pun masih tercari-cari(PK2).
325
3.2
Seperti mana penjawat awam yang lain, guru-guru perlu hadir kursus dan
latihan untuk meningkatkan kompetensi dalam profesion perguruan sama ada
disediakan oleh KPM ataupun agensi yang berkaitan. Sebaliknya ini tidak berlaku ke
atas GKMP
bagi saya sepatutnya ada satu kursus yang khas kepada semua
ketua bidang tadi lah dengan satu standard. Setakat ni langsung tiada
kursus untuk guru kanan dan kursus ini seharusnya menjurus kepada
tugasan ketua bidang itu(PK2).
Kursus dan latihan kepada GKMP sepatutnya diberikan semasa mereka sedang
menyandang jawatan tersebut. Ini boleh membantu mereka menjalankan tugasan
dengan lebih cekap dan terarah
kursus kalau dia tidak bagi sebelum pun, semasa jadi ketua bidang
dia bagi secara berkala ke sebulan sekali ke atau pun ni setahun pun
tidak ada langsung(GKMP1)
dalam kalangan guru di bawah seliaannya terdiri daripada guru-guru yang lebih tinggi
jawatannya dari segi gred
kalau mereka diberikan satu panduan apa yang perlu
dibuat dengan standard yang khusus sekurang-kurangnya
mereka boleh mengawal panitia di bawah nya ataupun bidang
masing-masing(PK1).
3.3
sangat perlu supaya dapat jadi panduan kepada guru kanan itu sendiri
(GKMP3).
4.0
PERBINCANGAN
Daripada dapatan kajian telah dikenal pasti isu dan masalah yang dihadapi
oleh GKMP iaitu dari segi pengupayaan, ketiadaan garis panduan, ketidakcekapan
atau kompeten dan ketiadaan arahan yang jelas dalam menjalankan tugas. Masalahmasalah yang dikenal pasti ini selari dengan dapatan Brian (2012) iaitu sebagai calon
pengganti utama pengetua berdasarkan hierarki, Penolong Kanan dan GKMP kurang
328
pengetahuan dan kemahiran dalam kalangan GKMP yang terhad disebabkan struktur
organisasi sekolah. Punca yang menyumbang kepada masalah ini termasuklah tiada
pengupayaan yang ada pada mereka (Jarvis, 2010). Seterusnya, menurut StoneJohnson (2013) GKMP akan berhadapan atau dilabelkan sebagai pemimpin yang
kurang bertanggungjawab.
Dapatan kajian juga turut mengusulkan supaya GKMP diberikan kursus dan
latihan sebelum dan semasa menyandang jawatan tersebut. Perkara ini pernah
dikemukakan oleh Earley & Fletcher-Campbell (1989) yang mendapati GKMP tidak
diberikan latihan yang mencukupi untuk melaksanakan amanah dan tanggung
jawabnya. Penyelidikan seterusnya juga menunjukkan masih terdapat kekurangan dari
segi latihan yang berkesan untuk GKMP. Kajian Adey (2000) mendapati bahawa
daripada 112 GKMP yang dikaji, 57.4% menyatakan bahawa mereka telah lama tidak
diberikan latihan agar peranan mereka lebih berkesan. Cadangan ini bukan sahaja
melibatkan kursus dan latihan tetapi juga menyediakan garis panduan khusus dan
menyeragamkan tugas GKMP. Pandangan ini dijelaskan oleh Benjamin & Jane
(2014)
Pendidikan Guru dengan menekankan inisiatif kendiri guru dan tidak lagi secara
berpusat (BPG, 2014). Keperluan membangunkan satu standard kompetensi seperti
yang disahkan oleh peserta kajian secara tidak langsung menunjukkan perlunya kajian
ini dilakukan. Seperti yang ditegaskan Saedah dan Mohammed Sani (2012), tanpa
satu standard kompetensi dalam bidang perguruan akan menimbulkan masalah
perkhidmatan, tekanan kerja, konflik peranan, kekaburan peranan, tiada satu sistem
sokongan sosial dari pengetua dan rakan sekerja. Implikasinya akan menyebabkan
guru meletak jawatan atau bersara awal, dan berlakunya burnout dalam kalangan
GKMP.
329
5.0
KESIMPULAN
Bertepatan dengan anjakan kelima dalam Pelan Pembangunan Pendidikan
RUJUKAN
Abdul Ghani Abdullah, Abdul Rahman Abdul Aziz & Mohammed Zahir Ahmad.
(2008). Gaya-gaya kepimpinan dalam pendidikan. Kuala Lumpur: PTS
Profesional Publishing
Adrian P. Jarvis,. (2010). School effectiveness and the subject leaders influence
space: an exploration of the influence of secondary school subject leaders on the
professional practice of the members of their departments. Tesis Dr. Fal, School
of Education The University of Birmingham
Alfes, K., Truss, C., & Gill, J. (2010). The HR manager as change agent: Evidence
from the public sector. Journal of Change Management, 10 (1), 109127
Amin Senin, Hj Ramli Yusoff, Sazali Yusoff, Abd Razak Manaf, Rosnarizah Abd
Halim, Rusmini Ku Ahmad, Ruhaya Hassan, Shahari Abd Rahman, Mohd
Yusof Mohd Noor, & Mehander Singh. (2008). Kajian Kompetensi Berimpak
330
Bennet, J. (2008). An examination of the issues facing first time subject leaders during
their first year of appointment in New Zealand secondary schools. Thesis.
Unitec New Zealand. http://hdl.handle.net/10652/1299[12 Mei 2013]
Bennett, N., Newton,W.,Wise, C.,Woods, P. & Economou, A. (2003). The role and
purpose of middle leaders in schools: Full report. Prepared for the National
College of School Leadership (NCSL)
Bolman, L. G., & Deal, T. E. (2003). Reframing organizations : artistry, choice, and
leadership. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
331
Bity Salwana Alias, Ahmad Basri Md. Yussof, Ramlee Mustapha & Mohammed Sani
Ibrahim. 2010. Analisis Kompetensi Pengetua Berdasarkan Kualiti Peribadi
pengetahuan, Kemahiran dan Amalan dalam Bidang Pengurusan Sekolah
Menengah Malaysia. Jurnal Pendidikan Malaysia, 35(2): 3141.
Glover, D., & Miller, D. (1999). Leading the troops: assessing the qualities of subject
leaders. Management in Education, 13(2): 2425
Jaya Silar,. M. (1998). Jenis dan skop tugas guru kanan mata pelajaran. Tesis
sarjana. Universiti Utara Malaysia
Jemaah Nazir dan Jaminan Kualiti. (2010). Standard kualiti pendidikan Malaysia.
Putrajaya. Kementerian Pendidikan Malaysia
Jemaah Nazir dan Jaminan Kualiti. (2012). Laporan Kebangsaan Tahun 2012:
Pemeriksaan Penuh Sekolah Menengah, Kuala Lumpur. Kementerian
Pendidikan Malaysia
332
Julita Liwan. (2002). Peranan guru kanan mata pelajaran dan masalah dalam
pelaksanaan pengurusan kurikulum
Lokman Mohd Tahir. (1998). Persepsi guru terhadap tanggung jawab dan tingkah
laku guru kanan mata pelajaran sebagai pemimpin pengajaran: satu kajian kes
di sekolah menengah teknik Muar. Tesis Sarjana, Universiti Kebangsaan
Malaysia
Mayers, R. S., & Zepeda, S. J. (2002). High school department chairs: Role ambiguity
and conflict during change. NASSP Bulletin, 86(632):49-64
Mohammed Sani Ibrahim, Saedah Siraj & Tajuddin Mohd Yunus.(2011). Persepsi
dan Jangkaan Terhadap Peranan Guru Kanan Mata Pelajaran di Sekolah
Menengah. Prosiding Seminar Pendidikan Guru Majlis Dekan Universiti
Malaysia di Universiti Putra Malaysia 27-28 September 2011
Rosnarizah Abdul Halim. (2009). Assessing the Needs of Competencies for Training
and Development: Case of Two States in Malaysia. In The Second Thailand Malaysia Joint Educational Research Conference 2009 Research-Driven
Education Reform: Innovation for Quality, 1325.
Salamiyah Mustafa. (1995). peranan guru kanan mata pelajaran sekolah menengah di
negeri Perak. Tesis Sarjana. Bangi. Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.
333
Saedah Siraj & Mohammed Sani Ibrahim. (2012). Standard Kompetensi Guru
Malaysia. Dalam Prosiding Seminar Majlis Dekan Pendidikan IPTA.7 -9
Oktober 2012. The Zon Regency By The Sea Johor Bharu
Schmidt, M. (2000). Role Theory, Emotions and Identity in the Department Headship
of Secondary Schooling, Teaching and Teacher Education 16: 827842
Spencer, L., & Spencer, M. (1993). Competence at work: Models for superior
performance, N.Y: John Wiley & Sons
Wan Zulkifly Wan Zakaria. (2003). Tahap kepakaran guru kanan mata pelajaran
dalam memperkembangkan profesionalisme guru. Tesis Sarjana. Bangi :
Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia
Zamzam Binti Abas. (1999). Kepimpinan pengajaran di kalangan guru kanan mata
pelajaran Sekolah Menengah Daerah Kota Tinggi: Satu tinjauan. Tesis
Sarjana, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia
334
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
Sejajar dengan pembangunan negara yang semakin pesat telah mendorong
peningkatan terhadap keperluan tenaga kerja mahir yang kompeten dan berdaya saing.
Mesyuarat Jemaah Menteri pada 19 Mei 2004 telah meluluskan pelaksanaan SLDN
untuk membangunkan modal insan Malaysia yang berkemahiran tinggi dan
berpengetahuan bagi memenuhi kehendak industri semasa (M. Sail, R., Md Aroff, A.
R, Abu Samah, A., Hamzah, A., Mohd Noah, S., Kasa, Z., 2008). Pada penghujung
Rancangan Malaysia Kelapan, program SLDN mula diperkenalkan. Program ini
diperkembangkan
sepanjang
tempoh
Rancangan
335
Malaysia
Kesembilan
dan
Rancangan Malaysia Kesepuluh iaitu pada tahun 2006 hingga 2015. Golongan sasar
juga diperluaskan kepada pelajar tercicir, pekerja sedia ada, lepasan sekolah, graduan
menganggur dan perantis yang telah memiliki Sijil Kemahiran Malaysia Tahap 2
untuk meningkatkan tahap kemahiran kepada tahap yang lebih tinggi (JPK, 2014). Ini
membuktikan betapa Malaysia serius dalam menghasilkan sumber manusia atau
modal insan holistik negara ini.
mendedahkan
bahawa
kebanyakan
institusi
latihan
kemahiran
tidak
memfokuskan dan mengambil kira kemahiran sosial sebagai suatu aspek yang perlu
pada perantis. Masalah mengintegrasikan elemen kemahiran sosial ke dalam
pengajaran dibangkitkan oleh tenaga pengajar kerana kurikulum kemahiran sosial
adalah tidak jelas dan pengajar kesuntukan masa untuk menumpukan pengajaran
kemahiran sosial semasa proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran (Yahya, 2006). Maka
kajian ini berusaha untuk memastikan aspek kemahiran sosial dipenuhi dalam
program SLDN.
Pada masa ini, Malaysia mempunyai sebanyak 77 peratus tenaga kerja yang
mempunyai pendidikan selama 11 tahun sehingga Sijil Pelajaran Malaysia (SPM)
atau yang setaraf dengannya dan hanya mempunyai 28 peratus tenaga kerja daripada
kategori pekerja mahir (Rancangan Malaysia Kesepuluh
336
2.0
(SLDN)
Pelaksanaan SLDN terbahagi kepada SLDN Sedia Ada, SLDN Khas, SLDN
Insentif, SLDN Peningkatan Tahap dan SLDN In-House Training. Walaupun terdapat
beberapa kaedah SLDN yang diperkenalkan oleh Jabatan Pembangunan Kemahiran
tetapi konsep asasnya adalah sama (JPK, 2013). Konsep Asas SLDN ialah latihan
dwilokasi iaitu 20 hingga 30 peratus latihan di institusi latihan dan 70 hingga 80
peratus latihan di industri. Kurikulum latihan SLDN adalah berdasarkan Kurikulum
SLDN dan Standard Kemahiran Pekerjaan Kebangsaan (NOSS) yang dibangunkan
oleh pakar dalam sesuatu bidang latihan pekerjaan. Perantis dibenarkan untuk
menjalani latihan secara day release atau block release. Pendekatan day release
adalah latihan yang dijalankan selama 3 hingga 4 hari dalam seminggu di industri dan
1 hingga 2 hari di institusi latihan. Manakala pendekatan block release adalah latihan
berterusan selama 3 hingga 4 bulan di industri dan 1 hingga 2 bulan dalam satu
semester. Tempoh latihan adalah bergantung kepada lima tahap persijilan (JPK,
2011) yang ditawarkan dalam Sistem Persijilan Kemahiran Malaysia iaitu Sijil
Kemahiran Malaysia (SKM) Tahap 1, SKM Tahap 2, SKM Tahap 3, Diploma
Kemahiran Malaysia (DKM) Tahap 4 dan Diploma Lanjutan Kemahiran Malaysia
(DLKM) Tahap 5. Takrifan Tahap dalam Sistem Persijilan Kemahiran Malaysia
(SPKM) adalah seperti berikut :
Jadual 1 Takrifan Tahap dalam SPKM
Tahap
Takrifan
SKM 1
Terampil melakukan pelbagai aktiviti kerja, sebahagian besarnya adalah lazim dilakukan dan boleh dijangka
SKM 2
Terampil melakukan pelbagai aktiviti kerja di dalam pelbagai konteks, sebahagiannya adalah tidak lazim
dilakukan serta memerlukan tanggungjawab dan autonomi diri
SKM 3
Terampil melakukan pelbagai aktiviti kerja di dalam pelbagai konteks, kebanyakannya adalah kompleks dan
tidak lazim dilakukan. Mempunyai tanggungjawab dan autonomi diri yang tinggi di samping mengawal dan
memberi panduan kepada yang lain
DKM
Terampil melakukan pelbagai aktiviti kerja teknikal dan profesional yang luas skop dan konteksnya.
Mempunyai tanggungjawab dan autonomi diri yang tinggi di samping lazim bertanggungjawab terhadap kerja
orang lain dan agihan sumber-sumber
DLKM
Terampil menggunakan pelbagai prinsip asas dan teknik yang kompleks di dalam skop yang luas serta selalu
tidak dijangka. Mempunyai tanggungjawab dan autonomi diri yang sangat tinggi serta bertanggungjawab
terhadap kerja orang lain dan agihan sumber-sumber. Bertanggungjawab juga terhadap analisis, diagnosis,
rekabentuk, perancangan, pengendalian dan penilaian
2.1
3.0
TUJUAN KAJIAN
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
339
5.0
DAPATAN KAJIAN
Jadual 2 menunjukkan demografi majikan yang terlibat bagi kajian ini.
Jadual 2 Demografi Majikan
Faktor demografi
Faktor
Frekuensi
Peratus (%)
Gender
29
Lelaki
13
44.8
Perempuan
16
55.2
Bangsa
29
Melayu
14
48.3
Cina
17.2
India
10
34.5
Peruncitan
13.8
Kecantikan
13.8
Dandanan Rambut
13.8
Elektrikal
10.3
Elektronik
10.3
Komposit
17.2
Mekanikal
20.8
Bidang
29
Hasil analisa yang dijalankan, terdapat beberapa maklum balas yang diperoleh
daripada pihak majikan yang berkaitan dengan tahap kemahiran sosial perantis
SLDN, antaranya adalah seperti berikut:
Ada yang ikut arahan dan ada yang main-main. Sikap tu lebih kepada individu lah, saya tak kata
mereka semua main-main & tak serius. Tapi kalau kita arahkan untuk mereka buat, baru lah mereka
buat Majikan Syarikat A
Kalau mesin rosak, kami akan minta perantis ni kenalpasti kenapa. Kami nak tengok sejauh mana
mereka boleh buat. Kadang-kadang mereka ni senyap je. Langsung tak nak bertanya. Boleh ke tak
boleh ke kami pun tak pasti. Majikan Syarikat B
Masa tengah dalam perbincanganphone perantis tu berderingboleh dia kata kat kami tunggu
kejap ya saya kena jawab panggilan nipatutnya mereka kena la off handphone tu dulu Majikan
Syarikat C
ada tu bila saya tanya soalan yang agak mencabar dan dia tak boleh jawab soalan tu dan tak suka
soalan tuterus buat muka boringmasam muka Majikan Syarikat D
datang keje lambat.ini sikap yang tak baguskita perlukan pekerja yang berkualiti. Majikan
Syarikat E
tak perlulah berpakaian casualtechnician buat kerja kat line productiontapi mesti kemas
janganlah pakai seliparjanganlah pakai jeans koyak-koyakrambut panjang. Majikan
Syarikat F
340
6.0
KESIMPULAN
Hasil daripada kajian ini, penyelidik mendapati majikan memerlukan pekerjapekerja yang bukan sahaja mempunyai kemahiran teknikal tetapi pekerja-pekerja
yang mempunyai peribadi atau sikap positif yang mempengaruhi prestasi di tempat
kerja (Mohamad Sattar, Md Yusof, Napsiah, Rashid, Rose Amnah, 2009). Oleh itu,
penemuan kajian ini diharap dapat menjadi panduan kepada pihak yang berkenaan
supaya dapat lebih memahami senario yang berlaku dalam pelaksanaan SLDN
terutamanya dalam aspek kebolehkerjaan.
RUJUKAN
Asuquo P.N, Inaja A.E. (2013). Fostering Sustainable Career Development and
Employability Among Young People in the Changing World of Work:
Employers Perspective. Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 84, 14921499. doi:10.1016/j.sbspro.2013.06.778
Baharom, N. (2007). Kamus Dewan (Edisi ke-4). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan
Pustaka.
Buntat, Y., Jabor, M.K., Saud, M.S., Mansor. S.M.S.S. & Mustaffa, N.H. (2013).
Employability Skills Elemnetss: Difference Perspective Between Teaching
Staff and Employers Industrial in Malaysia. Procedia-Social and Behavioral
Sciences, 93, 1531-1535. doi:10.1016/j.sbspro.2013.10.077
Dewan Ekonomi Keluaran Mei 2014 (2014, Mei 1). Malaysia kritikal lahirkan tenaga
mahir?. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka Malaysia.
341
Jaem, R.R (2013, November 3). Kerajaan optimis capai sasaran 300,000 tenaga
mahir setahun. Bernama.com.
JPK. (2011). Guidelines for National Dual Training System Curriculum (NDTS-C)
Development 2011-2013. Putrajaya: Jabatan Pembangunan Kemahiran,
Kementerian Sumber Manusia.
JPK. (2013).
Pembangunan Kemahiran
2013.
JPK. (2014).
Pembangunan Kemahiran
2014.
JTM. (2012). Kaji Selidik Graduan Lepasan ILJTM. Putrajaya: Jabatan Tenaga
Manusia, Kementerian Sumber Manusia.
Kerajaan Malaysia (2010). Rancangan Malaysia Kesepuluh, 20112015. Putrajaya :
Unit Perancang Ekonomi, Jabatan Perdana Menteri
McArdle, S., Waters, L., Briscoe, J.P., & Hall, D.T. (2007). Employability during
Unemployment: Adaptability, career identity and human and social capital.
Journal of Vocational Behavior, 71, 247-264. doi:10.1016/j.jvb.2007.06.003
Mohamad Sattar Rasul ,Md Yusof Ismail, Napsiah Ismail, Rashid Rajuddin,
Roseamnah Abd. Rauf. (2009). Aspek Kemahiran Employability yang
Dikehendaki Majikan Industri Pembuatan Masa Kini. Jurnal Pendidikan
Malaysia, 34(2), 6779.
M. Sail, R., Md Aroff, A. R, Abu Samah, A., Hamzah, A., Mohd Noah, S., Kasa, Z.
(2008). Buku Panduan Kemahiran Sosial dan Nilai Sosial dalam Pendidikan
Teknikal
dan
Latihan
Vokasional.
Putrajaya:
342
Jabatan
Pembangunan
M. Sail, R., Alavi, K. (2010). Social skills and social values training for future kworkers. Journal of European Industrial Training 34(3) : 226-258
M. Zohdi, S (2015, Mac 26) Perkasa bidang teknikal, vokasional. Berita Harian.
Ramlee Mustapha & Rohana Rahmat (2013). Integration of social skills and social
values in the National Dual Training System (NDTS) in the Malaysian
automotive sector : employers perspective. Tvet@Asia (1);1-15.
Rasul, M. S., Abd Rauf, R. A., Mansor, A.N. & Puvanasvaran, A.P. (2012).
Employability Skills Assessment Tool Development. International Education
Studies, 5 (5), 43-56. doi:10.5539/ies.v5n5p43
Rivera, M.d.C.A, Gallego, L.V., Alvarez. M.A., Inchaurtieta, A.M., Albizuri,I.E. &
Eulate,
C.Y.A.d.
(2012).
Perceived
Employability and
Competence
Stirling, J.A (2001) Thematic networks: an analytic tool for qualitative research.
Qualitative Research 1(3): 385-405. DOI: 10.1177/146879410100100307
Yahya Buntat & Juliana Abd Rahman (2006). Tanggapan Tenaga Pengajar di Institut
Latihan Perindustrian (ILP) Pasir Gudang terhadap Penerapan Kemahiran
Employability dalam Proses Pengajaran dan Pembelajaran. Universiti
Teknologi Malaysia
343
Yusof, H.M., Mustapha, R., Mohamad, S.A.M.S. & Bunian, M.S. (2012).
Measurement Model of Employability Skills using Confirmatory Factor
Analysis.
Procedia-Social
and
doi:10.1016/j.sbspro.2012.09.663
344
Behavioral
Sciences,
56,
348-356.
Lampiran A
Jadual 3 Analisis perbandingan sistem perantisan negara maju dan negara membangun
Negara
Golongan
sasar
Kadar
tamat
pengajian
(%)
50
Status
pekerjaan
perantis
Australia
Belia,
dewasa,
kelainan
upaya
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
Kanada
Dewasa
50
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
United
Kingdom
Belia,
dewasa,
kelainan
upaya
< 50
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
Perancis
Belia,
kelainan
upaya
80
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
Jerman
Belia,
kelainan
upaya
80
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
Kewujudan
perantisan
dalam sektor
awam
Perantisan
terdapat di
jabatan
kerajaan
Perantisan di
tempat yang
mempunyai
alat-alat
milik
kerajaan
Perantisan
terdapat di
jabatan kerajaan
Perantisan
terdapat di
jabatan
kerajaan
Perantisan di
tempat yang
mempunyai
alat-alat
milik
kerajaan
Perantisan
terdapat di
jabatan
kerajaan
Perantisan di
tempat yang
mempunyai
alat-alat
milik
kerajaan
Perantisan di
tempat yang
mempunyai
alat-alat
milik
kerajaan
345
Kelebihan
Kekurangan
Kadar penyertaan
Kelayakan
Penglibatan dalam
sistem
Imej / jenama
Minoriti / kadar
penyertaan wanita /
pendatang dan halangan
Perbezaan dalam negara
/ persekutuan dan negeri
/ wilayah berkenaan
dengan perantisan
Isu-isu penilaian keyakinan, piawaian
geran perantisan
persekutuan
pelbagai sokongan
kepada perantis
Minoriti / kadar
penyertaan wanita /
pendatang dan halangan
Hubungan dengan
lepasan sekolah /
sekolah / kerjaya
bimbingan / kesedaran
Berat sebelah kepada
universiti
Kerumitan sistem
Isu-isu penilaian keyakinan, piawaian
Pembiayaan
Kadar penyertaan
(Peluang diperluaskan
kepada lingkungan
umur yang lebih besar)
Struktur bagi industri
kecil
Manfaat kepada
majikan - produktiviti
/ pengambilan / latihan
/ fleksibiliti / retention
Kadar penyertaan
High
retention/completion
rate
Kelayakan
Pekerjaan Siswazah
Komponen sistem
berprestasi terbaik
Perkembangan melalui
tahap
Peralihan sekolah
kepada kerja
Kadar penyertaan
High
retention/completion
rate
Kelayakan
Struktur bagi industri
kecil
Penglibatan dalam
sistem
Pekerja produktif
Pekerjaan Siswazah
Imej / jenama
Integrasi dengan
pasaran buruh
Pendekatan pragmatik
bagi syarikat-syarikat
Syarikat-syarikat pakar
boleh bekerja dengan
Amerika
Syarikat
Dewasa,
kelainan
upaya
50
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
Perantisan
terdapat di
jabatan kerajaan
(Perkhidmatan
bomba,
pembetulan dan
tentera)
Mesir
Belia,
kelainan
upaya
80
Gaji/elaun
sahaja
Indonesia
Belia &
Dewasa
< 50
Gaji/elaun
sahaja
Perantisan
terdapat di
jabatan
kerajaan
(Kejururawat
an)
Perantisan di
tempat yang
mempunyai
alat-alat
milik
kerajaan
-
India
Belia,
kelainan
upaya
< 50
Gaji/elaun
sahaja
Afrika
Selatan
Belia &
Dewasa
< 50
Perantis
dibayar
sebagai
pekerja
Perantisan di
tempat yang
mempunyai
alat-alat milik
kerajaan
orang lain
Syarikat menyokong
model / pengambilan
Kelayakan
Manfaat kepada
majikan - produktiviti
/ pengambilan / latihan
/ fleksibiliti / retention
Penajaan program
Kelayakan
Pekerjaan Siswazah
Pihak berkepentingan
dan kakitangan yang
setia
Pekerja produktif
Menyumbang kepada
tabung kemahiran /
kualiti
Manfaat kepada
majikan - produktiviti
/ pengambilan / latihan
/ fleksibiliti / retention
Memenuhi keperluan
perniagaan
Menanamkan nilainilai syarikat
Pembangunan kerjaya
meningkatkan jumlah
peluang kerja
Sokongan kerajaan
Hubungan dengan
lepasan sekolah /
sekolah / kerjaya
bimbingan / kesedaran
Berat sebelah kepada
universiti
Pembiayaan
Kerumitan system
TVET mempunyai
status yang rendah
Laluan kepada
pendidikan tinggi
Sokongan kerajaan
Hubungan dengan
lepasan sekolah /
sekolah / kerjaya
bimbingan / kesedaran
Pelbagai skim
kebangsaan
TVET mempunyai
status yang rendah
Perbezaan dalam negara /
persekutuan dan negeri /
wilayah berkenaan dengan
perantisan
TVET mempunyai
status yang rendah
Kurang hubungan
dengan industri
Status sosial pelatih
adalah rendah
Majikan membayar gaji
rendah
Tempoh kerja yang
panjang
Tidak meliputi sektor
perkhidmatan
Kekurangan jurulatih
Kurang penumpuan
antara agensi
Kurikulum tidak
fleksibel
Terhad kepada bidang
teknikal
Kekurangan kontrak
yang membolehkan
pelatih diambil kerja
meningkatkan
jumlah peluang kerja
menyediakan lebih
banyak peluang
pembangunan
kemahiran untuk
penganggur
Turki
Belia
80
Perantis
Perantisan
Kadar penyertaan
Laluan kepada
dibayar,
terdapat di
pendidikan tinggi
High
tetapi
jabatan kerajaan
retention/completion
Minoriti / kadar
bukan
(sebilangan
rate
penyertaan wanita /
sebagai
kecil)
pendatang dan halangan
Ditubuhkan struktur
pekerja
peraturan / undang Pelbagai skim
formal
undang
kebangsaan
(Sumber : International Labour Organization, International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/ The World Bank, 2013)
346
ABSTRACT
Key words: Poverty Relief, Intelligent Decision Support System, Fuzzy AHP
1.0
INTRODUCTION
income for a family that was not enough to buy a minimum requirement for expert
content (Siti Hadijah & Roslan, 2011).To ensure the welfare of these people, the
government tried to identify of all household heads (Ketua Isi Rumah KIR) which
fall under the category Low Income Household (LIH). Two types of strategies used
by the government which are schemes or programs that increase productivity and a
scheme or program which provide facilities, help or aid basic needs (Mohamed Zahir,
2006). The government is very concerned and held the initiatives to reduce poverty
through the Period End Poverty programs (1AZAM).
AZAM Tani, Azam Niaga, AZAM Khidmat, AZAM Kerja, AZAM Sabah and
AZAM Sarawak are 6 areas 1AZAM managed by several ministries and agencies.
All programs are supervised by the implementing agencies NKRA-LIH such as
Ministry of Women, Family and Community Development that provides the
opportunities to increase income to the poor through a combination of employment
and entrepreneurship. Self-sufficiency intensive such BR1M continues to be
distributed by the government although this intensive cannot help generate further
income producing them out of poverty but able to ensure survival of poor.
Based on the statistics in February 2012, there were 66, 243 households that
have registered with e-Kasih and as participants in 1AZAM programs. In Terengganu,
the district's population consists of 29.9 percent of coastal fishing communities which
recorded the highest number of KIR total of 10,115 (MPK, 2012). e-Kasih system
plays a very important role by providing information about KIR and match the
programs or intensive provided. The extraction of information from e-Kasih and
matching process was done manually and concept registration by e-Kasih also
produce the duplicate and attrition of information, which are that supposed to receive
the fund are not included, while those who do not qualify are listed in this system.
The information obtained during the census and bleaching when repeat visits
do not appear to be accurate and not feasible, this list (e-kasih database) will be
excluded from the original category and not to be considered to receive fund under the
program poverty reliefs. This research is important to ensure poverty alleviation
programs or funds are delivering to poverty legitimate beneficiaries.
348
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
2.1
Poverty Reduction
Poor are define based on the minimum monthly household income below
RM760 the peninsula, more than RM1, 050 in Sabah and RM910 in Sarawak. While
extreme poverty is income below RM460 down in peninsula, more than RM630 in
Sabah and less than RM590 in Sarawak. Low income households are income less than
RM2300 to the peninsula, Sabah and Sarawak (Pelan Transformasi Jabatan Kebajikan
Masyarakat 2011-2015). Extreme Poverty Group is that each family of five members
(Example: husband, his wife and three children) live below the poverty if their gross
income is less than RM800 month (Ungku Aziz, 2012). Through the Ninth Malaysia
Plan (RMK-9), the country managed to reduce the poverty rate to 2.8 percent in 2010.
Overall poverty has declined significantly from 3.8% in 2009 to 1.7% in 2012. Sabah
recorded the highest poverty of 1.6 followed by Perlis (0.5), Sarawak and Sabah
respectively by 0.3 percentage recorded. For Terengganu, Perak and Pahang
percentage of poverty is at 0.2 (Economic Planning Unit, Level Poverty Line, 2012).
According to Alwi Abdullah Hj Hassan (2006), research entitled Kemiskinan
Di Kalangan Masyarakat Islam Di Malaysia: Kajian Terhadap Agensi- Agensi
Pembasmi Kemiskinan" study the problem of poverty among the Muslim community
in Selangor, with emphasis on the effectiveness of the agencies poverty eradication.
According to Saravanan (2011), the attrition problem is a major problem caused by
registration and census information is not complete, KIR are not registered with eKasih and registration information through NGOs that do not reach the intended. Bias
and inconsistent decision are inevitable if the decision-making process is totally
depends on intuition, subjective judgement or emotion (Rosmayati, 2010). Thus, the
development model proposed decision support system is expected to help in the fund
distribution so that it can be implemented in a more systematic and precise. The
engaged programs and funds is a transparent vital to ensure qualified participants will
be help given appropriate opportunities to change their lives, thus allowing them to be
very independent and for better life. The lack of transparency in the selection of
beneficiaries is a very large impact on the development for next generation. Model of
349
intelligent decision support system is a mechanism that can prevent this problem
occurs.
2.2
350
DSS have the basic design that consists of user interface, data management
and model-based management (Hamidah et al, 2010). Figure 1 shows a schematic
view of DSS as defined by Turban (2007).There are five key approaches of DSS
defined based on the input they can handle and type of decision processes they can
support including communication driven, data-driven, document-driven, model-driven
and knowledge-driven DSS
2.3
Pervan et.al. claim there are types of DSS such as Personal DSS, Group
Support System, Intelligent DSS and large data centered System (EIS and data
warehouse). Intelligent decision support system is combination of DSS and field of
artificial intelligent (AI) that makes use of computer based mechanism to develop
intelligence systems. IDSS can be classed into two generations: the first involves the
use of rule-based expert system and second generation uses neural network, genetic
algorithm and fuzzy logic (Turban et al., 2005). Table 1 shown is the literature review
of research on Decision Support System Model
351
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
Top management
system
FIELD
DSS
functionalities specifically
maintaining attendance & generate
report for top management
Dr. Mark Littleboy
Biophysical Models
Multiple
Objective DSS
Salinity
(MODSS)
E-business
DSS
use.
(Ily Amalina
Tourism Destination
et.al,2010)
Choice system
DSS
Human Resource
Machine Learning
2010)
Management
and IDSS
DSS
Madyatmadja
Fund
physical project
F.O Akinyemi
Poverty
Geo-Information
Management
Penerimaan
TOPSIS (Multi
Satria
Bantuan Siswa
Attributes
Miskin (BSM)
Decision Making)
and DSS
352
3.0
METHODOLOGY
This section will discuss method of the recommended IDSS model (1A-FDS)
and framework illustration to determine 1AZAM recipients. 1AZAM recipient is has
multi criteria of poor indicator and also explores which criteria that have the highest
factor on determining the citizen poverty condition. The model used for determination
of 1AZAM recipients is FAHP. The Analytic Hierarchy Process is aimed at
facilitating decision-making in problems which involve multiple criteria. AHP method
set the decision problems in form of structured hierarchically at different levels, each
level consisting of a finite number of elements. The priorities represent the relative
importance of the decision elements at that level (Fiarni et al., 2013). Fuzzy Analytic
Hierarchy Process (FAHP) is a combination of fuzzy logic techniques that aim to
facilitate the assessment criteria that is not definitive (Kabir, 2011). The fuzzy set
theory is designed to deal with the extraction of the possible outcome from a variety
of information expressed in vague and imprecise terms (Wang, 2008).
The FAHP model provides priority weights for the 1AZAM receiver, based on
the KPWKM guidance and priority on multiple criteria on defining poverty. The
alternative with the highest priority weight is then selected for the recommendation.
Figure 2 shows the hierarchy is based on the level interest that been determined and
the goal is to select the poor from the all citizen data, based on schemes criteria. This
figure is based on Hierarchy tree for recommendation of SKTM recipient wrote by C.
Fiarni et.al.
353
4.0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
This study proposed to develop the intelligent decision support system for
distribution of poverty relief distribution by implement the proposed framework. The
research stages are:
a. Preliminary study
The goal is to understand material related to intelligent decision making system
and physical tools allocation.
b. Problem identification
Find general description of the current problem that to avoid non-legitimate
beneficiaries.
c. Literature review
Review literatures to determine the appropriate stages and good methodology,
which avoid us from neglected important factor or variables. Review theory from
books, journal and scientific articles.
354
ii.
Direct observation and interview with related person are our focus in this
area. It can also be done by collecting data from any variables that can
influence the intelligent decision making of poverty relief distribution
allocation.
Create the decision support system that aligns with poverty profile &
recipients criteria.
ii.
Create flow chart for poverty relief transmission system that had
developed.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
f. Implementation
The model design implementation using software.
g. Test / Evaluate
To run User Acceptance Test (UAT) and Final Acceptance Test (FAT) whether
the proper application skill build including all the models.
5.0
CONCLUSION
This work identify the existing DSS in fund distribution and recommend new
framework to overcome these limitations. The outcome or main contributions from
this study to decide the selection of beneficiaries who are really worth and engage
1AZAM. FAHP used to evaluate each poor criterion in order to determine
beneficiaries and classification of real citizen poverty condition.
355
REFERENCES
Akinyemi, F.O., Preliminary Design Of A Spatial Decision Support System For
Poverty Management.
Economic Planning Unit, Level Poverty Line (2012). Retrieved September 10, 2014,
from http://www.epu.gov.my.
Fakhry, Hussein (2010) "A Fuzzy Logic Based Decision Support System for Business
Situation Assessment and e-Business Models Selection," Communications of
the IIMA: Vol. 10: Iss. 4, Article 6.
Hamidah J., Abdul Razak H., Zulaiha A. O. (2010). Intelligent Techniques for
Decision Support System in Human Resource Management, Decision Support
Systems Advances in Ger Devlin (Ed.), ISBN: 978-953-307-069-8, InTech.
356
K.P Tripathi. Decision Support System Is A Tool For Making Better Decisions In
The Organization, Indian Journal of Computer Science and Engineering
(IJCSE), Vol2, No. 1, ISSN: 0976-5166.
Mohd Ayop, A. R., (2013). Kejayaan Malaysia Dalam Program Basmi Kemiskinan.
Retrieved from http://www.penerangan.gov.my
Mohamad Zahir Zainudin (2006). Persepsi Kumpulan Sasar Terhadap Skim Bantuan
Jabatan Kebajikan Masyarakat Di Wilayah Persekutuan Kuala Lumpur.
Retrieved from http://psasir.upm.edu.my/6368/1/IPSS_2009_2a.pdf
A.S Ily Amalina,M. N. Noor Maizura, & H. A. Noraida (2010) Intelligent Decision
Support System for Tourism Destination Choice: A Preliminary Study.
http://www.jkm.gov.my/images/stories/pdf/pelan_transformasi_jabatan.pdf.
Rosmayati M., Abdul Razak H., Zulaiha A. O. & Noor Maizura M. N.,(2010, March)
Decision Support Systems (DSS) in Construction Tendering Processes, IJCSI
International Journal of Computer Science Issues, Vol. 7, Issue 2, No 1.
Saelindri et.al. Sistem Pendukung Keputusan Untuk Menentukan Kelayakan
Penerimaan Bantuan Siswa Miskin (BSM) Dengan Menggunakan Metode
TOPSIS.
357
Turban, E., Sharda, R., Delen, D.(2011).Decision Support and Business Intelligence
Systems. 9th Edition. Prentice-Hall., Inc. Upper Saddle River. New Jersey.
358
nasriyyah@yahoo.com, drsattar@ukm.edu.my
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
Keperluan untuk tenaga kerja yang berkemahiran tinggi boleh dicapai melalui
penglibatan industri yang aktif dalam TVET.Salah satu bentuk kerjasama yang
memerlukan penglibatan industridalam TVET adalah latihan kemahiran.Kerjasama
yang dibentuk dalam latihan kemahiran di antara pusat latihan dan industri dapat
melahirkan lebih ramai tenaga kerja mahir sejajar dengan wawasan Malaysia untuk
359
Salah satu faktor yang memainkan peranan dalam penglibatan industri dalam
latihan kemahiran adalah budaya organisasi di industri itu sendiri. Menurut Beach
(1993) budaya merupakan elemen penting dalam sesebuah organisasi yang boleh
digambarkan sebagai perkara yang boleh dilakukan dan yang tidak boleh dilakukan
sehingga boleh dijadikan panduan kepada organisasi. Kebiasaannya, budaya
organisasi telah berakar umbi dalam sistem organisasi yang mana ianya adalah satu
proses yang berkembang dalam masa yang lama. Budaya organisasi menentukan cara
organisasi menjalankan aktiviti dan hasilnya juga akan mempengaruhi prosesprosesnya. Disebabkan budaya itu telah berakar umbi, budaya organisasi adalah sukar
untuk berubah kerana sering terdapat rintangan terhadap melepaskan sesuatu iaitu
nilai, sikap dan kepercayaan yang telah diamal pada masa lalu.
2.0
BUDAYA ORGANISASI
Budaya organisasi memberi impak yang besar dalam kemajuan sesebuah
oleh satu norma yang dipatuhi sebagai pedoman dalam bertindak. Pada dasarnya
manusia atau seseorang yang berada dalam kehidupan organisasi berusaha untuk
menentukan dan membentuk sesuatu yang dapat menampung kepentingan semua
pihak, agar dalam menjalankan aktiviti yang tidak bercanggah dengan pelbagai sikap
dan perilaku individu lain dalam lingkungan persekitarannya. Inilah yang
dimaksudkan dengan budaya di mana seseorang individu berperanan membentuk satu
perilaku nilai, sikap dan terbentuknya kepercayaan sehingga mempengaruhi sesebuah
organisasi.
361
3.0
PENGLIBATAN
PEMBANGUNAN
INDUSTRI
DAN
KEMAHIRAN
(JPK)
PERANAN
DALAM
JABATAN
LATIHAN
KEMAHIRAN
362
menyatakan usaha untuk menarik minat industri bekerjasama dengan pusat latihan
dalam program SLDN akan dipergiatkan selaras dengan Pelan Induk Latihan Dan
Pembangunan Kemahiran Pekerjaan Malaysia 2008-2020 yang menggariskan lima (5)
Teras Strategik.Teras strategiksatu (1), dua (2) dan empat (4) memberi tumpuan untuk
memperkukuhkan dan mempertingkatkan kerjasama dan perkongsian pintar dengan
pihak industri (Kementerian Sumber Manusia 2008). Ianya selari dengan kenyataan
Abdullah, 2013 iaitu perkongsian antara penyedia latihan dan industri boleh menjadi
strategi yang saling bermanfaat dalam memberikan latihan tenaga kerja dan
mengekalkan pengetahuan pekerja.
3.1
Berbeza dengan sistem latihan lain, SLDN menyediakan latihan yang lebih
sistematik berorientasikan industri dengan menggabungkan latihan di pusat latihan
dengan latihan kemahiran di tempat kerja.Pelaksanaan program SLDN dilakukan di
dua lokasi, iaitu 70-80% latihan dijalankan di industri manakala 20-30% latihan
dijalankan
di
institusi
latihan.Dengan
berkonsepkan
student
centered
dan
Program SLDN
dilihat banyak memberi manfaat kepada golongan seperti pelajar tercicir dan pekerja
industri yang memerlukan sijil sebagai jaminan pekerjaan serta meningkatkan kerjaya
sedia ada
363
4.0
komitmen
industri
terhadap
latihan
masih
tidak
364
5.0
CADANGAN PENAMBAHBAIKAN
Kerjasama yang wujud antara pusat latihan dan industri dalam program SLDN
dilihat sebagai satu usaha yang harus diteruskan. JPK sebagai jabatan yang
bertanggungjawab untuk menyelaras program SLDN perlu memainkan peranan untuk
menggalakkan penyertaan industri. Beberapa inisiatif yang berpotensi seperti
melibatkan pihak industri menyertai kempen dan promosi program SLDN di lihat
membantu pihak industri untuk sama-sama terlibat dalam program ini. Selain daripada
itu kepakaran dan input daripada pihak industri juga perlu di ambilkira untuk
penambahbaikan program SLDN. Negara-negara maju seperti Jerman dan United
Kingdom memainkan peranan besar dalam pendidikan teknikal dan vokasional. Setiap
sektor perindustrian di United Kingdom misalnya mempunyai badan peneraju mereka
sendiri untuk menentukan piawaian industri yang digunakan sebagai tanda aras untuk
melatih dan menetapkan tahap kemahiran perantis.
Di pihak industri pula, budaya organisasi yang telah berakar umbi setelah
sekian lama perlu di ubah untuk membantu kerajaan menjayakan program SLDN.
Budaya tanggungjawab sosial dan pentingkn ilmu serta memberi latihan untuk laluan
kerjaya kepada pekerja perlu diterapkan.Pool (2000) mencadangkan bahawa budaya
organisasi membenarkan organisasi untuk menangani masalah yang sentiasa berubah
untuk adaptasi kepada persekitaran luaran dan integrasi dalaman sumber organisasi,
kakitangan dan polisi bagi menyokong penyesuaian luaran.Ini disebabkan budaya
organisasi reflek kepada nilai, kepercayaan dan sikap yang diamalkan oleh pekerja
dalam menghadapi sesuatu situasi (Scott-Findlay dan Eastabrooks, 2006).Dengan cara
ini, keterlibatan industri dalam program SLDN dapat ditingkatkan dan seterusnya
dapat melahirkan lebih ramai pekerja mahir.
6.0
KESIMPULAN
mereka melalui
orientasi pembelajaran di pusat latihan dan suasana kerja sebenar di industri. Ini
secara tidak langsung memastikan masalah mismatch antara kompetensi dan
kebolehkerjaan perantis setelah tamat latihan dapat di elakkan.Berjaya atau tidak
sesebuah organisasi itu bergantung kepada perubahan budaya organisasi itu
sendiri.Budaya organisasi di industri perlu bersedia menerima perubahan untuk
mencapai kecemerlangan.Pendapat ini disokong oleh(Lorenzo, 1998; Ahmed, 1998;
Pool, 2000) yang menyatakanbudaya organisasi memainkan peranan penting dalam
kejayaan sesuatu proses perubahan.
RUJUKAN:
Ahmed, P.K. (1998), Culture and climate for innovation, European Journal of
Innovation Management, Vol. 1 No.1, pp.30-43.
Glaser, Susan R; Zamanou, Sonia and Hacker Kenneth, 1987, Measuring and
Interpreting Organizational Culture.Management Communication Quartely
Vol.1 No.2 pp 173-178.
Hofstede, Geert, 1986, Cultures Consequences, International Differences in Work
Related Values. Sage Publication, Beverly Hills/London/New Delhi.
Kartono, Kartini, 1994, Psikologi Sosial untuk Manajemen, Perusahaan dan industri,
Jakarta. PT.Raja Grafindo Persada.
366
Lorenzo, A.L. (1998), A framework for fundamental change: context, criteria, and
culture, Community College, Journal of Research & Practice, Vol. 22 No.4,
pp.335-48.
Pool, S.W. (2000), Organizational culture and its relationship between job tension in
measuring outcomes among business executives, Journal of Management
Development, Vol. 19 No.1, pp.32-49.
Robbins, Stephen P., 2013, Organizational Behaviour, Upper Saddle River, New
Jersey Prentice- Hall Inc.
Schmidt, H. dan Alex, L. (1997).The dual system of vocational education and training
in Germany : Dalam Roderick Millar dan Jonathan Reuvid (Eds.), Doing
business with Germany. London
367
ABSTRACT
parameter
(i.e.
pouring
temperature
and
cooling
length)on
pouring
temperature
and
cooling
length
could
368
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Syarif, Alhawari& Mohammed, 2014). This paper reports the observations and results
of the investigation on the effects of cooling plate length and pouring temperature (CS
parameter)to produce an aluminium alloy A319 with anon-dendritic microstructure.
2.0
METHODOLOGY
The starting material used in this study was A319 aluminium alloy ingots with
the chemical composition as shown in Table 1. The X-ray fluorescence (XRF)
machine was used to determine the chemical composition of the alloy. The solidus,
liquidus and liquid fraction within the semisolid range of the as-received alloy were
estimated
by
using
Netzsch-STA
(TG-DSC)
449
F3
simultaneous
and
then
immediately
quenched
in
water.The
microstructural
characterisations were carried out using Olympus optical microscope after the
samples were surface finished and etched in Kellers agent for 20 s.
Si
Cu
Mg
Mn
Zn
Ni
Fe
Cr
Ti
Al
6.26 2.91 0.30 0.19 0.71 0.06 0.53 0.03 0.03 Remainder
370
Furnace
Cooling slope
plate
Mould
60
60
3.0
Liquidus
300
620
300
630
300
640
400
620
400
630
400
640
500
620
500
630
500
640
610
610
610
mould. However, the main requirement of SSM processing is the production of solid
spheroidal structure in liquid matrix(Chen, Hao, Sun & Li, 2003; Omar, Palmiere,
Howe, Atkinson &Kapranos, 2005).While, Figures 2(b) - 2(j) show the
microstructures of the ingots that cast over the CS. Figures 2(b) - 2(j) reveal the
alteringin microstructuremorphology affected by changing the CS length and pouring
temperature. From the observation, CS process was capable of producing nondendritic
structure but the variation of CS length and pouring temperature combination has no
significanteffects on the morphology of the microstructures(Birol,2007).
372
Figure 2: Optical Microstructuresof A319 Alloy (a) As-cast and After CS Process At
Various Pouring Temperatures and Cooling Lengths(b) 620C-300mm (c) 620C400mm (d) 620C-500mm (e) 630C-300mm (f) 630C-400mm (g) 630C-500mm
(h) 640C-300mm (i) 640C-400mm(j) 640C-500mm
Figure 3(a) and 3(b) respectively show the variations in the shape factor and
globule size of -Al particles that produced from various pouring temperatures and
CS lengths. Based on the quantitative analysis, even though the effect of different
pouring temperatures and CS lengths combination is small, there was however an
optimum CS length for each pouring temperature to produce the best shape factor
with smallest primary grain size. Shape factor was defined as P2/4A, where P is the
perimeter and A is the area of the particle (the shape factor of a circle is equal to one).
While, the average size of the globule primary particles was defined as
[2(Ai/)1/2]/N, where Ai is the area of each particle and N is the total number of
particles in each image(Czerwinski, 2002;Arif, Omar & Muhamad, 2012;Arif, Omar,
Muhamad, Syarif&Kapranos, 2013;Chen, Hao, Sun & Li, 2003). The analysis
indicates that when the pouring temperature was 620 C, the CS with length of 300
mm has produced nearly spherical Al particles and smaller globule sizes than those
373
produced by the CS with length of 400 mm and 500 mm. While, at a pouring
temperature of 630 C, 400 mm long slope produced more sphere-shape Al with
smaller globule sizes compare to others CS length, and differing at pouring
temperature of 640 C, where the nearly spherical and smaller Al has been
generated by the largest CS length (500 mm).However, the feedstock with the best
shape factor (0.75 0.09) andsmallest average size (34 4.6 m) of globule Al
particleshas been produced through the optimum combination of the pouring
temperature and cooling length of 630 C and 400 mm, respectively.
(a)
(b)
Figure 3:Variations InThe (a) Shape Factor and (b) Globule Size of -Al
ParticlesWhich Formed Over The CS AtVarious Pouring Temperatures and Cooling
Lengths
374
1.5
100
1.1
80
70
kne
e
0.9
60
50
40
0.7
30
DSC
curve
0.5
90
Liquid fraction
profile
1.3
20
10
0.3
0
490
510
530
550
570
590
Temperature (C)
610
630
Figure 4:DSC Heating Flow and Liquid Fraction Curves For A319 Alloy
100 m
4.0
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Arif,
M.A.M.,
Omar,
M.Z.,
Muhamad,
N.,
Syarif,
J.,
&Kapranos,
P.
Chen, T.J.,Hao, Y., Sun, J., &Li, Y.D. (2003). Effects of Mg and RE additions on the
semi-solid microstructure of a zinc alloy ZA27.Science and Technology of
Advanced Materials, 4, 495502.
Omar, M.Z., Atkinson, H.V., Howe, A.A., Palmiere, E.J., Kapranos, P., &Ghazali,
M.J. (2009).Solid-liquid structural break-up in M2 tool steel for semi-solid
metal processing.Journal of Materials Science, 44, 869-874.
Rincn, E., Lpez, H.F., Cisneros, M.M., Mancha, H., & Cisneros, M.A. (2007).
Effect of temperature on the tensile properties of an as-cast aluminum alloy
A319.Materials Science and Engineering: A, 452-453, 6827.
Salleh, M.S., Omar, M.Z., Syarif, J., Alhawari, K.S., & Mohammed, M.N. (2014).
Microstructure and mechanical properties of thixoformed A319 aluminium
alloy. Materials and Design, 64, 142152.
377
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
378
feedstock in the chemical industry (Carlsson, 2009). High petroleum prices and the
scarcity of known petroleum reserves demand the study of other sources of energy.
Biodiesel production with high quality feedstock such as vegetable oil are
relatively expensive compare to fossil diesel cost. Edible vegetables oil is a feedstock
that commonly used in producing biodiesel. Production of biodiesel could be less
expensive if the feedstock is from inedible food or waste. Therefore, one of the most
promising less-expensive feedstock is animal fat such as chicken fat, beef tallow, etc.
Besides to reduce the environmental problems caused by incomplete combustion of
diesel engines, at the same time, by using low-cost feedstock such as inedible animal
fat could indirectly reduce the waste that comes from the slaughterhouse.
2.0
OBJECTIVES
a)
To produce a sustainable and ecofriendly fuel that could substitute the fossil
fuels.
b)
c)
3.0
Methodology consists of four main parts which is Part 1; Laboratory works (to
obtain the important parameters). Part 2; Design, Fabrication and commissioning of
Mini Plant. Part 3; production of Biodiesel including the availability renewable
feedstock which is Chicken Fats (CF) and the three-stage main process which is
Hydrolysis, Transesterification and Washing. Part 4; the product analysis consist of
conversion analysis, density analysis and combustion analysis.
3.1
3.2
This fabricated mini plant that has the capacity of producing 15 litres of
Biodiesel took about 6 months of designing and fabrication work to finish. Starting by
brain storming the idea on how to design a simple but efficient flow processing plant
till the fabrication work to build up a new features in a whole new look , this project
takes quite sometimes to finish as certain design need to be modified during the
process operation. Figure 2 shows the schematic diagram of the Mini Plant which
consist of main components such as Hydrolysis tank, Transesterification mixer tank,
separation and washing components. The solid model of the mini plant is as shown in
Figure 3.
380
2.3
Part 3: Process
a)
Materials
The feedstock samples of Chicken Fats (CF) were provided by a local chicken
supplier which has been wash thoroughly to remove foulness and bloodstain that can
affect the hydrolysis process. Then, the CF is well fine-filtered to remove any
unwanted part of the chicken mixed with the samples. Specific calculated amount of
CF is needed to produce the desired amount of Biodiesel.
b)
First step of the process is boiling up the CF along with distilled water Hydrolysis process
381
c)
382
2.4
Part 4: Analysis
a)
Analysis of Biodiesel
The samples of biodiesel were analysed accordingly through respected
formula below:
i.
Titration Value:
Initial syringes value Final syringes value = Titration value
ii.
iii.
Amount of catalyst
Amount of catalyst =
iv.
+ Titration Value
Conversion Analysis
Conversion Efficiency =
v.
100 %
Density Analysis
Density, g/ml =
vi.
Combustion Analysis
The product Biodiesel (alkyl ester) is combust in alternative fuelled engine to
observe the combustion and the exhaust gas.
383
3.0
3.1
BEAKER A
CHICKEN
DISTIL
OIL
TIME
FATS (g)
LED
EXTRACT
TAKEN
WATER
ED
(min)
(ml)
(ml)
100
300
80
30
100
300
80
30
(non-cut)
BEAKER B
(cut)
From this experiment, the scale of oil can be extracted from chicken fats is
known. Error might come from human error, technical error. Human error could be
listed as eyes were not perpendicular to the measuring scale of the apparatus used,
neglected time counting, non-written data and etc. Technical error may be from
heating element and apparatus failure.
384
3.2
Table 2: Result for titration solution added to neutralize the free fatty acid
Beaker
1 ml
1 ml
1 ml
Average
1 ml
a)
Titration Calculation
(g/l)
(%)
Potassium
80
Hydroxide(KOH)
0.8
Sodium
90
Catalyst
(g/l)
@ 8.75
9.75
@ 6.1
7.1
Hydroxide(NaOH) 0.9
b)
Base Calculation
Base (KOH) =
Base (NaOH) =
c)
Required Catalyst
Required catalyst (g/l) = Base + Titration Solution Added
385
3.3
Hence, oil sample must be heated up to 70oC in order to reduce the viscosity
of the sample. Besides, while titrating the oil, it was important to observe promptly
the changes of solution from colorless to pinkish color.
3.4
Plant efficiency
4.0
CONCLUSION
In conclusion, chicken fat could be one of the low cost feedstock as well as to
produce a sustainable and ecofriendly fuel that could substitute the fossil fuels. Result
for density and combustion are not stated due to some technical problem at this time.
5.0
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
a)
b)
c)
REFERENCES
Engineering,
Universiti
Sains
Malaysia,
School
of
387
International Journal on Power Engineering and Energy (IJPEE) SSN PRINT(23147318) and Online (2314 730X) Vol. (4) No. (2) April 2013
International Journal on Power Engineering and Energy (IJPEE) ISSN PRINT(23147318) and Online (2314 730X) Vol. (4) No. (2) April 2013
Nivedita Das, Vinayak Kulkarni and Mayur Lokhande International journal on Power
Engineering and Energy (IJPEE) ISSN PRINT(2314-7318) and Online (2314
730X) Vol. (4) No. (2) April 2013
388
Politeknik Mukah
fardillah.poli@1govuc.gov.my, habsah.poli@1govuc.gov.my
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
A bank is a financial institution that helps the public to accept deposits, money
lending, clear cheque and transferring funds, acceptance of deposits, granting of credit
389
facilities, and management of loans. The history of banking begins with the banks of
merchants of the ancient world, which provide loans to farmers and traders who
carried goods between cities. The banking system in Malaysia comprises of Central
Bank, commercial banks and other financial institutions. The conventional banks
included Maybank, CIMB, Public Bank, HSBC Bank, Bank Simpanan National, RHB
Bank, Hong Leong Bank, Bumiputera Commerce Bank, and Ambank. The first
commercial bank to be established in Malaysia was Chartered Mercantile Bank of
India, London and China (later renamed as Mercantile Bank) in 1859.
In today's
world, a bank provides several general banking activities to the customers. Bank earns
its operating profit through functional activities of these departments under general
banking. In order to ensure good performances, the bank cannot avoid the function of
customer service. The services provided to customer will directly reflect the banks
image. Therefore, there is a close relationship between service quality and customer
satisfaction. According to Parasuraman et.,al (1985) and Zeithaml et., al (1990) noted
that the key strategy for the success and survival of any business institution is the
deliverance of quality services to customers. Customers needs are changing and they
want everything very fast and within short span of time. This change in customer
attitude has gone hand in hand with the development of ATMs, phone and net
banking along with availability of service right at the customer's doorstep. This
include the time taken to be served in the counter is too long. The customers need to
queue for a long time of period before it is his or her turn to make the transactions.
Therefore, it comes to few questions that to what extent that the customer
satisfaction towards the service quality provided by the banks? Therefore, bankers
can identify and improve the service quality in order to increase the level of customer
satisfaction. The RATER Model has been adapted from Shah & Asst (2013) using
useful
acronym
RATER:
Reliability,
Assurance,
Tangible,
Empathy
and
390
2.0
3.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
of the user. Therefore, it can conclude that customers are the sole judges of service
quality. Berry et. al (1990) pointed out since customers are the sole judge of service
quality, an organization can build strong reputation for service quality when it can
constantly meet customer service expectation. Customers can assess the service
quality by comparing their expectation with perception. Gupta & Agarwal (2013)
studies comparative study of customer satisfaction in public and private sector banks
in India.
The research showed that the customer satisfaction in terms of service quality
is a relational marketing paradigm. The relationships are mostly viewed from the
perspective of the firm providing services. For service firm like banks, building strong
relationship is important for improving customer satisfaction through service quality.
There are three important terms related to the customer satisfaction, which are
responsiveness, reliability, tangibles and empathy. The researcher has suggested that
the bank should provide some sort of guidelines to the policy makers (managers) of
banks to take appropriate decision to improve the quality of services.
This research applied five dimensions (RATER) of service quality that which
is adopted from (Shah& Asst, 2013) to examine the first objective. Each dimension is
measured by five items. Reliability means the ability of an employee to perform its
intended or required function on demand and without failure and it also refers to
ability of the employees to perform the promised service dependably and accurately.
Tangibles mean having actual physical existence. It shows the physical aspects of the
services as physical facilities, appearance of personnel and tools & equipment used
for provision of services (Gupta & P.K.Agarwal, 2013). Assurance means the act of
assuring or a declaration or full confidence are designed for the services provided. It
also refers to knowledge and courtesy of employees and their ability to inspire trust
and confidence (April & Pather, 2008). It is a diverse feature that provides confidence
to customers such as the firms specific service knowledge, polite and trustworthy
behavior of employees. (It is the physical surroundings represented by objects, such as
interior design; and subjects, such as the appearance of employees (Shanka, 2012).
Empathy means the capacity to share or recognize emotions that experienced by
someone. It refers to caring, individualized attention the firm provides its customers
and responsiveness refers to the ability of a machine or system to adjust quickly and
392
altered external conditions and to remain stable operation without undue delay. It also
refers to the willingness to help customers and provide prompt service (April &
Pather, 2008). Most electronic service quality scales have responsiveness as a major
dimension (Parasuraman et al., 2005; Kim et al., 2006; Nusair and Kandampully,
2008; Shachafet al., 2008. Besides that, it also refers to a firms willingness to assist
its customers by providing fast and efficient service performance (Shanka, 2012).
4.0
5.0
Table 2 shows the frequency and percentage of the respondents from Mukah
Sarawak. From the table above, out of 381 samples, majority of our respondents were
female (58.8%) while 224 or (41.2%) were male. Out of the 381 respondents, 198
(52%) were married and 183 (48%) respondents were still single. Besides that, 114
(29.9%) respondents were within the range of 18-22 years old, 65 (17.1%) were in
ages 23-27 years old, 54 (14.2%) respondents were in ages 33-37 years old, while the
remaining 53 (13.9%) respondents were in between 28-32 years old. Furthermore, 27
(7.1%) of the respondents were in ages 43-47 years old, 26 (6.8%) were in ages 38-42
years old, and lastly 21 (5.5%) respondents were in between 48-52 and 53 above years
old. Moreover, 81 (21.3%) of the respondents were Malay, 79 (20.7%) were Chinese,
53 (19.4%) were other races, 71 (18.6%) were Melanau, 65 (17.1%) were Iban, and
the rest 11 (2.9%) were Indian. Out of the 381 respondents, 164 (43%) of the
respondents were SPM level, 126 (33.1%) respondents had accomplished their
Diploma level, 75 (19.7%) and 15 (3.9%) were holding Degree or others, and the
remaining 1 (0.3%) respondents were having Master level. The sample population in
Mukah mostly chose Public Bank, which indicated the highest percentage, 35.2%,
followed by Maybank, which were 32.3% of the respondents. This is because the two
banks are located at the urban area. The frequency of the other respondents chose
BSN Bank, Hong Leong Bank, and Bank Rakyat were 10%, 8.7% and 8.1%
respectively. This is because of the non-strategic location of these banks due to far
away from the urban area. There are only 5.8% of the respondents who were choosing
Agro Bank, which might be a result of the smaller scale of the bank itself.
394
Marital Status
Ages
Ethnic Origin
(Race)
Education
Level
Chosen bank in
Mukah
N
157
224
381
183
198
381
114
65
53
54
26
27
21
21
381
79
65
11
81
71
74
381
164
126
15
1
75
381
22
31
38
33
123
134
381
Male
Female
Total
Single
Married
Total
18-22
23-27
28-32
33-37
38-42
43-47
48-52
53 above
Total
Chinese
Iban
Indian
Malay
Melanau
Other
Total
SPM
Diploma
Degree
Master
Other
Total
Agro Bank
Bank Rakyat
BSN Bank
Hong Leong Bank
Maybank
Public Bank
Total
395
(%)
41.2
58.8
100
48
52
100
29.9
17.1
13.9
14.2
6.8
7.1
5.5
5.5
100
20.7
17.1
2.9
21.3
18.6
19.4
100
43.0
33.1
3.9
0.3
19.7
100
5.8
8.1
10.0
8.7
32.3
35.2
100
Mean
SD
3.220
.780
3.305
.825
3.383
.827
3.530
.947
3.423
.930
3.714
.867
reliability is 0.270; follow by assurance 0.260, empathy 0.131 and lastly tangible
0.097. This explains reliability the most influential towards to customer satisfaction.
However, responsiveness is not significant level because the value of p is more than
0.05. The general form of the regression equation to predict customer satisfaction
from reliability, assurance, tangible and empathy which obtained from the coefficient
is:
CS = 0.551+0.270R+0.260A+0.097T+0.131E
Model
Unstandardized
Standardized
Coefficients
Coefficients
sig
3.566
.000
Std Error
Beta
(Constant)
.551
.155
Real
.270
.050
.264
5.347
.000
Assurance
.260
.049
.273
5.339
.000
Tangible
.097
.044
.107
2.215
.027
Empathy
.131
.054
.138
2.414
.016
Responsiveness
.083
.055
.079
1.499
.135
The value of R2
397
6.0
R Square
.706
Adjusted R
Square
estimate
.492
.45514
.499
398
Based on the research that we had conducted, Firstly, Mukah town should
provide more types of banks such as Ambank, CIMB, and Bank Islam. This is
because of some respondents has to travel from other places like Sibu and Kuching.
The choices for banks are limited for them. Besides that, some students from
Polytechnic Mukah will need to pay their fees by using Bank Islam, which now this
bank is not available in Mukah. Secondly, the banks should increase the numbers of
the ATM machines. Most of them are complaining that the numbers of ATM
machines are not enough to satisfy the users needs, especially Public Bank. They also
suggest that the ATM machines should be provided at some convenience places such
as, Medan Mall Mukah. Lastly, the service quality of the banks provided should be
improved in order to give better services to the customers. The banks should enhance
more customer rights in dealing the transactions with the banks, such as privacy of the
users. Moreover, the number of employees working in the banks is not enough. Some
of the respondents complained that the working speed of the employees is too slow.
Therefore, the employees of the bank should improve their attitudes.
REFERENCES
April, G. D., & Pather, S. (2008). Evaluating Service Quality Dimensions within eCommerce SMEs, 11(3), 109124
Belay, D., & Ebisa, D. (2012). Evaluation of customer satisfaction on bank services:
An empirical analysis, 1(November), 6471.
Bitner, M.J. and Hubbert, A.R. (1994). Encounter satisfaction versus overall
satisfaction versus service quality: the consumers voice, in Rust, R.T. and
Oliver, R.L. (Eds), Service Quality: New Directions in Theory and Practice,
Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks, CA.
Jha, B. K., Sureka, S., & Shitika. (2014). Customer s Satisfaction For ATM Services
In Bihar , India, 1(4), 4249.
Kristensen, K.; Dahlgaard, J.J. & Kanji, G.K. (1992). On measurement of customer
satisfaction, Total Quality Management, 3(2), 123-8.
Ladhari, R., Ladhari, I., & Morales, M. (2011). Bank service quality: comparing
Canadian and Tunisian customer perceptions. International Journal of Bank
Marketing, 29(3).
Liang Kheng, L., Mahamad, O., Ramayah, T., & Mosahab, R. (2010). The Impact of
Service Quality on Customer Loyalty: A Study of, 2(2), 5766.
Levesque, T. and McDougall, G. (1996), Determinants of customer satisfaction in
retailbanking, International Journal of Bank Marketing, Vol. 14 No. 7, pp.
12-20.
Mohammad Idham, M. R., Sakrani, S. N., Wahab, S. A., Abas, N., Yaacob, N. H. A.,
& Rodzi, S. N. A. M. (2013). Adaptive Of SERVQUAL Model In Measuring
Customer Satisfaction Towards Service Quality Provided By Bank Islam
Malaysia Berhad ( BIMB ) In Malaysia, 4(10), 189198.
Shah, M., & Asst, S. (2013). A Study of Customer Satisfaction towards Service
Provided by Employees of Public Banks using Servqual Model with Reference
to Durg-Bhilai Region, 2(8), 7177.
400
Singh, J., & Kaur, P. (2013). Customers' attitude towards technology based
services provided by select Indian banks: Empirical analysis. International
Journal of Commerce and Management, 23(1), 5668.
Snehalkumar, R. (2013). Measuring Customer Satisfaction In Banking Sector: With
Special Reference To Banks Of Surat City, 2(7).
Suhid, A., Md.Aroff, A. R., & Kamal, N. (2012). Factors causing student absenteeism
according to peers, 1(4), 342350.
401
hartyni@poliku.edu.my1 , hasimah_salleh@poliku.edu.my2
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
403
Belia merupakan aset negara yang paling bernilai dan berpotensi untuk
memainkan peranan penting dalam transformasi negara, oleh itu adalah mustahak
agar kedinamikan dan potensi sumbangan belia kepada pembangunan ekonomi dan
negara dipupuk dan di manfaatkan.
Mohd Noor & Samsuri (2008) dalam tulisan mereka menyatakan bidang
keusahawanan merupakan satu bidang yang diberi perhatian khusus oleh kerajaan
sesuai dengan matlamat Wawasan 2020. Hasrat kerajaan kini ialah melahirkan ramai
golongan belia yang menceburi bidang keusahawanan sepenuh masa dan menjadi
usahawan yang berjaya. Pada masa kini semakin ramai golongan belia Bumiputera
yang terbukti telah berjaya dalam perniagaan, tetapi peratus yang terlibat dalam
bidang ini adalah masih terlalu kecil. Walaupun Indeks Belia Malaysia 2011 yang
dikeluarkan oleh IPPBM menunjukkan peningkatan minat belia terhadap bidang
keusahawanan dari skor 63.3 pada 2008 meningkat kepada 68.6 pada 2011 namun
realiti penglibatan belia terutama bumiputera masih rendah. (Zoolhilmi Ahmed dan
Buerah Tunggak, 2013)
Oleh yang demikian dalam kajian ini, pengkaji ingin mengkaji dan
mengenalpasti budaya keusahawanan yang sedia ada di kalangan belia. Melalui kajian
404
ini juga, penkaji beranggapan bahawa peringkat belia yang bebeza dan pembabitan
secara terus atau tidak dalam bidang keusahawanan akan memberikan jawapan dan
pandangan yang berbeza seterusnya hasil kajian ini boleh djadikan panduan atau
rujukan yang baik mengenai kerjaya belia.
2.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
Melalui objektif kajian yang telah digariskan, kajian ini akan menjawab beberapa
persoalan yang timbul dalam kajian ini, iaitu
i.
ii.
iii.
Apakah
faktor-faktor
yang
mendorong
belia
menceburi
bidang
keusahawanan.
3.0
KAJIAN LITERATUR
3.1
Usahawan
405
3.2
406
Inisiatif diri
ii.
iii.
Kecekalan
iv.
Mencari maklumat
v.
vi.
vii.
Berorientasikan kecekalan
viii.
ix.
x.
Keyakinan diri
xi.
Ketegasan
xii.
xiii.
3.3
Nor Aishah (2002) menyatakan bahawa secara amnya terdapat tiga tarikan
yang mendorong usahawan menceburi bidang keusahawanan, iaitu
i.
ii.
iii.
408
Dalam Rancangan Malaysia ke 10- dan ke-11, (meliputi tahun 2010 hingga
2020), kerajaan telah menetapkan matlamat untuk menggalakkan generasi baru
menceburi bidang keusahawanan selain membangunkan organisasi sedia ada supaya
terlibat dalam pasaran global (Amran et.al 2010).
Peserta juga
Usaha ini disokong oleh kerajaan dengan pemberian dana kepada aktiviti
usahawan seperti yang termaktub dalam Bajet 2015 Sebanyak tujuh teras utama telah
dibentangkan dan salah satu strategi iaitu strategi ketiga- mengupaya modal insan dan
409
4.0
4.1
METADOLOGI KAJIAN
Sampel Kajian
dibawah premis
4.2
Instrumen Kajian
Instrumen kajian adalah menggunakan soal selidik yang telah digunakan oleh
pengakaji lain sebelum ini. Bagi memastikan instrument boleh digunakan dalam
kajian, satu kajian rintis telah dijalankan terhadap pelajar-pelajar Politeknik Kuching
yang terlibat dengan Program Students Business Centre. Ujian Cronbach Alpa telah
digunakan untuk menguji kebolehpercayaan soal selidik. Hasil kajian menunjukkan
bahawa indeks kepercayaan bagi mengukur budaya keusahawanan di kalangan belia
adalah 0.865. Menurut Mohd Majid (2005) instrument ini adalah baik dan boleh
digunakan kerana kebolehpercayaan melebihi 0.6.
Borang soal selidik dijadikan sebagai instrumen kajian. Mohd Majid (2000),
dalam tulisan beliau menyatakan soal selidik merupakan cara terbaik dalam
410
4.3.
Data-data diperolehi dalam kajian ini adalah daripada dua sumber iaitu data
primer dan data sekunder. Data primer ialah data yang diperolehi daipada soal selidik
manakala data sekunder diperoleh daripada buku, tesis dan jurnal berkaitan.
4.4
data tersebut dianalisis dengan perisian Statistical Package For Social Science (SPSS)
Version 21.0. Bagi meninterpretasi dapatan dari responden, nilai min akan digunakan
sebagai panduan. Nilai min merupakan nilai purata dan mewakili nilai yang banyak
dan nilai min merupakan kaedah ukuran kecenderungan memusat.
5.0
DAPATAN KAJIAN
5.1
tahun dan ke bawah. Dari aspek pendidikan seramai 79.2% responden tamat
bersekolah menengah dan selebihnya tamat pengajian di kolej dan universiti.
Kategori
Jantina
Umur
Pendidikan
Kekerapan
Peratus
Lelaki
33.3
Perempuan
16
66.7
12
50
Melebihi 40 tahun
37.5
Sekolah Rendah
Sekolah Menengah
19
79.2
Maktab/Kolej
12.5
412
Universiti
8.3
20.8
14
58.3
Jualan
23
95.8
dijalankan
Perkhidmatan
Pembinaan
19
79.2
Melebihi 10 orang
Kurang 5 tahun
15
62.5
berniaga
16.7
8.3
15 tahun keatas
Bagaimanakah perniagaan
Mulakan sendiri
24
100.0
anda dimulakan
Mewarisi keluarga
0.0
Lain-lain
0.0
20.8
Tradisi keluarga
0.0
Kehilangan pekerjaan
0.0
Minat
19
79.2
Kurang 17 tahun
8.3
memulakan perniagaan
12.5
16.7
29.2
29.2
Wang
33.3
Kebebasan
4.2
Cabaran
20.8
Kepuasan diri
10
41.7
Adakah pendidikan
Ya
23
95.8
keusahawanan penting?
Tidak
4.2
perniagaan
Jumlah pekerja
pekerjaan dahulu
413
12
50.0
Lebih 6 bulan
20.8
anda hadiri
29.2
Bil
Perkara
Nilai
Skor Min
Kebolehpercayaan
1
0.859
2.9583
0.871
1.7917
0.863
4.6250
0.860
2.7500
0.863
4.6957
0.863
4.7917
0.878
1.8750
0.865
3.9583
0.857
4.5217
0.860
3.7917
0.864
4.8333
0.866
1.9167
10
11
12
13
0.879
2.7917
0.861
4.2917
0.862
4.5417
0.861
4.7500
0.858
4.4583
0.859
4.2083
15
16
17
18
416
Jadual 5.3: Mengenalpasti Potensi, Sikap, Ciri Dan Aspirasi Keusahawanan Belia
Bil
Perkara
Nilai
Skor Min
Kebolehpercayaan
1
0.860
4.1667
0.857
3.7826
tinggi?
2
0.858
4.0417
0.862
4.1250
0.863
3.9167
0.862
4.3750
0.858
4.3750
0.858
0.4333
0.860
4.5417
0.861
4.6250
10
Hasil data dari Jadual 5.4 pula melihat apakah sumber dorongan belia dalam
417
Perkara
Nilai
Skor
Kebolehpercayaan
Min
0.862
4.7917
usahawan
2
0.857
4.0000
0.862
4.3333
0.860
4.5000
0.862
3.1250
0.860
4.2609
0.860
4.5833
0.859
3.1250
makan gaji
7
0.879
2.8750
10
Kehilangan pekerjaan
0.870
2.3333
11
0.860
4.5000
418
0.865
4.7083
13
0.852
3.2174
14
0.856
4.5000
15
0.861
4.1667
RUJUKAN
Amran Awang, Zainal Ariffin Ahmad, Abdul Rashid Said Asghar dan Khairol Anwar
Subari (2010). Entrepreneurial Orientation Among Bumiputera Small and
Medium Agro Based Enterprises (BSMAES) in West Malaysia: Policy
Implication in Malaysia. International Journal of Business and Management,
5(5), 130-143
419
Azmi Abdul Manaf, Nik Hairi Omar, Lee Kuan Yee (2012) Faktor Kritikal Kejayan
Usahawan Dalam Perniagaan. Jurnal Sains Dan Kemanusiaan vol.7,
no.1:034-045
Brush, C.G. (1992). Research on Women Business Owners: Past Trends, A New
Perspective and Future Direction. Entrepreneurship: Theory and Practice.
Vol 16 issue 4 pp5
Juhary Hj Ali & Ishak Ismail (1991). Prinsip dan Amalan Pengurusan. Kuala
Lumpur. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.
Moha Asri Abdullah (1999). Pembangunan Industri Kecil dan Sederhana: Utusan
Publications & Distributors Sdn Bhd.
420
Mohd Noor Mohd Shariff dan Samsuri Samsudin (2008). Keusahawanan Peladang di
Lembaga Kemajuan Pertanian Muda (MADA): Kajian dari Sudut Pendekatan
Sikap: International Journal of Management Studies, 15 (1), 161-180.
Moore, D.P. & Buttner, E.H. (1997). Women Entrepreneurs: Moving Beyond the
Glass Ceiling, Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications
Noor Aishah Buang (2002). Asas Keusahawanan. Selangor: Penerbit Fajar Bakti
Nor Aini Idris (2003). Daya saing usahawan wanita Melayu menghadapi cabaran
globalisasi. Prosiding Persidangan Kebangsaan 2003, 7-22.
Norita Deraman, Nizamuddin Zainudin, Omar Hamdan (2005). Kajian Tentang Ciri
Ciri Personaliti Keusahawanan di Kalangan Usahawan Bumiputera (Melayu)
Malaysia. Jurnal Manajemen & Bisness Sriwijaya. Vol 3 No 6.
Rosli Mahmood, Azrain Nasyarah Mustapa, Rosli Mohd Saad, Mohamad Yusop
Mohd Jani, Norria Zakaria, Syahrina Abdullah, Ahmad Khairi yahya, Hoe
Chee Hee, Shamsul Huda Abd.rani, Muhammad Shukri Bakar, Shiza Saatar,
Lily Julienti Abu Bakar, Habshah Bakar (2nd Edition).(2010).Prisip-prinsip
Keusahawanan Pendekatan Gunaan. Singapore: Cangage Learning Asia Pte
Ltd.
Tee Kee Pei (2000). Kajian Penerokaan Terhadap Faktor yang Mendorong Wanita
Menceburi Dalam Bidang Keusahawanan. Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.
Projek Sarjana
421
Thuaibah@Suaibah Binti Abu Bkar, Azlah Bin Md.Ali, Dr.Rozeyta Binti Omar, PM
Dr. Hishamuddin Md.Som, Syaharizatul Noorizwan Binti Muktar
(2007).Penglibatan Kaum Wanita Dalam Aktiviti Keusahawanan Di Negeri
Johor: Kajian Terhadap Factor-Faktor Kritikal Kejayaan Dan Kegagalan
Pengendalian Perniagaan. VOT 75087
Zaidatol Akmaliah Lope Pihie, Habibah Elias (1997). Keusahawanan & Motivasi
Diri. Serdang: Penerbit Universiti Putra Malaysia.
Melaksanakan
Kemahiran
Keusahawanan:
Satu
Kajian
422
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENGENALAN
Persekiran kerja yang bersih, sihat dan selamat telah dibuktikan mampu
meningkatkan prestasi kerja individu dan meningkatkan kecekapan Bagi memastikan
423
persekitaran kerja yang kondusif Kolej Komuniti Hulu Selangor telah melaksanakan
amalan kerja 5S.
Melalui inovasi ini, pelbagai aspek yang positif telah diperolehi. Di antara
aspek tersebut adalah, menjimatkan masa untuk mencapai marker dan menyimpankan
semula. Menurut kajian Hassan, Z. F. (1998), ciri-ciri inovator adalah hasil daripada
pemerhatian, masalah dan cadangan penambahbaikan yang dihasilkan oleh seseorang
individu.
2.0
PENYATAAN MASALAH
perihal menyimpan (Kamus Dewan Edisi Keempat). Penggunaan papan putih adalah
elemen utama dalam proses Pembelajaran dan pengajaran dan perlu diberikan
perhatian yang serius. Tempat letak marker dan tempat letak pemadam yang kecil
menyebabkan gangguan ketika proses PdP. Hal ini telah menyebabkan proses
Pembelajaran dan pengajaran dihentikan sementara kerana ketiadaan marker atau
marker tidak berfungsi
Slot penempatan pemadam dan marker yang tidak efektif dan mudah jatuh.
3.0
OBJEKTIF
3.1
Objektif Am
3.2
Objektif Khusus
3.2.1
3.2.2
425
4.0
Produk yang dibangunkan ini akan digunakan oleh pensyarah dan staf Kolej
Komuniti Hulu Selangor dalam bidang pembelajaran dan pengajaran sebagai alat
bantuan papan putih. Produk ini juga dibangunkan untuk memastikan semua
aktiviti berkaitan marker termasuk pengambilan dan penyimpanan dapat
dilaksanakan dengan baik dan teratur. Produk ini juga sesuai digunakan untuk
semua agensi pendidikan kerajaan dan sektor swasta yang melaksanakan proses
PdP.
5.0
KAJIAN LITERATUR
426
Sisih bererti mengasingkan apa yang perlu dan tidak perlu. Apa yang
tidak perlu itu boleh dibuang atau dilupuskan bagi menjimatkan ruang. Kemudian,
semua perlu disusun atur dan diseragamkan dengan pelbagai sistem penyimpanan
seperti angka, abjad atau warna supaya memudahkan urusan mencari serta
menyimpan dokumen.
427
6.0
PERKEMBANGAN
DAN
PEMBANGUNAN
IDEA
KAJIAN
KEBERKESANAN
LAKARAN DAN
MEMBANGUNKAN
PRODUK DENGAN
BAHAN TERBUANG
428
6.1
i.
Membangunkan Prototaip
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Penghasilan
model
adalah
proses
menghasilkan
model/prototaip
6.2
i.
ii.
iii.
7.0
METADOLOGI KAJIAN
Pelbagai kaedah yang boleh dilaksanakan bagi bagi mendapatan hasil kajian
keberkesanan. Di antara kaedah yang ada adalah temuramah, edaran soal selidik dan
sebagainya. Namun begitu, pengkaji telah memilih kaedah soal selidik sebagai
instrumen kajian keberkesanan ini kerana terdapat banyak bukti dan dapatan yang
menunkukkan ianya mudah ditadbir dan mempunyai piawai yang tetap dan serta lebih
tepat. Menurut Tuckman (1978) instrumen soal selidik merupakan cara yang berkesan
bagi mendapatkan maklumat daripada responden. Hal ini disokong oleh Ea Ah Meng
429
(1989) yang menegaskan bahawa kajian yang menggunakan soal selidik mempunyai
kelebihan tertentu iaitu:
i.
ii.
Boleh digunakan untuk satu kelompok yang ramai dan maklumat boleh
dikumpulkan sekaligus
iii.
iv.
Manakala kaedah temubual dan tinjauan data dilaksanakan bagi melihat penjimatan
atau pengurangka pembelian pen marker secara suku tahunan.
7.1
Borang soal selidik diedarkan kepada responden yang telah mencuba dan
menguji prototaip yang disediakan. Borang soal selidik ini mengandungi 2 bahagian
iaitu, bahagian A adalah berkenaan dengan latar belakang responden dan bahagian B
berkenaan dengan tahap kepuasan penggunaan EMH oleh responden sebanyak
Sembilan (9) item soalan. Kaedah borang kaji selidik adalah sebelum dan selepas
penggunanaan EMH. Set soalan kaji selidik adalah sama sebelum dan selepas.
Kaedah Skala Likert tiga (3) mata yang dimurnikan daripada skala likert lima
(5) digunakan di mana responden dikehendaki menandakan jawapan mereka tentang
sesuatu kenyataan berdasarkan kepada satu skala dari satu ekstrem kepada ekstrem
yang lain (Mohd Najib, 1999). Dengan ini responden lebih mudah membuat pilihan
jawapan berdasarkan kepada tahap kefahaman mereka. Berikut adalah petunjuk bagi
Skala Likert tiga mata yang dimaksudkan :
Skala 3 mata
Setuju
Tidak Pasti
3.Tidak Pasti
Tidak Setuju
430
7.2
Julat Min
Tahap Keberkesanan
0.0-0.9
Rendah
1.0-1.9
Sederhana
2.0-3.0
Tinggi
Temubual
8.0
Hasil dapatan kajian soal selidik sebelum penggunaan EMH terhadap 35 orang
responden dalam bentuk bilangan dan peratusan adalah seperti berikut:
8.1
431
sesuai digunakan. Item ke-4 memberikan dapatan bahawa 57.1% menyatakan bahawa
masalah marker kehabisan dakwat adalah perkara biasa dialami.
Item
% Maklumbalas
Setuju
Tidak
Tidak
Pasti
Setuju
10
20
( 14.3%)
(28.6%)
(57.1%)
23
(11.4%)
(22.9%)
(65.7%)
19
10
(54.3%)
(28.6%)
(17.1 )
26
(11.4%)
( 14.3%)
(74.3%)
15
18
( 5.7%)
(43%)
(51.4%)
25
( 5.7%)
(22.9%)
(71.4%)
18
10
(51.4%)
(28.6%)
(20%)
18
12
( 14.3%)
(51.4%)
(34.3%)
35
(0%)
(0%)
(100%)
hitam
8.2
Hasil dapatan kajian soal selidik Selepas penggunaan EMH terhadap 35 orang
responden adalah seperti berikut:
432
Item
% Maklumbalas
Setuju
Tidak
Tidak
Pasti
Setuju
26
(74.3%)
(17.1%)
(8.6%)
25
(71.4%)
(17.1%)
22
(62.9%)
(22.9%)
(14.3 )
28
(80%)
( 14.3%)
(5.7%)
33
( 94.3% )
( 5.7%)
( 0%)
20
10
(57.1%)
(28.6%)
( 14.3%)
30
( 5.7%)
(8.6%)
(85.6%)
28
(80%)
(17.1%)
(2.9%)
33
( 94.3% )
( 5.7%)
( 0%)
PdP
(11.4%)
baik.
8
433
8.3
Analisa Deskriftif min akan dianalisa melalui jadual berikut mengikut dapatan
min sebelum dan selepas penggunaan EMH
Jadual 5.0 : Perbandingan Analisa Min Sebelum dan Selepas Penggunaan EMH
Bil
Item
Analisa Min
Sebelum
Selepas
Penggunaan
Penggunaan
EMH
EMH
1.3
2.7
1.5
2.6
2.4
2.5
1.4
2.7
sewaktu PdP
1.5
2.9
1.3
2.4
2.3
1.2
1.8
2.8
2.9
Hasil analisa min jelas menunjukkan peningkatan ketara hampir kesemua item
soalan menunjukkan min melebihi 2.0 iaitu merujuk kepada tahap keberkesanan
tinggi. Hanya item no 7 menunjukkan penuruan nilai min daripada 2.3 ke 1.2. Hal ini
kerana produk EMH telah memaksa responden meletakkan marker pada kedudukan
ke bawah. Dapatan kajian ini jelas menunjukkan bahawa EMH berjaya membantu
pensyarah dalam proses PdP.
434
8.4
Kadar
Kadar
Kadar
Pengeluaran Pen
Pengeluaran Pen
Pengeluaran Pen
Marker Hitam
Marker Hitam
Marker Hitam
Permohonan
5 Kotak ( 12*5 )
5 Kotak ( 12*5 )
5 Kotak ( 12*5 )
Pengeluaran
60 batang
60 batang
60 batang
Permohonan
5 Kotak ( 12*5 )
5 Kotak ( 12*5 )
3 Kotak ( 12*3 )
Pengeluaran
60 batang
60 batang
36 batang
Permohonan
3 Kotak ( 12*3 )
3 Kotak ( 12*3 )
2 Kotak ( 12*2 )
Pengeluaran
36 batang
36 batang
24 batang
435
9.0
10.0
Berdasarkan kepada ujian percubaan prototaip dan melalui analisis data yang
dibuat, Effective Marker Holder (EMH) merupakan satu penemuan baru dalam
aksesori papan putih yang boleh digunakan sebagai medium penggunaan efektif bagi
proses Pembelajaran dan pengajaran di Kolej Komuniti Hulu Selangor. Namun
begitu, dilihat terdapat beberapa tindakan penambahbaikan perlu dilakukan ke atas
produk yang ingin dibangunkan ini agar dapat memenuhi kepuasan pengguna kelak.
EMH sesuai untuk dikomersialkan kerana kos penghasilannya yang rendah, mesra
pengguna dan merupakan satu inovasi yang terkini industridalam pengurusan
Pembelajaran dan pengajaran
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
436
RUJUKAN
Mustafa al-Khin, Mustafa al-Bugha dan Ali Asy-Syarbaji., (2011). Al-Fiqh alManhaji `ala Madzhab al-Imam asy-Syafi`i. 1st ed. Kuala Lumpur: Jabatan
Kemajuan Islam Malaysia (JAKIM)
Oborne, D. J. and Gruneberg, M.M (1983). The Physical Environment at Work. 1st
ed. England: John Wiley & Sons (2 Nov. 1983).
Mayo, Elton, et al. Teamwork and Labor Turnover in the Aircraft Industry of
Southern California. Vol. 32. Boston, Mass.: Harvard University, Graduate
School of Business Administration, Bureau of Business Research, 1944.
Kamus Dewan Edisi Ketiga (2005). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa Dan Pustaka
Mohd Najib Abd Ghafar. (1999). Penyelidikan Pendidikan. Skudai, Johor. Penerbit
Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.
437
Syed Arabi Idid. (1992). Kaedah Penyelidikan Komunikasi dan Sains Sosial. Kuala
Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.
Abdul Halim, Nurul Anis and Ihkasan, Mohd Nor and Suhaime, Nurul Shahidah and
Omar, Nurul Huda and Wan Arifin, Wan Amanina .(2013). Faktor-Faktor
Yang Mempengaruhi Kelestarian 5S Di Kolej Vokasional. In: Conference in
Education Technical Vocational Education & Training (CiE-TVET 2013), 23 September 2013, Kuala Terengganu, Terengganu
438
PoliteknikMukah
yatt.dann@gmail.com, ifaniza@pmu.edu.my
ABSTRACT
This study focuses on the mixture of Mukahcoal ash and coarse aggregate
according to the criteria of the concrete following the specification by
decreasing the amount of 10% and 25% from the actual amount of the coarse
aggregate been used whereby the raw materials can be obtained from the
Jetty near the yellow bridge area, at theMukah Selangau road. Ratio of
mixture that is used is 1:2:4. The difference between nominal concrete and
mixed concrete could be tested from the workability and the compressive
strength of the concrete. Experiment/test that has been used to determinethe
workability and strength of concrete are cube factor test and slump test.
Results from the cube factor test for as early as 7 days produced concrete
compressive strength of 10.0Mpa. On the 14th day, the compressive strength
value for the tested Mukahcoal ash concrete is 19.4Mpa, while on the 28thday,
the compressive strength value is 22.1Mpa. The results gained from the
concrete mixed with 10% of Mukahcoal ash on the 7th day is 6.5Mpa, on the
14th day is 8.0Mpa and gained 18.9Mpa on the 28th day. However, for the
concrete which was mixed with 25% of Mukahcoal ash, the test obtained
11.3Mpa on the 7th day. While on the 14th day and 28th day, the concrete
obtained compressive strength and reaches till 11.6Mpa and 21.8Mpa
respectively. From the data taken, the compressive strength of the concrete
mixture with Mukahcoal ash is lower compared to the nominal concrete. As a
conclusion from the case study, we could apply the theory that has been
studied practically by producing a better concrete by mixing other materials
with aggregate which could also become guidance for other students in
upgrading their work.
439
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Currently, much has been done to identify the characteristics and the actual
behavior of concrete. This is because of the use of concrete in nature and the
different behavior due to various factors. These factors will usually result in a drastic
change of the strength and durability of concrete. It will give a major problem in the
stability and security of the concrete structure.
1.2
Problem statement
a)
The increasingly rapid growth of the industry at present has an impact on the
production of residues and waste from any of the existing industry.
b)
1.3
Objective
440
1.4
Scope Of Study
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
The typical proportioning is 1:2:5, 1:2:4. and 1:4: 8, one part of cement, two
parts of sand, and five parts of broken stones or gravel, with the proper amount of
water for a pouring consistency. A simple test called a "slump test" is used to confirm
the proportions and consistency of the mixtures and it is then poured into wood or
steel moulds, called forms.
A study shows the strength of concrete depends on the mixing ratio according
to D. E. Shirley (1992).Concrete used without strengthening is termed as mass or
plain concrete which has the structural properties of stonegreat strength under
compressive forces and almost none under tensile ones. The tensile weakness could be
overcome if steel rods were embedded in a concrete member (F. Joseph Monier, a
French inventor).
441
Concrete was well known by the Ancient Roman and was widely used within
the Roman Empire for example, the Colosseum is largely built of concrete and the
concrete dome of the Pantheon is the worlds largest. After the empire passed, the use
of concrete became scarce until the technology was re-pioneered in mid-18th century.
2.1
Concrete grade can be distinguished based on the strength of concrete that can
be used according to the needs of use. CP 110 proposes a limited basis for the design
of concrete figures used to equalize its real strength with some suitable mix concrete.
When the average power required has been set, the mix should be designed
to meet these requirements and other requirements such as workability and others
(Owen P.L, 2007).To obtainthe right mix, severalattemptshavebeen modifiedforthe
needsandto get the appropriate criteria forthe concretemix. Accordingtothistheory,the
firsttrialmixturecan be modifiedto suit themixtureratiotoobtainthe mostpractical
finalresults.
In
other
words,mixedconcrete
can
bechangedwithouteffecting
thestrengthand stability.
The relationship between the ratio of water and cement in the concrete mix is
known as the water-cement ratio. In general,if thewater-cement ratiois lower,
442
These rates are usually calculated by volume or weight. For example, when
27 liters of water is used for mixing 50 kg cement bags, it was found that in order to
achieve maximum strength portland cement, water cement ratio is 0.33. Usually the
ratio to achieve a good work enjoyment is 12:49. (Mat LazimZakaria,2005).
2.1.3
Fine and coarse aggregate stone shall consist of all sizes to produce a
minimum pore. Cement consumption should be sufficient to fill in sand and cement
and sand should be sufficient to cover the gross aggregate. However, it will produce a
rough concrete. Thus, the excess cement and sand is required to produce a mixture
having high workability.
2.2
Fly Ash
Fly ash, also known as flue-ash, is one of the residues generated in combustion
which comprises of the fine particles that rise with the flue gases. Ash which does not
rise is termed bottom ash. Fly ash is generally captured by electrostatic precipitators
or other particle filtration equipment before the flue gases reach the chimneys of coalfired power plants and together with the bottom ash removed from the bottom of the
furnace is in this case jointly known as coal ash. Depending upon the source and
makeup of the coal being burned, the components of fly ash vary considerably, but all
fly ash includes substantial amounts of silicon dioxide (SiO2) (both amorphous
andcrystalline) and calcium oxide (CaO), both being endemic ingredients in many
coal-bearking rock strata.
qualify as nonhazardous waste in a given state, whereas, unmixed, the fly ash would
be within the range to qualify as hazardous waste.
Fly ash material solidifies while suspended in the exhaust gases and is
collected by electrostatic precipitators or filter bags. Since the particles solidify
rapidly while suspended in the exhaust gases, fly ash particles are generally spherical
in shape and range in size from 0.5 m to 300 m. The major consequence of the
rapid cooling is that only few minerals will have time to crystallize and that mainly
amorphous, quenched glass remains. Nevertheless, some refractory phases in the
pulverized coal will not melt (entirely) and remain crystalline. As a consequence, fly
ash is a heterogeneous material. SiO2, Al2O3, Fe2O3 and occasionally CaO are the
main chemical components present in fly ashes. The mineralogy of fly ashes is very
diverse. The main phases encountered are a glass phase, together with quartz, mullite
and the iron oxides hematite, magnetite and/or maghemite.
The table below shows the concentration trace elements vary according to the
kind of coal combusted to form it. In fact, in the case of bituminous coal, with the
notable exception of boron, trace element concentrations are generally similar to trace
element concentration in unpolluted soils. (K. Ladwig, 2010), Comparison of coal
combustion products to other common materials Chemical Characteristics, Electric
Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA).
444
Bituminous
Subbituminous
Lignite
SiO2(%)
20-60
40-60
15-45
Al2O3(%)
5-35
20-30
20-25
FeO3(%)
10-40
4-10
4-15
CaO
1-12
5-30
15-40
Lol(%)
0-15
0-3
0-5
Two classes of fly ash are defined by ASTM C618: Class F fly ash and Class
C fly ash. The chief difference between these classes is the amount of calcium, silica,
alumina, and iron content in the ash. The chemical properties of the fly ash are largely
influenced by the chemical content of the coal burned (i.e., anthracite, bituminous,
and lignite). (ASTM C618, 2008)
3.0
a)
Mix with 10% utilization of coal ash aggregates and a reduction in the use of
aggregates of nominal mix.
b)
Mix with 25% use of coal ash and reduction of the use of aggregate nominal
mix. Among the experiments that can be used to obtain the results of this
experiment consists of Cube test and Slump test.
445
3.1
Slump Test
A test ruin is a test done to measure the workability for all types of concrete. If
you have found a decrease value changes, it indicates a change in the material, the
water content or the mix proportions. Apparatus to be used while performing this
experiment is a frustum of a cone, long and short steel ruler, steel rod and spatula.
3.2
Cube Test
Cube test is used to determine the level of concrete strength, where each cube
will be tested at different levels according to age. Among the tested strength at age
consists of 7 days, 14 days, and 28 days. The right tools must be used to find the
results to be obtained. The equipment consisted of concrete formwork, steel rod and
spatula. Mixed concrete mixture will be given by the ratio of 1:2:4 or 1:3:6.
4.0
The result obtained is based on both types of experiments that have been
carried out through the slump test and cube test.
4.1
Slump Test
The slump test is an empirical test that measures the workability of fresh
concrete. More specifically, it measures the consistency of the concrete in that
specific batch. This test is performed to check the consistency of freshly made
concrete. Consistency is a term very closely related to workability. It is a term which
describes the state of fresh concrete. It refers to the ease with which the concrete
flows. It is used to indicate the degree of wetness. Workability of concrete is mainly
affected by consistency for the example given, wetter mixes will be more workable
than drier mixes, but concrete of the same consistency may vary in workability.
446
Average decline(mm)
0.8
25 mm
Nominal concrete
of
coal
ash
with 26 mm
concrete
4.2
Type of concrete
Consistency
Strength of slump
Nominal concrete
Rigid
25 50
Rigid
25 50
Rigid
25 50
Cube test
447
Date
no.
casting
of Date
testing
Before
After
(day)
strength
failure(kN) (Mpa)
24/08/13
30/08/13
7.38
7.46
227.0
10.0
24/08/13
6/09/13
14
7.64
7.80
438.7
19.4
27/07/13
23/08/13
28
7.48
7.63
423.9
22.1
7.6
363.2
17.2
Average 7.5
Date
no.
casting
of Date
testing
Before
After
(day)
strength
failure(kN) (Mpa)
24/08/13
30/08/13
6.476
6.577
146.7
6.5
24/08/13
6/09/13
14
6.020
6.120
181.3
8.0
27/07/13
23/08/13
28
7.103
7.144
425.9
18.9
6.61
251.3
11.1
Average 6.5
Date
no.
casting
of Date
testing
Before
After
(day)
strength
failure(kN) (Mpa)
24/08/13
30/08/13
7.326
7.419
254.9
11.3
24/08/13
6/09/13
14
7.108
7.191
261.1
11.6
27/07/13
23/08/13
28
6.405
5.977
528.7
21.8
6.9
348.2
14.9
Average 6.9
448
25
20
15
10
5
0
7 days
14days
28days
From Figure 1, the results obtained for cube test concrete aged 7 days
produced the compressive strength of 10.0Mpa. For 14 days, the value of compressive
strength is 19.4Mpa, while for 28 days it produced the compressive strength till
22.1Mpa.Concrete cubes mixed with 10% of coal ash aged 7 days produced yield of
6.5Mpa.
14 days
28 days
449
25
20
15
10
5
0
7 days
14 days
28 days
15
10
5
0
7 days
14 days
28 days
Compressive strength for 14 days cube is 8.0Mpa and 18.9Mpa for the next 28
days of cubes test as shown in Figure 2, while for the concrete cubes that mixed with
25% of coal ash produced 11.3Mpa for 7 days as shown in Figure 3. Meanwhile, for
14 days and 28 days, results obtained as much as approximately 11.6Mpa and
21.8Mpa.
Based on Figure 4,nominal concrete shows the compressive strength for the
concrete increased consistency. While for the mixed concrete with 10% coal ash
showed slightly growth but drop much than the nominal concrete. However, for the
mixed concrete with 25% coal ash showed that it drastically increase compared to
nominal concrete and the concrete that mixed with 10% coal ash on day 14 and day
28.
450
5.0
concretemixed
withcoalashcanachievethe
same
In this experiment, the use of coal ash is used as an alternative to affiliate with
coarse aggregate in concrete. Several experiments have been conducted that
experimented the nominal concrete, concrete with a mixture of 10% coal ash and
concrete with a mixture of 25% coal ash. The results or data were made between all
three of the concrete.
Based on the results obtained, it is shown that the usage of coal ash as a
combination of coarse aggregate is recommended in concrete mixture. The results
obtainedfromtheexperimentaresatisfactory.The slump test also shows that all three
concrete mixtures are recommended to provide consistent readings. However, the
combination of concrete with coal ash shows drastic changes at all from day 7 to 14
and 28 days although produced is consistently relative to the nominal concrete. The
value generated from the combination of concrete with coal ash does not exceed the
nominal value of the compressive strength of concrete.
Therefore, the environmental pollution caused by coal fly ash into the air will
certainly provide good benefits and can evenbea fast successor to the origin of the
material sin the concrete mix.
From the data analysis, it shows that the concrete produced with a mixture of
coal ash gives a drastically increase on the 14th and 28th day despite of the reading
produced is consistent compared to the nominal concrete. As more and more amount
of coal ash been used, the reading of the strength of the concrete weakening and
451
decline. It shows that the strength of the coal ash is still weaker than the coarse
aggregate.
However, coal ash gives good results for the workability. Besides that, coal
ash produces concrete heavier than normal concrete. Between the experiments that we
run are the test cubes, and slump tests, which were done to identify the workability of
coal ash as a combination of coarse aggregate.As a conclusion of this study, the use of
coal ash in concrete imparts several environmental benefits and thus it is ecofriendly.It saves the cement requirement for the same strength.
5.1
RECOMMENDATION
From the test that has been done, there are a few suggestions for improvement
on the projects in the future:
a)
The content ofcoal ash can be increased to 30% and 40% to give better results
b)
c)
The material used forthe proposedconcrete mix must being proportion and
measure coincided to produce the required strength.
d)
Make sure all the mixture has been suggested to be compacted with
compaction methods that have been established without the occurrence ofany
error.
e)
452
REFERENCES
ASTM C618 08 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. ASTM International.Retrieved 200809-18.
American Coal Ash Association. Coal Combustion Products Production & Use
Statistics.
Bang Yeong Lee, Taemin Kim and Yun Yon Kim (2010). Journal of Advanced
Concrete Technology, Volume 8.
Chusid, Michael; Miller, Steve; &Rapoport, Julie. (May 2009) The Building Brick of
Sustainability, The Construction Specifier.
453
ABSTRACT
This paper presents the stabilization of Mukah peat using fly ash, pond
ash/bottom ash from a local coal fired thermal power station and Rumbia ash
- disposal from a Sago factory. Peat or highly organic soil is well known for
its high compressibility, high natural moisture content, low shear strength
and long-term settlement. This study investigates the effect of different
amounts (i.e, 5, 10,15 and 20% of the dry peat soil mass) of fly ash, bottom
ash and Rumbia ash added to peat, collected from Mukah-Dalat Road,
Sarawak, Malaysia. The study focuses mainly on determination of Scanning
Electron Microscope (SEM) and unconfined compressive strength (UCS)
properties of the stabilized soil. With the increased percentage of additive
added to peat, the Maximum Dry Density (MDD) of the stabilized peat
increased, while the Optimum Moisture Content(OMC) decreased. The UCS
values of stabilized peat increased significantly with the increased percentage
of additive used and curing periods. This improvement on compressive
strength of Mukah peat indicates that the selected additives have the potential
to be used as stabilizer for Mukah peat. In addition, the use of these
stabilizing agents also help in reducing ponding volume for the pond ash,
reducing the usage of cement for fly ash and in recycling waste for beneficial
use for Rumbia ash. These findings are particularly important in the effort of
utilizing alternative materials such as wastes in construction while
conserving our natural resources.
Key words: Peat, maximum dry density (MDD), Optimum Moisture Content
(OMC), Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS), Scanning Electron
Microscope (SEM)
454
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Peat is classified as highly organic with organic content being more than 75%
and represents the extreme form of soft soil (Jarret,1995). Peat originates from
disintegration of plant and organic matters. It has typical characteristics which include
high natural moisture content, high compressibility and water holding capacity, low
specific gravity, low bearing capacity and medium to low permeability (Wong et.al
2008). Peat is generally considered not suitable for supporting foundations or loadings
in its natural state. Consequently, peat soil is susceptible to instability such as
localized sinking and slip failure, and massive and long-term settlement when subject
to even a moderate load increase.
Figure 1 and 2 (recorded by author) show the peat area along Mukah-Dalat Road,
Sarawak.
The rate of utilization of peat land in Malaysia is currently quite low, although
construction on peat land increasingly necessary for economic reasons (Duraisamy
et.al 2007). With the increasing demand of land for development, it is difficult to
avoid construction on theses problematic type of soils. Therefore, it is a imperative to
455
2.0
2.1
Peat Sample
456
soil is dark brown in color, slightly decomposed and in muddy brown water
2.2
Both fine dry fly ash and coarse wet pond ash were collected from Mukah
Power Generation Thermal Coal Plant, Mukah, Sarawak (Fig 3).
2.3
Rumbia trees are mainly planted in Mukah and Dalat. The demand for
rumbias main product that is sago has been increasing on annual basis. In producing
Sago, some portions of Rumbia are normally separated and disposed. These are
considered waste materials that are collected from the factory and burned to form
Rumbia ash.
2.4
The peat samples were first sun-dried for about 2 weeks. Then the sun-dried
samples were grinded and allowed to pass through a 1.18mm sieve size.In order to
investigate the effect of adding fly ash, pond ash and rumbia ash on the unconfined
compressive strength (UCS) of stabilized peat, a total of four different dosages of
additives were chosen (i.e., 5, 10, 15 and 20%). The mixing process took at least 10
minutes to perform toensure the additives were well distributed within the peat.
3.0
EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION
3.1
determined by drying the soil sample in the oven at 105C for 24 hours which was
done according to ASTM D 2974 (2000). The Loss on Ignition test was conducted
according to ASTM D 2974 (2000). The wet soil sample was first oven dried at 105C
for 24 hours. After oven dried, the sample was then placed in a muffle furnace at
450C for 5 hours. Next, the sample was cooled at room temperature for a further LOI
calculation. Organic Content (OC) was calculated according to an equation proposed
by Skempton and Petley (1970);
OC =100 C (100 N)
(1)
where, C is the correction factor (=1.04 for temperature 550 0C); Edil ( 2008) and N is
the loss on ignition in percent.
The fiber content of the soil sample was determined from the dry weight of
fibers retained on ASTM sieve no.100 over the total oven dried mass sample, which
was done according to ASTM D 1997-91 (1996). The specific gravity of the peat soil
sample was determined by using the pyknometer method based on the procedures
stated in ASTM D 422 63 (1994). Lastly, the pH test was conducted according to the
procedure detailed in BS 1377-1990 (1990) where 30gm dry peat sample which
passed through the 200 m sieve was mixed with 75ml of distilled water and stirred
for a few minutes before standing overnight. The pH value of the sample was
measured on the second day by a digital pH meter.
In addition to the tests mentioned, the microstructure of the stabilized soil was
also observed via the Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM). Table 1 shown the
physical properties for Mukah Peat which meet the properties criteria of Peat natural
behaviour.
458
Sample
440
Degree of Decomposition
H4
83.93
1.2
97
4
pH Value
3.2
84.5
UCS Values
UCS test was conducted on the original peat samples compacted at its MDD
and OMC. The UCS value for the unstabilized peat was 14 kPa. The peat samples
were then mixed with different percentage of additives, compacted at their respective
MDD and OMC. Results of UCS are presented in Figures 3, 4, 5 and 6 . It is shown
that as the amount of additives was increased a corresponding higher increase of UCS
was obtained. Also, it is found that as the curing period is increased, the UCS strength
increased as well. This is presented in Figure 3.
From the Figure 4 it can be observed that, in general, UCS values increased
with the increase of the percentage of fly ash added to the peat samples. However, it
shows little change when 10 %-20 % of FA is added at 14 and 28 days curing period
s.
Figure 5 shows that the UCS value increased with increase of PA added except
at 5-15% of PA which remained initially constant but later increased at 20% of PA
was added for the 14 and 28 day curing periods.
Figure 6 shows that increasing the percentage of Rumbia Ash and the curing
period increased the UCS strength significantly.
459
UCS Value(kPa)
160
5% Fly ash
140
120
100
80
10% Pond
Ash
15% Pond
Ash
20% Pond
Ash
5% Rumbia
Ash
10% Rumbia
Ash
60
40
20
0
7
14
28
Curing Period (Days)
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
7 Days
14 days
28 Days
10
15
20
Fly Ash %
Figure 4: Effect of Fly Ash Addition and Curing Period on UCS of Stabilized Peat
50
7 Days
40
14 days
30
28 Days
20
10
0
0
10
15
20
Pond Ash %
Figure 5: Effect of Pond Ash Addition and Curing Period on UCS of Stabilized Peat
460
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
7 Days
14 days
28 Days
0
10 15 20
Rumbia Ash %
Figure 6: Effect of Rumbia Ash Addition and Curing Period on UCS of Stabilized
Peat
4.0
SEM images of the original peat is shown in Figure 7 and stabilized peat at of
20% FA,20%, PA, 20% Rumbia Ash and cured for 28 days are shown in Figure 8, 9
and 10 respectively. All of the images are at 5000x magnification. Figure 7 shows that
the untreated peat is composed of fibers which are woody and porous in nature. Figure
8 and 9 show the predominantly spherical particles of FA and PA and formation of the
bonding or cementing structure. There were no spherical particle in Rumbia stabilized
peat but the mineralogical structure was different compared to original peat as the
cementing structure could be observed clearly. Also SEM micrographs for stabilized
peat samples show that the particles are closely packed and bonded. When mineral
soils are stabilized with fly ash and other chemical admixtures; needle like structures
or very closely packed bonds are generally observed in Figure 8, 9 and 10. But in case
of highly organic soil or peat, which is acidic in nature, closely bonded particles could
not be observed comprehensively in the image as the acidity tends to reduce the
efficiency of strength enhancement compared to mineral soils.
461
462
5.0
a)
The results for stabilized peat sample increase with the increase of Fly Ash
(5,10,15,20%) added to the original peat sample.
b)
The UCS values for peat samples increases with the increase of Pond Ash
added (5,10,15,20%)
c)
The UCS values increased with the increase of Rumbia ash added to peat
(5,10,15, 20%) and strength enhancement was significantly improved for
longer curing period from 7 , 14 and 28 days.
d)
Strength improvement was found to be the highest in peat stabilized with Fly
Ash followed by Rumbia Ash and Pond Ash
Results on this study indicated that addition of the Fly Ash, Pond Ash,
Rumbia Ash can improve the engineering properties of Mukah Peat. The used of
Rumbia ash as a new material can be considered an alternative replacement for
cement, commonly used nowadays to enhance the strength of soil.
The study is part of an on-going research that will further investigate the SEM
images and chemical reactions which related to the strength behavior of sample.
463
REFERENCES
ASTM D 1997-91.,Standard Test Method for laboratory Determination of the fiber
Content of Peat Samples by Dry Mass, Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
ASTM Standards,ASTM.Philadelphia, USA,1996.
ASTM D 2166., Standard test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of
Cohesive Soil. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. ASTM. Philadelphia,
USA,2000.
ASTM D 2974., Standard Test Method for Moisture , Ash ,and Organic Matter
of Peat and other Organic Soils.Annual Book of ASTM Standards,
ASTM,Philadelphia , USA,2000.
ASTM D 42263.,Standard Test Method for Spesific Gravity of Soils.Annual Book
of ASTM Standards, ASTMPhiladelphia ,USA. Vol.04.08;80-83,1994.
BS 1377. Part 1-4., Soils for civil Engineering purposes, British Standards
Institution. London,UK,1990.
Cortellazzo, G. and Cola, S., Geotechnical characteristics of two Italian peats
stabilized with binders, Dry Mix methods for Deep Soil
Stabilization.Bredenberg. Holm &Broms, Balkema, Rotterdam, pp. 93-100,
1999.
Deboucha, S.,Hashim,R and Alwi, A., Engineering properties of stabilized peat
soils,Electronic Journal of Geotechnical Engineering vol.13,Bund.E,2008.
Duraisamy, Y., Huat, B.B.K and Aziz A.A., Engineering properties and
compressibility behavior of tropical peat soil. American J. of Applied
Sciences, vol.4, No.10,pp.768-773,2007.
Edil,T.B., Recent advancements in geotechnical characterization and construction
over peat and organic soil, In Proceedings of 2nd International Conference on
advances in soft soil Engineering and Technology ,Ed Huat, et al., Putrajaya
,Malaysia, pp.3-35,2003.
464
Eskioglou, P. and Oikonomou, N., Protection of Environment by the use of Fly ash
in Road Construction, Global NEST Journal, vol. 10, No. 1, pp. 108-113,
2008.
Hampton, M.B. and Edil, T.B., Strength Gain of Organic Ground with Cement-Type
Binders, Soil improvement for Big Digs.Geotechnical Special Publication
No.81. ASCE, pp.135-148,1998.
Hashim, R. and Islam, M.S., A model study to determine engineering properties of
peat soil and effect on strength after stabilization. European J.of Scientific
Research,Vol.22, No.2,pp.205-215,2008.
Hebib, S and Farell , E.R., Some experiences on stabilization of Irish Peats, Can.
Geotech.J., vol.40,pp.107-120,2003.
Huat, B.B.K. , Shukri, M. and Themer, A.M., Effect of chemical admixtures on the
engineering properties of tropical peat soils, American J. of Applied Science, vol
2, No. 7, pp 1113-1120, 2005.
Huie, C and Wang.Q.The behavior of organic matter in the process of soft soil
stabilization using cement. BullEngGeolEnv., pp.445-448,2006.
Jarret, P.M., Geoguide 6, Site investigation for organic soils and peat, JKR
Document 20709-3041-95, InstitutKerjaRaya , Malaysia 1995.
Kumar, B.R. Phani, Nagareddayya, S. and santhi S. B.., Improving clayey solids
with fly ash, Soft Soil Engineriing, Lee et al., Swets&Zeitlinger, 2001.
Kolay, P.K. and Suraya, N.B.R., Stabilization of Organic soil by different Types of
Stabilizer, International Conference on Civil Engineering in the New
Millenium: Opportunities and Challenges (CENeM-2007), BESU, Shibpur,
India, 2007.
Lin, D.F., Lin, K.L., Hung, M.J. and Luo, H.L., Sludge ash/ hydrated lime on the
465
S.N.L. Taib, Jacqueline Lam Wan Hwa, P.K., Kolay, KGHC, Seneviratne and Mohd
Zain, M.I.S (2011) Comparison of Triaxial Compression Results on Cement
Stabilised Peat in Sarawak, International Conference on Advances in
Geotechnical Engineering, 7-9th November 2011, Perth, Australia.
Wong, L.S., Hashim, R. and Ali,F.H., Engineering behavior of stabilized peat soil
,European J.of Scientific Resarch, Vol.21, No.4, pp.581-591,2008.
466
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
467
The diverse financial needs among Muslim and non-Muslim customers have
raised the needs of personal financing from conventional banks and Islamic banks.
Islamic banks are expected to come out with better products that consider the needs of
their customer compared to the conventional banks. Furthermore, Islamic finance is a
growing industry in Malaysia nowadays. It is important to know the perceptions of
customers towards Islamic personal financing and the factors that influence the
customers intention to use Islamic personal financing in order to improve the Shariah
compliant product and Islamic finance industry. In fact, it involves establishing,
maintaining and enhancing relationships with customers and other parties at a profit so
that the objectives of the parties involved are met. This is done by mutual exchange and
fulfillment of promises ( Groonros, 1994 and Kanyan et.al, 2015).
Therefore, this paper seeks to identify the perception of customers towards
Islamic personal financing and to analyse how factors such as concepts of Islamic
personal financing, the benefits and government support as well as social
demographic affect customers intention to use Islamic personal financing.
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
the main source of Islamic financing is to fulfilled and satisfy the needs of human in
order to make ones wealth grow.
2.1
Based on the following verse, if the debtor is in a difficulty, grant him time till
it is easy for him to repay. But if ye remit it by way of charity. That is best for you if
ye only knew (Al-Quran, Surah Al-Baqarah verse 280). In the argument of Hamid et
al. (1993) Islam had been discourages the debt financing in regards of Gods
prohibition towards interest and Prophet Muhammads are also deeply against the debt.
Interest is prohibited not only because money must remain a medium of exchange to
facilitate trade, but also because money is not a leasable asset. It must be consumed in
the process of being utilized in production or consumption.
According to Haron and Shanmugam (2001), there are two best alternatives if
the debtor not able to pay back the loan either the lender extend the repayment
duration of the loan borrowed by the debtor or convert the loan borrowed by the
debtor to charity. However, the second alternative is argued as the best alternative
between the two alternatives. The alternatives given is due to the consistent with
Islamic teaching. Islam supports debt cancellation in order to avoid the borrower from
bad debt and bankruptcy. Other than that, it helps Islamic bank to reorganize or
restructure their banking policies in promoting the Islamic compliant product at the
same time exposing the true spirit or value of Islam.
In the argument of Haniffa and Hudaib (2007), the borrowers should be given
the right or proper treatment according to the Islamic teaching, the lender of the loan
should be lenient towards their debtor rather than the conventional banks. In the
469
certain circumstances, the debtor is qualified to receive zakat and their debt or loan
borrowed can be written off as a charity. However, Haniffa and Hudaib (2007) also
suggest Islamic bank to communicate and demonstrate their debt policy in the yearly
report of their bank. The Islamic bank is also expected to inform their debt policy,
amount of debt written off as charity if there is any and types of debt.
2.2
Prohibition of riba
Interest given is also called as riba. Interest is also prohibited because money
is a medium of exchange to facilitate the trade activities not a leasable asset. It must
be consumed In the process of being utilized in production or consumption. There are
seventy three types of riba, the least of which is equivalent to bedding ones mother
and the worst of which is equivalent to destroying the honor of a Muslim (Narrated by
Ibn Majah and Al-Hakim). The prohibition of riba is due to riba corrupt society
(Al-Quran, Surah Al-Rum verse 37-41), riba implies improper appropriation of others
property (Al-Quran, Surah An-Nisa verse 160-161), riba ultimate effect is negative
growth (Al-Quran, Surah Al-Baqarah verse 276), riba demeans and diminishes
human personality (Al-Quran, Surah Al-Baqarah verse 275) and riba is unjust
(Al-Quran, Surah Al-Baqarah verse 279).
Qardhul Hassan refers the benevolent loan. It is a loan used to help those in
need of additional four for a fixed period of time without any requirement of paying
back with an interest or extra payment for profit. According to Khir et. Al (2008),
Qardhul Hassan is the only types of loan that does not violate the prohibition of riba
since the debtor do not have to compensate the creditor for the time value of money
and the debtor only need to pay the amount borrowed to the creditor without any extra
charges. The disadvantages of Qardhul Hassan is the creditor does not gain anything.
However, it is found that Qardhul Hassan does not have a clear practice of financing
due to the unclear transaction process.
Bay Al-Inah Personal Financing And Tawarruq Islamic Personal Financing
Another types of Islamic personal financing is Bay Al-Inah in which bring the
meaning of sale with immediate purchase. The transaction of Inah is sales based on a
delayed transaction that involved the sale and buy back transaction. Tawarruq is a
transaction where one party buys a commodity on credit at a markup price and sells
the same commodity at a lesser price to a third party in order to gain some cash.
471
3.0
METHODOLOGY
A set of questionnaires were distributed to the customers of Islamic personal
financing at the bank to ensure that the respondents are the customers of Islamic
personal financing. The population of this research are customers of two banks, which
operate as fully fledged Islamic bank. The target population of this research is the
customers of two banks that operating as fully fledged Islamic bank which is Bank
Islam Malaysia Berhad (BIMB) and Bank Muamalat Malaysia Berhad (BMMB) in
Kuching, Sarawak. However, there is only 200 customers will be selected as a
respondent of this research paper. According to the Voorhis and Morgan (2007), 200
respondents is fair to conduct the study in order to analyze the result of factor analysis.
The sampling techniques such as convenience sampling technique will be adopted to
gain a representative sample.
4.0
RESULTS
4.1
the majority of visitors were male (60%). Most of the respondents were between 26 to
30 years old (51%), followed by the age group of more than 41 years old (20%). In
terms of educational background, 51% had attained first degrees, 25% of the
respondents had completed their PhD and 11.1% of the respondents had STPM. Most
respondents are working with the private sector (52%). In terms of income, the
majority of respondents earned an income range of RM4001 to RM5000 (29%). This
was followed by an income group of between RM3001-RM4000 which was 26%.
Lastly, majority of the respondents (72%) are Muslims.
472
Percentage
(%)
Gender
Male
60
120
Female
40
80
< 20
11
22
21 - 25
10
26 - 30
51
102
31 - 35
36 - 40
18
> 41
20
40
STPM
11
22
Diploma
10
Degree
51
102
Master
16
PhD
25
50
Government
48
96
Private
52
104
< RM2000
11
22
RM2001 RM3000
10
RM3001 RM4000
26
52
RM4001 RM5000
29
58
RM5001 RM6000
> RM6001
25
50
Muslims
72
144
Non-Muslims
28
56
Age
Education Level
Working Sector
Monthly Income
Religion
473
4.2
18% of the respondents think that Islamic personal financing was reliable, 42% think
it was cheap and another 40% think that it was trustworthy. In terms of how they
know about Islamic personal financing, 39% of the respondents know from their
friends, 28% from their family, 28% from newspaper and 5% from mass media. The
table also shows that 87% of the respondents think that Islamic personal financing
does bring benefits to them. However, 13% of the respondents think that Islamic
personal financing does not bring benefits to them. Lastly, 73% of the respondents are
willing to use Islamic personal financing as their financial aids in the future while
another 27% of the respondents are not willing to use Islamic personal financing as
their financial aids in the future. The factors will be explained in the next section.
Table 2: Respondents Perception Towards Islamic Personal Financing
Percentage (%)
Reliable
18
36
Cheap
42
84
Trustworthy
40
80
39
78
Family
28
56
Newspaper
28
56
Mass Media
10
87
174
No
13
26
Yes
73
146
No
27
54
474
4.3
Coefficient
t-statisti
Sig.
c
Constant
13.800
6.921
0.00
0
0.073**
2.266
Financing
0.02
5
Benefits
0.032
0.744
0.45
8
Government Support
0.068
.0593
0.55
4
Gender
6.802***
9.193
0.00
0
Age
0.153
0.264
0.79
2
Working Sector
-3.128
-10.371
0.00
0
Income Level
-5.246
-5.822
0.00
0
Religion
-7.835
-9.163
0.00
0
Education Level
6.847***
5.136
0.00
0
R2
0.789
475
5.0
CONCLUSION
As a conclusion, this study shows that there are only three factors that
influence the customers intention to use Islamic personal financing, which are
concept of Islamic personal financing, gender and education level.
The concept of trust in Islam is linked with responsibility in which implying wealth
that is entrusted upon a human being is indeed a responsibility that he will be
accounted for on the Hereafter. Islamic economics is based on a paradigm which is
not secularist and value-natural. It treats all human beings as vicegerents of God and
brothers into each other. All resources at the disposal of human being are trust and
must be used for the well-being of all in a conformity with the values provided by
Shariah.Male are more prone to have the intention to use Islamic personal financing
as they are the head of a family with responsibility shouldered by them. In the case of
education level, the higher the education, the level of awareness towards Islamic
personal financing is higher.
This result brings benefit to the public, banks, government and future research.
For the public, this study might help to expose the benefits of Islamic personal
financing as well as helping the public to make their decision to use Islamic personal
financing as their financial aid. The study exposes what cause the customers intention
to use Islamic personal financing and what benefits does Islamic personal financing
bring to them that made them choose Islamic personal financing. By giving them
some insight, information, they may be motivated or encouraged to use Islamic
personal financing to support their additional financial needs.
The banks might be able to use the result of this study to add more factors in
Islamic personal financing products in order to attract customers intention to use
Islamic personal financing. This research brings benefits to the banks itself as they do
476
not need to identify what cause the customers to choose Islamic personal financing.
However, from this research, the banks might be able to identify certain factors that
affected the decision made by the customer to choose Islamic personal financing as
from the research the banks itself might be able to add some more factors in the
futures in order to attract more customers to choose Islamic personal financing to
support their additional financial needs.
This result helps the government to improve the performance of the Islamic
industry as the Islamic industry in Malaysia nowadays are raising from time to time.
The results from this research present great information for the government to
improve the Islamic finance industry and comes out with more attractive Islamic
compliant products for Islamic personal financing. The research would also allow the
government to evaluate the current product of Islamic personal financing in the
finance industry that they have nowadays either they can improve it with another way
or add some additional values on it in which according to Shariah. Subsequently, the
government would be able to utilize the information found from this research in order
to facilitate their efforts in boosting the products and performance of the Islamic
finance industry.
REFERENCES
Agnes Kanyan, Jasmine Vivienne Andrew, Jati Kasuma Ali, and Marianne Merley
Beti (2015), Building Customer Relationship for Gaining Customer Loyalty in
the Pharmaceutical Industry, Journal of Advanced Management Science Vol.
3, No.4
C. Gronroos, (1994) From marketing mix to relationship marketing: Towards a
paradigm shift in marketing, Management Decision, vol. 32, no. 2, pp. 4-20
Hamid, S., Craig, R., & Clarke, F. (1993). Religion: A Confounding Cultural Element
in the International H armonization of Accounting? Abacus, 29, 131, 148.
Haniffa, R. & Hudaib, M. (2007). Exploring the Ethical Identity of Islamic Banks
viaCommnication in Annual Reports. Journal of Business Ethics, 76, 97-116
477
Wilson Van Voorhis, C.R. &Morgan, B.L. (2007). Understanding Power and Rules of
Thumb for Determining Sample Sizes. Tutorials in Quantitative Methods for
sychology.3(2), 43-50.
478
ABSTRACT
Femtocell network has been deployed to improve voice and data services in
Long Term Evolution (LTE) mobile network for indoor and also for limited
outdoor geographical coverage. Apart from that, it also provides supports by
offering more capacity to fulfil the increasing demand from indoor mobile
users. Looking at its potential, this study therefore is focused on the
interference management to reduce the inter-tier interference for twotier
networks of Macrocells layered with femtocells. This study considered
Fractional Frequency Reuse (FFR) scheme to mitigate the interferences. To
be specific, there are two categories for the cell users which are the outer part
and the inner part. Therefore, this technique is able to reduce the
intereference and avoid losing much frequency resources in each cell.
Moreover the area for reliable coverage can be provided by a Home NodeBs
(HNBs) and may vary as the density of user equipment (UE) changes. The cell
total throughput and user satisfaction (US) will determine the selected optimal
frequency allocation. The objective of this study is to boost up the overall
throughput and user satisfaction. From the simulation, it is shown that high
throughput gain during maximum users base on user satisfaction. Therefore,
it was found out that the FFR scheme can provide extra capacity for both
indoor users and the users at the cell edge.
.
Keywords: femtocell, indoor coverage, FFR scheme, open access styling,
interference management
479
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Femtocell is defined as avery low power indoor base station and uses the same
Radio Interface Technology (RIT) to provide access to a cell of few meter radius.
Previously (Abdullah & Baba, 2014) mentioned that the femtocell coverage is
between 20-30 meter. Femtocell access point (FAP), also known as Home NodeB
needs a connection to the core network of the telecom operator through a high
data rate backhaul connectivity, which can be either X-DSL , fiber, etc.Voice calls
from the indoor subscribers are managed by the femtocells and eventually
channels from the macrocell base station (MeNBs) are released. From the walk
test conducted in previous study, (Ismail, Baba, & Zaini, 2014) found out that
RSSI reading after the deployment of femtocell was improved to-51 dB.
480
space time code named cooperative frequency reuse. The algorithm builds on the
cellular frequency reuse to add cooperation between adjacent base stations. The
base stations divide their transmission power between their own signals and the
signals from neighboring cells. The results of the present study ,(Lee, Yoon, Lee,
& Shin, 2010)also come up with another solution using Fractional Frequency
Reuse (FFR) in the OFDMA femtocell systems which is an efficient resource
allocation scheme. This interference avoidance scheme assign the femtocell access
point (FAP) to choose different subbands from macrocells frequency band
allocation.
Power control has been adopted widely for mitigating the inter cell
interference in the dense deployment of Femtocells(Pal & Nugraha, 2014) . The
HetNet usually deals with the co-tier and co-channel interference. For the purpose
of relieve the uplink interference caused by the co-tier Femtocells to Macrocells,
an adaptive power allocation control strategy used. Joint power control in the
HetNet environment can minimize the initial interference problem for the edge
users. Physical resourceblock (PRB) allocation technique is being done through
the power allocation scheme in the network. Comprising of fixed cell size of the
Femtocells the dynamic adaption of power control technique or pilot signal power
is used for the physical resource block allocation. The frequency is divided into
two parts, one part is allocated at the cell-center and the rest at the cell edge.
total frequency reuse in each cell, the frequency reuse patterns can be dynamically
adapted on a frame-by-frame basis in each cell. Therefore, the intention of the
present study is to improve the users throughput and at the same time discard the
Inter Cell Interference (ICI).
Howeverin this study that involve two tier network , the cell edge zone is
0.6 % ofthe coverage.The OFDMA technology points outmulti user diversity by
allocating frequency resources base on the channelqualities of FUEs. The FFR
Threshold has been maintained 3dB for this 2 tier network.
With reference
toFigure 3, the assigned frequency band is dividedinto two sets. One of this two
484
sets is divided into another three sets and labeled as B,Cand D. Similar with
conventional FFR, Frequency reuse factor 1 is allocated for inner region and
frequency reuse factor 3 for the outer region.The sub-band A is used inthe center
zone and sub-band B, C, and D isapplied in the outer regions, respectively.
.
For this case, femtocell as the secondary user (SU) will use sub bands
which left by the macrocell as theprimary user (PU). For example, when a PU is
in the inner region of a cell, automatically sub band A will be assigned to the PU.
When the PU move towards and located within outer region, the other sub bands
(B,C or D) will be assigned to the active PU. In order to mitigate the interference,
SU will avoids sub band A and the other sub band assigned to PU in the macrocell
if a SU is located in the inner region of the cell. For example as illustrated in
Figure 3, SU in the inner cell assigned with sub bands C or D and avoid sub band
A and B that already assigned to the PU in the inner and outer cell. Another
scenario is when SU located in the outer region, If the macrocell assigned PU with
sub band B, then SU can use the available sub bands A,C or D.
which is located in the edge region, in order to improve the performance of the
edge users.
2.0
ANALYTICAL STUDY
, ., .,
2 +
=1 , ., .,,
(1)
(1)
Where, Gb,xis the path loss for the channel between user x and base station
b, Pb,n is the transmit power from base station on subcarrier n, hb,x,n is the
exponentially distributed channel fast fading power while n2 is the Additive
White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) channels noise power. Symbols k and j refer
tothe set of all the interfering BSs (i.e. BSs that are using the same sub-band as
user x). Therefore j is the cell index and k the number of co-channel cells.
Basically a users downlink SINR within the cells range rely on the
interference of the respective cells. This paper consider m Macrocell User (MU)
on n subcarrier and since involving two tier network both effect from the adjacent
macrocell and overlaid femtocell also included.Value of SINR for this case is
calculated as (Bouras et al., 2013):
, =
,, .,
2 +
,,.
, + ,, .,
486
(2)
,, .,
2
+ ,,.
, + ,, .,
(3)
Cells interference only occurs to other user in the other inner region of the
cells which using the same frequency band. Due to this problem, there are two
types of base station (BS). First type of base station manages all interfering BSs
transmitting to the inner regions users who utilize the same sub band frequency
while the second type of base station consists of all interfering BSs transmitting to
outer cell users on the same sub-band. The capacity of user x on subcarrier n can
be calculated by the following equation :
, = 2 (1 + , ) (4)
where, f is the value of the available bandwidth for each subcarrier divided by
the number of users that share the specific subcarrier.The constant term is
connected with the bit error target rate (BER) as follows =-1.5/ln(5BER).
Besides, the users throughput of the serving macrocell m can be expressed as
follows:
=
, . ,
(5)
487
3.0
Simulation Parameter
Table 1 shows the simulation parameter that have been used in the
experiment. LTE cellular system allocated with 10 MHz of bandwidth is divided
into 25 subcarriers each having a bandwidth of 375KHz. Considering urban macro
scenario served by macrocells and path loss is calculated using suburban model
with reference to (3rd Generation Partnership Project, 2010).
.
Table 1 Simulation Parameter
Parameter
Unit
Value
System Bandwidth
MHz
10
Subcarriers
25
Subcarriers Bandwidth
kHz
375
MHz
2000
250/40
Path Loss
dB
Macrocell
BS
Transmit
dB
20
BS
Transmit
dBm
20
dBm/Hz
-174
500
Correlation Distance
40
Power
Femtocell
Power
From the simulation result in figure 4, it shows that the users throughput
over time for three mobility scenarios. The network topology involved 16 cells,
488
489
4.0
490
Further study will include identifying the matters that touch on mitigating the
interference issues and the user mobility management in the coexistence of
femtocell with macrocell networks using integration of cognitive radio with
femtocell LTE based cellular Network.
REFERENCES
Akoum, S., Zwingelstein-Colin, M., H. J., W., R., & Debbah, M. (n.d.).
Cooperative Frequency Reuse for the Downlink of Cellular Systems.
system 6:8.
Bilios, D., Bouras, C., Kokkinos, V., Papazois, A., & Tseliou, G. (2012). A
performance study of Fractional Frequency Reuse in OFDMA networks.
WMNC, (Cci), 3843.
Bouras, C., Kokkinos, V., Papazois, A., & Tseliou, G. (2013). Fractional
Frequency Reuse in Integrated Femtocell/Macrocell Environments. In
Wired/Wireless Internet Communication (pp. 229240). R
Das, S. S., Chandhar, P., Mitra, S., & Ghosh, P. (2011). Issues in Femtocell
Deployment in Broadband OFDMA Networks: 3GPP LTE a case study.
In Vehicular Technology Conference (VTC Fall) (pp. 15). SAN
FRANCISCO, CA. doi:10.1109/VETECF.2011.6093191
491
Jeong, Y., Lee, J. Y., Chung, M. Y., Lee, T.-J., & Choo, H. (2010). Femtocell
Frequency Planning Scheme in Cellular Networks Based on Soft
Frequency Reuse. In 2010 International Conference on Cyber-Enabled
Distributed Computing and Knowledge Discovery (pp. 176180). Ieee.
doi:10.1109/CyberC.2010.39
Lee, T., Yoon, J., Lee, S., & Shin, J. (2010). Interference management in OFDMA
femtocell systems using fractional frequency reuse. In 2010 International
Conference on Communications, Circuits and Systems (ICCCAS) (pp.
176180).
Lpez-Prez, D., Valcarce, A., de la Roche, G., & Zhang, J. (2009). OFDMA
femtocells: A roadmap on interference avoidance. IEEE Communication
Magazine, (September), 4148.
Pal, S., & Nugraha, T. (2014). Resource Allocation Strategy using optimal power
control for mitigating two-tier interference in heterogeneous networks. In
2014 IEEE WCNC - Workshop on Interference and Design Issues for
Future Heterogeneous Networks (pp. 104109).
Tsai, C., & Li, G. (2012). Soft frequency reuse design to reduce inteference in
femtocell
systems.
In
International
Conference
492
on
Optical
Politeknik Mukah
hermizul@pmu.edu.my, sheinairus@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
493
1.1
b)
c)
494
1.2
a)
Do the individual factors correlated with critical success factor in the context
of knowledge sharing among undergraduate students at PMU?
b)
To study the relationship between individual factor and success factor for
knowledge sharing
b)
1.3
For this research study, questionnaire had been developed to collect data for
this research. The set of questionnaire had been distributed to respondents which are
final year students at Polytechnic Mukah Sarawak.
1.4
The finding for this research is the success factor for knowledge sharing
among undergraduate students; another limitation is that this study was conducted in
one university in Thailand. In some countries, the findings of this study may not be
applicable due to a different social context (Wangpipatwong, 2009).Based on the
research finding about knowledge sharing patterns among undergraduate students,
Ting & Majid (2006), stated that it was found that, generally, students displayed a
positive attitude towards knowledgesharing and were appreciative of its importance in
peer learning. However, it was interesting to notethat the respondents were less
495
inclined to share knowledge for academic activities that were graded.Most of the
students thought that Knowledge Sharing through sharing lecturenotes, power point
slides, and other learning resources, among students shall benefit all and existing
University culture does not provide sufficient support for sharing knowledge. On the
contrary voluntarily sharing informationwas strongly refused and positive attitude that
sharing knowledge reduces student competitiveness among peers.The study also
revealed that competition among students to outperform their fellow students and lack
of depth in peer relationship were the two main factors that inhibited knowledge
sharing(Yaghi, Barakat, Alfawaer, Shkokani&Nassuora, 2011)
1.5
There are some terms that need to be identifying in this research which are
knowledge, knowledge sharing and critical success factor. Weiling& Kwok (2007) in
their article stated that knowledge is brought to the forefront as a factor of production
and identified as the asset fundamentally responsible for organizational success.
Knowledge is something that people already has in their mind and they already know
about it. Knowledge sharing requires one party who is willing and able to share
knowledge, and another who wishes to receive it (Hendriks, 1999). In short,
knowledge sharing should have at least two persons to discuss or share any
information each other. Knowledge sharing cannot occur for one person only. The
critical success factor method is a means for identifying these important elements of
success (Caralli, 2004). In this context, critical success factor of knowledge sharing
can be defining as the elements of success for knowledge sharing. The critical success
factor is very importance to identify which elements really have big influences to
knowledge sharing in context university environment.
2.0
One of the previous research that exactly same like this topic found that
technology support, students ability to share, and degree of competition with the
classmates significantly influence knowledge sharing of students respectively. In
496
2.1
Basically, the conceptual framework for this research was adapted from
Wangpipatwong, (2009). The research area was same but the respondent for this
research was different from the previous research.
The research framework for this research has been adapted from
Wangpipatwong, (2009) whereby this research had been done at Bangkok University,
Thailand. The main reason to adapt this research framework was to do comparison the
factor that influences knowledge sharing at Bangkok University, Thailand with
Malaysian environment. The figure shown below was the research framework for this
research whereby for dependent variable was knowledge sharing while independent
variables had three factors which are individual factors (willingness to share and
ability to share), classroom (organizational) factors (instructor support and degree of
497
competition) and last but least was technological factors (technology support and
technology availability).
INDIVIDUAL FACTORS
Willingness to Share
Ability to Share
CLASSROOM (ORGANIZATIONAL)
FACTORS
Instructor Support
KNOWLEDGE
SHARING
Degree of
Competition
TECHNOLOGICAL
Technology Support
Technology Availability
Most of every single place in university can be as location for students to share
knowledge with their peers. Consciously and unconsciously, knowledge sharing
between students occurs when they were in class. Knowledge sharing occurs when the
instructors engages students in intellectualdiscussions. The way the instructor
conducts the class may also influence how the studentsbehave in terms of knowledge
sharing behavior (Chen, Koch, Chung, & Lee, 2007).Competition is another factor to
be addressed. People do not share knowledgebecause they are afraid to lose their
exclusiveness.In aclassroom context, a student may keep knowledge from classmates
to gain a competitiveadvantage in grades (Wangpipatwong,2009). Since the context
inthis study is about knowledge sharing among students in a university, the
organizationalfactors are modified to the classroom factors.
Technology was one of the main factors for students to share knowledge. The
new technology that had been developed by university really assists students to share
knowledge for like student portal. Connectivity is the ability for members of a social
system to contact each other directly(Van Den Hooff, Elving, Meeuwsen, &
Dumoulin, 2003). Technology can be considered tobe an important contribution to
connectivity since it enables long distance collaboration.
498
3.0
The quantitative data collection methods rely on the stratified sampling and
structured data collection instruments that fit diverse experiences into predetermined
response categories.
3.1
Focus Group
Based on Bartlett, Kotrlik and Higgins (2001), when the population size
around 500, the sample for the research should be 150 respondents to represent the
whole population. Therefore in this research, 150 respondents had been selected to
represents the whole population.
The result for the questionnaire is 0.939 over 1.0. Cronbachs alpha reliability
coefficient normally ranges between 0 and 1. However, there is actually no lower
limit to the coefficient. The closer Cronbachs alpha coefficient is to 1.0 the greater
the internal consistency of the items in the scale (Gliem and Gliem,2003). According
to George and Mallery (2003) in Gliem and Gliem (2003) article, stated that the
following rules of thumb: _ > .9 Excellent, _ > .8 Good, _ > .7 Acceptable, _ >
.6 Questionable, _ > .5 Poor, and _ < .5 Unacceptable. Based on rules of
499
thumb the result for this pilot study 0.939 was excellent. Other than that, all of the
instruments for this research also can be categorized as an excellent and good.
Table 1: Reliability Statistics
Reliability Statistics
Cronbach's
Alpha
N of Items
.939
42
4.0
FINDINGS RESULT
4.1
Descriptive Profile
Valid MALE
FEMAL
E
Total
Valid
Cumulative
Frequency Percent
Percent
Percent
113
75.3
75.3
75.3
37
24.7
24.7
100.0
150
100.0
100.0
Table 2 yields the gender of the respondents for this research. The frequency
for male and female are 113 and 37 make the total number for respondents are 150
students. The fraction for respondents by gender is over 24.7 percent over 100% of
the respondents is female and 75.3 percent are male. The total number of female and
male is 100%.
4.2
Descriptive Statistics
500
Descriptive Statistics
KNOWLEDGE
SHARING
WILLINGNESS
TO
SHARE
ABILITY TO SHARE
INSTRUCTOR
SUPPORT
DEGREE
COMPETITION
TECHNOLOGY
ABILITY
TECHNOLOGY
SUPPORT
Valid N (listwise)
OF
Minimu
Maximu
Std.
Mean
Deviation
150
2.83
5.00
3.8989
.62477
150
2.40
5.00
3.8200
.76807
150
1.80
5.00
3.9880
.59268
150
1.00
5.00
3.9413
.79682
150
2.11
4.44
3.7481
.47572
150
2.40
4.80
3.6653
.73949
150
2.00
5.00
3.8627
.65051
150
N= 150
1=Strongly Disagree; 2=Disagree; 3=Neutral; 4=Agree; 5=Strongly
Agree
As shown in Table 3 the average score for knowledge sharing items was
3.8989. This result shows that students do not like to share with their peers about their
activities. Respondents like to share knowledge but do not like to inform their peers
about what they do. Basically for individual factor it is divided into two variables
which are willingness to share and ability to share. The average mean score for
willingness to share is 3.8200 and the average scores for ability to share is 3.9880.The
result for average classroom factor score with consist of two items which are
instructor support and degree of competition. The average score for degree of
competition is lowest than instructor support. The average score for instructor support
is 3.9413 while the average score for degree of competition is 3.7481.Technological
factor is divided into two variables which are technology availability and technology
support. With the score of 3.8626 for technology support and mean for technology
501
availability is 3.6653 shows that technology support has highest mean than
technology availability.
4.3
This relationship had been analyzed used bivariate correlation to determine the
relationship between critical success factor and knowledge sharing. Based on Table
4.0 the value of Pearsons range is from r = 0.474 to r = 0.887. In order to identify the
strength of the relationship between the critical success factors and knowledge sharing
it had been referred to the range of the value. The range of the value start with weak
relationship which is the range from 0.10 to 0.29, moderate relationship from 0.30 to
0.49, strong relationship range from 0.50 to 0.69, very strong relationship range from
0.70 to 0.95 and last but not least 1.00 is perfect relationship. The table below showed
the analysis of critical success factor and knowledge sharing.
Based on the table 5.0 shown below, willingness to share has the highest value
with 0.887 followed by 0.628 which is degree of competition. The lowest range is
instructor support and technology support. All items for critical success are positively
correlated with knowledge sharing. The value for each item will determine the
relationship from weak relationship until very strong relationship. This relationship
can be measured by looking at the value for the items. The highest value shows that it
has very strong relationship with knowledge sharing.
502
Table 4: Correlation matrix between Critical Success Factor and Knowledge Sharing
KNOWLEDGE SHARING
WILLINGNESS
.887**
TO Pearson Correlation
SHARE
Sig. (2-tailed)
.000
150
.511**
.000
150
INSTRUCTOR
Pearson Correlation
.452**
SUPPORT
Sig. (2-tailed)
.000
150
DEGREE
.628**
OF Pearson Correlation
COMPETITION
Sig. (2-tailed)
.000
150
TECHNOLOGY
Pearson Correlation
.515**
ABILITY
Sig. (2-tailed)
.000
150
TECHNOLOGY
Pearson Correlation
.474**
SUPPORT
Sig. (2-tailed)
.000
150
5.0
CONCLUSION
abilityhad
significant
influence
on
knowledge
sharing
among
knowledge while instructor support and technology support also can be improved to
increase knowledge sharing among students.
REFERENCES
Caralli, R., (2004). The Critical Success Factor Method: Establishing a Foundation for
Enterprise Security
Chen, J., Koch, P., Chung, M., & Lee, C. (2007). Exploring Contributory Factors in
Student-to-student Knowledge Sharing: A Singaporean Perspective. Paper
presented at the annual meeting of the NCA 93rd Annual Convention, Nov 14,
2007, TBA, Chicago, IL.
Majewski, G., & Usoro, A., (2008) "Barriers of and incentives to knowledge sharing
in (Virtual) Communities of Practice: A critical literature review." Journal of
Knowledge Management, v10 No. 1 : 388 - 405.
ODell, C. & Grayson, C.J. Jr. (1998). "If Only We Knew What We Know:
Identification and Transfer of Internal Best Practices". California Management
Review, 40 (3): 154-174.
Sekaran, U. (2003). Research Methods for Business (4th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John
Wiley & Sons.
Van den Hooff, B., & Huysman, M. (2003). Managing Knowledge Sharing: Emergent
and Engineering Approaches. Information & Management, 46(1), 1-8.
Weiling, K., & Kwok, K.W., (2007). "Factors affecting trading partners' knowledge
sharing: Using the lens of transaction cost economics and socio-political
theories." Journal Electronic Commerce Research and Applications Archive.
Volume 6 Issue 3, Pg. 297-308.
Wangpipatwong. (2009) "Knowledge Sharing Impact Factors Selection for Research
Supervision." Journal of Basic and Applied Scientific Research, v18.3: 16 170.
505
ofiee_2907@yahoo.com, mkk@upm.edu.my
ABSTRACT
The broiler industry primary role is to fulfill the demand for domestic meat
consumption in Malaysia at reasonable price. Many researchers found that
small and medium scale farms earn small profit margin per bird because of
high cost of production mainly from high percentage of feed cost. Since
technology differs among operators, this study will add to the existing findings
with additional information on open and close systems technology. Therefore,
the study aims to evaluate the current costs, benefits and net returns to broiler
industry in different scales and technology. The research applied multi-stage
sampling based on primary data of 310 operators in Peninsular Malaysia.
The cost of production and break even analysis were used to answer the
objective of the study. The results showed that the initial investments were
highest in large farm, particularly those utilized close system. The small
operators in open system recorded highest total variable cost per bird,
followed by the small farms in close system. In terms of net profit per bird, the
farmers who involved in large broiler production and adopting open system,
mostly obtained highest return per bird. Finally, the research concluded that
broiler farming in small scale is still not highly profitable either in close or
open systems. However, the chicken broiler business is consistently lucrative
in the medium and large farms of both technologies.
Key words:
506
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Region
2004
West Malaysia 110.12
Poultry Meat
Sarawak
100
Sabah
81.51
Sources: DVS
2005
2006
131.15 132.45
91.76 95.74
77
84.74
2007
107.73
91.76
74.99
2008
106.54
87.79
78.85
2009
106.43
88.67
91.24
2010
106.86
88.87
101.09
2011
106.27
87.72
111.71
2012
102.93
89.57
99.16
Picture 1: Number of broiler farm according to states. (sources: DVS and FLFAM)
An increasing number of the Malaysias population will result in an increase in
demand of energy and protein in their daily diet. But along with the increase in
population, cost of living is also rising. Therefore, chicken become the preferred
source of energy and protein. This is because, compared with a source of energy and
other protein, chicken meat was found to be the cheapest. If seen in Table 2, we can
see how different chicken meat prices compared to other meat sources. But farmers
face increased production costs rates. This is because chicken is a major cost for their
food. Food broilers in turn strongly influenced by the price of its main ingredient,
namely soybean and corn. This is to coincide with the findings of Shaikh and Zala
(2011) shows the results of his study on poultry in Anand district of Gujarat, India
that there are three main costs in broiler production. The principal costs are chicken
feed (58.6%), chick cost (21.5%) and depreciation of building (10.7%). The cost of
chicken feed is more than half of the overall cost. Even some other sources claim a
higher percentage of the cost of feed for a broiler production process. Thus, the price
of food plays a major role in determining the levels of broiler meat production cost
and also the market price of chicken in the market. Thus, the field of chicken feed is
one of the areas that should be seen by researchers as an opportunity generate new
food formula that is more practical and inexpensive. Therefore, the study aims to
508
describe the current circumstances of broiler net return in variety situation that occur
in Malaysia. Feeding cost also indirectly will play part in the analysis for this study.
Table 2: The price of local meat from 2003 to 2012
Comodity
Processed Chicken (standard) - (RM/kg)
Local Beef - (RM/kg)
Local Mutton (RM/kg)
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
5.17
5.37
6.05
5.74
6.10
6.85
7.00
7.05
7.90
7.40
14.61 15.46 16.24 17.14 17.60 18.70 19.15 19.35 20.00 22.00
18.78 20.03 22.04 23.43 25.40 26.20 26.80 27.10 29.40 31.55
Sources : FAMA
2.0
METHODOLOGY
The study was conducted in nine states of Peninsular Malaysia namely Johor,
Malacca, Negeri Sembilan, Selangor, Pahang, Kelantan, Perak, Pulau Pinang and
Kedah. Selecting Peninsular Malaysia as sample study due to the highest demand
consumption of broiler meat and a massive production as representing a total number
of broiler production in Malaysia. In order to describe clearly economical return from
small, medium, and large stockbreeders, the study therefore focused to analyze
separately broiler returns in different scale. The technological adoption is also
elaborated to notice in particular whether closed or open system obtaining more
efficiency to the net return per bird of broiler production. Moreover, the research
solely based on primary and secondary data. Primary observation includes spreading
questionnaires to broiler breeders and approaching personal interview method. By
raising related information of poultry issues from any text books, journals,
Government reports are considerably important as a secondary data to strenghten the
theoritical background of the study.
509
Veterinary Service (2012), the number of day old chick production which is less than
30,000 birds per cycle classified as small breeders, between 30,001 to 125,000 is in
medium row and more than 125,001 goes to large farms. Afterwards, to determine the
potential region of chicken production in Peninsular Malaysia, the stratified sample
was regularly implemented. Then, the final existing population was selected
randomly to achive the concise number of sample study. Elder (2009) stated that the
advantage of sampling method is mostly useful to supervise, coverage, and perform
the quality data collection as well preserve the sampling frame. Additionally, Barnett
(1991) even emphasised the survey budgeting may be more economically efficient
and the unbiased estimation with small variance can be handle appropriately when
implementing sampling method.
3.0
3.1
Production description
Regarding to the findings from table 1. The open system in large scale is listed
as having tremendous production to the total day old chicks (DOC) per cycle. Where
the price DOC of small stockfarmers in open system is higher than other groups
510
constituted 1.7 ringgit per bird. In term of mortality rate, average weight and price of
selling chicken per kilogram, the closed system with producing large broiler
production has an elevated result among others constituted 6.4%, 2.49 Kg, and RM
4.68 respectively. The lower ratio of FCR indicates that feed cost would be
considerably less (Sahzadi et al, 2006). The finding of FCR revealed that the large
scale in open system has an efficent feed ratio as 1.26 followed by medium stock
farmers in open system which constituted 1.32. The result of 1.26 ratio however
explained that in order to produce 1 kilogram chicken, is necessary to provide 1.26
kilogram of feed.
items
Small
Medium
Total DOC
17,942
Small
Medium
Large
62,272
195,400
16,782
67,619
214,252
1.59
1.55
1.56
1.70
1.58
1.68
3.17
4.77
6.40
3.29
4.57
6.08
2.10
2.25
2.49
2.10
2.25
2.42
4.17
4.46
4.68
4.44
4.32
4.67
1.47
1.48
1.49
1.57
1.32
1.29
per round
Price
of
DOC (RM)
Mortality
rate (%)
Average
weight
of
broiler (Kg)
Price
Chicken
kg (RM)
Feed
conversion
rate (kg/kg)
511
3.2
broiler farms
Fixed capital investments refers to the funds invested in the permanent assets
and cover up any related equipments to perform entire production prosess. The table 2
below illustrated the differences among types of broiler production which is based on
scale and technological usage. In terms of total fixed cost, the stock breeders who has
large production absorbed tremendous costs in their initial investments, where by
adopting closed system is slightly higher then using open system. Then, almost 65 %
from the list of total investment is represented by building a henhouse and open
system simply charge lower cost then closed system especially to the breeders who
produced less number of day old chick. In the trade cycle, working capital is
important to survive from the cash resources. Ganesan (2007) explained that the
working capital is just as the investment to run day to day business and result the time
lag between the expenditure from buying raw materials and the overall sales from
finished products. Less cost of working capital lead to lost revenue and effect the
companys profitablity. In this study, the large farms of the open system registered as
having enormous working capital for one year period. It means that the firms would
be more profitable since the cash availability is considerably plentiful.
512
Mediu
389,4
675,70
14
Feed box
Drinker
Large
Smal
Mediu
Large
858,80
156,0
492,35
575.42
20
8,220
13,386
34,000
7,926
11,036
13,321
2,947
10,983
30,000
8,464
12,641
14,007
1,076
8,000
12,000
4,340
11,567
20,000
5,353
9,185
10,900
Playwood
1,963
1,157
2,900
722
1,242
2,479
Generator
14,14
27,000
42,400
37,81
15,920
35,800
10,396
12,333
77,400
180,00
Building &
equipments
Coop
Preventive
room
Trench/drai
nage
6
Fence
1,809
7
9,889
33,333
10,36
7
Lorry
or
76,50
79,033
322,60
79,90
4x4 wheel
Farm road
4,166
14,750
30,000
8,486
10,875
12,000
Tyre
3,020
4,524
10,000
6,290
9,544
12,000
151,9
596,01
2,134,7
151,4
628,35
2,272,0
02
62
86
84
658,4
1,444,0
3,518,7
473,6
1,286,9
3,152,3
30
07
62
05
51
52
treatment
Working
capital
Total fixed
cost
513
3.3
production. Nevetheless, when the costs turns to the cost per bird or kilogram, the
total variable cost constituted to RM 3.41 per kilogram which is less then others
levels of production and hennery systems. Conversely, the stock breeders which
adopted small scale in open system, is recorded as having a huge number of variable
cost per bird constituted RM 4.26 per kilogram which the price is slightly marginal to
the wholesalers market.
514
Items
Small
Mediu
Small
m
Per
Mediu
Large
farm
variable cost
Day old chicks
Feed
Labour charges
142,3
484,06
1,528,0
142,6
533,30
1,797,4
37
28
97
85
469,9
1,702,1
5,931,8
464,5
1,782,0
5,853,2
95
04
99
96
29
26
51,93
92,025
376,00
78,23
65,853
350,00
249,50
7,171
7
Medicines/vacc
8,952
58,982
ines
0
62,823
Electricity/dies
el
12,13
42,992
139,00
items
24,69
22,227
31,998
169,88
28,28
45,258
137,97
0
66,962
Total variable
5
5,820
Miscellaneous
129,43
710,0
2,447,1
8,394,3
726,8
2,511,4
8,300,1
24
34
15
06
99
24
0.78
0.72
0.67
0.84
0.73
0.74
Feed
2.58
2.55
2.60
2.72
2.45
2.41
Labour charges
0.29
0.14
0.16
0.46
0.09
0.14
Medicines/vacc
0.05
0.09
0.11
0.04
0.09
0.05
0.07
0.06
0.06
0.03
0.03
0.01
0.14
0.10
0.07
0.17
0.06
0.06
3.90
3.66
3.68
4.26
3.45
3.41
cost
Per
kg
variable cost
ines
Electricity/dies
el
Miscellaneous
items
Total variable
cost per kg
515
3.4
Net Returns from Different Scale and Tecnology of Broiler Farms for tax
paying enterprises
The net return of broiler production in this part is simply focussed on the
procedure calculation of net cash flow method. Where the units of depreciation cost
and tax obligation are imposed to obtain the absolute value of net return. Chen and
Koebel, (2013) stated that the character of fixed cost on the rate of return should be
avoided in order to neglect estimation biases. Baumol and Willig (1981) also
emphasised the fixed cost is used to consider the long run business and put as
magnitude intial cost when the variable cost tends to zero. Therefore, the net profit in
this study ignored the fixed cost and solely inserted it as the first investment. The
finding from table 4 revealed that the large scale in open system is highly registered
as the highly net return of broiler farms in Peninsular Malaysia followed by large
scale in closed system. Moreover, the small scale stock breeders either in closed or
open system simply received a marginal profit since the returns are only calculated to
0.55 and 0.35 cents respectively. This circumstanses however would not provide
enough cash to generate more earnings in the long terms business.
516
Mediu
Small
Mediu
Large
Total
759,5
2,980,0
10,673.6
757,4
3,141,7
11,360,4
08
53
44
29
68
18
Total
658,4
1,444,0
3,518,76
473,6
1,286,9
3,152,35
fixed
30
08
05
51
710,0
2,447,1
8,394,31
726,8
2,511,4
8,300,12
24
34
06
99
43,93
98,785
101,416
22,36
43,534
56,973
revenue
b.
cost
c.
Total
variable
cost
d.
Total
depreciat
ion cost
e.
Total
cost
753,9
2,545,9
8,495,73
749,1
2,555,0
8,357,09
57
18
75
33
5,550
434,13
2,177,91
8,253
586,73
3,003,32
108,53
544,478
146,68
750,803
(c+d)
f.
EBT (ae)
g.
Tax
1,388
(EBT*25
2,063
%)
h.
EAT (f-
4,164
g)
i.
Deprecia
tion
Net
43,93
325,60
1,633,43
98,785
101,416
3
profit
(g+h)
6,190
22,36
440,05
2,252,49
43,534
56,973
48,09
424,38
1,734,85
28,55
483,58
2,309,46
0.26
0.63
0.76
0.17
0.66
0.95
0.55
1.43
1.90
0.35
1.50
2.30
3.5
Net Returns from Different Scale and Tecnology of Broiler Farms for tax
exemption enterprises
The table 5 below generally explained the net return of broiler farms in tax
redemption. In a business, paying a tax after obtaining the gross return per year is
commonly obligatory. This condition ordinarily occurs to the company which has
been registered officially. Nevertheless, the tax responsibility sometimes overburdens
the companys return, particularly to the small business. Therefore, the study as well
illustrated how the profit of broiler industry in tax exemption. The result showed that
without paying tax, majority of the farms increased their net return. For instance, the
large scales in the closed and open system are heightened approximately about 30
cent to the net return per kilogram. On the contrary, the slight increase of net return,
as 1 cent per kilogram, is occured to small scale either in closed or open system.
Thus, the broiler industry in small production must be sensible to run their business in
order to reach out proper profit in advance.
518
Mediu
Small
Mediu
Large
Total
fixed cost
b.
Total
variable
658,4
1,444,0
3,518,7
473,6
1,286,9
3,152,3
30
08
62
05
51
52
710,0
2,447,1
8,394,3
726,8
2,511,4
8,300,1
24
34
15
06
99
24
43,93
98,785
101,416
22,36
43,534
56,973
cost
c.
Total
depreciati
on cost
d.
Total cost
(c+d)
e.
Earnings
753,9
2,545,9
8,495,7
749,1
2,555,0
8,357,0
57
18
32
75
33
97
5,550
434,134
2,177,9
8,253
586,735
3,003,3
(a-e)
f.
Depreciat
ion
Net
12
43,93
98,785
101,416
3
profit
(g+h)
49,48
20
22,36
43,534
56,973
630,269
3,060,2
9
532,919
2,279,3
30,62
28
93
0.27
0.80
1.00
0.18
0.87
1.26
0.57
1.80
2.49
0.38
1.95
3.04
Kg (RM)
Net profit per
chicken (RM)
4.0
CONCLUSION
The economic analysis through the application of production costs and benefit
analysis was employed in this study. In particular, the net return on broiler production
based on the number of birds produced and different technological application were
evaluated. However, the result follows similar theoretical assumption that in most
519
cases, the high initial investment is constantly occured in large farms of close system.
Nevertheless, the findings from the study also revealed that the elevated net return is
also consistently achieve from an open system that operates large production. This is
due to efficient FCR and the lowest variable cost per bird. On the other hand, the high
concern is on small scale operators either in close or open system as their net profit
per bird is slightly marginal even though under the tax exemption rgime. Therefore,
the study suggested that the small operatorss should consider building better
relationship with parental stocks or large farms in order to reduce cost of production,
particularly from intial investments. Finally, the high feed cost should be resolved by
the Government since it contributed almost 70 percent to the total expenses of broiler
production.
REFERENCES
Ahmad, Sarfraz, Tahir Zohoor Chohan and Ikram Ali. (2008). Economic analysis of
poultry production in Mirpur, Azad Jammu Kashmir.Pakistan Journal of life
and Social Sciences, Vol. 6, No. 1, pp 4-9.
Barnett, V.(1991). Sample survey principles and methods. Edward Arnold Publisher
Ltd, London
Baumul, William J and Willig, Robert D (1981), Fixed costs, sunk costs, entry
barriers, and sustainability of monopoly. The Quarterly Journal of Economics,
Vol. 96, No. 3, pp
405-431
Chen, Xi and Koebel, Bertrand M (2013), Fixed cost, variable cost, markups and
returns to scale, Bureau dEconomie Theorique at Appliquee, Document de
Travail n 2013-13
the
website
at
January
2015.
http://www.flfam.org.my/index.php/industry-info
Gutierrez, P.H and Dalsted, N.L (2012). Break-even method of investment analysis.
Farm and Rench Series, Colorado State University, Fact sheet No. 3.759
Index Mundi (2015) Broiler Meat (Poultry) Production by Country in 1000 MT.
Accessed
the
website
at
January
2015.
http://www.indexmundi.com/agriculture/?commodity=broilermeat&graph=production
521
Singh, Varinder Pal, Sharma, V.K, Sidhu, M.S and Kingra, H.S (2010), Broiler
production in Punjab- an economic analysis, Agricultural Economics Research
Review, Vol. 23, pp 315-324
Shaikh, A.S. and Y.C. Zala (2011). Production Performance and Economic Appraisal
of Broiler Farms in Anand District of Gujarat. Agricultural Economics
Research Review. Vol. 24 July-December 2011 pp 317-323.
522
Politeknik Mukah
laila.poli@1govuc.gov.my, fazlinarahiman.poli@1govuc.gov.my
ABSTRACT
The aim of this study is to identify the extent of preparation of final year
accounting students of Borneo Polytechnics before employment based on
their accounting skills. This extension study involved data collection based
on perception survey from usable 263 responses of final year accounting
students of Borneo Polytechnics. Quantitative methods have been used to
achieve the objectives of the study. Thus, descriptive statistics are used to
analyze the findings. The accounting skills discussed in this review with
respect to the preparation of Borneo Polytechnics final year accounting
students before their employment are (a) technical and functional skills; (b)
interpersonal and communication skills; and (c) organizational and business
management skills.
accounting skills during their study. However, they perceived that certain
skills needed to be enhanced before entering career in accounting profession.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
from employers are expected to be high while their potential employees have a higher
education level. This is due to knowledge is a major factor that will determine individual
happiness and success and strength of a nation (Siti Hajar and Maimunah, 2012).
1.1
Problem Statement
Accounting is an important area and playing vital roles in various fields. However,
accountants are still insufficient especially among Bumiputeras. Ainul Asniera (2014)
stated that Malaysia needs 60,000 chartered accountants by the year 2020. By June 2013,
the number of accountants in Malaysia was 30,000. According to the data of 2011, only
1,464 persons or 8.0 percent of qualified accountants compared out of the total of 19,062
persons. The data shown that accountancy students have a good chance in the future to be
employed if they meet the criteria and accountancy skills required by the employers.
Meanwhile, Malaysia needs an adequate number of accountants for the economic sectors
development.
It is important that graduates who will be graduating equip themselves with the
skills required by employers and make adequate preparation prior to employment.
Among the skills required are technical and functional skills across the areas of
accounting, auditing and taxation. Interpersonal and communication skills as well as
organizational and business management skills are also the focus point among employers.
Besides that, nowadays, employers will also require workers with skills such as problem
524
solving skills, communication skills, able to think independently and have the ability to
apply knowledge to practical tasks (Sanuzee, 2003).
1.2
Research Objectives
a)
b)
c)
1.3
This study was carried out to help final year students of Borneo Polytechnics
pursuing Diploma in Accountancy to make adequate preparations to cope with the new
environment of the workplace. The study can serve as a guide for future graduates in
preparing themselves for the employment. The contributions of this study include being a
comprehensive guide to the academicians of Borneo Polytechnics to acknowledge the
level of students accounting skills. It is important for academicians to recognize
525
students ability in order to measure the academic performance and assist them to
improve their teaching methods. In addition, academicians can encourage students to
improve their accounting skills before entering their career in the accounting profession.
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
Chaker and Abdullah (2011) also revealed that students training to practice public
accounting are required to have skills in communication, interpersonal and intellectual,
and knowledge in the areas of accounting, auditing, business and organizations.
In
addition, other generic skills could be considered by employers as key criteria in the
recruitment of new accounting graduates, such as oral, written communication, and also
listening skills. Besides that, other skills such as leadership and skills related to
communication and teamwork also needed to be enhanced (Klibi and Oussii, 2013).
However, Bui and Porter (2010) found that the accounting graduates were lacking in
writing skills, in applying knowlege to practical situations, and in understanding the
requirements of working as a member of a team in the accounting profession.
526
3.0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
The populations of this study were final year accounting students of three
Polytechnics in Borneo offering Diploma in Accountancy program for the June 2014
session. Table 1 shows the summary of the population and determining the sample size.
The study aimed to examine the preparation of Diploma in Accountancy final year
students before entering career in accounting field based on technical and functional skills;
interpersonal and communication skills; and organizational and business management
skills. Therefore, the researchers used survey technique in conducting this study.
Population
Sample Size
Polytechnic A
102
80
Polytechnic B
175
121
Polytechnic C
90
73
367
274
Total
The reliability tests on the identified skills for this study were found to be
acceptable and reliable as the Cronbachs Alpha values for all the items are above 0.60.
The following are the outcomes from the reliability tests: technical and functional skills
(16 items; Cronbachs Alpha= 0.860); interpersonal and communication skills (4 items;
Cronbachs Alpha= 0.770); and organizational and business management skills (10 items;
Cronbachs Alpha= 0.94). The data collected from this study is in the form of quantitative
data interval (comparison). To explain further, the data were presented in descriptive
analysis tables. Table 2 shows the mean score interpretation made to analyze the data
obtained.
527
Interpretation
1.0 1.4
1.5 2.4
Not prepared
2.5 3.4
Less prepared
3.5 4.4
Prepared
4.5 5.0
Strongly prepared
Adapted from Laila and Azizee (2014)
4.0
RESEARCH FINDINGS
measured based on their Cummulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). Generally the
respondents performed moderate academically. About 67.3% obtained CGPA above 3.00.
Table 6, Table 7 and Table 8 shows the mean score level of preparedness of
respondents towards employment based on the accounting skills that were acquired while
studying at Polytechnic. The technical and functional skills group covers the financial
accounting skills, management accounting skills, auditing skills, taxation skills and
information development and distribution skills as illustrated in Table 6. The mean for
each statement is comparatively moderate high. The respondents perceived they were
comparatively strong in knowing to prepare the financial statements (mean = 3.95;
standard deviation = 0.59).
For the management accounting skills, the mean for each statement is
comparatively moderate. This indicates that the respondents were comparatively fair in
the area of management accounting. The respondents were less able in appraising the
investment (mean = 3.24; standard deviation = 0.70) and able to exercise judgment to
solve real-world problem (mean = 3.49; standard deviation = 0.74). However, they
528
Male
Female
Total
Polytechnic A
18
103
121
Polytechnic B
10
59
69
Polytechnic C
21
52
73
Total
49
214
263
Race
Total (Percentage)
Malay
47
16
72 (27.4%)
Bajau
11 (04.2%)
Brunei Malay
7 (02.7%)
Kadazan - Dusun
18
26 (09.9%)
Murut
2 (00.8%)
Iban
19
15
35 (13.3%)
Bidayuh
10
16 (06.1%)
Melanau
14 (05.3%)
Orang Ulu
6 (02.3%)
17
13
37 (14.1%)
Indian
1 (00.4%)
Others
11
22
36 (13.7%)
121
69
73
263 (100%)
Chinese
Total
Frequency
Percentage
2.00 2.50
3.4%
2.51 3.00
77
29.3%
3.01 3.50
118
44.9%
3.51 4.00
59
22.4%
Total
60
100%
529
The responses for the auditing skills, taxation skills and information development
and distribution skills were also varied. The respondents were believed to understand the
fundamentals of auditing (mean = 3.78; standard deviation = 0.61) and were able to apply
auditing standard in their work (mean = 3.54; standard deviation = 0.66). For the taxation
skills, the respondents were comparatively moderately able to apply relevant tax
legislation in their work (mean = 3.54; standard deviation = 0.75).
Moving to the
information development and distribution skills, the respondents were asked on their
preparedness on 3 statements.
moderately high, as the lowest mean score is 3.67. They were comparatively strong in
using computerized accounting software. Overall, the dominant skills in the technical and
functional skills group are information development and distribution skills and financial
accounting skills. The respondents perceived that they were prepared for these skills.
For interpersonal and communication skills, the mean score is in the range of 2.94
until 3.81 as per shown in Table 8. The responses for those skills are illustrated in Table
7. The respondents were comparatively not able to make presentation in other languages
(mean = 2.94; standard deviation = 1.25). However, the respondents were comparatively
moderately strong in presenting their views by writing in English (mean = 3.81; standard
deviation = 0.79).
530
Mean
SD
3.95
0.59
3.67
0.64
3.73
0.62
3.75
0.64
3.60
0.66
3.74
0.43
3.92
0.68
3.63
0.81
3.24
0.70
3.49
0.74
3.57
0.51
3.78
0.61
3.54
0.66
3.66
0.55
3.73
0.69
3.54
0.75
3.64
0.63
3.75
0.68
3.86
0.66
3.67
0.69
3.76
0.53
3.67
0.42
531
Mean
SD
3.81
0.79
3.62
0.82
2.94
1.25
3.76
0.84
3.53
0.68
Mean
SD
3.89
0.72
3.97
0.66
4.05
0.63
3.94
0.69
3.99
0.67
3.85
0.68
3.58
0.74
3.61
0.73
3.56
0.73
3.65
0.77
3.81
0.52
the world.
managed.
I possess knowledge of financial markets and funding
institutions.
I understand relevant laws relating to the business and the
operating of business.
I understand methods of managing changes within
organization.
Table 9 shows the summary of mean score for all accounting skills.
The
respondents rated themselves to be prepared in all accounting skills. They perceived they
were prepared more in organizational and business management skills followed by
technical and functional skills.
532
Table 9: The overall mean score and interpretation for each accounting skills
Accounting skills
Mean
Interpretation
3.67
Prepared
3.53
Prepared
3.81
Prepared
3.67
Prepared
skills
Overall Accounting skills
5.0
DISCUSSION
The research finding of this study indicates that final year accounting students of
Borneo Polytechnics perceived that they were prepared in organizational and business
management skills before their employement in the accounting profession. This finding
confirms the result of Chaker and Abdullah (2011). The result revealed accounting
students perceived that they were good in professional ethics and they knew how to apply
them in their work, which consist under organizational and business management skills.
The output also indicates that final year accounting students of Borneo
Polytechnics perceived that they prepared in technical and functional skills that consist of
financial accounting skills, management accounting skills, auditing skills, taxation skills,
and information development and distribution skills. This result is consistent with the
Chaker and Abdullah, (2011) that accounting students as a respondent were good in
auditing skills and moreover accountancy firms perceived that financial accounting,
taxation and management accounting were important too. Klibi and Oussii (2013) also
found from their finding that students believed more in basic technical skills compared to
other categories of skills.
However, the findings of this study shows that they also prepared in interpersonal
and communication skills before entering career in the accounting profession. This result
is not consistent with the study of Bui and Porter (2010) that accounting graduates were
lacking in writing skills, in applying knowledge to practical situations, and in
understanding the requirements of working as a member of a team in the accounting
533
profession. The results agree with the study of Klibi and Oussii (2013) that suggest other
generic skills could be considered by employers as key criteria in the recruitment of new
accounting graduates, such as oral, written communication, and listening skills. Besides
that, other skills such as leadership and skills related to communication and teamwork
also needed to be enhanced among Borneo Polytechnics students. The findings of this
study have important implications for accounting students.
themselves for the demands of the business world.
6.0
Researchers have determined the limitation of this study. The sample for this
study is only within the Borneo Polytechnics boundaries that could not be generalized
onto all Polytechnics in Malaysia. The researchers also have some recommendations for
future researches. Based on the findings, the researchers recommended for the study to be
extended to the accounting students in several Polytechnics in Malaysia that may
investigate on the differences among them. Besides that, by using the instrument, it could
be applied to different research methods or other research analyses.
534
REFERENCES
Ainul
Asniera
Ahsan.
2014.
Malaysia
Perlu
60,000
Akauntan
Bertauliah.
at
College? International Journal of Business and Social Science. 2(18), pp. 193199.
Handbook of
Klibi, M. F. & Oussii, A. A. 2013. Skills and Attributes Needed for Success in Acounting
Career: Do Employers Fit with Students Perceptions? Evidence from Tunisia.
International Journal of Business and Management; Vol. 8(8).
Laila Musa & Azizee Aziz. 2014. Final Year Accounting Students Preparedness towards
Employment Based On Accounting Skills. Persidangan Pendidikan (Penyelidikan
dan Inovasi) dalam Pendidikan dan Latihan Teknikal dan Vokasional (CiE-TVET),
Kali Ke-4. eISBN 978-967-0468-99-0. 725 739.
Mohaiyadin, N.M. Jaafar, M.A., Hassan, A., Jafri, A.R. & Abd. Azar, N.A. 2013.
Undergraduate Accounting Students Perceptions of Students Empowerment and
Accounting Technical Skills: Case in Universiti Tenaga Nasional (Uniten),
Malaysia. Social Sciences. Vol. 2(2). pp. 39-47.
535
Sanuzee Shafie. 2003. Persediaan Pelajar Tahun Akhir Diploma Akauntansi Sebelum
Memasuki Alam Pekerjaan Berdasarkan Kriteria yang Dikehendaki Oleh Majikan.
Kolej Universiti Teknologi Tun Hussein Onn.
Siti Hajar & Maimunah. 2012. Keberkesanan Program Skim Latihan Graduan bagi
Mengurangkan Kadar Pengangguran dalam Kalangan Siswazah. Jurnal Islam dan
Masyarakat Kontemporari Jilid 5(Julai). 3-12
536
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Rising raw materials in China led to a high demand. Strong demand in China's
economy is stable enough to produce more than one hundred million kg (more than
200 million pounds) of steel products per year. Most of gray cast iron is reserved for
military use in crafting weapons and armor soldiers, but some have been used for
many steel products, such as fashion car cylinder head, block, iron, motors and much
more is needed to fill the growing demand in the real market.
Less energy is used when we can get a cut depth in the grinding process. The
industry uses grinding process such as automotive, aircraft, shipbuilding, engines,
turbines and others can benefit from it. The grinding process is necessary to produce
accurate and precise measurements. It also aims to create a better quality of surface
condition he not only benefit the industry but also improve the quality of the material.
Type parameter in the grinding process will affect the characteristics of the
workpiece, such as surface roughness, temperature, energy and others. There are
many types of parameters in the grinding process. Surface quality produced in the
grinding surface is influenced by various parameters such as the parameter wheel,
workpiece parameters, process parameters and machine parameters in writing
Mustafa (2012).
In this study, researchers conducted a study of gray cast iron after a surface
grinding process cutting parameters for the relationship of the surface roughness and
material removal rate. Other researchers parameters which is controlled, such as
machinery, grinding wheels, skill workers, materials, machine calibration and the
like. Cutting parameters studied were cutting depth, feed rate and cutting speed table
and use a dry grinding. Using a different example, it can determine which have a
significant parameter to the workpiece surface roughness and material removal rate.
538
2.0
METHODOLOGY
In this experiment using design of experiment (DOE), which is 23 by 8 work
piece Repeat to use and apply the method (mirror). Repeat method (mirror) will make
the work piece is rolled into as many as 16 overall number of work piece. 2 values in
the DOE shows minimum and maximum values in coordinating one variable, while
the third, namely the index of the value 2 indicates the number of variable cutting
parameters studied in the experiment. Variable cutting parameters studied were as
table velocity, depth of cut and feed of rate. Selection of experimental design requires
knowledge of the process to be carried out and the choice of factors and levels may
significantly affect the response of materials, by article Zurita et al (2002). Gray
studied material is cast iron (SAE G29000 F10008), this material is widely used in
the production of vehicle components. In this study is to obtain the best cutting
parameters of the material being studied. Grinding machine used is a brand Seedtex
52 Model A1S. Machine calibration has been performed which includes works such
as balancing, dressing and leveling. Spark has also set out a total of 5 times each time
the spark out of the feed rate is done. Similarly, work is also done every time dressing
for the grinding of each work piece with step 7, 5, 3 and 1. The diamond is used for
grinding stainless 2.5 sized grinding wheel for every new piece work. From Table 1
539
shows the Design Matrix is used in this study which included 16 specimens. The
equation of full factorial design is stated in Equation 1.
Full Factorial Equation = 2k
(1)
Where k denotes as the number of factors, i.e., depth of cut, feed of rate and
velocity table being investigated in this experiment and 2 is level of experiment, i.e.,
low (-1) and high (+1). The analysis of ANOVA is employed in order to indicate the
mathematical models of Surface Grinding machining characteristic using design
expert software version 6. Table 2 shows the setting parameters for Surface grinding
machine.
Table 1: Combination parameter in arrays Design Matrix ( 23 ) Two Level
540
All of the grinding experiments were carried out on a Surface Grinding Machine,
Model YSG 52 A1S manufactured by Seedtex Precision Machinery in Taiwan Fig 1.
Factor
Low ( - 1)
High (+ 1)
12
0.50
1.00
10.00
20.00
From Table 2 shows the Design Matrix is used in this study which included 16
specimens.
541
3.0
3.1
542
Hence;
Ra = 0.19 + 1.87 x 10-4 x (1) + 3.812 x 10-3 x (1) 0.033 x (-1) + 0.020 x (1) x (1)
0.043 x (1) x (-1) 6.562 x 10-3 x (1) x (-1) + 3.437 x 10-3 x (1) x (1) x (-1)
Ra = 0.19 + 0.000187 + 0.003812 + 0.033 + 0.020 +0.043 + 0.006562 0.003437 =
0.2931 m
Percentage of difference between calculated value and experimental value of Ra is
2% as indicated in Equation 3. It is confirmed that mathematical model generated by
Design Expert software is reliable and acceptable.
(3)
grinding speed it is possible to increase the mass removal rate in the grinding process.
Ra value obtained from the average of the three readings of surface roughness
machine utilization. While the MRR is from equation 4 as shown below.
(4)
544
3.2
From Anova analysis, mean value of A is 1.052, B is 0.15 and C is 10.75. The
higher percentage of parameter cutting surface roughness (Ra) is C (velocity table)
89.5%, second higher is A (feed of rate) 8.8% and the lower is B (depth of cut) 1.3%,
shown
Figure 4.
From Anova analysis, mean value of A is 20.68, B is 3.01 and C is 27.15. The
higher percentage of parameter cutting surface roughness (Ra) is C (velocity table)
545
53.4%, second higher is A (feed of rate) 40.7% and the lower is B (depth of cut)
5.9%, shown
Figure 5.
According by Kamal et al (2012), it says that the mass removal rate (MRR) is
mainly affected by cutting speed and feed of rate of dry grinding process. With the
increase in cutting speed the mass removal rate is increase. The parameter considered
in the experiment are the best parameter cutting process to attain maximum mass
removal rate.
546
3.3
The selected value of the best parameter cutting setting is number 1, it use
0.55 feed of rate, 10.00 depth of cut and 12.00 velocity table. Another selected
method is surface roughness 0.215403 m, material removal rate (MRR) 0.196454
mg/sec and desirability 0.782. This can be referred to Fig. 6 the software has been
analyzed as below.
4.0
CONCLUSION
4.0
The analysis for dry surface roughness has determined that the most effective
of grinding surface is velocity table with prob > 0.0112 and the percentage is 89.5%.
It has proven through 16 specimen repeated method with average of surface
roughness 0.05m. From the main effect plotted, it is observed that there is decrease
of surface roughness when
the parameter for velocity table is decrease. The percentages value affecting of
surface roughness are in the following order. Feed of rate (8.8%), depth of cut (1.3%)
and velocity table (89.5%). Velocity table are significant for cutting parameter
effecting surface roughness, this fact is also supported by Babu et al (2012) based on
547
their ANOVA velocity table are the most significant parameters for affecting multi
response characteristics. The feed of rate and depth of cut value are not significant.
Based on the curve, the reason why these two parameter cutting is not significant
because of the minimum and maximum value are not in best position to get the
significant mean value. Fig. 7 shows the adjustment of the cutting parameters that
need to be adjusted for future studies.
4.2
In dry condition, the best cutting parameter for the output process of MRR in
terms of machining cutting parameter are velocity table, feed of rate also significant,
only depth of cut are not significant. This have been identified on cast iron on surface
grinding machine using design expert software. The values of prob>F less than 0.05
m are significant with the value 0.0032 m.
548
REFERENCES
Henderson G.R, (2006). Six Sigma : Quality Improvement With MINITAB. John
Wiley & Sons. England, ISBN : 10: 0470011556. pp:452.
Kamal Hassan, Anish Kumar and M.P Garg (2012). "Experimental Investigation of
Material Removal Rate in CNC Turning using Taguchi Method". Lecturer,
Haryana Engineering College.
Klocke. F and Eisenblatter (1997)."Dry cutting, Annals of the CIRP". Vol. 46/2 Pages
519-525.
M Janardhan and A. Gopala Krishna (2012), Multi Objective Optimization of
Cutting Parameter for Surface Roughness and Metal Removal Rate in Surface
Grinding using Response Surface Methodology. University College of
Engineering, JNTU, India.
M.Kiyak and O Carkib E Altana (2006), Study on Surface Roughness in External
Cylinder Grinding. Technical University, 34390 Istanbul, Turkey.
Maheswari S.K, Misra V and Metha N.K (1991)."A New Approach To Parameters
Selection: Integration Of Quality: Computers and Industrial Engineering".
549
21(1-4), 57-62.
Malkin,.S. (1989), Grinding of metal: Theory and Application, Applied
Metalworking. American Society for Metals, vol. 3, No. 2.
Muhamad Afiq bin Razali (2010), Effect of wheel Grinder on the Surface Roughness
when Grinding Aluminium Alloy, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering,
Universiti Malaysia Pahang.
Mustafa Kemal Kulekci (2012). "Surface Grinding Process Based in the Taguchi
Method". Mersin University, Turkey.
Zurita, O., Acosta, A. and Moreno, D. (2002). Superficial Hardening in the Plane
Grinding of 1055 - 1045 Steel, ASM International.
550
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
residential and commercial sectors contributed about 12.8 % of total energy demand
in 2012 (The Economic Planning Unit, 2006). Thus, the Malaysia authority has taken
much action to reduce energy consumption in this country (T. M. Mahlia et al., 2002;
T. M. Mahlia et al., 2004). One of the program that has been implemented based on a
minimum EE standard is MEPS. MEPS is a minimum performance level set for many
types of energy consuming products from entering a market by mandatory
requirements. Currently MEPS is used in 37 countries around the world for 17
product groups amongst others in Australia, China, Japan and US (CLASP, 2014).
Improving EE of electrical appliances such as refrigerator and air conditioner can
reduce energy consumption in a building (Javadi and Saidur, 2013). In other hand, a
significant amount of electricity can be saved by using efficient electrical appliances.
However, the implementation of this program should be proven reliable and have
potential to save energy.
2.0
552
In ninth Malaysia Plan (2006-2010), the 6th Prime Minister Dato Seri
Abdullah Ahmad Badawi said that adequate quality and energy supply is key to the
nations development. An energy conservation culture must be inculcated. Buildings
should be designed to optimise energy usage and resources need to be prudently and
carefully utilised. He stated that the Government will adopt measures to reduce
wastage by enhancing EE and increasing EE. The Government is also committed to
reduce dependence on petroleum products through the increased usage of alternative
fuels such as biofuel and biodiesel as well as renewable energy (The Economic
Planning Unit, 2006).
553
AREA OF JURISDICTION
Planning
Unit Responsible
(EPU)
implementing
for
formulating,
policies,
regulating
regulations,
and
legislations,
and
(KeTTHA)
The
Energy
(EC)
Energy
Besides
Tenaga
Malaysia, and
technological
research,
development
and
3.0
Although EE standards are now commonly used around the world, the MEPS
approach still not implemented in many countries. However, the countries that have
not used this strategy yet are considering it. Malaysia is also considering adopting this
strategy. MEPS are incorporated in the amendments of the Electricity Regulations
1994 and has been gazetted by the Minister of Energy, Green Technology and Water
Malaysia on 3rd May 2013. Before MEPS, a Voluntary Energy Efficient Appliances
and Equipment standards and labelling programme for Energy Efficient Appliances
and Equipment was conducted from 2009 to 2012. A total of 5016 appliances and
equipment registered under this programme including domestic refrigerators,
domestic fans, television, air conditioners (single split wall mounted type), lamps and
high efficiency motors. The incentives that supports the Voluntary Energy Efficiency
Rating and Labeling programme at that time are Sustainability Achieved Via Energy
554
Efficiency (SAVE) Programme and Sales Tax and Import Duty Exemption (Energy
Commission, 2014). Currently, MEPS has been implemented to 5 domestic electrical
products which is air conditioner, refrigerator, television, domestic fan and lighting.
However, beginning 3rd May 2015, the above 5 appliances will have to adhere to the
MEPS requirement for it to be sell in the Malaysian market. The efficiency level is
shown by using the star rating label. This label must be affixed onto the electrical
appliances before it can be sold in the market. Mahlia, et al. (2002) highlighted the
purpose to introduce labels is to convince consumers to buy EE appliances. At the
same time also influence the manufacturers to produce more EE products into the
market.
4.0
The testing standards and performance criteria that have been set for the
electrical appliances in Malaysia is Performance Indicator and Testing Standard and
the Star Index based on daily energy consumption obtained from tests in accordance
with MS IEC 62552:2011 (Energy Commission, 2014).
Star Index = (
) 100%
(1)
Where,
Energy Efficiency Factor (EEF) =
EEF average (1 door) = 1.37 Vadj
EEF average (2 door) = 0.409 Vadj
The STAR Index values for the various star ratings are as shown in Table 2.0 below.
555
5.0
556
Figure 1.0: The Energy Efficiency Label Specification by the Energy Commission
Table 3.0 below shows the efficiency ratings for the purpose of efficient use of
electricity for five types of appliances in Malaysia.
Table 3.0: The Efficiency Ratings For The Purpose Of Efficient Use of Electricity
Equipment
Type of
MEPS
Efficiency Ratings
Equipment
Refrigerato
a) One door
b) Two
STAR
STAR
RATING
INDEX
doors
VALUE
5
+25%
STAR
Index
+10%
STAR
Index
<+25%
-10%
STAR
Index
<+10%
-25%
STAR
Index <-
557
10%
1
STAR
Index <25%
Air
Single split
conditioner
wall mounted
a) Cooling capacity
< 405kW
air conditioner
STAR
STAR
capacity up to
RATING
INDEX
25,000Btu/h
VALUE
5
11.94
11.16
11.93
10.37
11.15
9.56
10.36
9.00
9055
b) 4.5kW < cooling
Capacity <
7.1kW:
STAR
STAR
RATING
INDEX
VALUE
10.71
9.83
10.70
8.94
9.82
8.03
8.93
7.50
8.02
558
Television
a) Plasma
STAR
STAR
RATIN
INDEX
Crystal
VALUE
Display
+05%
b) Liquid
(LCD)
STAR
c) Light
Index
Emitting
+10%
Diode
STAR
(LED)
Index
d) Cathode
<+20%
Ray Tube
(CRT)
-10%
STAR
Index
<+10%
-20%
STAR
Index <10%
30%STA
R Index <20%
Domestic
a) Wall
Fan
b) Des
c) Pedestal
a) Ceiling fan:
STAR
STAR
RATING
INDEX
d) Ceiling
VALUE
5
3.00
2.74
2.99
2.66
2.73
2.58
2.65
559
2.50
2.57
b) Pedestal, wall
and desk fan:
STAR
STAR
RATING
INDEX
VALUE
1.20
1.12
1.19
1.08
1.11
1.01
1.07
0.93
1.00
Lighting
a) Fluorescent
b) Compact
a) Tubular Fluorescent
Type
(W)
Fluorescent
Lamp
(lm/W)
T8
(CFL)
c) Light
Emitting
Diode
(LED)
T5
18-30
70
31
85
14
80
15
85
d) Incandescen
t
MEPS
MEPS
(lm/W)
CFLi (Self
ballasted)
<9W
55
9-15W
8060
16-24W
8560
25W
60
CFL(non
560
Nil
integrated
lamp)
<10W
60
11-26W
65
27W
85
LED Lamp
55
Incandescent
20
Lamp
Source: Energy Commission, 2014
6.0
CONCLUSIONS
REFERENCES
Basu, K., Hawarah, L., Arghira, N., Joumaa, H., & Ploix, S. (2013). A prediction
system for home appliance usage. Energy & Buildings, 67, 668679.
561
Commission.
(2014).
Energy
Commission.
Retrieved
from
http://www.st.gov.my/
Jalal, T. S., & Bodger, P. (2009). National Energy Policies and the Electricity Sector
in Malaysia. In International Conference on Energy and Environment (pp.7
8).
Javadi, F. S., & Saidur, R. (2013). Energetic, economic and environmental impacts of
using nanorefrigerant in domestic refrigerators in Malaysia. Energy
Conversion and Management, 73, 335339.
Mahlia, T. M. ., Masjuki, H. ., Saidur, R., & Amalina, M. . (2004). Costbenefit
analysis of implementing minimum energy efficiency standards for household
refrigerator-freezers in Malaysia. Energy Policy, 32(16), 18191824.
Mahlia, T. M. I., Masjuki, H. H., & Choudhury, I. A. (2002). Theory of energy
efficiency standards and labels. Energy Conversion & Management, 43, 743
761.
The Economic Planning Unit. (1996). Seventh Malaysia Plan 1996-2000.
562
Politeknik Mukah
abgsyafiq.poli@1govuc.gov.my, ml_chong.poli@1govuc.gov.my
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
Ketika permulaan
perlaksanaan
EE601) ini pada sesi, kos untuk pembelian kit peralatan P&P adalah sangat tinggi
iaitu sekitar RM 50,000 hingga RM 100,000 seunit. Pada masa kini, peralatanperalatan tersebut
boleh
dikatakan
telah
lapuk
dari segi
teknologi
dan
Ianya
merupakan
Politeknik dan boleh digunapakai serta di praktikan untuk kursus Project 1 & Project
2, yang
bertujuan
Dengan pembanggunan Pengawal mikro ini, diharap proses P&P akan dapat
dijalankan dengan lebih berkesan. Selain daripada itu juga, reka bentuk ABBM yang
dihasilkan ini juga mampu menarik minat pelajar untuk meneroka ilmu secara
praktikal berbanding secara teori sahaja. Penggunaan ABBM yang bersesuaian untuk
proses P&P amatlah dituntun dikalangan pensyarah agar dapat memberi kesan yang
maksimum kepada pelajar semasa proses pengajaran.
564
Kebolehan seseorang pelajar semasa proses P&P dapat diukur dengan penilaian serta
pemerhatian semasa pelajar melaksanakan ujikaji, penerangan penggunaan teknologi
serta kemahiran sedia ada untuk melaksanaan tugas (Mok Soon Sang, 2002).
1.1
Pernyataan Masalah
1.2
Objektif Projek
satu modul
pengawal mikro yang boleh digunakan di dalam proses P&P kursus Project
1(EE501) & Project 2 (EE601) bagi pelajar program Diploma Kejuruteraan
Elektrik di Politeknik Mukah, Sarawak. Objektif projek ini adalah seperti berikut
berikut iaitu :
a)
b)
c)
1.3
Kepentingan Projek
Mikro ini juga dapat membantu individu yang baru menceburi didalam bidang
kejuruteraan elektrik untuk lebih memahami konsep elektrik itu sendiri dimana projek
yang dibangunkan ini dapat memberi pendedahan kepada bentuk aplikasi yang
sebenar.
1.4
Skop Projek
a)
Projek ini tertumpu kepada kursus yang dijalankan untuk pelajar semester kelima dan ke-enam di Jabatan Kejuruteraan Elektrik di Politeknik Mukah
Sarawak.
b)
c)
d)
2.0
METODOLOGI PROJEK
Rajah 1 menunjukan salah satu perisian yang akan digunakan semasa pembangunan
projek ini.
566
Selain daripada itu juga, PIC18F4550 merupakan salah satu pengawal mikro
antara yang termurah dipasaran, mempunyai fungsi aplikasi yang luas, kualiti
penghasilan yang baik, menggunakan teknologi yang terkini serta ianya mudah
didapati.
PIC18F4550 ini juga telah dipilih sebagai pengawalmikro utama untuk projek
ini kerana telah banyak pengaturcaraan yang telah dibangunkan oleh Microchip.
Perisian-perisian yang telah dibangunkan ini juga mudah untuk didapati dan dimuat
turun secara percuma dilaman sesawang sebagai rujukan didalam penghasilan projek
yang diperlukan. Disini ia boleh dibayangkan sebagai penyelesaian yang sangat baik
bagi permasalahan semasa melaksanakan pengaturcaraan bagi pengawalan proses
yang berbeza di dalam industri mahupun penggunaan domestik. Rajah 2 menunjukan
bentuk fizikal PIC18F4550 yang digunakan untuk pembangunan projek ini.
567
2.1
Kuantitatif
b)
Kualitatif
c)
Gabungan
2.2
Pengumpulan data
568
3.0
569
a)
Eksperimen 1
Aturcara
pertama
yang
dibangunkan
dengan
menggunakan
perisian
Output digital untuk LED tersebut adalah disambungkan pada PORTB modul
pengawal ini. Manakala bahagian input disambungkan pada kawalan PORTA.
b)
Eksperimen 2
Aturcara kedua pula adalah mengawal arah pergerakan motor 12V DC dengan
menggunakan alat kawalan jauh tanpa wayar. Motor tersebut juga akan menggunakan
2 jenis bekalan kuasa, samada dari punca kuasa domestik (240VAC) ataupun battery
12V.
c)
Eksperimen 3
Sensor warna adalah diantara satu aturcara yang telah dibangunkan untuk
projek ini, dimana satu program telah ditulis bagi membezakan warna objek yang
dilalukan di atas sensor warna tersebut.
570
Perbezaan warna ini juga akan di perlihatkan pada paparan skrin LCD yang
turut dibangunkan. Ujikaji ini mampu mengajar penggunak tentang penggunaan LCD
dan juga sensor warna.
d)
Eksperimen 4
Sensor pergerakan juga telah dibangunkan sekali di dalam projek kali ini
dimana setiap kali sensor tersebut mengesan pergerakan, LCD akan memaparkan
Movement Detected pada skrin.
Ujikaji kali ini hanya membolehkan pelajar untuk memahami konsep sensor
pergerakan , dimana input dan output sesuatu sensor itu memberikan maklumat yang
diperlukan sebelum paparan pada LCD dihasilkan.
e)
Eksperimen 5
Ujikaji yang kelima pula menunjukan cara dan kajian tentag litar 240VAC
yang boleh dikawal dengan menggunakan alat kawalan jauh.
Satu Solid State Relay akan disambungkan pada bahagian output Microchip,
pada PORTB, bagi menentukan bilakan bekalan kuasa AC boleh digunakan.
Penulisan program juga mengambil kira input daripada alat kawalan jauh dimana data
yang dihantar oleh alat kawalan jauh akan menentukan Solid State Relay
membenarkan arus elektrik 240VAC untuk mengalir dan seterusnya menghidupkan
alatan elektrik dan elektronik.
3.1
Had Projek
Perisian
MIcrochip
yang
beroperasi
dalam
LITE
MODE
hanya
membenarkan pengguna untuk menulis aturcara asas sahaja dan ini menyebabkan
keupayaan Modul Pengawal ini terhad dalam menghasilkan lebih banyak aturcara
program yang canggih.
571
4.0
CADANGAN
a)
b)
c)
5.0
KESIMPULAN
Dengan adanya projek ini, maka tugas penerangan semasa perlaksanaan P&P
untuk kursus Projek Tahun Akhir Pelajar (EE501 & EE601) lebih mudah untuk
dilaksakan. Dengan menepati silibus yang dikeluarkan oleh pihak KPTM, penggunaan
Microchip ini amat sesuai untuk pengajaran.
Sehubungan itu juga, kit yang dibangunkan ini juga diharapkan mampu
dinaiktarafkan serta dipertingkatkan kebolehan dalam perlaksaan eksperimen yang
mampu mebawa kepada manafaat kepada pengguna. Ini kerana seperti yang kita tahu,
penggunaan Microchip ini sangat luas untuk dikaji bersama.
RUJUKAN
Bogdan, R. C., & Biklen, S. K. (1982). Qualitative research for education: An
introduction to theory and methods. Boston: Allyn and Bacon, Inc.
572
Chong Man Lung, Mohamad Zamri Bin Jamil, Zulkefli Bin Iberahim (2013)
Pembangunan PIC18FXXXX Trainer Malaysia: PMU DIGEST
Dogan Ibrahim(2008). Advanced PIC Microcontroller Projects in C.U.S.A: Newnes
Han Way Huang (2005).PIC18 PIC Microcontroller - An Introduction to Software
and Hardware Interfacing. U.S.A: Thomson
Mok Soon Sang. (2002). Psikologi pendidikan untuk kursus Diploma Perguruan
Semester 3. Kuala Lumpur: Percetakan Sentosa Sdn. Bhd.
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. McKinlay, Danny Causey(2008). PIC
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems. New Jersey: Prentice Hall
Myke Predko(2008). Programming and Customising the PIC Microcontroller.
U.S.A.: McGraw-Hill
Tim Wilmshurst(2007). Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers
using C. Great Britain : Newnes.
573
ABSTRAK
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
a)
b)
c)
575
Kajian ini dijalankan untuk melihat peningkatan imej bandar Kota Bharu
sebagai produk pelancongan utama bagi negeri Kelantan dan pemeliharaan imej
bandar Kota Bharu sebagai sebuah bandaraya yang mempunyai ciri unik dan
memelihara produk pelancongan. Beberapa objektif telah dikenalpasti untuk mencapai
tujuan kajian ini iaitu:
a)
b)
c)
2.0
KAJIAN LITERATUR
penawaran ke dalam pasaran yang boleh digunakan atau diminta kebenaran untuk
memilikinya. Produk juga termasuklah di dalam bentuk fizikal, objek, perkhidmatan,
manusia, tempat, organisasi dan sebagainya lagi. Selain itu, produk juga adalah
pengeluaran yang boleh mendatangkan kebaikan, produk juga bukan sahaja barangan
tetapi perkhidmatan pelancongan juga termasuk di dalam produk yang merupakan
pengeluaran sesuatu produk yang dapat memberi keselesaan di dalam kehidupan.
Menurut beliau lagi, destinasi pelancong seperti di dalam negeri, antara wilayah dan
tempat peranginan yang istimewa merupakan sebahagian daripada produk
pelancongan, namun jika dilihat dari perspektif geografi perkhidmatan setiap kawasan
berbeza-beza mengikut jenis produk yang dipasarkan di kawasan tersebut.
a)
b)
Peningkatan
kawalan
dan
penguatkuasaan
terhadap
amalan
agama,
d)
e)
f)
g)
a)
Memperbanyakan
kemudahan
infrastruktur
yang
dapat
membekalkan
c)
d)
e)
bagi
menggalakkan
kedatangan
pelancong-pelancong
antarabangsa.
f)
580
3.0
METODOLOGI
Kajian yang dijalankan ini adalah kajian yang berbentuk deskriptif atau
tinjauan yang mengimplementasikan penglibatan data secara kuantitatif iaitu
melibatkan pengambilan data menggunakan instrumen soal selidik. Instrumen ini
telah dibahagikan kepada tiga bahagian, iaitu bahagian A, B dan C. Bahagaian A
merangkumi profil dan latar belakang pengunjung, bahagian B mengandungi 7 item
ciri-ciri perjalanan pengunjung dan bahagian C mengandungi 13 item pandangan
pengunjung terhadap pelancongan bandar Kota Bharu. Tempat kajian yang dijalankan
adalah di sekitar destinasi pelancongan di bandar Kota Bharu, iaitu ibu negeri
Kelantan. Populasi kajian ini terdiri daripada pelancong dan pengunjung yang
mengunjungi destinasi pelancongan berkenaan, seramai 100 responden telah dipilih
untuk kajian ini. Dapatan kajian yang diperolehi telah dianalisis dengan menggunakan
perisian Statistical Package for Social Science (SPSS Versi 18). Pemilihan ini adalah
untuk memudahkan menyimpan, mengolah, mencapai, mengira dan mengubah data
serta mampu membina laporan. Kaedah pemerhatian juga dilakukan secara tinjauan
visual.
581
4.0
DAPATAN KAJIAN
Seramai 100 responden yang terlibat dalam kajian ini terdiri daripada
pengunjung yang berkunjung ke destinasi-destinasi pelancongan yang telah dipilih di
sekitar bandar Kota Bharu. Sebanyak 59% responden adalah daripada kaum Melayu
diikuti Cina (31%) dan India (10%). Ini menunjukkan kaum Melayu lebih ramai
mengunjungi bandar Kota Bharu berbanding dengan kaum yang lain.
Kaum
Jumlah
Melayu
Cina
India
Lelaki
17 (28.8%)
16 (51.6%)
5 (50.0%)
38 (38.0%)
Perempuan
42 (71.2%)
15 (48.4%)
5 (50.0%)
62 (62.0%)
59 (100.0%)
31 (100.0%)
10 (100.0%)
100 (100.0%)
Jumlah
Majoriti pengunjung adalah datang dari luar bandar Kota Bharu iaitu 62% dan
25% daripadanya adalah pengunjung dari luar negeri Kelantan. Ini menunjukkan
bandar Kota Bharu adalah kawasan tumpuan sama ada dari penduduk tempatan
mahupun penduduk luar bandar Kota Bharu. Statistik Ini juga disebabkan hanya
pengunjung dalam daerah Kota Bharu dan dalam negeri Kelantan yang banyak
mengetahui kewujudan destinasi pelancongan dan tidak mustahil jika kebanyakan
responden terdiri daripada pengunjung dalam negeri Kelantan sahaja. Selain itu,
terdapat juga pengunjung yang datang dari luar negeri Kelantan contohnya seperti
Terengganu, Perak, Pahang dan sebagainya sebanyak 25 orang (25%). Namun bandar
Kota Bharu juga telah menerima ketibaan pelancong dari luar Negara seperti
582
SUMBER MENDAPATKAN
MAKLUMAT PELANCONGAN
9%
10%
6%
Agensi Pelancongan
22%
42%
Internet
11%
Surat Khabar/
Majalah/ Pamplet
Rakan/ Saudara Mara
Televisyen Dan
Radio
Buku Panduan
Pelancongan
Bilangan
Peratus (%)
Pertama kali
25
25.0%
2 Hingga 5 Kali
57
57.0%
6 Hingga 10 Kali
11
11.0%
Lebih 10 kali
7.0%
Jumlah
100
100.0%
kerana
keseluruhan
destinasi
pelancongan
tidak
menyediakan
584
2 Hari
3 Hari
4 Hari
3 Malam
Malam
Malam
62.5%
39.1%
Hotel
37.5%
Chalet/Resort
Jumlah
Seminggu
Tiada
25.0%
75.0%
23.0%
47.8%
75.0%
20.0%
4.3%
1.0%
Homestay
8.7%
25.0%
3.0%
Tidak Menginap
100.0%
53.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
Rumah Rakan /
Saudara
Di Mana-mana
Jumlah
Jumla
Berjalan
Menjalan
Berman
Membe
Lawatan
Tidak
Tujuan
kan
di-
li-
Ke Tempat
Melakuk
Perjalana
jalan
Kajian
manda
belah
Pengajian
an
dan
dan
Agama
Sebaran
Berehat
Berkela
Aktiviti
Membuat
Penyelidik
(52.9%)
(16.7%)
11
(10.0%)
(11.0
an
%)
Akademik
Bersiar-
siar
(28.6%)
(11.8%)
(30.0%
(23.1%)
(20.0
)
Bercuti
%)
14
37
(66.7%)
(23.5%)
(50.0%)
(40.0%
(26.9%)
(10.0%)
(37.0
)
Urusan
20
Perniagaan
(11.8%)
%)
10
(5.0%)
(7.7%)
(50.0%)
(10.0
%)
Membeli-
belah
(33.3%)
(25.0%
(34.6%)
(16.0
)
Melawat
Rakan/
(4.8%)
Saudara
mara
586
16
%)
2
(7.7%)
(30.0%)
(6.0%)
Jumlah
21
17
20
26
10
100
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
100.0
%
Pelancongan Bandar
Kota Bharu Memberi
Ya
Tidak
Jumlah
%
Bilangan
Bilangan
14.5
2.6
10
10.0
28
45.2
28
28.0
20
32.3
2.6
21
21.0
8.1
2.6
6.0
Impak
35
92.1
35
35.0
Jumlah
62
100.0
38
100.0
100
100.0
Impak Positif
Mempunyai Sumber
Pelancongan Yang
Menarik
Penyediaan Aktiviti
Pelancongan Yang
Menarik
Suasana Persekitaran
Yang Indah
Berupaya Menyediakan
Peluang Pekerjaan
Tidak Memberi Sebarang
secara
berulang
bersama-sama
dengan
keluarga
atau
rakan-rakan.
tempatan dalam konteks penyediaan peluang-peluang pekerjaan yang baru iaitu 6%.
Keunikan kebudayaan tidak ditonjolkan sepenuhnya kepada pengunjung dan
penduduk tempatan. Ini menyebabkan pengunjung dan penduduk tempatan tidak
mengetahui tentang keunikan seni dan budaya yang terdapat di negeri Kelantan.
Keunikan kebudyaan seharusnya ditonjolkan agar keseniaan dan budaya tidak luput
begitu sahaja serta mempunyai tarikan yang tersendiri.
terhadap pembangunan
5.0
PERBINCANGAN
a)
b)
Pada masa kini masih belum ada brosur yang komprehensif bagi
mengambarkan tarikan destinasi pelancongan yang menarik di kawasan kajian.
Namun ada sesetengah destinasi pelancongan yang sudah mengeluarkan
brosur sendiri tetapi untuk diedarkan kepada pengunjung ke premisnya sahaja.
d)
Pada masa kini tiada destinasi yang memiliki laman web yang tersendiri bagi
memperkenalkan resort atau destinasi pelancongan kepada pelancong.
Manakala potensi destinasi pelancongan yang lain masih kekurangan saluran
mempromosikan produk, ini di sebabkan kekurangan kemahiran dan sumber
kewangan untuk mereka bentuk laman web sendiri.
e)
f)
589
6.0
KESIMPULAN
usaha kerajaan
negeri dalam
RUJUKAN
Alister Manthieson Dan Geoffery Wall (1999). Pelancongan Impak Ekonomi, Fizikal
Dan Sosial Hasil Penulisan. (terjemahan Abdul Kadir Hj Din)
Dasar dan Strategi Pembangunan Pelancongan Negeri Kelantan daripada Pusat Kajian
Strategik Kerajaan Negeri Kelantan Darul Naim
591
Isu
Pembangunan,
Budaya, Komuniti
dan Persetempatan
http://www.scribd.com/doc/17159153/Cara-Cara-Memajukan-Industri-Pelancongan
http://eprints.utm.my/10354/1/bab7.pdf
592
mujibur@uniten.edu.my, hendriyanirahman@gmail.com,
darshannamasivayam@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
minutes.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Fe-based alloys are light weight and have superior high temperature corrosion
resistance compared to other superalloys such as Ni-based and Co-based (Ngai,
Kuang & Li, 2007, Slimi.M
et.al, 2014).
compounds produced in the world comprises of iron in its pure state due to favorable
mechanical properties such as toughness, ductility and strength (Smith & Hashemi,
2006). In the twentieth century, studies were conducted on the alloying of Fe, Cr and
Al elements which led to the research on the alloy classified as Al-Cr-Fe carried out in
the 1930s (Pavlyuchkov et. al, 2014), however in the current era similar elements are
being studied with iron being the base material in the form of Fe-Cr-Al. The Fe-CrAl alloy is currently utilized in various applications due to its good oxidation
resistance properties which can withstand temperatures as high as 1200C (Zhou et.al,
2007). Corrosion resistant for this alloy is provided by the formation of Al 2O3 which
provides a corrosion protection when utilized at high temperatures above 900C
(Zhang, Hou, Gesmundo & Niu, 2006).
The rate of the Al2O3 increases as the sintering time progresses due to the
oxidation of Al and would later on impede the bonding of the Fe and Cr grains by
enveloping the Fe and Cr grains (Zhou et.al, 2007). Additionally, the inclusion of the
Cr element would further enhance the mechanical properties of the alloy. From
previous studies (Ortega et.al, 2007), it was stated that the addition of Cr into a Fe-Al
compound significantly increased the yield and fracture strengths of the respective
alloy.
holding time tend to increase the chances of the Fe-Cr-Al alloy to expand causing it to
crack and further lowering the strength of the alloy. Hence this research is conducted
to study the effects of varying sintering temperature and holding time to the
characteristics of Fe-Cr-Al alloy produced through warm compaction route.
594
2.0
sintered samples were also evaluated through scanning electron microscopy (SEM).
3.0
The volumetric expansions are found to have an increasing trend with the
ascending sintering temperature. This can be observed Figure 1 where the highest
volumetric expansion was obtained by the samples that were sintered at 900C.
Although, the volumetric expansion escalades with the sintering temperature, there is
a slight drop of volumetric expansion at the sample sintered at 750C with a holding
time of 30 minutes which is 4.91% when compared to the sample sintered at 600C
with a holding time of 30 minutes (5.58%). It is believed that the expansion of the
sample is due to the elemental composition, particle size, green density, heating rate,
and temperature of processing, however the swelling effect can also be caused by the
formation of Fe2Al5 compound (Kang & Hu, 2004). There is a sudden rise in the
volumetric expansion at the sample sintered at 900C for 90 minutes which yielded an
expansion of 16.04%. The volumetric expansion also induced cracks on the surface
of the product (Figure 2).
595
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
30 min
600C
60 min
90 min
750C
900C
Fe67Cr22Al11 Alloy
Figure 3 shows the changes in density from green to sintered density. It was
noticed that after the sintering process, the densities for all the samples declined. The
highest density drop was obtained by the sample sintered at 900C for 90 minutes
which yielded a change in density by 8.91%. There is a slight fluctuation for the
sample sintered at 750C for 30 minutes which obtained the lowest percentage of drop
in density, i.e., 4.19%.
density changes show a similar pattern with the volumetric expansion. The drop in
sintered density might be due to the volumetric expansion of the samples. Since the
density was measured based on the ratio between mass and volume of each sample,
high changes in volumetric expansion would produce a declination in sintered density.
The flexural strength shown Figure 4 can be said to be the inverse of the
density changes from Figure 3 for the sintering temperature of 750C, where the
highest flexural strength for this batch was obtained by the sample sintered at a
holding time of 30 minutes which yielded a flexural strength of 31.65 MPa which also
possess a lower density change and volumetric expansion.
sintered at 600C, the flexural strength follows the same pattern as the drop in density
where the highest strength was obtained by the sample sintered for 90 minutes. The
samples sintered at 900C shows a similar trend to that of the 750C sintered samples.
However, there are some fluctuations when comparing the results with the density
drop in Figure 3. The highest strength was obtained by the sample sintered for 60
596
minutes, i.e., 34.55 MPa. This particular sample also possess the lowest density
change for this batch. There are some fluctuations of flexural strength obtained for
the samples sintered for 60 minutes due to the different sintering temperature. This
fluctuations caused the induced cracks on the samples (Figures 5 - 7). The cracks are
resulted from the volumetric expansions which in return is caused the formation of the
Fe2Al5 compound and other factor mentioned earlier.
40
60 min
35
90 min
Flexural Stress (MPa)
30 min
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
30 min
60 min
90 min
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
600C
750C
900C
600C
750C
900C
Sintered Products
Samples
Figure 5: Sintered at
Figure 6: Sintered at
Figure 7: Sintered at
597
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
expansion could be caused by elemental composition, particle size, and green density
of the samples. The declination of the sintered density is caused by volumetric
expansion, the higher the volumetric expansion the lower the sintered density. The
flexural strength is found to be inversely proportional to the change of density, higher
change in density causes the sample to have a low flexural strength. However, the
fluctuation in the results are caused by the cracks that propagated during the sintering
process.
observed. The sample sintered at 900C for 60 minutes showed the best result when
compared to other sintering parameters.
Acknowledgement
The authors would like to appreciate the Ministry of Education (MOE), Malaysia for
funding this research study under 20140117 FRGS.
REFERENCES
Vagnon, A., Lame, O., Bouvard, D., Michiel, M.D., Bellet, D. & Kapelski, G. (2006).
Deformation of steel powder compacts during sintering: Correlation between
macroscopic measurement and in situ microtomography analysis. Acta
Materialia, 54(2), 513-522.
Rahman, M.M., Nor, S.S.M., Rahman, H.Y. & Sopyan, I. (2012). Effects of forming
parameters and sintering schedules to the mechanical properties and
microstructures of final components. Materials and Design, 33, 153-157.
Ngai, T.L., Kuang, Y.-h. & Li, Y.-y. (2007). Warm Compaction forming of a bindertreated Fe-base material. Sino-Swedish Structural Materials Symposium,
14(5), 77-81.
598
Slimi, M., Azabou, M., Escoda, L., Suol, J.J. & Khitouni, M. (2014). Structural and
microstructural properties of nanocrystalline Cu-Fe-Ni powders produced by
mechanical alloying. Powder Technology, 266, 262-267.
Smith, W.F. & Hashemi, J. (2006). Foundation of material science and engineering,
New York: McGrow-Hill.
Pavlyuchkov, D., Przepirzyski, B., Kowalski, W., Velikanova, T.Y. & Grushko, B.
(2014). Al-Cr-Fe phase diagram: Isothermal sections in the region above 50
at% Al. CALPHAD: Computer Coupling of Phase Diagrams and
Thermochemistry, 45, 194-203.
Zhou, Y., Zuo, X.Q., Sun, J.H., Mei, J. & Sun, J.L. (2007). Effects of sintering
parameters on the structures of Fe-Cr-Al extruded honeycombs. Materials
Science and Engineering A, 457(1-2), 329-333.
Zhang, Z.G., Hou, P.Y. Gesmundo, F. & Niu, Y. (2006). Effect of surface roughness
on the development of protective Al2O3 on Fe-10Al (at.%) alloys containing 010 at.% Cr. Applied Surface Science, 253(2), 881-888.
Ortega, Y., Diego, N.D., Plazaola, F., Jimenez, J. & Ro, J.D. (2007). Influence of
Cr addition on the defect structure of FeAl alloys. Intermetallics, 15(2), 177180.
Stott, F.H., Woodm G.C. & Stringer, J. (1995). The influence of alloying elements on
the development and maintenance of protective scales. Oxidation of Metals,
5(8), 113-145.
599
Kang, H.Z. & Hu, C.T. (2004). Swelling behavior in reactive sintering of Fe-Al
mixtures. Materials Chemistry and Physics, 88(2-3), 264-272.
600
ABSTRACT
The reason for this project is to use sun energy for cabin power generation.
The sun provides solar energy for the cabin. The cabin is assumed to have
off-grid supply. This project is to make a light and fan to switch on and off,
by using voice recognition from user. This is to ensure how the smart cabin
is defined from the title of this project. The main objectives of the project are
firstly to use solar system in smart cabin for power generation. Second, is to
create smart cabin system powered by solar system. Third, is to use
microcontroller PIC18F4580 as a output channel for the output system. The
cabin control panel is uses a microcontroller to control the output which is
the fan and light. The fan is uses a DC motor to provide fan for user as it also
help to cool the working space. Besides that, the light is used for lighting
purpose as it help user to see clearer during night time. The solar have
limited sources during night time, because of the effect a battery power
supply is used to generate supply for the light and fan. The battery back-up is
separated differently as the microcontroller itself cannot supply current to
output because microcontroller only uses up to equal to +5VDC of supply.
The battery then can be use for night time. In conclusion, the future outcome
for this project is to create smart cabin that uses solar energy for its power
supply and voice technology to control all the system in the cabin not only fan
or light but many more to come.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The sun is a wide uses for the human needs. As much as it is for the needs for
human, the sun is commonly uses for solar energy. Solar energy is a green energy
which it is safe to use and it is considered as alternative source for nowadays era.
601
Solar energy supply electric using a solar panel. For this project, solar panel is
installed to the cabin as it is uses to generate supply throughout the cabin. The solar
panel is then connected to separate section of load. The main supply goes to the
output of the microcontroller, which is fan DC motor and LED light. While in the day
time, the battery back-up is recharge in order to help generate energy for the fan and
light. Next, the fan and light itself cannot switch on or off without switches. For this
project, to create a smart cabin voice recognition is used to switch on and off the light
and fan. The voice is used as it is more convenient and it help user to make less
movement just switch on and off the light and fan from the switches.
2.0
PROBLEM STATEMENT
A study was being conducted on research in the internet. The project is using
voice recognition technology which is taken based on with a sparked idea from
monitoring and observation on human way of life nowadays. This project coined to
ease human as to engage appreciation on solar power function furthermore to use it
for working purpose like switching on the light and fan without going to push any
switches.
Thus, with the existence of this project it able facilitate more work to carried
out with long distance area perimeter and condition getting more complicated if the
user is doing something is heavy, they simple just say command by switching on
light and fan, either way by switching it off. The voice recognition act as a switch
which by mean it will help the user to turn-on light and fan with a command using
voice.
It helps for human as it will enlighten the work thus help to save time and
human energy. Data based voice recognition software also used to carry out the work
as it will help the microcontroller to the output which is the motor fan and light to
switch on. The solar panel is function as a supply to the microcontroller, DC motor
fan and light.
602
3.0
METHODOLOGY
Methodology is to aims to describe the process used in the Smart cabin with
voice technology solar system. Each selection and the actions performed during
project implementation will be clear until the project build is successfully generated.
Further explanation there are various procedures and method is used. Furthermore,
this block diagram will explain what is the steps and procedure to do this project
either its by software development and coding or hands-on. This block diagram will
be used to describe how the process will be carrying out for this project in Figure 3.1.
In Figure 3 the block diagram, two MCU units are used. Firstly, the
microphone is used from the computer. The computer microphone port will received a
voice command from user. Then, the BitVoicer will collect data from the words
spoke. The words are setup by using special licensed software called the BitVoicer
from BitSophia. The command will send a signal to pin in Arduino. The Arduino
digital pin will be connected to PIC18F4580 input pin. As the command sent a high
signal to pin input.
603
The PIC18F4580 output pin will turn on an output, example the DC motor or
LED light. Since the MCU cannot handle larger than 5VDC, battery is used to
generate external source to output. During the day, the solar panel will recharge the
battery. As the battery, is used about 9VDC. The solar panel can generate up to
20VDC, and output power of 10Watt. The regulator functions to step down from 20V
to 9V.
4.0
EXPECTED RESULT
As in the block diagram has explained that this project is to help user inside
cabin to facilitate more work to carry out with long distance area perimeter and
condition getting more complicated if the user is doing something is heavy, they
simple just say command by switching on light and fan, either way by switching it off.
The expected result from this project is that the solar panel will generate supply to
microcontroller output. The user will speak and tell a command to voice recognition
and the output will switch on.
The user can also switch off the output by speaking out the command to
switch it off. During day time, the battery will be charged from solar panel. The
battery then will help to generate during night day. The main supply goes to
microcontroller output as it is used inside the cabin. The output is fan DC motor and
LED light. While in the day time, the battery back-up is recharge in order to help
generate for the DC fan motor and light LED. Next, the fan and light itself cannot
switch on or off without switches. For this project, voice recognition has come to the
very nearest way of giving a command by using any voice as long it is saying the
command that have been written in the voice schemes.
5.0
CONCLUSION
The solar panel can be used not only in smart cabin. But also in the house or
office. This project application can be further more advance in near future. Nurturing
human mind on saving more energy using alternative power. From this project, can
conclude that the BitVoicer is acted as the Data base for Arduino. The Arduino digital
output connected to PIC18F4580 digital input. The PIC18F4580 is used then to
control output. The solar panel is used to generate power to output.
As the MCU operating voltage is only 5VDC. So, there must be external
power source for the outputs. The battery is used for the external power source, as the
solar will recharge the battery. The solar panel first has to be step down from 20V to
9V. The solar panel has been tested and the maximum voltage generated is 20V on
peak days without the shadowing effect. Maximum power generated is 10Watt. Even
in Cytron description explained; example From our test, it will generate 18.5V,
500mA at 10.30am sunlight, in Malaysia clear sky. You should be able to get 20V,
650mA at maximum sunlight!
As in conclusion, this project can be done from the main objective and scope
which is to use solar energy for power generation, to create smart cabin using solar
power, use PIC18F4580 as output controller and use voice recognition data base
software which is the BitVoicer.
Hopefully, for the next innovation this project can be extended for more
various kind of useful outputs involving not only home or office use but also can use
in heavy industrial in robotic machine.
REFERENCES
Ieandro4b
(2012).
Speech
Recognition
with
Arduino.
Website:
http://www.instructables.com/id/Speech-Recognition-with-Arduino/
605
BitVoicer
1.2
version
(2013).
User
Manual
(English).Website:
panel
10Watt.Website:
http://www.bitsophia.com/
Cytron
Technologies
(2015).
Solar
http://www.cytron.com.my/p-sc-18v-555ma/
606
ABSTRACT
The purpose of doing this project is to try obtaining the intensity of sunlight
and producing the maximum output of watt from the solar panel. The
instruments that use in this project are solar panel, microcontroller
PIC18F4580, sensors, motors, battery (power supply) and load. By using the
microcontroller PIC18F4580 to control the system, we can let the solar panel
to receive more intensity of sunlight compare to the stationary solar panel.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Sun is a one of the most important component in this world. Without sun, it is
impossible for a human or living creature to live in this world. Humans nowadays feel
uncomforted about the global warming situation. Even this kind of situation bring a
lot of negative perception, they should have to think it through the positive way. One
of the way to reduce the global warming is to reduce the utilizing of electrical voltage
and change to a natural voltage source like wind, rain, tides, sunlight and geothermal
heats. So, the engineers try to create a new device that can convert the natural energy
to an electrical energy like solar panel for sunlight energy, wind turbines for wind
energy, water turbines. The problem that still exists now is the device that invests by
an engineer. For example, the solar panel that many of the users use is only in a one
way direction. If the sun located at the direction that is not perpendicular to the solar
panel, the power that can be generate is low compare to the solar panel when the sun
located exactly perpendicular to it. The sun is rotate from east to west but the highest
power that can be generate by the solar panel is when location of sun is perpendicular
to the solar panel. So the power that can be used in the night day is quite short.
607
So, the project that will do is called Solar tracking System. This is because
the sunlight can generate a clean and free power. This project helps for power
generation by setting the equipment to get maximum sunlight automatically. This
project will use a LDR (Light Dependant Resistor) sensor to sense the direction of
maximum intensity of light. This system will detect the maximum intensity of light.
When there is decrease in intensity of light, this system will automatically change it
direction using a stepper motor to get a maximum intensity of light. This system will
use a PIC18f4580 Microcontroller as a brain to operate this system and a stepper
motor to rotate the solar panel. This system is suitable to be used in home or small
factories that want to save their budget for a long term.
1.1
a)
b)
c)
2.0
METHODOLOGY
2.1
Project Preparation
Before the project Smart Solar Tracking System started, there are a few
steps of work to do in order to complete this project. All the steps and process of the
project will be explained in detail one by one in this chapter.
2.2
a)
b)
c)
Finding the PIC expertise to get feedback about the propose project.
d)
e)
f)
2.3
Project Implementation
a)
b)
Project Consultation
Due to the fact that we are using the PIC18F4580 microcontroller for our
project, we use the opportunity that we have taken the subject Embedded
System in this semester to ask our lecturer on the design of our project. Our
lecturer Sir Syahlan Bin Abdul Halim is expert on the PIC microcontroller so
we have a discussion and consultation with him. In our project, we are going
to use the LDR (Light Dependent Resistor) sensors to sense the density of the
sunlight to move our stepper motors. Therefore, we need to use the analogue
pin for our input sensor so that it can sense every angle of the sun density light.
For the stepper motor, we need to use the driver ULN5804 to run it and we
also need to know the ADC (Analogue Digital Converter) for us to inject the
CCP or PWM (Pulse Width Modulation signal for the stepper motor to
operate.
c)
d)
e)
610
f)
2.4
3.0
RESULTS
The result of this project is the solar panel can sense the intensity of the
sunlight and produce maximum output.
4.0
CONCLUSIONS
As the conclusion, after this project had being done, we should able to
generate electricity using solar power system, to develop the control system to control
the solar panel and to control the solar angle to obtain maximum active power.
612
REFERENCES
Asmarashid Ponniran, Ammar Hashim, Ariffuddin Joret (2011). A Design of Low
Power Single Axis Solar Tracking System Regardless of Motor Speed .
Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia.
Dr. Liping Guo. Design and Simulation of a Sun Tracking Solar Power System.
Northern Illinois University
Nur Khuzairy Bin Jamaludin (2008). Solar Tracking System. University Malaysia
Pahang
Pramit Saha, Soumya Goswami. Light Sensor Based Automatic Solar Tracking
System Using Parabolic Reflector And Lens Focussing Action For Maximum
Power Point Tracking. Jadavpur University.
613
ABSTRACT
This
paper
will
cover
the
innovations
of
soldering
station
in
614
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Soldering is one of the most important steps for making the electronics project
615
2.0
PROBLEM STATEMENT
Usually, the fume generated from the solder is dangerous for health during the
3.0
OBJECTIVES
The objectives of this paper are:a) To prevent the illness and dangerous respiratory disease which come from
the solderfumes.
b) To make the solder station has enough light when soldering process occurs.
c) To hold the PCBso that the solder process will be more efficient.
4.0
PROJECT SCOPE
5.0
METHODOLOGY
The study was conducted in two sections: first designing and test run the smart
soldering system in the laboratory and the second sections was designing the PCB
holder as complementary of smart soldering systems. The development of the Smart
Soldering System is created to overcome the fume and pcbproblems. The design of
enclosed hood which was based on the prototype developed by Pocock and Saunders
(2011) in Figure 1 and being modified as shown in Figure 2.
616
They were designed to enclose the soldering process as much as possible. The
design of the project consists of two rectangular exhaust fans of 6 inches in diameter,
height of 50 cm, width of 80 cm and using a glass as a barrier between the fume and
the student breathing zone. The contaminated air is cleaned by using activated carbon
filter which is located at the back of the exhaust fan. The operational of the systems is
illustrated in Figure 3as follows;
617
Contaiminated Air /
Solder Fume in
Activated
Carbon
Filter
Exhaust
Fan
Purified Air
out
Meanwhile, The PCB holder was designed to help the students to hold the
PCB while soldering. For PCB holder, a simple design was used which shown on
Figure 3. This PCB holder is capable of holdseven small PCB during the soldering
process. The student does not need any friends to help him. The design of PCB holder
which was based on the prototype developed by John Nicol at makerplane.org is
shown in Figure 4.
6.0
DISCUSSION
According to the Pocock and Saunders (2011), they ran five extraction
systems; downdraught bench, a mobile, capturing hood, an air displacement box, an
enclosing hood, and an on-tip extraction system, to remove solder fumes.Based on
their findings, it shows that an enclosing hood was the most effective to pull away the
solder fume (Pocock & Saunders, 2011). Enclosed hood is designed to make the
soldering; taking place inside therefore it is capable to reduce the student breathing
zone exposure to zero. This is because they had a physical barrier between the sources
618
and breathing zone and the solder fume accumulating in the enclosed hood before its
pull away.
7.0
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Census data revisited. (n.d.). Retrieved March 5, 2015, Lead Soldering Safety
Guidelines. Retrieved from http://www.cmu.edu/ehs/chemical/Lead Soldering
Safety Guidelines.pdf
Census data revisited. (n.d.). Retrieved March 5, 2015, PRESS INFORMATION
Lead-Free Solders Increase the Need for Bench-Top Fume Extraction.
Pocock, D. (Health and Safety Laboratory) , Saunders, C. J. (2011). Visualisation and
control of solder fume exposure A quantitative assessment of LEV effectiveness.,
46.
Systems, S. A. (2010). The Hazards of Solder Fume. Retrieved from
http:/www.sentryair.com/brochures/TheHazardsofSolderFume.pdf
Veedu, C. (2013). Case Report Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis Due To Soldering: A
Rare Case Report, 1(2), 98100.
619
620
1.0
INTRODUCTION
In our daily routines, we use and utilise the numbers without even noticed it.
In other words, numbers are important to us in life to give us limitations and set our
capabilities and limitation. The processes of number manipulation will lead us in the
development of mathematical skills. However, the achievements in mathematics are
not satisfactory among the students in schools. Competencies of basic numbers are
formed at the early age (Jordan & Levine as cited in Kelanang & Zakaria, 2012, p.
1086).
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
2.1
2005). The research found that students faced difficulties in learning Mathematics
because of the lack of ability in understanding of subject matters involving
calculation, the relationship of mathematics with other subject and instruction
language (Nordin, 2005).
There are few factors that might cause the problems of understanding in
mathematics. Psychological attitudes toward mathematics might cause students to be
less interest in the subject. In addition, teachers have no effort to help the student to
achieve a good result in Mathematics and do not utilise a suitable learning tools.-.
Moreover, the heavy backpacks full of textbooks used in learning are caused and
burden to the student (Mahamad, Ibrahim & Mohd Taib, 2010). Along with reducing
backaches, the shift to e-textbooks holds bright promise for decreasing education
costs and improving learning. These challenges scenarios involving mathematics
learning are not only occurs in Malaysia but also worldwide in the concept of delivery
methods and students involvement (Chong, Horani & Daniel, 2005).
2.2
622
Although children are synonym with games, it cannot be presumed that all
children have an interest in games. Boys are more dominant in playing games
compared to girls. The pattern of games also differently capture children interests, for
instance, boys more likely to play adventurous games compare to girls. Thus, it is
essential to create a suitable environment and pattern of games to attract and capture
both genders interest and different level of ages.
2.3
Scratch programming was launched in the year 2007 through its official
website (http://scratch.mit.edu). This website attracts many developers of games
especially young generations or commonly known as Scratchers. The project
uploaded to the site does not only limited to game-based application only, it also
provides interactive newsletters, virtual tours, interactive tutorials and many more
(Resnick, Maloney, Hernandez, Rusk, Eastmond, Brennan, Millner, Rosenbaum,
Silver, Silverman & Kafai, 2009). In developing software, children will be able to
understand basic mechanisms and important of Mathematical and computational
concepts hence developed their skills creatively, systematically and work
collaboratively (Resnick et al., 2009; Slany, 2012).
looks simple and easy to develop, it does not mean to lower the perspective of
programming, instead Scratch helps to motivate and nurture the children interests in
programming (Resnick et al., 2009; Slany, 2012).
3.0
METHODOLOGY
The Mat Zin, Jaafar and Wong Digital Game Based Learning Instructional
Design (DGBL ID) Model (Mat Zin et al, 2009), is an educational game design and
development. The model is developed based on Instructional Design (ID) and game
development methodology. The DGBL ID model consists of five phases, which are
analysis phase, design phase, development phase, quality assurance phase as well as
implementation and evaluation phase. Figure 1.0 illustrates the DGBL-ID.
Analysis phase:
Based on DGBLID, the statement of learning the objective and the children
characteristics which is the target users of the proposed game are defined earlier.
After the requirement and problem analysis occurred, the game idea is determined.
The idea of the game also determined based on the environment of the learning
process and the aspects that initiate students interest.
Design phase:
Before the design of the interface of proposed game, the framework of the game
process is captured and defined. The frameworks discussed here are the system
architecture, use case diagram, activity diagram and sequence diagrams. After the
implementation of all the frameworks, the graphical user interfaces are presented.
Development phase:
The prototype of the game is developed by using scratch programming software that
can be downloaded from its official website (http://scratch.mit.edu). After the
downloading of the software, it can be installed on a personal computer or laptop.
Other software also have been used in the process of developed the game that are
Adobe Photoshop CS4 and Photoscape version 3.6.3 for the editing graphic purposes.
Quality phase:
After the completion of developing the game prototype, it will be tested for quality
checking which essential determining the project are at which level. Besides the
quality of the game, the content of the game also is checked and tested before it
delivers to the target users. Although Scratch does not involve or occur any bug in the
code, there is still a concern with other errors. Hence, the most important testing to be
carried out is to ensure that the game fulfil all the requirements of the target users.
625
4.0
The results of the paper are based on the development of the game. Before the
implementation and evaluation of the game carried out, the analysis of requirements
and the designs are done. The phases in the development are iterated to each other in
order to make the game development are proof to be successful. The implementation
of the game is based on the implementing the game functions and creating the game
as a whole. Furthermore, for each of the evaluation there will be a modification occur
if required to meet the all the requirements. In addition, introduction to scratch
programming also mentioned in this paper.
4.1
Mathness game will be developed using Scratch 2 Offline Editor software that
can be downloaded from its official website. In this software, it uses the scratch
programming language.
The snapshot above shows the interface of the Scratch 2 Offline Editor. It has
four main panes on the windows. The large pane on the upper left is the stage, where
all the actions happen. The bottom left pane shows thumbnails of all sprites in the
project. The middle pane is the syntax palette with buttons to select the categories,
with folder tabs to view, edit the costumes and sounds owned by that sprite. The large
626
pane on the right is where all the scripts of commands are placed. For the ease of
writing or develop programming, there is a total of 8 syntax which are Motion, Looks,
Sound, Pen, Control, Sensing, Operators and Variables. Plus, all the command blocks
are categorized by colour-coded to help users find related blocks. Finally, to start
scripting, users only need to drag the command blocks to construct the code.
4.2
Mathness Game
Unlike any other games, Mathness game is not required to install into users
computer. The only thing that needs to be considered here is that as long as users have
the Scratch 2 Offline Editor in their computer, they can play it whenever and
wherever they want. They also can play the Mathness game online through the official
website by uploading the game to the website with their personal account. Once the
game launches, the first thing users might see the main interface of the Mathness.
Users do not require to enter any information on the main page because the only
things that appear are few buttons to allow users to go to other pages. The four
buttons at the main page shows are Take Quiz button, Play Game button, Learn
Lesson button and Setting button. For the Take Quiz button it will bring the users to
Quiz page, as for Play Game button, it will bring the users to Game page, as for Learn
Lesson button, it will bring the users to Lesson page and for Setting button, it will
bring the users to Setting page. Figure 3 illustrate the design of main page for
Mathness game.
5.0
CONCLUSION
advanced countries such as United States, Germany, etc. Our country should take a
lesson from these advanced countries to increase our level of IT area and educational
performance. An introduction to scratch programming is one of the good ways to
introduce the skills in the IT area. This can be proofed through lots of initiatives taken
by a group of non-government or educators in those advanced countries by using
scratch programming as one of the platforms. The attractiveness of the Scratch
software itself can capture children interests and easy to be learned.
Therefore, through such research on the development of the IT area and education
improvement can be a good combination to enhance children skills and knowledge in
both areas in a more interesting way.
REFERENCES
Chong, C. K., Horani, S., & Daniel, J. (2005). A study on the use of ICT in
mathematics teaching. Malaysian Online Journal of Instructional Technology
(MOJIT), 2(3), 43-51.
Epper,
R.
M.,
Derryberry,
A.,
&
Jackson,
S.
(2012).
Game-based
Lim, C.S. (2003). Cultural differences and mathematics learning in Malaysia. The
mathematics educator, 7(3), 110-122.
Mahamad, S., Ibrahim, M. N., & Mohd Taib, S. (2010). M-Learning: A new paradigm
of learning mathematics in Malaysia. International Journal of Computer
Science and Information Technology (IJCSIT), 2(4), 76-86.
Maloney, J., Resnick, M., Rusk, N., Silverman, B., & Eastmond, E. (2010). The
scratch programming language and environment. ACM Transaction Computing
Education, 10(4), 1-15.
Mat Zin, N.A., Jaafar, A., & Wong, S.Y. (2009). Digital game-based learning
(DGBL) model and development methodology for teaching history. Wseas
transaction on computers, 8(2), 323-333.
Nordin, A. (2005). Students perception on teaching and learning mathematics in
English. Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.
Perotta, C., Featherstone, G., Aston, H., & Houghton, E. (2013). Game-based
learning latest evidence and future directions. The NFER Research Programme.
Resnick, M., Maloney, J., Hernandez, A. M., Rusk, N., Eastmond, E., Brennan, K.,
Millner, A., Rosenbaum, E., Silver, J., Silverman, B., & Kafai, Y. (2009).
Scratch: programming for all. Communication of the ACM, 52, 60-67.
Slany, W. (2012). Catroid: A mobile visual programming system for children. Visual
Language and Human-Centric Computing (VL/HCC), 2012 IEEE Symposium,
Innsbruck, Autrsia.
Tall, D. & Razali, M. R. (1993). Diagnosing students difficulties in learning
mathematics. International Journal of Mathematical Edcuation in Science and
Technology. 24(2), 209-222.
629
630
ABSTRACT
Car License Plate Recognition (CLPR) system is one of the important areas in
the intelligent traffic engineering field. CLPR is developed to recognize the
car license plate with the implementation of Digital Image Processing (DIP)
and Template Matching Algorithm (TMA) approaches by using the MATLAB
software. This research works on the offline input images collected by using
digital camera. The method of this project is based on template matching
where a character is identified by analyzing its shape. Then, the current input
character is compared to each template to find either an exact match, or the
template with the closest representation of the input character. Experimental
results show a high accuracy of the developed CLPR on hundreds random
sample images of car license plate in Sarawak.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Car License Plate Recognition (CLPR) has becomes vital application in the
transportation system. Normally, car license plate registration is made by either metal
or plastic and is usually attached to the front or back of a vehicle. The car plate
characters are the combination between numbers and alphabetical letter which can be
used to represent an identity of respective vehicle (Toral et al.'s, 2010). In Malaysia,
the first letter of the vehicle serves as the location prefix and followed by four
numerical digits.
This paper proposed a CLPR software system that capable to recognize the car
license plate by employing the Template Matching Algorithm (TMA) approach as a
recognition engine. The system is functioning with a captured license plate image as
631
the input image, which will then be processed by digital image processing techniques
to further improve the quality of the input image prior to recognition phase.
2.0
RELATED WORKS
Many research WANG Xingling (2006), Saqib Rasheed et al.'s (2012) and
Deng Hongyao (2009) were carried out on this area and they used different methods
for license plate character recognition. However, some of the methods used were
almost similar especially on the image processing. Comelli et al.'s (1995) proposed
template matching technique for License Plate characters recognition task. Their
system functions with a TV camera and a frame grabber card to acquire a rear view
image of the vehicle. In the license plate segmentation phase, the feature projection is
used to estimate some image parameters. Finally, the character recognizers will
extract character feature points before it can be preceded to the template matching
632
based recognition process. Gendy et. al.'s (1997) proposed Fast Hough Transform
(FHT) for automatic LPR system. In their method, the system recognizes a character
by calculating the error factor between the unknown character identification array and
the database matrix row. The character with small error factor can be recognized.
3.0
METHODOLOGY
The main objective of this paper is to develop a system that can extract the
license plate number from various scene of image. In this project, digital camera is
used in order to capture vehicle input image. After that, an image will be preprocessed by implementing a few processing techniques of image processing. Finally,
for recognition purpose, Template Matching Algorithm (TMA) approach is utilized.
MATLAB version 2009a is used as a software platform. The process is started with
image acquisition, followed by image pre-processing, localization procedure and
ended with recognition phase. An overview of the general flow of the system is
shown in Figure 1.0.
633
3.1
Image Acquisition
The mode of image acquisition can be categorized into online and offline. We
used offline mode so that the system can get it input from a digital camera. Our
proposed system is then will preprocess the input image
3.2
Pre-processing
The aim of pre-processing is to improve the image data that has unwanted
distortions such as noise, skew detection and correction. In this stage, there are three
steps involve to recognize the character which are image cropping, RGB, binarization,
filtering and dillation. The pre-processed image is then segmented into lines, words
and characters.
3.3
Image Cropping
The area with license plate in the image is considered as the region of interest
for this system. Therefore, any unwanted element from the image must be discarded
to minimize the noise. This can be done by using image cropping technique. The
lower part of an image is considered as the region that containing the license plate.
Figure 2.0 shows the cropping process.
3.4
RGB
The color image is converted to gray scale image because it is faster to process
and less memory space due to three different layer of processing. Figure 3.0 shows the
conversion process of RGB to grayscale image.
634
3.5
Thresholding
3.6
635
3.7
Dilation
In this project, the noise is filtered out by using standard methods like
Dilation. Dilation refers to an enlargement or expansion in bulk or extent, the opposite
of contraction. In this operation, pixels are added to the boundaries of objects in an
image. The main outcome of this operation is to gradually enlarge the boundaries of
regions of foreground pixels. Thus, areas of foreground pixels will grow in size while
holes within those regions become smaller. In other word, dilation filters the outer
image which then will highlight the plate characters. Figure 5.0 shows the dilation
process that form the edge detection.
3.8
Segmentation
636
3.9
Templates matching are the process involves the use of a database of character
or templates. There exists a template for all possible input characters. For recognition
to occur, the current input character is compared to each template with the closest
representation of the input character. Template matching can be performed on binary,
threshold characters or on gray-level characters.
Figure 7.0 shows the workflow of the Template Matching flow of CLPR. The
template matching algorithm implements in five steps. Firstly, the character image
from the detected string is selected. After that, the image is rescaled to the size of the
first template. After the rescale the image to the size of the first template (original)
image, the matching metric is computed. Then the highest match found is stored. If
the image is not match, the matching metric is repeated again. Finally, the index of the
best match is stored as the recognized character.
637
Start
Image Selection
Image Scaling
Matching Range
Computation
Highest
Match?
Y
Highest Match Storing
Bounded
Character?
N
Store the index of best
match as recognized
character
End
cor
N 1
x
i 0
Where,
x
N 1
i 0
( xi x ) yi y
N 1
(1)
x yi y
2
i 0
The value cor is between 1 and +1, with larger values representing a stronger
relationship between the two images. Figure 8.0 shows the feature extraction
operation in Template Matching.
638
4.0
EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
639
Table 2 shows the images of car plate that partially recognized due to
misinterpretation of characters.
qA set of 100 images with various sizes were used for experimental testing. The
proposed prototype was successfully recognized 87 images. There are only 13 images
that were partially recognized due to misinterpretation of characters. With 87% of
recognition, the proposed prototype is considerably delivers quite reliable system.
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
The objective of this research is to look into the possibility of making a system
for recognition of car license plate with template matching algorithm assisted by
implementation of digital image processing techniques. From the input image, the
system will extract the license plate and finally identify its characters. The
effectiveness of this system was validated by an experimental image testing with
ability of 87% successfully recognized rate.
REFERENCES
Comelli, P.; Ferragina, P.; Granieri, M.N.; Stabile, F.(1995). "Optical recognition of
motor vehicle license plates," Vehicular Technology, IEEE Transactions
vol.44, no.4, pp.790-799.
640
Gendy, S.; Smith, C.L.; Lachowicz, S.; (1997). "Automatic car registration plate
recognition
Conference, pp.209-218.
Miyamoto, K.; Nagano, K.; Tamagawa, M.; Fujita, I.; Yamamoto, M.; (1991),
"Vehicle license-plate recognition by image analysis," Industrial Electronics,
Control and Instrumentation. Proceedings. IECON '91., 1991 International
Conference, vol.3, pp.1734-1738.
Saqib Rasheed, Asad Naeem and Omar Ishaq, (2012). Automated Number Plate
Recognition
world congress on
Toral, S.L., E.S. Ing., University of Seville, Seville, Spain, Torres, M.R.M., Barrero,
F.J. and
Arahal,
M.R.(2010).
Current
Paradigms
in
Intelligent
641
ABSTRAK
642
1.0
PENGENALAN
Pada
tahun
2009,
Kerajaan
telah
memperkenalkan
agenda
Bidang
pendidikan.
Salah
satu
daripada
NKRA
yang
digariskan
adalah
mempertingkatkan hasil kualiti pelajar sebagai satu anjakan reformasi dalam sistem
pendidikan Malaysia. Reformasi sistem pendidikan ini memperlihatkan bahawa, PTV
diberi penekanan iaitu dengan mengarus perdanakan dan memperluas akses kepada
PTV yang berkualiti
2.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
a) Mengenal pasti cabaran dan halangan untuk mendapat kerjaya yang terjamin.
b) Mengenal pasti peningkatan kemahiran untuk mendapat pendapatan yang tinggi.
c) Mengenal pasti cabaran untuk mendapatkan pendapatan yang tinggi.
3. 0
METODOLOGI
modal insan,
dokumen terpilih yang telah diterbitkan dari tahun 1990 sehingga sekarang telah
dirujuk bagi mendapatkan idea umum untuk membentuk perspektif kajian ini seperti
dalam Jadual 1
Item Rujukan
Jumlah rujukan
(Jurnal, artikel, buku,
laman web, tesis, akta,
laporan dan lain-lain)
Modal Insan
15
16
Kemahiran Generik
19
Kebolehkerjaan
11
JUMLAH
70
4.0
HASIL DAPATAN
4.1
terjamin.
4.2
yang tinggi.
Dalam aspek pembangunan sumber manusia, lulusan teknik dan vokasional
perlulah berkebolehan untuk bekerja secara profesional di samping berupaya
646
menerima dan menguasai pengetahuan baru yang berkaitan dengan cepat. Menurut
Isahak Haron (1992), tenaga manusia yang diperlukan di dalam masyarakat industri
tentulah tenaga manusia yang cekap dan profesional, berfikiran terbuka untuk
menerima dan mengkaji maklumat dan ilmu dan dapat membuat penyesuaian dengan
tepat. Hanya golongan pekerja yang diiktiraf sebagai k-pekerja sahaja akan
menyumbang kepada peningkatan produktiviti dan daya saing yang diperlukan ke
arah pertumbuhan ekonomi negara yang berasaskan pengetahuan atau k-ekonomi
(Subramaniam, 2008; Indrawati et.al, 2009). K-pekerja telah mengubah polisi
pendidikan, latihan dan pekerjaan di Malaysia. Majikan masa kini bukan saja
menuntut pekerja yang berpengetahuan tetapi juga berkebolehan dalam pelbagai
kemahiran dan fleksibel (Indrawati et.al, 2009).
Selain itu, kemahiran kebolehkerjaan sangat didambakan pada era ini ekoran
jika sekadar hanya kemahiran teknikal, ia tidak memadai untuk ke arah komuniti
berpendapatan tingi. Menurut Sharil (1993), pihak industri kini juga sangat
memerlukan pekerja bukan sahaja mempunyai kemahiran teknik dan vokasional
tetapi perlu memiliki kemahiran kebolehkerjaan. Beliau juga menyatakan bahawa
sektor perindustrian
masa
kini sedang
teknologi maklumat, teknologi tinggi maka sumber tenaga diperlukan pada masa
akan datang adalah pekerja yang bukan sahaja mempunyai kemahiran teknikal tetapi
juga mempunyai kemahiran kebolehkerjaan.
4.3
peralatan. Pihak swasta perlu digalakkan untuk memainkan peranan mereka dengan
menjalankan latihan di tempat sendiri sama ada secara usahasama dengan institusi
kerajaan ataupun melalui sumber dalaman. Sumbangan secara terus dalam bentuk
peruntukan tetap, biasiswa dan juga pinjaman perlu digalakkan. Sumbangan pihak
swasta dalam menjayakan aspirasi kemahiran secara usaha sama dengan pihak
kerajaan akan merancakkan keperkasaan teknik dan vokasional di Malaysia khasnya.
5.0
KESIMPULAN
RUJUKAN
Abd Hair et.al (2003). Penguasaan kemahiran bolehkerja dikalangan pelatih ILP dan
IKM.
Prosiding
Persidangan
Kebangsaan
Pusat
Pengajian
Sosial,
Ahmad Esa et.al, 2012. Cabaran Pendidikan Teknik & Vokasional (PTV) Di Malaysia
:
Ahmad Rosli et.al (2013). Exploring the High Income Community Education
Programme in Malaysia. Proceedings of the 6th International Conference on
Educational Reform (ICER 2013): ASEAN Education in the 21st Century
Mahasarakham University, 2013
649
Amla Salleh, Zuria Mahmud and Ramlee Mustapha (2008). Mengenal Potensi
Kerjaya. Shah Alam : Oxford Fajar.
Herzberg,F. (1959). The Motivation hygiene Theory in Vroom,V.H. and E.L.Deli (ed)
Management and Motivation, Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books LTtd.
Indrawati et.al (2009). Soft Skills Dan Kepentingannnya Di Kalangan Guru PTV
Sebagai Agen Pembangunan Modal Insan Di Peringkat Sekolah. Seminar
Kebangsaan Pendidikan Teknikal Dan Vokasional Tve09.
Kilpatrick, S & A1len,K. (2001). Review of research: factors influencing demand for
vocational education and training courses. Kensington: National center
vocational education research.
Norain dan Nooriah (2012). Universiti, Pembangunan Modal Insan dan Penumpuan
Ruang Komuniti Berpendidikan Tinggi di Malaysia: Suatu Ulasan Kritis.
Journal of Science and Humanities. Volume 7, Number 2, 308-327, 2012
ISSN: 1823-884x e-Bangi, FSSK, UKM
Shaharuddian
et.al
(2011).
Kebolehpasaran
Graduan
UKM:
Satu
Kajian
Wan Rahimah Wan Kadir (1995). Pendidikan masa kini: Ke arah melahirkan
generasi berkualiti. Jurnal Guru, 7: 426-436.
651
mfahmy@psa.edu.my, rahida@psa.edu.my
ABSTRACT
Key words: Green Marketing, Eco Label, Packaging and Branding, Green
Advertisement
652
1.0.
INTRODUCTION
Consumers the world over are turning green. The beginning of the twenty-
Shaped by
change in consumers behavior where those who worry about the environment will
indicate their concerns through different behaviors like checking the products which
they are going to purchase to ensure they are buying ethically (Suchard and Polonski,
1991).
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
2.1
2.2
2.3
environmental claims were extremely or very believable (Dagnoli, 1991). Nik Abdul
Rashids (2009) in his research found that awareness of eco-label has positive effect
between knowledge of green product and consumers intention to purchase. The
research shown eco-labels are attractive instruments informing consumers about the
environmental impact of their purchasing decisions.
2.4
behaviour
Brands able to classifiable as green are those whose users primary
associations are environmental conservation and sustainable practices. Of the few
studies that examine the nature of green brands, Hartmann, Apaolaza Ibanez, &
Forcada Sainz (2005) characterize a green brand identity as having a specific set of
brand attributes and benefits related to the reduced environmental impact of the brand
and its perception as being environmentally sound. Hartman et al (2005) also stated
that a green brand identity is defined by a specific set of brand attributes and benefits
related to the reduced environmental impact of the brand and its perception as being
environmentally sound. A well-implemented green brand identity should provide
benefits to environmentally conscious consumers. The research done by Hartmann et
al (2005) found that that a well-implemented green positioning strategy can lead on
the whole to a more favourable perception of the brand, thus giving support to the
green marketing approach in general. The Theory of Reasoned Action (Ajzen and
Fishbein, 1980) suggests that marketers can influence consumers attitudes and
intentions by changing their evaluations through adding new beliefs and targeting
normative beliefs. Branding is a valuable tool in this manipulation or forming of
attitudes. Brands are effective because they have an effect on the affective domain:
rational reasons are translated into emotional preferences (Travis, 2000). Thus,
brands can shift consumer attitudes to more sustainable consumption.
2.5
behaviour
ECO
LABELLING
CONSUMER
PURCHASING
BEHAVIOUR
PACKAGING AND
BRANDING
GREEN
ADVERTISEMENT
Figure 1: Theoretical framework
658
3.0
RESEARCH METHOD
Data was collected from primary sources. The data was formed of 50
individuals.
business, to the lecturer at Politeknik Shah Alam and to the resident at Taman Alam
Budiman Shah Alam. The respondents was chosen because there also a consumer
who involve in daily product consumption and they know and have been exposed to
the various sources about green marketing. The measurement for this research was
adapted from previous research. This interval scale is used to measure the degree of
agreement towards the statement. This research was conducted using quantitative
survey research methods. In particular, a questionnaire was developed for data
gathering and some statistical methods were used for data analysis. Most questions
are fixed-alternative questions that require the respondent to select from a
predetermined set of responses. Researchers meet the respondents face to face and
gave the questionnaire. The respondents answered all the questions in writing and
they can ask the researcher if there were any questions they cant understand or any
questions that related to the questionnaire. Participation for this research was
voluntary. The data was collected within 4 weeks starting from 10th November 2014
to 7nd December 2014.
4.0
4.1
Profile of Respondents
Data analysis was conducted by using the SPSS system with test results of 50
sets of questionnaires answered by 50 qualified respondents. This study was use
quantitative methods to analyze the data because the data available is in the form of
number. Data analysis is an important process in a research. It can be concluded that
the results of research conducted on the basis of information obtained from the
respondents. Thus, this part should be done with caution because this is the desired
outcome of the study by the researcher. The results are analyzed to show the results
accurately. The objective is to obtain a count of the number of responses associated
with different values of the variable. The relative occurrence, or frequency, of
different values of the variable is then expressed in percentages. A frequency
659
Table 4.1:
Respondents Characteristics
i)
Frequency
GENDER
Percent Valid Percent
Cumulative
Percent
MALE
Valid
FEMAL
E
Total
19
38.0
38.0
38.0
31
62.0
62.0
100.0
50
100.0
100.0
Table above is shown the frequency distribution of the respondents' gender in this
study. It was found respondents total of 50 peoples. Number of female respondents is
more than male, represents 31 respondents or 62% of the total, while the male
respondents was 19 and it represents 38% of the total gender.
ii)
THINK PROMOTE
Frequency
Cumulative
Percent
YES
Valid NO
Total
49
98.0
98.0
98.0
2.0
2.0
100.0
50
100.0
100.0
There was 98% or 49 respondents who was agree with the statement of promoting
green marketing is importance and only one person which is represents 2% who
didnt agree with the statement
660
iii)
GREEN MARKETING
Frequency
Cumulative
Percent
ELECTRONIC MEDIA
Valid
NON ELECTRONIC
MEDIA
Total
39
78.0
78.0
78.0
11
22.0
22.0
100.0
50
100.0
100.0
According to the table above there are 39 respondents or 78% knows about green
marketing from the electronic media sources meanwhile 11 respondents or 22%
respondents knows from non electronic media sources.
4.2
Scale Reliability
Before the data analysis conducted, researchers have test the reliability
(Reliability Test) on data obtained from 50 qualified respondents. This is to ensure
that question in the questionnaires is reliable and able to demonstrate the right
decision on the question is to be studied by researchers. A survey instrument is
considered reliable if its repeated .Therefore since the instrument has been tested for
its reliability, it is required to retest its reliability for the different variables and
objectives. The reliability test has been done using SPSS to measure reliability of
instrument using Cronbach Alpha Coefficient. Below is the reliability statistics for the
mentioned variables. Noted that the rule of thumb about Cronbach-alpha coefficient
size is 0.6 to 0.7 is moderate and 0.9 is excellent.
Table 4.2:
Scale Reliability
Cronbachs Alpha
Variables
Statements
Consumer
i.
Decision
ii.
Making
as environmentally safe
iii.
animal-testing
iv.
= 0.924
Effectiveness
i.
of eco labeling
products
and green
ii.
products
on eco-labels
identification
iii.
read
iv.
Information
on
eco-labels
is
products in Malaysia
vii.
Intensity of
green
packaging and
branding for
ecological
customers
i.
Biodegradable
important
packaging
consideration
is
for
an
green
customers
iv.
which
are
less
damaging
to
the
environment
v.
= 0.879
products in Malaysia
Environmental
i.
Green
advertisement
and green
a credible manner
consumption
ii.
patterns
advertisements
The
advertisements
content
of
should
should
environmental
offer
pertinent
Attractive
= 0.927
environmental
consumers
will
obtain
environmental
benefits
v.
Ads
should
be
clear
about
environmental claims
Based on table 4.2, after conducting reliability tests, we found that the
reliability or Cronbach's Alpha is as high as 0.927. This suggests that the statement in
questionnaires is very reliable and able to test the thoughts and perception of the
respondents towards our research Analyzing the impact of green marketing strategies
on consumer purchasing behaviour. After conducting reliability tests in statement
Effectiveness of eco labeling and green products identification, we found the
reliability or Cronbach's Alpha is as high as 0.924. This suggests that the statement in
questionnaires is very reliable and able to test the thoughts and perception of the
respondent towards consumer decision behaviour. After conducting reliability tests in
question Intensity of green packaging and branding for ecological customers, found
the reliability or Cronbach's Alpha is as high as 0.879. This suggests that the
statement in questionnaires is very reliable and able to test the thoughts and
perception of the respondent towards consumer purchasing behaviour. Based on the
table, after conducting reliability tests in question Environmental advertisement and
green consumption patterns, we found the reliability or Cronbach's Alpha is as high as
663
0.927. This suggests that the statement in questionnaires is reliable and able to test the
thoughts and perception of the respondent towards consumer purchasing behavior.
4.3
Correlation
Table 4.3:
Correlation
Decision
Pearson
Correlation
Decision
Pearson
Correlation
Sig. (2-tailed)
N
Pearson
Packing_Brandi Correlation
ng
Packing_
Green
Branding
Advertisement
Sig. (2-tailed)
N
Eco_Labeling
Eco Labeling
Sig. (2-tailed)
N
50
.792**
.000
50
50
.633**
.571**
.000
.000
50
50
664
50
Pearson
Correlation
Advertisement
Sig. (2-tailed)
N
.457**
.388**
.754**
.001
.005
.000
50
50
50
Based on the table 4.3, we can see three variables which are between eco
labelling and decision making, packaging and branding and decision making and
advertisement and decision making. The table above shown that N = 50 mean
respondents is 50 peoples. The closer the value is to -1 to +1, the stronger the
association is between the variables. The value between 0.5 and 0.9 mean are strongly
related and the value less than 0.5 are weakly related.
According to the table 4.3.1 above, there is strongly related correlation between eco
labelling and consumer decision pattern with very dependent relationship between
those two variables. Consequently, the first hypotheses of these studies stated that:
H1:
behavior
665
50
4.4 Regression
Model Summary
Model
R
.822a
R Square
Adjusted R
Std. Error of
Square
the Estimate
.676
.654
1.09681
The table of interest is the Model Summary table. This table provides the R
and R Square value. The R value is 0.822 which represents a high degree of
correlation. The value of our R square is 0.676, which means that 67.6 percent of the
total variance in consumer decision making pattern has been explained. The
Adjusted R Square value indicates 65.4% of the consumer decision making pattern by
the question in marketing tools. The Adjusted R Square value 50.9% of the consumer
decision making pattern can be explained by the marketing tools.
666
ANOVA
Model
Sum of
Df
Mean Square
Sig.
Squares
Regression
1
Residual
Total
a.
115.23
2
55.338
170.56
38.411
46
1.203
.000b
31.929
49
The next table is the ANOVA table. This table indicates that the regression model predicts
the outcome variable significantly well. Here, .000, which is less than 0.05, and indicates
that, overall, the model applied can statistically significantly predict the consumer purchasing
behavior.
Coefficients
Model
Unstandardized
Standardized
Coefficients
Coefficients
B
(Constant)
Eco Labeling
1
Packing
Branding
Advertisement
Std. Error
-1.704
1.176
.707
.114
.385
.026
Sig.
Beta
-1.448
.154
.639
6.229
.000
.218
.255
1.771
.083
.199
.017
.132
.896
667
because it has "too" much dispersion/variance. The significant value is less than 0.1
then the coefficients estimate is reliable because they are not too much
dispersion/variance. The coefficient for Eco labelling is in the range .000 with a 95%
level of confidence, while the coefficient for packaging and branding is 0.083. This
variables is not significant because more than 0.05.
5.0
CONCLUSION
5.1
Another significant implication of the study relates to the importance of ecolabels as an input for green buying behavior. Likewise, Rashid (2009) has suggested
that eco-label is an important factor that would enable consumers to make the right
purchase choice. Therefore, marketers should emphasize on green product strategies
and in turn, eco-labels should be viewed as an essential marketing tool in promoting
green consumption as there is enough empirical evidence in the present study
demonstrating that green labelling has a positive impact on consumer purchasing
behavior. In a similar vein, business executives and government should ensure that
eco-labels are comprehensible and equally, the type and format of information
668
Even though from the study has found that packaging, branding and green
advertisement are not influence consumer to make decision towards green products,
there are a positive relationship. This situation was because in Malaysia we can see
there are just a few companies who really stressed about green product and
environmental friendly. Lack of information and advertisement either in electronic
media or non-electronic media about green product and green purchasing behavior
also bring to the problem. As pointed out by Swenson and Wells (1997), customers
are more inclined towards environmental friendly brands because of their growing
environmental concerns.
branding strategies to sell their products. Green brands can evoke positive emotions
by showing the nature-related advantages stemming from sensations and feelings
(Kals et al., 1999). Marketers should ensure green advertisements are more pleasant,
attractive and convincing in the context of Malaysia. Marketers should capitalize on
creativity and originality in order to enhance the appeal of green advertisements and
equally, differentiate the green advertisements from other non-green advertisements in
Malaysia. In addition, marketers should emphasize on emotional appeal in the green
advertisements (Hawkins et al., 1998; Pooley and OConnor, 2000) as emotional
content in green advertisements can also increase customers attention towards these
advertisements.
REFERENCES
Alwitt, L.F. and Pitts, R.E. (1996), Predicting purchase intentions for an
environmentally sensitive product, Journal of Consumer Psychology, 5(1), 4964.
Ajzen, I. (1991), The theory of planned behaviour, Organizational Behavior and
Human Decision Processes, Vol. 50 No. 2, pp. 179-211.
Ajzen, I. and Fishbein, M. (1980), Understanding Attitudes and Predicting Social
Behavior, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
669
Cherian, Jacob & Jacob. Jolly (2012). Green marketing: a study of consumers
attitude towards environment friendly products. Asian Social Science: 8(12).
117-126
Chase, D. and Smith, T.K. (1992), Consumers keen on green but marketers dont
deliver,
Advertising Age, Vol. 63.
Dagnoli, J. (1991), Consciously green, Advertising Age, Vol. 14.
DSaouza, Clare. (2004). Eco-label programmes: a stakeholder (consumer)
perspective. Corporate communications: An International Journal, 9(3), 179188
DSaouza, Clare. (2006). Green advertising effects on attitude and choice of
advertising themes. Asia Pacific Journal of Marketing and Logistics, 17(3), 5166
Futerra (2008), The green wash guide, available at: www.futerra.co.uk/
Hartmann, P., Apaolaza Ibanez, V. and Forcada Sainz, J.F. (2005), Green branding
effects on attitude: functional versus emotional positioning strategies,
Marketing Intelligence & Planning, 23(1), 9-29.
Journal
of
Entrepreneurship,
670
Management
and
Sustainable
Kotchen, M.J., & Reiling, S.D (2000). Environmental attitudes, motivations and
contingent valuation of nonuse values: a case study involving endangered
species, Ecological Economics, 32(1), 93-107.
671
saiful_kktj@yahoo.com.my, hayah_kktj@yahoo.com.my
ABSTRAK
bahan
multimedia
interaktif
telah
menyuntik
kepada
672
1.0
PENGENALAN
673
yang statik tetapi lebih dinamik dan dapat berada di mana-mana tempat dalam dunia
ini.
1.1
Oleh yang demikian, menurut Albrecht dan Sack (2000), perubahan dalam
kaedah pengajaran bagi kursus Perakaunan adalah penting. Pendidik perlu
memikirkan kaedah alternatif agar pelajar mendapat kemahiran yang sepatutnya dan
dapat digunakan setelah bekerja kelak.
674
1.2
Pernyataan Masalah
Pelajar perlu menguasai topik lejar kerana lejar perlu disediakan sebelum
penyata kewangan dapat dihasilkan. Berdasarkan kitaran perakaunan, transaksi akan
direkod dalam jurnal dan seterusnya direkod dalam lejar dan perlu ditutup pada setiap
tempoh kewangan untuk menentukan baki akhir setiap akaun yang ada. Selepas lejar
disediakan imbangan duga akan disediakan untuk menentukan sama ada lejar
disediakan mengikut kepada prinsip catitan bergu serta peraturan debit dan kredit
yang betul. Akaun dan amaun yang ada dalam imbangan duga kemudian akan
digunakan untuk menyediakan penyata untung rugi dan penyata kunci kira-kira (Seai
Kie (2013)).
675
1.3
Objektif Kajian
1.4
Persoalan Kajian
1. Sejauh manakah isi kandungan I-Ledger menepati silibus DPA1013
Fundamentals of Accounting?
2. Adakah I-Ledger dilengkapi dengan ciri-ciri multimedia?
3. Adakah I-Ledger dilengkapi dengan ciri-ciri interaktif?
1.5
Kepentingan Kajian
676
1.6
Batasan Kajian
Fundamentals of
Accounting sahaja.
2.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
2.1
Rekabentuk Kajian
Kajian ini dilaksanakan dengan menggunakan set soal selidik yang dijawab
oleh pelajar jurusan Diploma Perakaunan semester 1 sesi Jun 2014 kursus DPA1013
Fundamentals of Accounting di Politeknik Mukah, Sarawak setelah mereka
melayari perisian I-Ledger.
2.2
Data yang diperoleh dari Jabatan Hal Ehwal Pelajar Politeknik Mukah,
Sarawak, terdapat sebanyak 62 orang pelajar yang mengambil
jurusan Diploma
677
2.3
Instrumen Kajian
Soal selidik dengan skala Likert lima pilihan jawapan tersebut dibahagikan
kepada enam bahagian iaitu Bahagian A, Bahagian B, Bahagian C, Bahagian D,
Bahagian E dan bahagian F. Bahagian A adalah berkaitan dengan latar belakang
responden. Bahagian B pula menyentuh mengenai isi kandungan perisian. Bahagian C
adalah berkaitan dengan unsur-unsur multimedia yang ada dalam I-Ledger. Bahagian
D pula adalah berkaitan dengan unsur-unsur interaktif, bahagian E pula berkenaan
item-item yang menjurus kepada peningkatan kemahiran dan Bahagian F pula adalah
berkenaan persepsi pelajar terhadap perisian I-Ledger ini.
2.4
Kajian Rintis
Untuk kajian rintis yang telah dijalankan kepada 16 orang pelajar jurusan
Diploma Perakaunan semester 2 sesi Jun 2014 yang pernah mengambil kursus
Fundamentals Of Accounting di Politeknik Mukah, Sarawak, hasil ujian pekali
Alpha Cronbach adalah 0.934, iaitu menunjukkan soal selidik ini boleh diterima pakai
dan dianggap baik. Data yang diperolehi dari responden kemudiannya dianalisis
menggunakan perisian SPSS (Statistical Package For The Social Sciences) versi 21.
3.0
ANALISIS DATA
678
Tahap Interpretasi
Rendah
Sederhana
Tinggi
Sumber : Siti Fatimah dan Ab Halim (2010)
3.1
Latarbelakang Responden
Daripada 57 pelajar yang dikaji, didapati 87.7 peratus pelajar adalah wanita
dalam lingkungan umur 18 tahun. Daripada jumlah tersebut, sebanyak 61.4 peratus
pelajar wanita tidak pernah mengambil subjek Prinsip Perakaunan semasa
peperiksaan Sijil Pelajaran Malaysia manakala 26.3 peratus pula pernah mengambil
subjek Prinsip Perakaunan semasa peperiksaan Sijil Pelajaran Malaysia.
Manakala bagi pelajar lelaki pula, daripada 12.3 peratus responden, 10.5
peratus tidak pernah mengambil subjek Prinsip Perakaunan semasa peperiksaan Sijil
Pelajaran Malaysia manakala 1.8 peratus sahaja yang pernah mengambil subjek
Prinsip Perakaunan semasa peperiksaan Sijil Pelajaran Malaysia.
3.2
Isi kandungan
Dari aspek perincian skor min terhadap isi kandungan I-Ledger, skor min
tertinggi diperoleh pada item 3 (min=4.30) berhubung dengan kandungan perisian
adalah teratur. 35.1 peratus menyatakan sangat setuju, 59.6 peratus menyatakan setuju
berbanding 5.3 peratus menyatakan tidak pasti.
679
3.3
Unsur-Unsur Multimedia
Bagi unsur-unsur multimedia yang terdapat dalam I-Ledger pula, 91.2 peratus
memberikan maklumbalas yang sangat baik dan hanya 8.8 peratus sahaja yang
memberi maklumbalas yang sederhana. Manakala purata maklumbalas pelajar adalah
dalam skala 4.18 menunjukkan bahawa pelajar bersetuju terhadap unsur-unsur
multimedia yang digunakan dalam perisian ini.
Dari aspek perincian skor min terhadap unsur multimedia yang terdapat dalam
I-Ledger, pelajar amat berpuas hati dengan item 5 berhubung dengan saiz dan warna
teks yang digunakan sesuai dan mudah dibaca. Item ini memperoleh skor min
tertinggi, iaitu 4.33. 40.4 peratus menyatakan sangat setuju, 52.6 peratus menyatakan
setuju berbanding 7.0 peratus menyatakan tidak pasti.
3.4
Dari aspek perincian skor min terhadap unsur interaktif yang terdapat dalam ILedger, pelajar amat berpuas hati dengan item 7 berhubung dengan kebebasan
memilih bahagian yang ingin dipelajari. Item ini memperoleh skor min tertinggi, iaitu
4.23. 31.6 peratus menyatakan sangat setuju, 59.6 peratus menyatakan setuju
berbanding 8.8 peratus menyatakan tidak pasti.
Namun demikian, terdapat 2 orang pelajar (3.5 peratus) yang sangat tidak
setuju dan 4 orang pelajar (7.0 peratus) tidak bersetuju terhadap item 11 berhubung
dengan menggunakan perisian ini tanpa bimbingan rakan dan pensyarah.
3.5
Peningkatan Kemahiran
680
dan hanya 29.8 peratus sahaja yang memberikan maklumbalas yang sederhana. Purata
maklumbalas pelajar adalah dalam skala 3.88.
3.6
Persepsi Pelajar
Persepsi pelajar terhadap I-Ledger adalah sangat baik, iaitu 82.5% dan hanya
17.5 peratus sahaja yang memberikan maklumbalas yang sederhana. Purata
maklumbalas pelajar adalah dalam skala 4.06.
Dari aspek perincian skor min, skor min tertinggi diperoleh dari item 2, 7 dan
9 (min=4.12). Sebanyak 26.3 peratus sangat bersetuju dan 59.6 peratus bersetuju
bahawa item 2, iaitu elemen multimedia interaktif perlu digunapakai dalam kursus
DPA1013 sebagai alat bahan bantu mengajar. Sebanyak 24.6 peratus sangat bersetuju
dan 63.2 peratus bersetuju bahawa item 7, iaitu perisian I-Ledger dapat menjimatkan
masa pengajaran dan pembelajaran. Sebanyak 19.3 peratus sangat bersetuju dan 73.7
peratus bersetuju bahawa item 9, iaitu perisian ini membantu pelajar dalam proses
pembelajaran.
4.0
PERBINCANGAN
681
maklumat yang lebih kepada pelajar dapat membantu dalam pembentukan corak
ingatan yang lebih kompleks.
mereka
5.0
682
Untuk kajian akan datang, dicadangkan juga supaya perisian I-Ledger ini
dapat dikaitkan dengan pencapaian pelajar sebelum dan selepas menggunakan
perisian I-Ledger. Kajian tersebut kelak akan dapat mengukuhkan lagi peranan dan
kepentingan bahan multimedia interaktif dalam proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran
kursus Perakaunan.
Namun demikian, peranan pendidik masih lagi kekal dan tidak mungkin
teknologi boleh menggantikan peranan yang dimainkan oleh pendidik sepenuhnya.
Teknologi merupakan alat yang membantu pendidik mempelbagaikan lagi kaedah
pengajaran dan pembelajaran bagi menghasilkan satu pembelajaran yang lebih
berkesan dan bermakna.
RUJUKAN
Albrecht, W.S., Sack, R.J. (2000). Accounting education : Charting the course
through a perilous future. Accounting Education Series, Volume 16, American
Accounting Association, Sarasota FL, 2000. Retrived from http://www.imanet.
org/docs/default-source/maq/maqrussell-pdf.pdf?sfvrsn=0
683
Seai Kie, H. (2013). Fundamentals of Accounting. Malaysia : Oxford Fajar Sdn. Bhd.
Shamsi, S. B. (2011). Does using computer technology improve students
performance? Evidence from a management accounting course. International
Journal of Business and Social Science Vol. 2 (10), June 2011. Retrived from
http://www.ijbssnet.com/journals/Vol.%202_No._10%3B_June_2011/28.pdf
Siti Fatimah, A. & AB. Halim, T. (2010). Persepsi guru terhadap penggunaan Bahan
Bantu mengajar berasaskan teknologi multimedia dalam pengajaran j-Qaf.
Journal of Islamic and Arabic Education 2(2), 53-64
684
685
ABSTRAK
Projek Penjana elektrik magnet ini dijalankan bagi mencari alternatif untuk
menghasilkan tenaga elektrik bagi mengurangkan kebergantungan kepada
penjana elektrik konvensional seperti penjana diesel dan penjana gas turbin.
Selain daripada itu projek ini dibangunkan sebagai prototaip alat bantu
mengajar yang digunapakai dalam kursus sistem kuasa. Penjana ini
mempunyai dua bahagian utama iaitu turbin magnet dengan gear dan dan
dinamo sebagai pemula. Penjana elektrik magnet ini mengaplikasikan teori
aruhan elektromagnetik. Penjana elektik magnet ini dihasilkan dengan
menyusun dua kumpulan magnet dalam bentuk bulatan ataupun gegelung
dengan arah kutub yang sama susunan magnet yang berbeza arah kutub akan
saling menolak menyebabkan rotor berputar tanpa menggunakan tenaga
daripada luar. Apabila penggerak pemula mendapat tenaga elektrik, magnet
yang disusun secara gelang akan memutarkan gear dan seterusnya
memutarkan alternator yang bersifat elektromagnetik. Pergerakkan ini akan
menjana elektrik kerana terdapat pemotongan fluks yang berlaku diantara
dua kumpulan magnet yang mempunyai arah kutub yang berbezaa. Penjana
ini tidak menggunakan sebarang bahan api selain untuk menggerakan pemula
sahaja. Projek
1.0
PENGENALAN
Projek
penjana
elektrik
magnet
ini
dijalankan
bagi
menguji
Magnet terbahagi kepada dua jenis iaitu magnet kekal iaitu ferromagnetic dan
magnet tidak kekal (elektromagnetik). Sebagai permulaan, projek ini hanya
memfokuskan kepada penggunaan magnet kekal bersaiz kecil kerana magnet ini
mudah diperolehi daripada peralatan-peralatan elektrik dan elektronik yang rosak. Ini
dapat menjimatkan kos dan mengguna semula komponen peralatan yang telah rosak.
Pembolehubah dalam projek ini adalah kekuatan atau bilangan magnet yang ada. Oleh
itu, ujian tertumpu kepada susunan magnet dan jumlah magnet yang digunakan. Dapat
dirumuskan, skop bagi projek ini adalah;
i.
bahan yang digunakan bagi memutarkan motor adalah magnet kekal iaitu
feromagnetik yang diperolehi daripada peralatan elektrik dan elektronik
yang rosak,
ii.
iii.
Bahan ini tidak bergantung kepada sumber pihak kedua untuk menghasilkan
tenaga. Ini juga memberikan gambaran bahawa, penggunaan elektrik boleh
melaksanakan pelan tenaga sifar titik iaitu memaksimukan penggunaan tanpa
membayar kos bulanan. Terdapat beberapa jenis magnet kekal iaitu magnet
neodymium (Magnet paling kuat), magnet samarium, magnet seramik, magnet plastik
dan magnet Alnico.
688
Tenaga keupayaan
Tenaga
mekanikal/kinetik
Tenaga Elektrik
2.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
i.
ii.
iii.
3.0
KAEDAH METODOLOGI
Konsep penjanaan elektrik magnet adalah lebih kurang sama dengan konsep
penjanaan tenaga elektrik hidro. Perbezaannya adalah dari segi bentuk sumber
janakuasa elektrik tersebut iaitu penjana elektrik magnet mengunakan sumber tenaga
keupayaan magnet bagi menggerakkan turbin manakala penjana tenaga elektrik hidro
menggunakan sumber air bagi menggerakkan turbin. Jenis magnet yang digunakkan
adalah magnet kekal memandangkan sifat magnetnya yang kekal.
ii.
iii.
Tenaga elektrik yang dihasilkan boleh bekerja dalam skala kecil untuk
peralatan yang menggunakan tenaga yang lebih kecil.
Bahagian A
Bahagian B
Litar
dinamo
magnet
bateri 12 V
potentiometer
magnet
bebola alas
cakera padat
papan litar
komponen elektronik (perintang, kapasitor, LED, IC
7805)
Rajah 2.1: Bahan dan komponen yang digunakan dalam projek Penjana Elektrik
Magnet.
690
Penilaian dan
maklumbalas
Penilaian dan
maklumbalas
Bengkel
Pembangunan
projek dan
penilaian
Produk akhir
dan
pembentangan
Rumasan dan
cadangan
penambahbaikan
Definisi
projek
mengenal
pasti
masalah
Kajian
Model
pembelajaran
berdasarkan
projek
digunapakai
dalam
proses
pembangunan projek Elektrik Magnet yang mana proses pembangunan projek ini
merupakan kerjasama diantara tenaga pengajar dan pelajar. Model ini dipilih kerana ia
merupakan alternatif kepada berasaskan kertas, hafalan hafalan, ataupun aktiviti bilik
kuliah. Penyokong model pembelajaran berasaskan projek, menyatakan keadah ini
mempunyai pelbagai faedah kepada pelaksanaan strategi tersebut dalam kelas,
termasuk pemahaman konsep, pengetahuan yang lebih luas, komunikasi lebih baik
dan kemahiran interpersonal / sosial, meningkatkan kemahiran kepimpinan,
meningkatkan kreativiti, dan kemahiran penulisan yang lebih baik. John Dewey
merupakan pelopor kepada idea "pembelajaran dengan melakukan". John Dewey
(1997)
691
pelajar yang tahu projek mereka akan dinilai akan memberikan usaha yang lebih bagi
mendapatkan pengiktirafan positif.
Tenaga pengajar
1. Persoalan /
pernyataan masalah
2. Perancangan
3. Kajian
Pelajar
4. Merekacipta
5. Penambahbaikan
6. Pembentangan
4.0
Projek ini berjaya mencapai objektif yang disenaraikan. Tujuan utama untuk
membangunkan mini prototaip sebagai alat bantu mengajar telah berjaya dilakukan.
Projek ini dapat menjana kuasa elektrik bagi menghidupkan 4 biji LED. Projek
penjana
elektrik
magnet
ini
membuktikan
bahawa
magnet
mempunyai
Gambarajah 3.1: Susunan magnet dan pemasangan starter di posisi yang sesuai.
692
Keputusan
magnet
Catatan
Turbin tidak dapat saling menarik diantara satu
Turbin berputar
Turbin berputar
sama lain
Jadual 3.1 menunjukan hasil dapatan terhadap penambahan jumlah magnet yang
digunakan.
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
Voltan minimum
voltan maksimum
Projek Penjana Magnet ini mempunyai potensi untuk dimaju dan dibangunkan
namun memerlukan lebih banyak kajian susulan. Terdapat beberapa kekangan dan
cabaran dalam pembangunan projek ini dan, antarnya adalah:
i.
ii.
5.0
iii.
iv.
Menitikberatkan keselamatan.
KESIMPULAN
Hasil projek ini telah menginspirasikan pelajar untuk meminati Kursus Sistem
Kuasa di Politeknik Kota Kinabalu. Model Pembelajaran berdasarkan projek mampu
menarik minat pelajar untuk memahami dan mendalami sesuatu bidang yang
berkaitan. Diharap projek ini mampu dibangunkan, malah dikomesialkan bagi
kebaikan sejagat kerana Projek Penjana Magnet ini mempunyai potensi yang baik
dalam memenuhi keperluan bekalan tenaga elektrik. Malahan Penjana Elektrik
Magnet ini mengamalkan konsep mesra alam.
694
REFERENCES
Hye-Jung Lee1, h., & Cheolil Lim1, c. (2012). Peer Evaluation in Blended Team
Project-Based Learning: What Do Students Find Important?. Journal Of
Educational Technology & Society, 15(4), 214-224.
Moner. Athur., Noni. Normiah., Teng Howe Cheng, Gatt Abram & Jamson (2012).
Perpetual Motion Re-generator (Magnetic). 1-20
695
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Now technology is more expanding and sophisticated that will benefit for us as
a human being. Before the QR code was introduced, barcode as shown in Figure 1
played the main role for a long time for instance, in good price in the supermarket
which displayed the price when it was scanned by the barcode reader.
696
A great feature of QR Code is that they do not need to be scanned from one
particular angle, as QR Code can be read regardless of their position. QR code
scanners are capable of determining the correct way to decode the image due to the
three specific squares that are positioned in the corners of the symbol and the
697
alignment blocks (Narayanan, 2012). The QR code stores the information in both
vertical and horizontal directions (Law & So, 2010).
QR code can be applied in so many areas such as train ticket, zoo information
boards, concert ticket, food and product packaging, billboards and etc. By knowing
the usefulness and the advantages of the QR code, the tracking of the electronics
equipment such as oscilloscope and power supply as shown in Figure 3 will be easy
for the Laboratory Supervisor. The code will assist the lecturers and the lab
technicians about the origin location quickly if the equipment is misplaced.
(a)
(b)
2.0
PROBLEM STATEMENTS
In Jabatan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, PMU there are four laboratories that have
some electronic equipments with the same model such as oscilloscope, power supply,
and etc. Laboratory Supervisor had to find the electronic equipments that are
sometimes misplaced such as Oscilloscope, power supply and etc. This is because the
lecturer who borrowed that equipment forgot to return it back. The laboratory
supervisor had to search the equipment at another laboratory with the same model and
bring along the ID number. Therefore, QR code was implemented and stick at the
equipment so that the Laboratory Supervisor can recognize his/hers by scanning the
code using his/hers smartphone only.
698
3.0
OBJECTIVES
a)
b)
4.0
SCOPE OF PROJECT
and
Analog
power
supply
about
15
units
each
from
5.0
METHODOLOGY
This research was conducted in two phases: first, the selection of the electronic
equipments that usually used by the students and lecturers, and took the important
details of the equipments. Secondly, the QR Codes image being printed on the sticker
and attached to the upside panel of the equipments. The size of the sticker is about
0.87 in X 0.87 in. The process on how to read the QR codes, images as shown in the
Figure 4.
699
Open the QR
Codes
application
Scan the QR
Codes
images
Decoding
process
Show QR
Codes
contents
Figure 4 : The process on how to access the information from the QR codes (Denso
wave,2014) .
Firstly, the user who is using a smart phone which has a cameraneeds to
download and install the free apps from Google Play for Android or the App Store for
iPhone. After installing the app, selecting the app will automatically activate the
smartphones camera, with an on-screen framing guide. The QR code image can then
be scanned with the camera. It may be necessary to hold the camera in one place for a
while until a beep indicates that the scan is complete. Lastly, the smartphone screen
will then display the information (Chang, 2014).
6.0
The QR Codes image and details of the electronics equipment are shown in the
Table 1.0 below. For instance, the QR Codes displayed a Dual Trace Oscilloscope
100 MHz, which was located at MakmalKomunikasiElektronik (MKE).
700
QR Codes image
ELEKTRIK (JKE)
LOKASI : MAKMAL KOMUNIKASI
ELEKTRONIK (MKE)
0.87
Tracking the electronics equipments which misplaced is not an easy job. For
instance, the staff will face difficulties if he or she found some extra equipments in his
or her laboratory. This is because he or she would not know and had to find by himself
or herself the owner of that equipment and the coding for that equipment are shown in
the Figure 5 and Figure 6. Normally, the searching of any equipment is through the
Harta Modal excel files as shown in the Figure 7 for each laboratory to know the exact
location.
701
Figure 5: One of the example email to search an electronic equipments, who sent by
the laboratory supervisor.
702
Figure 8 shows the easiest way to identify the equipment details and the person just
needs a smartphone, which installed with QR Scanner to know the details of that
equipment.
(b)
(a)
Figure 8 (a) Scanning QR code process (b) Details displayed on the smartphone.
703
7.0
CONCLUSIONS
Basically, the QR code implementation is a very effective method to help the
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
REFERENCES
WAVE.
Retrieved
from
http://www.qrcode.com/en/about/version.html
704
Retrieved
January
14,
2015,
from
http://www.google.com.my/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=6&
ved=0CEYQFjAF&url=http://www.ijcst.org/Volume3/Issue7/p13_3_7.pdf&ei
=ZvxNVOOkEKOwmAXkpoLoAw&usg=AFQjCNF8pWy4NvrJJZS25GY2w
UiVvHBBJw&sig2=sT_Glve2acGoVJ1QKjIQOw&bvm=bv.77880786,d.dGY
705
nasiruddin.poli@1govuc.gov.my, azam.daud.poli@1govuc.gov.my,
noorlizawati.poli@1govuc.gov.my
ABSTRAK
kekerapan,
peratusan
dan
min
untuk
mengenalpasti
Data
pensyarah
terhadap
penggunaan
e-Learning
dalam
proses
pembelajaran dan pengajaran adalah sederhana dengan nilai skor min 3.29
manakala untuk kemahiran pensyarah berada pada tahap yang tinggi dengan
nilai skor min 3.93.
rendah manakala untuk aspek peruntukan pula berada pada tahap sederhana
dengan nilai skor min 3.43.
1.0
PENGENALAN
Setiap orang akan mengalami proses pengajaran sejak kecil lagi samada
melalui pengalaman, didikan secara formal dan tidak formal.
Pendidikan yang
diterima secara formal dan tidak formal banyak memberi input kepada seseorang jika
dibandingkan dengan proses pembelajaran melalui pengalaman.
Sejak Malaysia
mencapai kemerdekaan pada tahun 1957, proses pembelajaran dan pengajaran berlaku
di antara guru dengan para pelajar sehingga sekarang tetapi kaedah serta pendekatan
yang berlainan mengikut peredaran masa. Pendekatan yang dimaksudkan ialah media
yang digunakan serta kurikulum yang dibentuk.
Pengajaran
adalah
strategi
pra-rancang
berasaskan
pedagogi
untuk
707
2.0
PENYATAAN MASALAH
Melalui pemerhatian yang dibuat serta statistik yang dikeluarkan oleh Unit
Teknologi Maklumat PBS bermula Januari hingga Mac 2015, para pensyarah di
politeknik
kurang
menggunakan
teknologi
instruksi
serta
CIDOS
dalam
menyampaikan ilmu kepada para pelajar. Dari pemerhatian yang dijalankan juga,
kemudahan prasarana terhad di sesetengah politeknik. Terdapat pelbagai faktor yang
mempengaruhi penggunaan peralatan ini di kalangan para pensyarah seperti sikap,
kemahiran, latihan dan kemudahan atau prasarana yang terhad.
pengajar juga dibebankan dengan terlalu banyak tugas yang tidak berbentuk akademik
atau mengajar terlampau banyak subjek yang berbeza sehingga menghilangkan
komitmen mereka. Walau bagaimanapun, sikap yang terdapat pada para pensyarah
memainkan peranan yang sangat besar dalam penggunaan teknologi instruksi serta eLearning dalam proses pembelajaran dan pengajaran. Permasalahan serta kekangankekangan yang dialami oleh para pensyarah dalam penggunaan e-Learning ini perlu
diatasi serta diselesaikan bagi memastikan proses pembelajaran dan pengajaran dapat
dijalankan dengan lebih efektif supaya dapat meningkatkan perkembangan daya fikir,
kreativiti serta matlamat falsafah dan sejajar dengan kehendak agensi luar.
Sehubungan itu, faktor sikap penggunaan e-Learning di kalangan para pensyarah di
politeknik merupakan salah satu objektif kajian ini dijalankan.
3.0
Kajian ini adalah bertujuan untuk mengkaji dan mengenal pasti penggunaan eLearning dalam proses pembelajaran dan pengajaran di politeknik. Objektif kajian ini
adalah untuk:
1. Menentukan faktor sikap mempengaruhi penggunaan e-Learning di kalangan
para pensyarah
2. Meninjau samada terdapat hubungan yang signifikan di antara sikap dengan
kemahiran pensyarah dalam penggunaan e-Learning
3. Mengkaji kemudahan prasarana yang disediakan serta penggunaannya.
4. Meninjau peruntukan yang disediakan untuk proses pembelajaran dan
pengajaran
4.0
prasarana
yang
disediakan
mencukupi
bagi
menggalakkan
Hipotesis kajian telah dirangka bagi menjawab 1 persoalan kajian. Untuk hipotesis
bagi menjawab persoalan kajian yang kedua seperti berikut:
5.0
KAJIAN LITERATUR
i.
ii.
Para pengajar dibebankan dengan terlalu banyak tugas yang tidak berbentuk
akademik atau mengajar terlampau banyak subjek yang berbeza sehingga
menghilangkan komitmen mereka
iii.
pendidikan
ini
merangkumi
perkembangan,
pembaharuan
dan
tenaga pensyarah perlu mengikut atau peka dengan perubahan pada persekitaran
samada dari sudut politik, teknologi, ekonomi dan sosial.
Selain dari itu kajian juga telah dijalankan terhadap kelebihan penggunaan
video, sumber web secara sistematik seperti oleh Maizurah Omar, Fattawi Mokhtar
(2000), Jamaludin Mohaidin (2000), Heinich et al (1999).
Mereka berpendapat
6.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
Rekabentuk kajian ini ialah kajian kuantitatif yang berbentuk deskriptif dan
korelasi. Kajian kuantitatif berbentuk deskriptif digunakan bagi mendapatkan
maklumat berkaitan demografi responden serta tahap penggunaan e-Learning dalam
pembelajaran dan pengajaran. Populasi kajian adalah terdiri daripada semua staf
akademik Jabatan Kejuruteraan Mekanikal yang terdiri dari 21 orang. Populasi ini
dipilih kerana semua staf akademik mengajar dalam mod semester berbanding dengan
Jabatan Penyenggaraan Pesawat yang masih menggunakan mod modular.
Dalam kajian ini, borang soal selidik digunakan sebagai instrument kajian.
Seterusnya data dan maklumat soal selidik akan dianalisis menggunakan perisian
Statistic Package for the Social Science version 18.0 (SPSS v 18.0). Soal selidik ini
terbahagi kepada tiga bahagian seperti yang ditunjukkan dalam Jadual 1:
711
Perkara
Bahagian A
Maklumat responden
Bahagian B
Persoalan kajian
Bahagian C
Terdapat 4 item dalam Bahagian B iaitu item sikap, kemahiran, prasarana &
latihan dan peruntukan. Segala pengukuran terhadap pembolehubah dibuat
berdasarkan maklum balas terhadap semua pertanya yang terkandung dalam soal
selidik. Soal selidik ini menggunakan Skala Likert.
Setelah diubahsuai dan diataptasi daripada Landell (1997), jadual tafsiran min
yang digunakan oleh pengkaji adalah seperti jadual 2 di bawah:
Julat
Tahap
1.00-2.40
Rendah
2.41-3.80
Sederhana
3.81-5.00
Tinggi
Kumpulan
712
Bilangan Item
Alpha Cronbach
17
0.838
II
21
0.929
III
10
0.798
7.0
Kekuatan
Tinggi, kuat
Sederhana
Lemah, rendah
Sangat lemah
713
Umur
Kelulusan
Pengalaman mengajar
Perincian
Peratus (%)
Lelaki
23.81
Perempuan
76.19
21-30 tahun
9.52
31-40 tahun
85.71
41-50 tahun
4.76
Diploma
Ijazah
33.33
Sarjana
66.67
Kurang 3 tahun
4-6 tahun
28.57
7-10 tahun
38.10
Lebih 10 tahun
33.33
Hasil dapatan kajian bagi pemilikan komputer setiap pensyarah juga dianalisis.
Pemilikan komputer peribadi mempunyai perkaitan dengan sikap dan kemahiran
penggunaan teknologi dalam proses P&P. Dapatan menunjukkan kesemua pensyarah
mempunyai komputer peribadi dalam menjalankan kehidupan kerja sebagai seorang
pensyarah. Dari dapatan kajian juga, responden berminat mengikuti perkembangan
teknologi komputer tetapi hanya sebahagian sahaja yang pernah mengikuti kursus
berkaitan dengan e-Learning. Ada pengkaji yang mendapati kursus komputer yang
pernah diambil dapat meningkatkan tahap pengetahuan komputer (Nor Hariza, 1994;
Geissler 3 dan Horridge,1993; Woodrow, 1991; Reece dan Owen, 1985). Tetapi ada
714
juga pengkaji yang melaporkan ia tidak memberi apa-apa kesan ke atas tahap
pengetahuan komputer seseorang (Lee, Pliskin dan Khan, 1994).
Julat
Tahap
1.00 2.33
Rendah
2.34 3.67
Sederhana
3.68 5.00
Tinggi
715
Learning serta pensyarah sentiasa mengikuti perkembangan terkini berkaitan eLearning menunjukkan tahap sederhana dengan nilai skor min masing-masing
sebanyak 3.8095. Secara keseluruhannya, item sikap pensyarah (faktor dalaman)
memberikan purata skor min yang tinggi di mana dapat ditafsirkan bahawa pensyarah
berminat menggunakan e-Learning walaupun kurang mengikuti perkembangan eLearning.
Terdapat 5 item dianalisis untuk melihat tahap sikap (faktor luaran) terhadap
penggunaan e-Learning. Merujuk kepada 5 item tersebut, item A13 iaitu pensyarah
akan menggunakan e-Learning dalam proses P&P apabila persekitaran dalam
bangunan dilengkapi dengan kemudahan serta prasarana memberikan nilai skor min
yang tertinggi iaitu sebanyak 4.619. Diikuti pula oleh item A11, A12, A17 dan A16.
Faktor luaran seperti persekitaran yang dilengkapi peralatan dan rakan sejawat
memainkan peranan penting dalam mempengaruhi sikap pensyarah.
Secara
keseluruhannya, item sikap pensyarah (faktor luaran) memberikan purata skor min
yang tinggi di mana dapat ditafsirkan bahawa pensyarah berminat menggunakan
teknologi instruksi apabila terdapat faktor luaran yang mendorong mereka.
Analisis yang seterusnya adalah untuk menjawab persoalan kajian yang kedua
di mana perhubungan antara sikap pensyarah dengan kemahiran pensyarah dalam
penggunaan e-Learning. Oleh kerana perhubungan yang perlu diuji, maka pengkaji
telah memilih Model Korelasi Pearson untuk mendapatkan dapatan daripada analisis
tersebut. Pengkaji memilih Model Korelasi Pearson kerana ujian ini dapat digunakan
untuk menganalisis perhubungan antara dua pemboleh ubah dan kedua-dua
pembolehubah menggunakan skala pengukuran interval atau sela.
Jadual 7 : Korelasi di antara sikap dengan kemahiran pensyarah dalam penggunaan eLearning
Sikap
Kemahiran
Signifikan
.574
0.006
716
Dengan menggunakan perisian SPSS 18.0 for Windows, pekali korelasi antara
dua pembolehubah iaitu sikap dan kemahiran dapat dikira melalui Model Korelasi
Pearson.
mendapatkan maklum balas dari responden berkenaan dengan prasarana yang terdapat
di politeknik yang dikaji. Peratusan responden yang memberi respons ya atau tidak
717
dikira bagi setiap item. Lampiran C menunjukkan peratusan bagi setiap item yang
dikaji.
Daripada Lampiran C, kemudahan prasarana yang disediakan di politeknik
dapat dilihat dan ditafsirkan. Majoriti responden iaitu 85.71% menyatakan tidak
terdapat komputer dalam bilik kuliah tertentuyang perlu menggunakannya. Walau
bagaimanapun, 85.71% responden menyatakan bahawa terdapat kemudahan komputer
dan perkakasan untuk membangunkan Platform CIDOS. Namun begitu, sebanyak
76.19% responden menyatakan tiada rangkaian internet dalam bilik kuliah yang perlu
digunakannya
Untuk tujuan pengajaran berlandaskan e-Learning, item-item C1, C3, C4, dan
C8 diperlukan iaitu prasarana, rangkaian internet, komputer dan makmal komputer
untuk kegunaan pelajar. Secara keseluruhannya untuk item-item yang dinyatakan ini
menunjukkan prasarana yang disediakan berada di tahap yang rendah.
718
peralatan dan kategori kewangan dan kursus. Skor min digunakan bagi mendapatkan
min purata bagi setiap item-item yang terlibat.
Walaupun kemahiran yang sedia ada pada pensyarah sudah memadai namun
perkembangan teknologi masa kini memerlukan mereka terus meneroka teknologi
terkini yang semakin pesat berkembang.
pendidikan, mereka telah didedahkan dengan kemahiran-kemahiran penggunaan eLearning manakala lepasan ijazah sarjana muda dan diploma tidak didedahkan dengan
kemahiran penggunaan e-Learning. Oleh itu, ini mempengaruhi keupayaan mereka
menggunakan e-Learning dalam P&P.
diberikan kepada mereka bagi membolehkan mereka turut serta dalam menggunakan
e-Learning dalam prose P&P.
8.0
Di mana dengan
mengamalkan kaedah pengajaran yang pelbagai akan menarik minat pelajar untuk
belajar. Sehubungan itu, pensyarah perlu menggunakan e-Learning dalam proses
P&P. Justeru itu, kemahiran untuk membangunkan, menyediakan dan menggunakan
e-Learning perlu diberikan kepada pensyarah-pensyarah di politeknik.
719
Rumusan yang boleh dibuat daripada kajian ini ialah tahap pengetahuan
komputer pensyarah tidak mempunyai hubungan dari segi jantina, pengalaman
komputer dan penggunaan komputer. Sebaliknya mereka yang memiliki komputer
mempunyai tahap pengetahuan komputer yang lebih tinggi.
teknologi maklumat berasaskan komputer ini sukar untuk berganjak dengan lebih jauh
lagi.
RUJUKAN
Jamaludin Badusah & Muhamad Hussin. 2000. Bilik Darjah Internet- Penggunaan
Pelbagai Bahan Media (MOO). Seminar Kebangsaan Penyelidikan dan
Pembangunan Dalam Pendidikan 2000: Penyelidikan ke arah Inovasi
Pedagogi. 3-4 Oktober 2000. Bahagian Pendidikan Guru, Kementerian
Pendidikan Malaysia.
Linde C. V. D., (2002) The role of good educational management in a changing south
africa, ProQuest Education Journals pg 511
Mohd Sahandri Gani Hamzah, Hapidah Mohamed & Nik Sukar Shahrany Nik Yusof.
(2001). Kecenderungan guru dalam pemilihan bahan pembelajaran dan
ekspektasi mereka terhadap hasil pembelajaran. Prosiding Konvensyen
Kepelbagaian
Dalam
Teknologi
721
Instruksional.
Persatuan
Teknologi
LAMPIRAN A
Reliability Statistics
Cronbach's Alpha
.838
N of Items
17
LAMPIRAN B
BIL
1
ITEM
Saya berminat untuk menggunakan e-Learning dalam proses
MEAN
SD
4.4286
.67612
4.1905
.67964
4.2857
.56061
4.5714
.50709
4.4286
.50709
4.1429
.65465
3.9524
.86465
3.8095
1.0779
4.1905
2
.81358
3.8095
.81358
4.1905
.67964
4.0000
.77460
4.6190
.49761
14
4.5238
.74960
15
Learning
Saya malas untuk menyediakan bahan e-Learning
2.7143
1.0556
9
10
11
12
13
16
17
Saya berminat mendapatkan latihan dalam menggunakan eLearning dalam proses P&P
Saya sentiasa mengikuti perkembangan terkini berkaitan eLearning
Saya ingin menggunakan e-Learning apabila melihat rakan
sejawat menggunakannya dalam proses P&P
Saya lebih bermotivasi menggunakan e-Learning apabila
melihat pelajar memberi tumpuan dalam proses P&P
Saya akan menggunakan e-Learning dalam proses P&P apabila
3.3810
0
1.2031
7
3.9048
.88909
Reliability Statistics
Cronbach's Alpha
.929
N of Items
21
BIL
ITEM
1
Saya boleh Log In e-Learning
MEAN
4.4286
SD
.59761
4.0952
.83095
4.0476
.86465
4.1905
.98077
4.2857
.90238
3.9524
.92066
3.3810
.97346
4.0952
.83095
4.0952
.88909
10
4.0476
.86465
11
4.4762
.51177
12
4.2857
.71714
13
4.0476
.92066
2.4762
.81358
15
2.7619
1.09109
16
3.9048
.83095
17
4.1905
.60159
4.0476
.66904
14
18
19
4.0000
.83666
20
3.8571
.91026
21
3.8571
.91026
LAMPIRAN C
723
Bil Item
YA (%)
TIDAK (%)
76.19
23.81
85.71
14.29
23.81
76.19
14.29
85.71
66.67
33.33
95.24
4.76
47.62
52.38
38.10
61.90
95.24
4.76
95.24
4.76
10
11
95.24
4.76
12
95.24
4.76
95.24
4.76
13
LAMPIRAN D
724
Reliability Statistics
Cronbach's
N of
Alpha
Items
.798
BIL
1
10
ITEM
Setiap bilik kuliah mempunyai sambungan rangkaian
internet
MEAN
SD
1.4762
.67964
3.0952
.62488
2.7143
1.14642
3.8095
1.24976
4.2857
.78376
2.6190
1.24403
3.8571
.79282
3.9524
.80475
4.2857
.90238
4.1905
.98077
10
725
ABSTRACT
In the recent years, the study on creative effort has suggested the influence of
leadership as one of the most important factors in encouraging creativity and
innovation among followers. Among many leadership styles, transformational
leadership has been highly subscribed as the most effective style to lead
creative effort. This paper intends to argue the tendency of romanticizing
transformational leadership as the only way to motivate creativity and
innovation by probing the conditions that determines the need for
transformational leadership and its flaws. Consequently, by investigating the
meaning of Japanese organizations practices at the epistemological level, this
paper also looks at how, instead of having transformational leaders, Japanese
organizations use self-heterogenization approach to lead their creative effort
effectively.
Key words: transformational leadership, creative effort, Japanese, selfheterogenization, leadership styles
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The shift to knowledge economy has allowed easier access to global market,
resulting in more demanding customers, shorter product lifecycle and increasing
complexity of technology (Dutta & Mia, 2010). To stay competitive, creativity and
innovation has become central to organizations. The focus has now been on stocks of
knowledge; human, organizational and intellectual, and also on activities; R&D
726
One important issue in leadership studies, however, concerns about the crossnational variation. Most research evidence on leadership for creativity and innovation
in the extant literature are based on western studies, predominantly American
(Elenkov, Judge, & Wright, 2005). However, there are also evidence that indicate
leadership behaviour is affected by culture (Holmberg & kerblom, 2006). Yet, there
are cultures like Japan who has proven its technological prowess, under researched on
the role of leadership in nurturing creativity and innovation (Ishikawa, 2012).
2.0
Creative work comprises of complex tasks because the problems are illdefined, ambiguous, and in the current demanding environment has the need to fulfill
various constraints such as lead time and financial resources. Massive interaction
among individuals involved in creative work is crucial, including intra-team, interteam and team members with leaders and among leaders of creative work.
Additionally, interaction with the top management is also imperative to secure
resources and ensure the sustainability of the project.
727
2.2
Creative People
Novel ideas are resourced by creative people; making them the most valuable
asset in creative effort. Psychological studies on creative people however suggested
that they have unique, contrasting characteristics; they are smart yet nave, playful yet
disciplined, energetic yet often resting and divergent yet convergent in thinking
(Csikszentmihalyi & West, 2006). Because they believe in their knowledge and ideas,
they love challenges, possess high self-confidence, hold high professional ego and
portray dominance and autonomy in what they do (M. Mumford & Hunter, 2005)
2.3
Creative Climate
728
Therefore, leaders of creative effort should not only be technically skillful, but
they also need to be socially intelligent and possess business acumen. In other words,
the leaders interaction with team members, top management and other related
stakeholders are critical in leading creative effort.
3. 0
CREATIVE EFFORT?
So what is the best leadership style to lead creative effort? Scholars have made
attempts to associate various leadership styles with fostering creativity and
innovation. Transformational leadership, thus far, has gained the most attention
compared to other leadership styles (Gumusluoglu & Ilsev, 2009).
However, this is not always the case. There are evidences that show
transformational leadership does not fit in certain occasions. For example, Rosing,
Frese & Bausch (2011) have argued that transformational leadership is more effective
at organizational level than individual level. As creative effort involves high
interaction between leaders and team members, transformational leadership may less
likely to be effective on individual level.
Bass (1997) mentioned that leaders are more likely to exhibit transformational
leadership behaviour when they are in an organic organization such as private
institutions compared to a mechanistic organization such as public university. A
private company that is willing to maximise risk in order to achieve high level of
creative output, for instance, would need transformational leaders to search for new
configuration while a public university that is subject to hierarchies and formalities
would less likely to encourage transformational leadership behaviours among the
leaders.
4.0
MANAGEMENT
Mendenhall, 2009). Again, after the 1980s when the Japanese lost its economic power
to the US and raising nations like China, its Japanese management practices are again
blamed for being rigid and not innovative. Throughout, the stereotyping of Japanese
management as rigid and inefficient remains till now.
There are at least two aspects to the difficulty of overcoming such the
stereotyping. The first is the cultural biasness in leadership research. Leadership
theories are mainly originated from western-oriented studies, predominantly
American (Jogulu & Ferkins, 2012). Similarly are the research on leadership for
creative effort (Elenkov et al., 2005). Having been developed based on individualistic
perspective, leadership theories have always been focusing on the leader as a hero
by which the leaders traits, behaviour and context were put in sight. Only after 70
years of research since it started in the 1900s has the research landed on the premise
that relational construct is also a determinant of effective leadership (i.e LeaderMember Exchange Theory, LMX) (see Antonakis, 2003, pp. 7). The same concept
was evidently applied in leadership for creative effort researches; it started with
conceptualizing creativity as a lone effort until the influence of others (i.e team,
leaders) was conceived later (Vessey, Barrett, Mumford, Johnson, & Litwiller, 2014).
Individualistic culture was the axiom for leadership research back then. While recent
studies have indicated culture as a predictor of leadership behaviour (Holmberg &
kerblom, 2006) and that it is crucial to be sensitive to cultural bias (House, Javidan,
Hanges, & Dorfman, 2002; Jogulu & Ferkins, 2012), the epistemology of leadership
which originated from North American (NA) perspective is still dominant and any
deviation from it is subject to criticism.
5.0
DIFFERENCE IN INTERPRETATION
members can use one another for mutual benefit in positive-sum relations (Maruyama,
1984). Figure 3 compiles some of the common practices in Japanese organizations
with difference in interpretation between NA theorists and Japanese theorists.
The concepts discussed above are only some of the many concepts and
practices in Japanese organizations. The outcome of these implicit trainings is selfheterogenization; the ability to see and understand the same situation from different
points of view (Maruyama, 1984). Because they feel mentally connected to others in
the group, they can work with others without rigid division of labour and with flexible
unwritten adaptability to changing situation. Consequently, this instills the willingness
to take responsibility for the success of failure of the entire group (Hamaguchi, 1977).
While NA theorists may discard the differences in views because their norm is
seeking an objective truth, Japanese self-heterogenization allows a person to
appreciate the differences of contrasting views as it enables him to see a dimension
invisible to both views (Maruyama, 1984). It provides rich information in
understanding a particular matter of consideration and sense of convertibility and
adaptability whenever the situation needs it. Through self-heterogenization, Japanese
workers will almost automatically respond to changing situation without having to be
given detailed instruction by the manager (Iwata, 1972).
733
Common practices in
Japanese Theorists
Japanese Organizations
Interpretation
Interpretation
Job rotation
parts
Senior-junior (Sempai-
kohai)
inability to change
Conformity; flexibility
Pre-meeting discussion
(uchiawase)
Report-touch base-discuss
(Hou-ren-sou)
Consensus-seeking
Unanimous decision,
process is on how to
compensate the
inconvenience of those,
who might be a minority or
even a single individual
Groupism
the group
6.0
retaining core capabilities internally and inherit its value proposition through mid and
long term period. This means that a long, harmonious relationship has to be
maintained in Japanese organization to ensure creative endeavours produce desired
results.
735
7.0
CONCLUSION
There are various leadership styles that are associated with creativity and
innovation. However, the leadership studies are seen to be oversubscribing
transformational leadership as the only way to motivate creativity and innovation.
Cultural idiosyncrasies should be taken into consideration when identifying the
leadership behaviour that is most effective for an organization. Contrarily, an
organization should identify which leadership behaviour that is most effective in
nurturing creativity and innovation based on the culture it is practicing.
It is possible that there are many other concepts in Japanese management that
are being misunderstood. Furthermore, compelling evidence has yet to be presented to
show that the American model leadership would fit Japanese organizations which are
highly influenced by culture. Given the changes taking place in Japans economy and
organizations, the interpretation of leadership behaviours in Japanese organizations
should be scrutinized at the epistemological level and re-analyzed in Japanese context
to avoid throwing the baby out with the bathwater.
736
REFERENCES
Elenkov, D. S., Judge, W., & Wright, P. (2005). Strategic leadership and executive
innovation influence: an international multi-cluster comparative study. Strategic
Management Journal, 26(7), 665682. doi:10.1002/smj.469
Fujii,S. (2008). The Japanese innovation that brings predominance: About a frame in
the comparison of a Japanese model and the American model. International
Association of P2M, 249-258.
737
House, R., Javidan, M., Hanges, P., & Dorfman, P. (2002). Understanding cultures
and implicit leadership theories across the globe: an introduction to project
GLOBE. Journal of World Business, 37(1), 310. doi:10.1016/S10909516(01)00069-4
Inazo, N. (2007). Bushido, the Soul of Japan (19th ed.). Tokyo, Japan: Kodansha
International.
Mumford, M. D., Hunter, S. T., Eubanks, D. L., Bedell, K. E., & Murphy, S. T.
(2007). Developing leaders for creative efforts: A domain-based approach to
leadership development. Human Resource Management Review, 17(4), 402417.
doi:10.1016/j.hrmr.2007.08.002
Mumford, M., & Hunter, S. (2005). The creativity paradox: sources, resolutions, and
directions. Research in Multi Level Issues, 4(05), 105114.
Nonaka, I., & Konno, N. (1998). The concept of ba: Building a foundation for
knowledge creation. California Management Review, 40(3), 4054.
738
Powell, W. W., & Snellman, K. (2004). The Knowledge Economy. Annual Review of
Sociology, 30(1), 199220. doi:10.1146/annurev.soc.29.010202.100037
Pudelko, M., & Mendenhall, M. E. (2009). The contingent nature of best practices in
national competitiveness: The case of American and Japanese innovation
processes. European Management Journal. doi:10.1016/j.emj.2008.10.002
Rosing, K., Frese, M., & Bausch, A. (2011). Explaining the heterogeneity of the
leadership-innovation relationship: Ambidextrous leadership. The Leadership
Quarterly, 22(5), 956974. doi:10.1016/j.leaqua.2011.07.014
Vessey, W. B., Barrett, J. D., Mumford, M. D., Johnson, G., & Litwiller, B. (2014).
Leadership of highly creative people in highly creative fields: A historiometric
study of scientific leaders. Leadership Quarterly, 25(4), 672691.
doi:10.1016/j.leaqua.2014.03.001
Yammarino, F., Bass, B., & Tosi, H. (2005). Something old , something new: The
mission of the leadership quarterly. The Leadership Quarterly, 16, 915.
doi:10.1016/j.leaqua.2004.10.002
Zheng, W., Khoury, A. E., & Grobmeier, C. (2010). How do leadership and context
matter in R&D team innovation? A multiple case study. Human Resource
Development International, 13(3), 265283. doi:10.1080/13678868.2010.483816
739
ABSTRACT
740
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Increased
competition and limited resources require a partnership between large industrial users
and the local utility to address the issue of power disturbances. Power quality
problems can be defined as problem that results in failure of customer equipments,
which manifests itself as an economic burden to users, or produces negative impacts
on the environment. There has been a proliferation of non linear loads in electrical
installations due to the great development of electronic equipment. As widely known,
everyone using computer whether at home or office has experienced a computer
shutdown and reboot, due to power outage which result in loss of working hours. This
is caused by the poor power quality on the 240v line. Quality of electricity is very
essential for modern industry. Almost all offices and industrial equipment depend on
electricity in some form or the other. Heavy industrial equipments like non-linear
variable speed drives powered through power electronic converters may cause power
disturbances. Due to this, power quality is becoming a mounting concern in the
electric power industry.
2.0
PROBLEMS STATEMENTS
3.0
This proposed paper aims to simulate the power quality phenomena using an
analytical tool, Power System Computer Aided Design (PSCAD) conducted at one of
the substation at Mukah Polytechnics and the impacts they may present to power
quality. It mainly focuses on the distribution system of Department of Mathematics,
Science & Computer. This department is chosen as there were some power quality
disturbance was reported for the past few years. It also attempts to study the power
quality problem such as voltage sag on a power line that may be caused by typical
loads using computer models paving the way to identify the source of the problem.
Reliability of supply and voltage quality is to be studied by using method of
monitoring the result of power waveform. The results of this study will contribute
knowledge for researchers to design a more efficient power to reduce power waste
either as a result of reactive or capacitive losses, harmonic distortion and other losses
such as load imbalance. Other than that, it also contributes to overcome problems
such as voltage dip and malfunction of electrical equipment due to the poor power
quality.
4. 0
LITERATURE REVIEW
Harmonic distortion is one of the main factors that contributes to poor power
quality and was observed when the sinusoidal voltages or currents have frequencies
that are integer multiples of the fundamental frequency being supplied. This distortion
is continuous and the most common result is unwanted heating in the electrical
system. It is interesting to note that some of the equipment that is sensitive to power
quality disturbances usually is equipment that generates harmonics. Equipment such
as adjustable speed drives, computer power supplies, UPS equipment and other power
electronics create harmonic currents. Harmonic currents generate harmonic voltages
as they pass through the system impedance. In addition to power electronics, arcing
equipment such as arc furnaces and welders are also major contributors in the
harmonic arena (John F. Hibbard,1992).
effective Power Quality Monitoring may also prevent future problems that might
cause damage of equipments or premature aging of the installation components like
transformers, circuit breakers even the electrical wiring can be affected. Power
Quality Monitor prototype was developed at Energy and Power Electronics laboratory
of the University of Minho. This prototype is assembled in a strong plastic case with
easy to connect plugs for power and sensors and a built-in 14 inch TFT monitor. To
allow the Electric Power Quality Monitor to record the consequences of the failure
and also the consequences of the return of the electric power, the prototype was
equipped with a backup battery, so, it continues working in the occurrence of power
outages. The software of the Electric Power Quality Monitor is constituted by several
applications and based in Lab View. The developed applications allow the equipment
to function like a digital oscilloscope, analyze harmonic contents, detect and record
voltage distortions (sags, swells, interruptions, wave shapes), measure energy, power,
voltage and current unbalance, power factor, record and watch strip charts and
generate reports (Renato Alves, Pedro Neves, D. Gonalves, J. G. Pinto, Jos Batista,
Joo L. Afonso,2010).
There is no single algorithm that can detect the variety of power quality
anomalies. Instead, a set of algorithms is need, where each one is responsible for
detection of a set of disturbances. The IT group expertise in analog to digital
converters (ADCs) testing/characterization and in digital signal processing algorithms
will be used in the development of power quality analyzers. The use of ADCs and
digital signal processing algorithms will enable the development and implementation
of instruments with great versatility which can be easily adapted to the anomalies that
degrade power quality (A. Lakshmikanth & M. M. Morcos, 2001).
5.0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
This research proposes a study on the power quality phenomena (voltage dip)
in small industries. It will be carried out in several stages: as below:
Stage 1:
Surveys and interviews with lecturer in the deparment of Mathematics, Science and
Computer, record data and information that provided from them.
Stage 2:
Modeling part of the distribution system at department Mathematics, Science and
Computer. The load data collected from survey will be used to carry out simulation
using PSCAD or any other appropriate simulation tools. It will be simulated by using
suitable parameters on the non-linear loads.
Stage 3:
The simulation results will be used to design or recommend a solution to improve and
overcome the issue of power quality in department of Mathematics, Science &
Computer.
6.0
According to the previous research, there are two main causes of voltage sag;
starting of large loads either on the affected site or by a consumer on the same circuit
or faults on other branches of the network. Voltage sag can be created within an
industrial complex without any influence from the utility system. These sag typically
caused by starting large motors or by electrical faults inside the facility. Part of the
distribution system
years. High starting current of the motor (motor chiller) often lead to unwelcome
voltage drops to an unacceptable value in the supply network and the high starting
torque put the mechanical elements under considerable strain. Flickering of the light
almost happens every time in the department of Mathematics, Science and Computer
when there is starting of the chiller motor in the chiller pump room. The data was
recorded. Every power and source has their own impedance. When there is heavy
loads at starting, voltage sag was happens on the feeders due to the large impedance.
The currents for the large induction motor sometimes can be several times higher than
the rated load currents due to the heavy loads. This higher currents can be represents a
very high load across the electrical system. The presence of the voltage sags has the
effect causing motor to draw more currents and results in trip of the electrical
network. Fig. 1 illustrates a simple model 33KV electrical supply from SESCO
through two 33/11KV step down transformer to the substation No. 5 and substation
No.6. Substation No. 5 was connected to Department of Mathematics, Science &
Computer, admin centre and chiller pump room.
Figure. 2: Illustrate single line diagram of the distribution system from SESCO
(power supply) to the substation 5 and 6.
746
Figure 5 shows that the survey data collected result from the department of
Mathematics, Science & Computer. The data is recorded by a lecturer from the
department. Table I shows the computed values from the survey result to be used to
present the load components and Table 2 shows that the data of the transformer.
Graph I summarize that since year 2012, its almost experience voltage sag conditions
in every month which those causing electrical equipments to trip suddenly and
consequently stop the electrical supply from substation 5.
747
Power
Base Angular
phase
Drawn
Frequency
Voltage/kV
(A)
(rad/sec)
0.25
1450
314.16
221
IM 2- ( JMSK Department )
0.25
350
314.16
110
IM 3 - (Admin Center )
0.25
150
314.16
50
Load Components
(Induction Motor )
Horse
Power
0.75MVA,11kV/0.415KV,60Hz
Efficiency
98.55%
Voltage Regulation
1.38
Width (m)
2100
Depth (m)
1850
Height (m)
2100
748
Figure 6 shows a normal single phase voltage which is around 339V peak to
peak voltage. Graph I show that the record of electrical trip (voltage sag) in a year due
to the large motor starting. It shows that last from half of a cycle to several seconds.
Induction motors draw starting currents ranging between 600 and 800% of their
nominal full load currents. The current starts at the high value and tapers off to the
normal running current in about 2 to 8 sec depending on the instant at which the
voltage is applied to the motor, the current can be highly asymmetrical.
7.0
Phase A:
749
Phase B:
Phase C:
Phase A
0.851
Phase B
0.672
Phase C
0.746
750
As seen in Figure. 8, there is no current drawn from 0 sec to 0.2sec from the
induction motor. At the moment of starting large induction motor, its exhibits an
instant hunger of current which is approximately seven times then it rated current.
The large inrush current can cause voltage sag in the local and adjacent area even if
the utility line voltage remains at a constant nominal value.
Figure 8: Effect of current during starting of large induction motor at chiller pump
room.
8.0
CONCLUSION
When a sub-station circuit breaker or a recloser is tripped, then the line that it
is feeding will be temporarily disconnected. All other feeder lines from the same
substation system will see this disconnection event as voltage sag which will spread to
consumers on these other lines. Voltage sags are becoming an increasing concern of
industrial plants due to increasing automation. Voltage sags and swells are generated
when loads are transferred from one power source to another. Automated facilities are
more difficult to restart, and the electronic controllers used are sometimes more
sensitive to voltage sags than other loads. The sensitivity of industrial equipment to
voltage sags varies greatly. The more sensitive equipment widens a plants area of
vulnerability to disruptive voltage sags. Simulation of voltage sag by using computer
aided tools PSCAD in the power distribution system has been carry out as part of this
research. Voltage sag in this research is concentrate on one of the distribution system
in Mukah Polytechnic. The purpose is to find out the low power quality due to the
voltage sag. The results obtained were realistic if compare with the previous research.
The loading effect on the starting was causing the high starting current and leading to
the voltage sag. Decreasing of the voltage magnitude on 0.2s shows that the poor
power quality in the power system. Normally the sag will remain until the motor have
reached their nominal speed. The results of the simulation will assist in the future
study and development in the power system network in Mukah Polytechnic. Therefore
751
more works should be carrying out in this area so that to improve the power quality
problems.
REFERENCES
K. Johnson & R. Zavadil, Assessing the Impacts of Nonlinear Loads on Power
Quality in Commercial BuildingsAn Overview, Conference Record of the
1991 IEEE Industry Applications Society Annual Meeting, September 28
October 4, 1991, pp. 18631869.
Renato Alves, Pedro Neves, D. Gonalves, J. G. Pinto, Jos Batista, Joo L. Afonso
Electric Power Quality Monitoring Results in Different Facilities,2010
Peng Li, Qian Bai, Baoli Zhao &Yihan Yang, (2005) Power Quality Control Center
and Its Control Method IEEE/PES Transmission and Distribution Conference
& Exhibition: Asia and Pacific Dalian, China.
752
ABSTRACT
1.0
INTRODUCTION
of Bank Muamalat Malaysia Berhad (BMMB). Both Islamic banking institutions are
fully operational embedding the sharia compliance. However, the second
establishment of BMMB was through a merger between the two banks, namely Bank
of Commerce (M) Berhad; and Bank Bumiputra Malaysia Berhad (Nor Mohamed,
1996; Ab. Mumin, 1999; Sudin, 2008).
1.1
Problem Statement
Datuk Seri Najib Tun Abdul Razak, the Prime Minister of Malaysia, also gives
a serious attention pertaining to the staffs understanding in Islamic banking
operations. This is expressed by him in his keynote address opening at the
"Transformation of Islam Management System in Malaysia Carnival" held at Putra
World Trade Centre, Kuala Lumpur. The emphasis expressed by him are as follow: ... in Banking and financial context, our country has become a
point of reference in terms of knowledge and the implementation of
Islamic banking and finance. We need to provide a skilled workforce
in greater numbers, exporting our experts internationally and lead the
field. For that, we need to strengthen the aspects of the production of
754
The above excerpt clearly shows that the implementation of Islamic banking
in Malaysia is given a serious attention by the government. He suggested that the
Islamic banking sector in Malaysia can provide skilled personnel and supply firstclass service as well. This is to ensure that an accurate understanding can be
highlighted by the Islamic banking staff in meeting the government's intention to
make Malaysia as a reference point for the Islamic banking industry at the
international level.
values are prioritized to ensure that the product does not contain any form of riba
alone. In fact, the Islamic financial system must be based on the strength of faith,
coupled with hard work and overlaid with pure values and ethics. This is because the
implementation of the Islamic financial system in Malaysia is an important strategic
issue and is the essence of the position of Islam as the official religion of this country
(Nor Mohamed, 1996). Therefore, based on the stated problem, the question arises
as to explore the aspect of understanding among Islamic banking staff in the
implementation of the tasks entrusted.
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
According to the fourth edition of Kamus Dewan (2005) published by
Learning and Teching" states that understanding is dependent or have been associated
756
Abdul Rahman Abdullah (2002) states that in general there are four major
trends in Islamic thought. Among them, 1) of flow derived from revelation alone; 2)
Flow derived from revelation and reason; 3) Flow sourced intellect and revelation;
and 4) flow derived from reason alone. According to him, the first generation of
Muslims based solely on the Quran and the Sunnah of Prophet Muhammad, even
when it has grown Greek civilization with the great philosophical heritage. However,
Muslims were only guided to Allah and His Messenger only, not to the Greek mind,
or the mind of the Arabs. While Mahmud Abu Raiyah (2011) describes the defining
expression "understood" by the term literally means reflect a good thing and a
willingness to draw conclusions from it. Understand also means knowing and knew
by heart. The "think" we mean the use of research to make sense of things.
Muhammad 'Abd Al-Khatib (t.t) in his book titled "Clarification Around Sheet
Ta'alim" states that the rule of understanding. According to him, a complete
understanding of the religion of Islam is becoming an obligation for every Muslim to
comprehend. This is because, among the factors of disunity among Muslims is
757
because of lack understanding of the aqidah aspects. Thus he is very concerned and
insisted on a true understanding. According to him, the actual practice is to
understand the concepts, principles, practices and implementation as well as serving
as the first rule in keeping Islam from deviant ideology. While Imam Hasan Al-Banna
(tt) an Islamic philosopher states that an authentic understanding will contibute to a
good implementation practices and protects the perpetrator from slipping. A person
who acts without understanding the authenticity is prone to displacing something can
sometimes gets lost.
758
3.0
RESEARCH METHOD
The methods of data analysis were staggered in themes. The themes were
determined based on the problems raised by the respondents during the interview
session. Thematic analysis obtained will allow more parallel screened and accurate
results. Then each of the themes will be refined with detailed analysis in order to get
the real findings of the research.
In order to produce the accuracy of the analysis, the triangulation method was
implemented in this research. Interviews triangulation were implemented through four
stages of screening namely triangulation on the practitioner or Islamic banking
industry specialist, triangulation of academics, triangulation of representative of
consumerism, and triangulation based on studies of previous scholars. Once the
triangulation process was completed, the results were generated with a more
significant approach based on the understanding benchmark that has been constructed.
Understanding Benchmark was derived from the triangulation screening that led to
the discovery of the two parameter of understanding.
understanding, and second unsatisfactory understanding.
759
First, satisfactory
4.0
FINDINGS
Based on the studies conducted, the findings have generated eight themes that
were successfully analyzed as shown in Table 1 below. However, the study found that
all the eight themes have resulted in a finding of unsatisfactory understanding. This
finding is also supported and validated through triangulation screening performed.
Based on the triangulation screening, all eight themes analyzed did not meet the
benchmark satisfactory understanding. Satisfactory understanding can only be
achieved if all the themes analyzed meet benchmark standards as in Table 2 below.
Themes of analysis
1. Understanding of routine tasks.
2. Understanding of the targeted job.
3. Understanding the challenges of the task.
4. Understanding the motives of customers applying for
financing.
5. Understanding the needed in handling tasks.
6. Understanding the organization and industrial environment.
7. Understanding the technical application of offices equipments
8. Understanding the application of "Standard Operating
Procedure (SOP)"
760
Themes
1.
2.
3.
4.
satisfactorily if:
Trying to explain clearly the pros and cons of managing the financial
resources of the amount requested, in addition to trying to understand the
real motive of the customer to obtain financing. (as a social responsibility
in educating clients towards financial management)
5.
6.
meet the needs of the organization but also to understand the society and
environment of competitors (other banks also offer similar products).
Understand the risk factors faced in managing the environment. for
example:
Within the organization - responsibility for compliance with the
requirements of the standard procedure (SOP).
Outside the organization - the responsibility for the safety of themselves &
the good name of the organization (ethics & personal attitudes).
Recognizing that the respondent was acting as a "preacher" or
"ambassador" to Islamic banking products.
7.
8.
Based on the findings that have been obtained, this study suggests that the
adoption of a model that purports to ecosystem of staff understanding in Islamic
banking management is highlighted. Ecosystem model was constructed to solve the
problem of employees understanding in the implementation of its tasks. The
proposed model is a combination of elements of "7Ps" as shown in Figure 1 below.
762
5.0
RECOMMENDATIONS
Thus, the "P1" represents the first element in the chain of this ecosystem,
which means PENCIPTAAN or "creation". Based on these findings, the
organization of Islamic banking is recommended to hold the creation of innovation in
the management and provision of training to its employees. This study found that the
operation of the system and the training given to the staff are still resembles with the
conventional banking organization. More focused training methods, Islamic identity
and a more interactive means of communication should be addressed to be able to
enhance their understanding of each employee in the performance of duties. In
addition, the creation of innovation in the training system should also be supported by
a clear working guidelines and are constantly updated to follow the passage of the
market and the industry.
The "P2" is an element associated with the PEMBENTUKAN or
"establishment". The study found that, Islamic banking organization should be intact
in its implementation by establishing a code of ethics established for Muslim staff and
be able to put into practice. The study found that in general there is code of ethics of
the organization of Islamic banking, but its implementation is not enforced across the
board. Even the code of ethics of which feature the work of Muslim employees is
rarely highlighted.
Next, the "P3". This is a chain of elements associated with the aspect of
PENAMBAHBAIKAN or "improvement". The study found that, to stimulate the
understanding of staff in the performance of the duties performed, improvements
should be made in the management system of rewards and benefits to employees.
Staff in Islamic banking should reap the rewards of a "win-win situation" in every
task undertaken. This is because, the study found that most respondents stated
763
grievances against the system of rewards and benefits in view of bias going on in the
organization at this time. This perception can lead to a negative impact on the
reputation and performance of the organization as a whole.
In addition, the element of PENERAPAN or "application" is also
noteworthy.
compliance with work assignments alone. Instead, adherence to the Allah SWT is also
to be applied among the staff on duty.
765
6.0
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Ab. Mumin (1999). Sistem Kewangan Islam dan Perlaksanaannya. Kuala Lumpur:
Jabatan Kemajuan Islam Malaysia (JAKIM).
Abdul Rahman Hj. Abdullah (2002). Tradisi Falsafah Ilmu, Penghantar Sejarah dan
Falsafah Sains. Selangor: Pustaka Ilmi.
Bugelski, B. R. (1974). The Image as Mediator in One-Trial Paired-Associate
Learning: III Sequential Functions in Serial Lists. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 103, 298-303.
Danial Zainal Abidin (2010). Minda Muslim Super. Kuala Lumpur: PTS Millenia
Sdn. Bhd.
KPMG
Journal of
Kamus Dewan Edisi Empat (2005). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.
766
Mahmud Abu Raiyah (2011). Rukun Faham 20 Asas Memelihara Kefahaman Islam.
Ikatan Muslimin Malaysia: Percetakan Salam Sdn. Bhd.
Muhammad Abdullah Al-Khatib (t.t).
Terjemahan oleh Mohd. Nizam bin Mohd Ali (2008). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan
Pustaka Fajar.
Nor Mohamed Yakcop (1996). Teori, Amalan dan Prospek Sistem Kewangan Islam
di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publications & Distributors Sdn. Bhd.
Sidek Baba (2011). Cetusan: Kita Ini Dalam Pencarian. Kuala Lumpur:
Telaga
Kuala Lumpur:
Zeti Aziz (2009). Kewangan Islam dan Kestabilan Kewangan Global. Ucaptama,
Seminar Kewangan Islam: Semasa dan Selepas Krisis Kewangan Global di
Istanbul. (diakses melalui http: //www. bnm. gov. my).
767
ABSTRACT
Key
words:
Novel
Green
additive,
768
Natural
Rubber
Latex,
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Natural Rubber (NR) Latex is a milky sap obtained from the incised bark of
havea brasiliensis tree. It's also known as polymer colloidal dispersion of this-1,4polyisoprene and other organic and non-organic materials such as lipids, protein,
mineral
salt,
and
etc.
in
water
[Biliaderis,et
al,
(2009),
Linos,
and
Even though several advantages have been outlined for NR latex, the
problems occurred due to the longer lifecycle of rubber products upon solid waste
769
after disposal. The increasing of several epidemic pathogens recently such as AIDS,
influenza A H1N1 and bird influenza, create people awareness on the importance of
barrier protection, especially during handling food or dealing with highly contagious
patient [Daschner and Dettenkofer, (1997), UNCTAD, (2011)]. This contributes to an
increased of NR latex and synthetic gloves production worldwide due to increasing
demands of protective products especially gloves.
All the latex products in the worldwide is not biodegradable products even
though some of the manufacturers claim that their products can biodegradable. Most
of the claims solely based on the based polymer used which is natural rubber latex
from renewable materials. Our previous works have shown that the complexity of the
sulphur crosslinks in the latex products hindered the ability of natural rubber latex
films to biodegradable (Azura et al, 2012). Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add is made
from carbohydrate polymer which can naturally biodegradable. The main ingredients
consist of glucosidic linkages and able to be hydrolyzed by means of enzymatic
reaction by microorganism. Due to the hydroxyl group which present in the
polymeric chain makes it compatible with NR latex system. Thus, the aim of this
research is to promote the use of Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add as a novel
additives to support the biodegradation process of rubber gloves is highlighted. From
previous lab scale works [Afiq and Azura, (2011),(2012), Azura et al (2012)], it is
proven that this novel additive is compatible with Natural Rubber Latex
compounding process. Addition of Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add has increased
the physical properties of final dipped products as well as the viscosity of NR Latex
compound [Afiq and Azura, (2013), (2014)].
without sacrificing their existing mechanical properties which are the plus point for
their products.
2.0
3. 0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
3.1
High ammonia (HA) latex with 60% of dry rubber content (DRC) was
purchased from Zarm Scientific and Supplies (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. Potassium
hydroxide (KOH), anchoid, antioxidant, zinc oxide, potassium oleate, zinc
diethyldithiocarbamate (ZDEC), and sulphur were supplied by Bayer (Malaysia) Sdn.
Bhd. The dispersion of Bio-add, was prepared using in house laboratory method.
The unfilled NRL films and the NRL films with different types of fillers were
prepared according to formulation in Table 1. The mixtures were constantly stirred
for two hours with stirring speed of 270 rpm. The latex compounds transferred into
pre-heated water bath with the temperature of 70oC and stirred at 270rpm for another
30 minutes. The chloroform number test was carried out until chloroform number 3
was obtained. The compounds were sealed and left overnight at room temperature for
maturation. The steel plates were dipped in coagulant (10% calcium nitrate) for 5
seconds and dried in the air oven for 10 minutes at 100oC before cooling at room
temperature for 5 minutes. The steel plates were then dipped into the latex compound
for 10 seconds and cured in the air oven for 20 minutes at 100oC before cooling at
room temperature for 24 hours. For tensile test, the films were cut into dumbbell and
crescent shapes. Instron IX3366 machine was used to measure the tensile (ASTM
D412) with the crosshead speed of 500mm/min.
771
4.0
filler (phr)
60% NR Latex
100
100
10% KOH
0.3
0.3
50% Antioxidant
0.5
0.5
50% ZnO
0.25
0.25
50% ZDEC
0.5
0.5
50% sulphur
0.5
0.5
10
772
Figure 1: Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add (SST) resides within rubber particles and
facilitated the biodegradation process of rubber gloves
Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add are produced in dispersion and powder form.
This is to ensure that it is compatible with latex and rubber compounds. The
specifications of Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add are presented in Table 2. The main
content is polysaccharide based material which contributes to the biodegradation of
latex/rubber based products, thus the additional cost to produce biodegradable
latex/rubber based product is minimal. The disposal of the used/ waste biodegradable
latex/rubber based products will be easier and indirectly will reduce the solid waste
disposal problems in the landfill. The Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add has been
tested to have good storage stability and thus, predicted to be stable during shelf life.
773
Values
Viscosity, cP
pH
7-8
1.41 106 - 2.23 106
65:35
25%
774
From Table 3, it shows that the addition of Novel Green Additives: Bio-Add
in gloves formulation will increase the physical properties of the films compared to
other commercial gloves produced commercially. The physical properties still retain
even though after undergoing accelerated aging test. This shows that Novel Green
Additives: Bio-Add is compatible to be used as additives in the latex compounding
and able to produce NRL films that comply with ASTM D412- 98a requirement for
minimum physical properties for the production of rubber gloves as presented in
Table 4. Figure 2 shows that the consistency of the tensile strength with the addition
different batches of Bio-Add.
Company A
Company B
Min 600
Min 600
Min 1200
Min 500
Min 500
Min 800
18
18
>18
14
14
>14
Tensile Strength
18 MPa, min
650% min
14 MPa, min
775
Ultimate
Elongation
500% min
Figure 2: Comparison tensile test for different NR latex films with Bio-add
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
776
REFERENCES
Afiq M.M. and Azura A.R. (2012). Effect of Natural Starch on Mechanical and
Biodegradation of Natural Rubber Latex (NRL) Films. Paper Presented at
International Conference on Latex and Latex Based Materials. KL Concorde
Hotel, Kuala Lumpur. March 2012. iSmither.
Afiq, M.M.. and Azura A.R (2013). Utilization of Starch to Accelerate the Growth of
Degrading Microorganisms on the Surface of Natural Rubber Latex Films.
Journal. Chem. and Chem. Eng. Vol 7(2).
Azura A.R , Afiq M.M, and Izmar M.H (2012). Effects of different additions of sago
starch filler on physical and biodegradation properties of pre-vulcanized NR
latex composites, Composites Part B: Engineering, Vol 43 (7) : 2746 2750
Afiq, M.M.. and Azura A.R (2014). Overview of Biodegradation of Natural Rubber
Latex Gloves for Commercializaton. Advanced Materials Research Vol. 844
(2014)
pp
486-489
Trans
Tech
Publications,
Switzerland
doi:10.4028/www.scientific.net/AMR.844.486
Daschner F. D, and
777
Daniel.H, and Perinaz.B-T., (2012). What a Waste: A global Review of Solid Waste
Management. Urban Development Series Knowledge Papers. Washington,
USA: The World Bank.
[online]
available
<http://www.gdrc.org/uem/waste/waste_factsheet.html>
at
[accessed
on
10thMarch 2014].
Jason, Y., (2010) Sector Update: Rubber Glove. Malaysia Equity: Investment
Research. Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, Osk Research.
Jerry,L. (2012) Sector Update: Rubber Glove. Malaysia Equity: Investment Research.
Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, O.S.K Research.
at
<http://www.unctad.info/en/Infocomm/Agricultural_Products/Caoutchouc/74
322/Summary/ [accessed on 27 Nov 2014]
William, E. H. (2009). Forecasts of New Economic Boom in 2015. Tech Cast Article
Series. Washington, USA: TechCast LLC.
778
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Meanwhile, the authors (Newman et al., 2008) also described that the overall flow of
manufacturing information in the enterprise is predominantly uni-directional. The
design is basically pushed down the manufacturing chain and the necessary
information is added at each stage. In cases where the NC program is edited on the
780
shopfloor, it is impossible to capture the knowledge from the shop floor and pass it
back through the chain. Changes in design or tools for example will not be reflected in
the CAD or CAM files.
Meanwhile, (Huang, Zhang, Bai, Xu, & Huang, 2015) proposed a novel
subpart retrieval approach of 3D CAD models for manufacturing process reuse is
presented. First, coupled machining feature cluster (CMFC) is introduced to represent
the 3D CAD model into structured MBD (model-based definition) model taking
machining features as the carrier of manufacturing semantics. Then, part layer code
and CMFC content code for accelerating subpart retrieval are given to filter out
unmatched subparts efficiently. Moreover, a multilevel feature descriptor capturing
different levels of information for manufacturing process planning is designed to
establish
the
machining
feature
781
similarity
assessment
model.
2.0
3.0
by face outer bounds, respectively. Face bounds consist of edge loop bounding the
face. It is defined by edge loop. An edge loop consists of oriented edges. Edges in
turn consist of vertices which are represented by vertex points. The 3-D model STEP
files are accessed and the relevant geometric and topological information are
obtained. The geometric data of the model is used for subsequent steps of the feature
recognition (Rameshbabu & Shunmugam, 2009). Meanwhile, STEP AP 224
("International Standards Organisation. ISO 10303-224 - Industrial automation
systems and integration - Product data representation and exchange - Part 224:
Application protocol: Mechanical product definition for process planning using
machining features," 2006) specifies an application protocol (AP) for the
representation of information needed to produce a mechanical part definition for
process planning of a single piece or an assembly of piece parts for machining
operations, and specifies the integrated resources necessary to satisfy these
requirements.
4.0
PROPOSED METHODOLOGY
4.1
Project framework
783
In order to have a good generic representation of the designed object for CAM
applications, especially for process planning, the overall designed object description
and its features need to be represented in a suitable structured database. A relational
database will be used in this methodology and Microsoft Access has become the tool
for this purpose. The first step toward automatic feature extraction will be achieved by
extracting the geometric and topological information from the (STEP AP 203) CAD
file and redefining it as a new relational database structure. The strength of relational
database system is the ability to store large amount of data in a highly normalized,
tabular form, and to perform efficient queries across large data sets (Babu, Rao,
784
Balakrishna, & Rao, 2010). Relational systems use Structured Query Language (SQL)
for both data definition and data manipulation. In the present work the database is
developed using Microsoft Access. This database can be easily migrated into other
advanced RDBMS (Babu, et al., 2010).
4.2.2
STEP is a standard file format for the data defining the object drawing in 3D
CAD systems in the B-rep structure. The contents in STEP format consist of
geometric and topological information. The geometric information includes the
definition of lines, planes, circles, and other geometric entities for a given object. The
topological information defines the relationships between the objects geometric
components, for example, in terms of loops (external loop and internal loop). Raw
model data, in the form of instances of entity types, is extracted from the input CAD
file and organized in a relational database structure. All the extracted CAD data will
be classified and stored into predefined tables based on its type of data entity as
shown in Table 1.
785
RAW_DATA_ADVANCED_
FACE
Entity
Closed shell
Advanced
face
RAW_DATA_FACE_BOUND
Face bound
RAW_DATA_EDGE_LOOP
Edge loop
Attribute
Closed Shell
ID
Function Name
Advanced Face
Pointer
Advanced Face
ID
Function Name
Plane / Circle
Pointer
Face Bound
Pointer
Boolean
Face Bound ID
Function Name
Edge Loop
Pointer
Edge Loop ID
Function Name
Oriented Edge
Pointer
Oriented Edge
ID
Function Name
Edge Curve
Pointer
Boolean
Type
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
786
4.3
At this stage, raw model data is processed to produce new information about
the model that is not natively contained within the CAD file. This new information is
very important for the manufacturing feature recognition process in the following
stage. Some of the important new information which is generated from this stage are:
list of advanced face with its normal direction, list of edge with its convexity, and list
of advanced faces with its shared edges by using RDBS queries.
Figure 2 shows the design view of the query for generating advanced face with
normal direction and Table 3 shows the example of the generated data.
Figure 2: Design View of Query for Generating Advanced Face with Normal
Direction
Table 3: Generated Advanced Face with Normal Direction List
787
At this process, the convexity of every edge of the object will be determined.
The procedure for convexity test is based on the following steps as below. Figure 3
show important parameter for determining the convexity of the edge and the design
view of query created for running this mechanism.
(1)
4.4
The dimensions of raw stock from which the component has to be machined
are needed to obtain feature volumes. In order to determine the raw stock dimensions,
the minimum as well as maximum X, Y and Z coordinate values of the 3-D model are
determined. From these values, the coordinates of the raw stock vertices and thus 3-D
model data of raw stock are formed. Queries of Microsoft Access have been used for
all these processes.
788
5.0 IMPLEMENTATION
This system have been successfully built with Microsoft Access as the main
tool for creating a relational database structure for importing the CAD data (AP203)
as shown in Figure 5. Then, proposed mechanism have been implemented in three
important stages of process, there are geometric and topological feature extractions,
data enrichment and finally, machining feature recognition. The recognized
machining features are displayed in report format as shown in Figure 6. These
recognized manufacturing features can be exported into other Window compatible
format, e.g. Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and Notepad. However, AP224 is the
main format generated from this system, which is shown in Figure 7.
789
790
Hole feature
#510 = (CHARACTERIZED_OBJECT ( , ) FEATURE_DEFINITION () INSTANCED_FEATURE ( )
MACHINING_FEATURE ( ) ROUND_HOLE ( ) SHAPE_ASPECT ( , , #43, .T. ));
Figure 7: Defining Hole Feature in STEP AP224 Format by using the Generated Hole
Feature Parameter from Automated Machining Recognition System.
6.0
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Babic, B., Nesic, N., & Miljkovic, Z. (2008). A review of automated feature
recognition with rule-based pattern recognition. Computers in Industry, 59(4),
321-337. Doi: 10.1016/j.compind.2007.09.001.
Babu, K. S., Rao, D. D. N., Balakrishna, D. A., & Rao, C. S. (2010). Development Of
A Manufacturing Database System For Step-Nc Data From Express Entities.
International Journal of Engineering Science and Technology, 2 (11), 68196828.
791
Bhandarkar, M. P., & Nagi, R. (2000). STEP-based feature extraction from STEP
geometry for Agile Manufacturing. Computers in Industry, 41(1), 3-24. Doi:
10.1016/S0166-3615(99)00040-8.
Dipper, T., Xu, X., & Klemm, P. (2011). Defining, recognizing and representing
feature interactions in a feature-based data model. Robotics and ComputerIntegrated Manufacturing, 27(1), 101-114. Doi: 10.1016/j.rcim.2010.06.016.
Hao Lan, Z., Van der Velden, C., Xinghuo, Y., Bil, C., Jones, T., & Fieldhouse, I.
(2009). Developing a rule engine for Automated Feature Recognition from
CAD models. Paper presented at the Industrial Electronics, 2009. IECON '09.
35th Annual Conference of IEEE.
Huang, R., Zhang, S., Bai, X., Xu, C., & Huang, B. (2015). An effective subpart
retrieval approach of 3D CAD models for manufacturing process reuse.
Computers in Industry, 67(0), 38-53.
Nasr, E. S. A., Khan, A. A., Alahmari, A. M., & Hussein, H. M. A. (2014). A Feature
Recognition System Using Geometric Reasoning. Procedia CIRP, 18(0), 238243.
Newman, S. T., Nassehi, A., Xu, X. W., Rosso Jr, R. S. U., Wang, L., Yusof, Y., et al.
(2008). Strategic advantages of interoperability for global manufacturing using
792
Xiao, W., Zheng, L., Huan, J., & Lei, P. (2015). A complete CAD/CAM/CNC
solution for STEP-compliant manufacturing. Robotics and ComputerIntegrated Manufacturing, 31(0), 1-10.
793
noraini045@perlis.uitm.edu.my, mohdsadi@hotmail.com,
amin.che.ahmat10@gmail.com, jamahizan@yahoo.com, rie_ryda@yahoo.com
ABSTRAK
MAJDANI adalah inovasi permainan simulasi berpapan (board game)
berkonsepkan jual beli hartanah yang diinspirasikan daripada permainan
Saidina dan Monopoly. Permainan ini berbeza dengan Saidina atau
Monopoly kerana ia adalah simulasi kepada pengurusan dan pembangunan
hartanah dalam sistem muamalat Islam. Melalui permainan ini pemain dapat
memahami dan mengingati istilah-istilah dalam muamalat Islam seperti jenisjenis jual beli, al-Ijarah, al-Rahn, akad usahasama hartanah, akad
perkongsian modal dan lain-lain. Kertas kerja ini adalah merupakan dapatan
awal kajian yang dijalankan bagi mengenalpasti keperluan permainan
simulasi pengurusan hartanah Islam MAJDANI dalam pengajaran dan
pembelajaran (P&P) bagi Kursus Pengurusan Hartanah Islam di UiTM
Perlis. Borang soal selidik telah diedarkan kepada 38 orang pelajar semester
3, Diploma Sains Geomatik, Fakulti Seni Bina, Perancangan dan Ukur, UiTM
Perlis sesi Jun Oktober 2014. Pemilihan responden adalah melalui kaedah
persampelan secara rawak. Berdasarkan kajian 82.3% pelajar yang bermain
mengatakan mereka berminat dengan permainan simulasi pengurusan
hartanah dan 88.2% pelajar pula bersetuju bahawa permainan simulasi boleh
membantu mereka memahami kursus dengan lebih baik. Manakala 89.4%
pelajar menyokong sekiranya permainan simulasi digunakan di dalam kelas
supaya mereka lebih memahami kursus yang diajar. Hasil kajian ini
794
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
2.0
PERNYATAAN MASALAH
Masyarakat juga secara umumnya tidak diberi pendedahan secara meluas dan
mudah difahami berkaitan ilmu ini terutama dalam memastikan muamalat umat Islam
mengikut syariat yang sepatutnya. Berdasarkan tinjauan 86.8% pelajar mengatakan
mereka berminat dengan ilmu berkaitan pengurusan hartanah Islam dan 97.4%
peratus mengatakan Pengurusan Hartanah Islam adalah ilmu yang sangat penting. Ini
menunjukkan bahawa kesediaan masyarakat atau pelajar untuk mempelajari ilmu ini
telah ada dan perlu dipupuk dengan baik. Justeru, penyelidik merasakan inisiatif
untuk memberi pendedahan awal kepada masyarakat berkaitan muamalat Islam
dengan pelbagai cara khususnya melalui permainan adalah satu usaha yang baik.
Tambahan pula, masyarakat Islam perlu sedar bahawa permainan yang mempunyai
elemen riba dan judi adalah satu bentuk pendidikan yang tidak sihat. Justeru,
permainan simulasi pengurusan hartanah Islam Majdani ini adalah alternatif
permainan yang boleh dijadikan pilihan oleh masyarakat Muslim.
3.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
i.
ii.
4.0
KEPENTINGAN KAJIAN
dan
minat
terhadap
permainan
tersebut.
Selain
mengenalpasti
pengurusan hartanah Islam. Secara tak langsung, penghasilan permainan ini sebagai
bahan bantu mengajar dapat mengubah persepsi pelajar terhadap kesukaran
mengingati istilah-istilah muamalat dan menjadikan pengajaran dan pembelajaran di
dalam kelas tidak membosankan. Masyarakat juga dapat memanfaatkan permainan ini
untuk pendidikan muamalat Islam untuk seisi keluarga.
5.0
SKOP KAJIAN
Responden bagi kajian ini adalah 38 orang pelajar Diploma Sains Geomatik
(semester 3) daripada Fakulti Seni Bina, Perancangan dan Ukur di UiTM Perlis yang
sedang mengikuti Kursus Pengurusan Hartanah Islam (CTU262) sesi Jun Oktober
2014.
797
6.0
TINJAUAN LITERATUR
berbentuk simulasi Richard B. Powers daripada Portland State University juga adalah
seorang yang aktif menghasilkan permainan simulasi. Diantara permainan yang
pernah dihasilkan ialah Communication Roadblocks (2005), Discover Me! (1995),
Stop! (1977) dan sebagainya (Powers, 2014).
7.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
Persampelan
799
Pengumpulan Data
Metodologi
Kajian yang dilakukan ini melibatkan dua jenis sumber data iaitu data primer
dan data sekunder. Data primer diperolehi daripada soal selidik yang diedarkan
daripada responden, manakala data sekunder diperolehi melalui kajian perpustakaan
dan pencarian data melalui internet seperti buku, jurnal dan artikel.
Soalselidik
Satu set borang soal selidik telah dibentuk berdasarkan sumber rujukan yang
telah diperolehi. Ia terbahagi kepada tiga bahagian. Bahagian 1 meliputi latar
belakang responden dan bahagian 2 meliputi pendapat pelajar secara khusus berkaitan
pengurusan hartanah Islam dan bahagian 3 meliputi keperluan permainan simulasi
pengurusan hartanah Islam di dalam pengajaran dan pembelajaran (P&P).
8.0
Latarbelakang Responden:
Kajian ini dijalankan menggunakan instrumen soalan soal selidik ke atas 27 orang
pelajar perempuan dan 11 orang pelajar lelaki semester 3, Fakulti Geomatik dan Ukur
Tanah, UiTM Perlis yang sedang mengambil Kursus Pengurusan Hartanah Islam
(CTU262).
800
Item
Frekuensi
Peratus
Perempuan
27
71.1
Lelaki
11
28.9
Item
Ya
Peratus
Tidak
Peratus
21
30
78.9
ilmu
33
86.8
13.2
18.4
31
81.6
31
81.6
18.4
37
97.4
2.6
Pernah
mengikuti
kursus
dengan
istilah
berkaitan
hartanah
Islam
Pengurusan Hartanah Islam
kursus yang menarik
Pengurusan Hartanah Islam
kursus yang penting
801
802
Item
Ya
Peratus
Tidak
Peratus
34
89.4
10.5
28
82.3
17.6
17
50
17
50
23
67.6
11
32.3
30
88.2
11.7
10
26.3
28
73.6
11
28.9
27
71
Item
Frekuensi
Peratus
Sangat Suka
16
42.1
Suka
18
47.3
Tidak Suka
10.5
803
9.0
804
RUJUKAN
Mohd Zohir Ahmad, Rohizani Yaakub & Shahabudin Hashim.( 2007). Pedagogi :
Strategi dan Teknik Mengajar Dengan Berkesan. Kuala Lumpur : PTS
Professional.
Powers, R. B. (2014). How I Became Addicted to Simulations and Games. Simulation
& Gaming, Vol 45(1) 5-22.
Suzzana Othman, Z. M. (2013). Peningkatan Kemahiran Bertutur Bahasa Arab
Melalui Arabic Board Game. 4th International Conference on Public Policy
and Social Science, (pp. 93-101). UiTM Sabah.
Umat Islam Masih Kurang Faham Sistem Muamalat. (2013, October 29). Utusan
Malaysia.
805
ABSTRACT
806
1.0
INTRODUCTION
In fulfill the need of the rapid prototyping technology; the key is to have a
good and quality product. By comparing to the other RP technology, the Fused
Deposition Modelling (FDM) offers great flexibility as does not required any solvent
and reducing resident time in the heating tube due to use of filament (Iwan Zeina,
2002). Research has been done for upgrading the FDM technology for the extruder as
one of the innovative is called Adaptable Filament Deposition System (ADPS)
(H. Brooks, 2011).This ADP system is improving the existing system of FDM. The
existing system of FDM is not capable of extruding wide range of filament size as
well as the mass flow rate of deposition is limited. The new ADP system improves by
providing the variable diameter filament of material which offers great accuracy and
efficiency base on the design (Tseng, 2001).
In this study, we are stress on analyzing the designing factor of the FDM
nozzle. FDM process is quite simple where filament fed through to heating tube
which melted the filament (Refer Figure 1). Material in the molten stage will be
807
deposited through the nozzle creating layer by layer to form a final product. The main
concern here is to analyze the FDM nozzle which is compatible with the biomaterials.
2.0
The main objective is focusing on the analyzing the current available nozzle of Fused
Deposition Modelling. For instance the objective of the study can be extending such
as to:
a)
Analyze the main factor of the FDM nozzle that suitable for extruding
biomaterial.
b)
3. 0
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
3.1
Introduction
In this paper the authors discussed on the factor affecting the FDM nozzle by using
simulation-modeling technique. Several factors and parameters have been identified
as the elements that can effects the quality of the product produce by using the current
FDM nozzle. The parameters such as liquefier length, nozzle angle and nozzle
808
diameter are identified as the major influence of the nozzle design. The effect of these
factors will be analyzed and the understanding of the factor gives significant impact to
the nozzle design.
3.2
L1
1
D1
809
Setup the boundary condition for FEA is very important. The boundary condition has
been specified for performing the simulation. Entering velocity set to be 0.0011m/s
and the temperature on the entrance and at the wall consider to be 313 K and 333 K
respectively (H.S. Ramanath, 2008). Assumption of the simulation (Jorge Mireles,
2013; Mostafa Nikzad, 2009; H.S Ramananth, 2008):
i.
ii.
iii.
Steady-state condition;
iv.
Meshing Process
Free meshing technique has been done and some of the parameters have bet setup to
find the optimum result. To get more accurate result, smoothing set to fine mode and
edge sizing method has been used and number of division set to be 30. Too many
cells can result long solver run which is not effective and too few cell may lead to
inaccurate result. Taking moderate meshing is one of the best ways to have an
optimum result. For computing the mesh, some option need to be considered as
double precision option has been choose and to ensure the stable result, number of
iteration set to 1000 iteration. Figure 3 shows the meshing process for the simulation.
810
4.0
The simulation has been done by focusing on the main factor as describe earlier. All
the condition has been recorded in the Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3.
Case 1
For case 1, nozzle angle will be fixed and nozzle diameter has been varied.
Nozzle
angle
()
Nozzle
Diameter
(D1)
Pressure
Drop
(Pa)
Outlet
Velocity
(m/s)
Notes
0.0011
40
0.4
0.0011
0.0050
Lowest
pressure drop
0.3
0.0209
0.0066
(Standard
Configuration)
0.2
0.0578
0.0099
0.1
0.3376
0.0198
Highest
pressure drop
As from the graph, pressure drop is high when nozzle angle become smaller. This
simply by referring the formula below (H.S. Ramanath, 2008):
(1)
(2)
811
Where:
P is pressure along the liquifier lenght
A is cross sectional area.
By reducing the diameter of the nozzle means the area (A), the pressure will
increase.It means the higher force is require to force out the filament. Force represent
the motor which is constant, pressure drop will be higher in nozzle exit which
compromised the final product.
Case 2
For case 2, nozzle diameter will be fixed and nozzle angle will be change from 20 0 to
800 angle.
Table 2: Effect on the pressure for each size of nozzle angle.
Entering
Nozzle Tip
Nozzle
Pressure Drop
Velocity
Diameter
angle ()
(Pa)
(m/s)
(D1)
20
0.0220
Notes
Highest
pressure drop
40
0.011
0.0209
0.3
(Standard
Configuration)
60
0.0131
80
0.0096
Lowest
pressure drop
812
This result shows that nozzle angle influence the pressure drop along the liquefier.
The pressure drop cause by the flow instabilities and vortices form in the corner
(Brian N. Turner, 2014).
Case 3
Nozzle angle and nozzle diameter will be fixed and liquefier length will be varied.
Table 3: Effect on the pressure for varying the liquefier length
Entering
Nozzle
Nozzle
Liquefier
Pressure
Velocity
Tip
angle
Length
Drop
(m/s)
Diameter
()
(mm)
(Pa)
Notes
(D1)
84
0.0224
Highest
pressure drop
0.011
0.3
40
63
0.0215
42
0.0209
(Standard
Configuration)
21
0.0198
Lowest pressure
drop
Pressure along the liquefier length can be calculated by using (equations 1, 2). From
the equation, pressure of section in the liquefier length can be calculated based on the
formula below (Brian N. Turner, 2014; H.S. Ramanath, 2008):
813
(3)
(4)
(5)
From the result, the length of liquefier does affect the pressure drop. This is also can
be seen by the (equations 3) as increasing the length of liquefier L1, will increase the
pressure needed to force out the filament through the nozzle thus increasing pressure
drop.
Three case scenarios have been analysed and the vital point here is pressure
drop factor. Pressure along the nozzle is very important to keep the material extruded
uniformly. Flow of the material through the nozzle is affected by the pressure drop as
well as the velocity. Length of the liquefier, size, and shape of the exit part of the
nozzle can influence the material being extruded (H. S. Ramanath, 2008; Brian N.
Turner, 2014).
As from the simulation, liquefier length, nozzle diameter and nozzle angle
does affect the pressure drop along the liquefier channel. Pressure drop varies with
respect to those criteria and thus affect the road width of the scaffold design which
influence the quality of final product (H.S Ramananth, 2008). These are very
important factor to be considered in designing FDM nozzle especially to be
compatible in extruding biomaterial.
CONCLUSIONS
Analyzing the main factor is vital in order to have a good design of FDM
nozzle especially for extruding biomaterials. Main factor need to be considered
include liquefier length, nozzle angle and nozzle diameter. Varying these parameters
will affect the pressure along the nozzle. Thus controlling the pressure is the key to
have a good and quality extruded product. The lowest the pressure drop the better it
would be and therefore this simulation enable us to find the best design in FDM
nozzle.
REFERENCES
Brian N. Turner, R. s. (2014). A review of melt extrusion additive manufacturing
processes: I. Process design and modeling. Rapid Prototyping Journal, pp
192-204.
815
Tseng, A. A. (2001). Patent No. US 6, 251, 340 B1. United States of America.
Wohlers, T. (2001). Rapid Prototyping & Tooling State of the Industry Annual
Worldwide Progress Report. United States Of America: Wohlers Associates.
816
ABSTRAK
817
1.0
PENGENALAN
2.0
KERANGKA KONSEPTUAL
Model sistem reka bentuk pengajaran ADDIE (Gordon & Zemke, 2000)
seperti Rajah 1 digunakan untuk membangunkan perisian multimedia ini. Model ini
digunakan berasaskan kepada singkatan dari perkataan yang bermaksud Analisa
(Analisys), Reka bentuk (Design), Pembangunan (Development), Pelaksanaan
(Implementation) dan Penilaian (Evaluation). Terdapat 2 bentuk penilaian iaitu
E1: penilaian formatif dan E2: penilaian sumatif. Pembelajaran modul bertema
berbantukan koswer ini melibatkan peranan kognitif dalam memproses maklumat
yang diperolehi menerusi deria sama ada dalam bentuk visual atau bukan visual.
Unsur-unsur bagi menyediakan kanak-kanak dengan kemahiran pengamatan menerusi
input visual dan input verbal, Teori Pengkodan Dedua (Paivio, 1986) digunakan.
Menurut teori ini input visual, input verbal dan kombinasi antara keduanya akan dapat
meningkatkan keupayaan menyimpan, mengingat kembali dan seterusnya melahirkan
kefahaman terhadap bahan yang dibaca. Pembelajaran ini merupakan aktiviti kognitif
kerana ia melibatkan pengutipan maklumat daripada teks beserta sebutan. Selain dari
itu, Vygotsky menjelaskan bahawa perkembangan kognitif adalah satu proses sosial
kerana kanak-kanak akan mempelajari dan terbentuk pemikiran dengan fokus kepada
faktor sosial dan pembelajaran (Rafidah, 2009). Dalam kajian ini juga, pembangun
perisian multimedia turut mengaplikasikan Teori Ekologi Bronferbrenner yang
menyatakan perkembangan kanak-kanak bergantung kepada persekitaran di sekeliling
mereka. Persekitaran perkembangan individu terdiri daripada lima sistem iaitu
Mikrosistem, Mesosistem, Eksosistem, Makrosistem dan Kronosistem. Pengaruh
persekitaran sistem telah menyebabkan proses peniruan berlaku ke atas kanak-kanak
yang bersandarkan kepada Teori Pembelajaran Sosial (Bandura, 1986). Teori tersebut
mempunyai empat proses iaitu pemerhatian, penyimpanan, pengeluaran dan motivasi.
819
Kognitif - Sosial
Analysis
Input Verbal
Naratif
Arahan
Muzik
Design
Development
Mendenga
r
Bertutur
Membac
a
Menulis
Implementatio
n
Keselesaan &
Kesenangan
Penggunaan
3.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
3.1
Sampel Kajian
objektif kajian merujuk kepada sesuatu perwakilan formal memenuhi kriteria yang
ditetapkan dalam kajian dan tergolong dalam populasi kajian.
3.2
Lokasi Kajian
3.3
Teori Ekologi Bronferbrenner merangsang perkembangan persekitaran kanakkanak prasekolah yang terbahagi kepada lima iaitu Milrosistem, Mesosistem,
Eksosistem, Makrosistem dan Kronosistem. Kesemuanya itu saling bergantungan
antara satu sama lain serta dapat meningkatkan motivasi kanak-kanak prasekolah.
Sejajar dengan itu, Teori Pengkodan Dedua menurut Paivio terbahagi kepada dua iaitu
822
Input Visual dan Input Verbal. Input visual lebih kepada input yang berbentuk imej
atau gambar manakala input verbal pula lebih kepada input yang berbentuk auditori
yang hanya mengeluarkan suara sahaja. Apabila kedua-dua input ini digabungkan di
dalam perisian multimedia secara bertema maka Teori Pengkodan Dedua telah
membuktikan bahawa hasil pembangunan sangat berkesan dan memberi impak yang
positif kepada guru prasekolah semasa menggunakan perisian multimedia tersebut. Di
dalam masa yang sama Teori Multimedia menurut Mayer juga digunakan sebagai
panduan untuk pembangun bangunkan perisian multimedia menggunakan prinsipprinsip multimedia yang sesuai. Oleh kerana pembangun bangunkan perisian
multimedia ini khas untuk guru-guru prasekolah, maka pembangun telah mengikut
Kurikulum Standard Prasekolah Kebangsaan yang telah ditetapkan oleh Kementerian
Pelajaran Malaysia. Di dalam perisian multimedia secara bertema ini menerapkan
Tunjang Komunikasi yang menggabungkan kemahiran bertutur, kemahiran membaca,
kemahiran mendengar dan kemahiran menulis.
3.4
Instrumen Kajian
Instrumen ataupun kaedah kajian yang digunakan ialah borang soal selidik
dan soalan temubual yang akan diberikan kepada guru prasekolah dan juga
pemerhatian dilakukan ke atas semua kanak-kanak prasekolah semasa proses
pengajaran dan pembelajaran berlaku bagi mengetahui tahap penerimaan maklumat
yang disampaikan oleh guru prasekolah kepada kanak-kanak prasekolah dengan
menggunakan perisian multimedia interaktif mengikut matlamat Kurikulum Standard
Prasekolah Kebangsaan (KSPK). Isi kandungan borang soal selidik terdapat 16 soalan
manakala bagi temubual terdapat 9 soalan yang telah penyelidik sediakan. Bagi
menentukan kesahan (validity) instrumen kajian, penyelidik telah menjalankan kajian
rintis bagi tujuan menjalankan ujian kebolehpercayaan (realibility test) dengan
mengedarkan borang soal selidik. Borang soal selidik yang digunakan telah diubah
suai dari Jamaluddin dan Zaidatun (2001). Borang soal selidik telah diedarkan
kepada 30 orang responden yang dipilih bagi tujuan mendapatkan maklum balas
823
Pembolehubah
Motivasi
0.784
0.815
0.786
0.892
4.0
825
4.1
Hasil dapatan daripada guru dengan menggunakan soal selidik dan temubual
bagi melihat kebolehgunaan perisian multimedia secara bertema berasaskan Tunjang
Komunikasi telah menghasilkan empat aspek iaitu Motivasi, Reka bentuk
Antaramuka, Reka bentuk Tunjang Komunikasi dan juga Keselesaan dan Kesenangan
Penggunaan. Nilai skor min yang dicatatkan berada pada tahap tinggi bagi setiap
aspek iaitu bagi aspek Motivasi nilai min sebanyak 4.55, aspek Reka bentuk
Antaramuka pula nilai minnya ialah 4.50, untuk aspek Reka bentuk Tunjang
Komunikasi pula nilai min sebanyak 4.53 dan aspek yang akhir iaitu Keselesaan dan
Kesenangan Penggunaan nilai minnya ialah 4.67. di dalam temubual juga terdapat
responden yang menyokong kebolehgunaan perisian multimedia ini sebagai alat bantu
mengajar. Guru-guru amat berpuas hati dengan penghasilan perisian multimedia yang
menggunakan model ADDIE ini, kerana ia dapat melancarkan proses pengajaran dan
pembelajaran mereka. Koswer ini juga telah menghasilkan komunikasi dua hala yang
sangat baik di antara guru dan kanak-kanak prasekolah.
i) Soal Selidik
Soal selidik ini dibina dan diubah suai berdasarkan soal selidik yang
digunakan oleh Jamaluddin, Baharuddin & Zaidatun (2001). Pengkaji membina soal
selidik yang berasaskan kepada skala likert dan ianya dipilih kerana mempunyai
kebolehpercayaan dan kesahan yang tinggi. Skala pemeringkatan likert 1 hingga 5
digunakan oleh responden dalam membuat pilihan jawapan dengan hanya
membulatkan jawapan yang dipilih pada nombor likert. Seterusnya, ianya dapat
dilihat melalui borang soal selidik yang telah diedarkan kepada guru prasekolah. Di
dalam proses menganalisis data, pengkaji mengkategorikan daripada lima
pemeringkatan skor skala likert kepada tiga peringkat. Ia bertujuan bagi mengelaskan
setiap item kepada tahap-tahap tertentu.
Mengikut
pengkaji. Aspek tersebut terdiri daripada aspek motivasi, reka bentuk antaramuka,
reka bentuk tunjang komunikasi dan juga keselesaan dan kesenangan penggunaan.
Jadual 5.1 menunjukkan min bagi setiap aspek kebolehgunaan koswer oleh guru.
Jumlah min yang tinggi iaitu 4.56 telah membuktikan bahawa koswer tersebut boleh
digunakan oleh guru prasekolah.
Berdasarkan kajian dapat dilihat nilai min bagi setiap soalan yang berkaitan
dengan reka bentuk antaramuka. Soalan 7 mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.20 yang
mana apabila merujuk kepada jadual 5.2 iaitu nilai skor min menunjukkan skor berada
pada tahap tinggi . Soalan 8 pula mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.47 dan berada pada
julat 3.50 hingga 5.0. Ini juga menunjukkan nilai min soalan 8 berada pada tahap
tinggi. Soalan 9 pula mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.53 dan berada pada tahap
tinggi. Seterusnya soalan 10 mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.77
menunjukkan skor min bagi soalan 10 berada pada julat 3.50 hingga 5.0 di tahap yang
tinggi. Ini membuktikan bahawa reka bentuk antaramuka perisian multimedia ini
adalah amat sesuai digunakan oleh guru prasekolah di dalam proses pengajaran dan
pembelajaran sebagai alat bantu mengajar. Min keseluruhan bagi reka bentuk
antaramuka koswer iaitu 4.50 menunjukkan nilai yang tinggi. Ini bermakna guru
prasekolah bersetuju dengan pembangunan reka bentuk antaramuka perisian
multimedia.
Berdasarkan Jadual 5.3 dapat dilihat nilai min bagi setiap soalan yang berkaitan
dengan Reka bentuk Tunjang Komunikasi. Soalan 3 mempunyai nilai min sebanyak
4.67 yang mana apabila merujuk kepada jadual 5.1 iaitu nilai skor min menunjukkan
skor berada pada tahap tinggi . Soalan 4 pula mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.40 dan
berada pada julat 3.50 hingga 5.0. Ini juga menunjukkan nilai min soalan 4 berada
pada tahap tinggi. Soalan 5 pula mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.63 dan berada pada
tahap tinggi. Seterusnya soalan 15 mempunyai nilai min sebanyak 4.43 dan ini juga
menunjukkan skor min bagi soalan 15 berada pada julat 3.50 hingga 5.0 di tahap
yang tinggi. Ini membuktikan bahawa Reka bentuk Tunjang Komunikasi yang telah
dimasukkan di dalam perisian multimedia ini adalah amat sesuai digunakan oleh guru
prasekolah semasa mengajar tajuk yang berkaitan dengan Tunjang Komunikasi
827
ii) Temubual
Komen aspek bahasa dan komunikasi daripada guru 6 disokong oleh kajian
Zulkifli (2007), yang menyatakan bahasa yang mudah dan intonasi yang bersesuaian
perlu dalam komunikasi dengan kanak-kanak. Ini dapat memudahkan pemahaman
kanak-kanak akan mesej yang disampaikan. Namun guru perlu kerap menggunakan
kedua-dua bahasa Melayu dan bahasa Inggeris di dalam komunikasi. Penggunaan
kedua-dua bahasa ini boleh membantu kanak-kanak di dalam penguasaan kemahiran
membaca, kemhiran mendengar, kemahiran bertutur dan juga kemahiran menulis
berpandukan tunjang komunikasi. Ia amat disokong oleh guru 2, 16, 20, 27 dan juga
guru 29. Berdasarkan komen daripada guru 9 yang melibatkan ingatan kanak-kanak
ketika belajar menggunakan koswer bersesuaian dengan teori kognitivisme, kerana
dengan penambahan pengetahuan di dalam ingatan jangka panjang akan memberi
perubahan ke atas struktur pengetahuan seseorang (Gagne 1985). Teori ini memberi
tumpuan kepada proses mengetahui dan memperolehi ilmu pengetahuan melalui
proses celik akal iaitu memproses maklumat dengan cara mengadakan perbincangan,
828
penaakulan, penyelesaian masalah dan aktiviti percambahan fikiran, maklumatmaklumat ini akan disimpan dan dikeluarkan kembali apabila diperlukan. Kanakkanak akan menerima maklumat yang berbentuk gambar dahulu berbanding bentuk
lisan yang terdapat di dalam koswer kerana visual lebih mudah bagi mereka untuk
ingat dan di simpan dalam ingatan jangka panjang. Perisian multimedia yang
dibangunkan haruslah menyediakan gambar yang mudah serta imej yang sebenar
supaya proses penerimaan maklumat kanak-kanak lebih cepat dan ia juga turut
disokong oleh guru 3, 4, 19, 21 dan 24.
829
4.2
Dapatan kajian ini turut disokong dengan pemerhatian oleh pengkaji. Melalui
pemerhatian yang dilakukan reaksi serta respon positif yang diterima daripada kanakkanak prasekolah semasa menjalankan kajian. Komunikasi yang berlaku di antara
guru dengan kanak-kanak amat memberangsangkan. Berlaku interaksi dua hala di
antara mereka semasa menggunakan perisian multimedia interaktif tersebut. Gaya
serta kaedah pengajaran guru prasekolah di dalam menyampaikan pengajaran
memberi impak kepada kanak-kanak prasekolah semasa proses pembelajaran berlaku.
Imej yang terdapat di dalam persisian multimedia tersebut telah membantu kanakkanak memahami serta mengenali objek yang sebenar. Ia juga dapat membantu
kanak-kanak semasa membuat latihan sama ada latihan yang diberi oleh guru
mahupun latihan di dalam perisian multimedia tersebut.
5.0
Setiap kajian akan mempunyai kajian lanjutan bagi membantu pengkajipengkaji yang akan lakukan kajian. Terdapat beberapa cadangan kajian lanjutan yang
telah pengkaji sediakan iaitu:
1)
Cadangan kajian lanjutan ini dibuat supaya pengkaji seterusnya dapat menguji
keberkesanan tunjang komunikasi dengan lebih mendalam. Setiap aspek komunikasi
iaitu kemahiran membaca, kemahiran mendengar, kemahiran bertutur dan juga
kemahiran menulis akan dikaji keberkesanan setiap kemahiran tersebut dengan lebih
mendalam.
2)
Penilaian bagi modul bertema yang telah digariskan oleh Kementerian Pelajaran
Malaysia boleh dikembangkan dengan menilai dari aspek yang berlainan seperti
830
melihat aspek kognitif, psikomotor, dan sebagainya. Penilaian ini juga boleh dilihat di
dalam pelbagai tunjang yang ada di dalam silibus pelajaran prasekolah. Berdasarkan
dapatan daripada kajian yang dijalankan, tujuan yang dibina pada awal kajian telah
dicapai dengan semua persoalan kajian telah dijawab. Terdapat beberapa rumusan dan
kesimpulan yang telah dibuat. Tujuan kajian yang pertama ialah merekabentuk
pembangunan
perisian
multimedia
interaktif
dengan
menerapkan
Tunjang
RUJUKAN
Ab. Ghani., Azmi, A., & Mohd Nor, H. (2009). ICT Literacy (ICTL) Programme :
THE MALAYSIAN EXPERIENCE. Proceedings of UNESCO- APEID
International Conference World Bank-KERIS High Level Seminar on ICT in
Education: ICT Transforming Education.
Bandura, A. (1986). Social Lerning Theory. Kuala Lumpur: PTS Publications &
Distributor Sdn. Bhd.
Gordon, J., & Zemke, R. (2000) The attack of ISD. Training Magazine. Vol 37(4) pp
42-53.
Hair, J., Money, A., Samouel, P., Y & Babin, B. (2003). Essential of Business
Research Methods, New York: John Wiley and Sons Inc.
Jamaluddin Harun & Zaidatun Tasir, (2001). Pengenalan Kepada Multimedia. Kuala
Lumpur : Venton Publishing Sdn. Bhd.
831
Karuovic, D., & Radosav, D.(2009). Adaptive User Interface Design In Multimedia
Courseware. Diperolehi pada 5 Julai 2010 daripada IEEE Xplore database.
Rafidah Binti Sitam (2009). Teori Perkembangan Kognitif (Piaget & Vygotsky).
Jurnal Mingguan.
832
mazlena@gapps.kptm.edu.my
ABSTRACT
In any society, the educational system is closely related to societal needs and
thus it cannot ignore the political, economic and cultural-ideological factors
which influence its functions. As a result, educational systems have
environments that give them purpose and meaning and define their functions,
limitation sand conflicts. In Malaysia, since independence one of the national
objectives has been unity;hence forth, all the enacted educational policies have
stated that unity is their overarching objective. The National Language Policy
declared that Malay language is the national language and medium of
instruction in the national schools. The centralized school curriculum and
examination, and the inclusion of subjects like civic studies, are attempts to
ensure integration, tolerance, and national consciousness. The notion of
Bangsa Malaysia, which means one Malaysian race introduced by Dr.
Mahathir Mohamad in 1991 as part of his vision of 2020, aimed at bringing
greater national integration among the various ethnic groups within the
country. Schools encourage students of one race to make an effort to study and
understand the other races, their cultures, beliefs, and religions. For example:
the Indians must understand all about their Malay and Chinese fellow
Malaysians, and the same applies to the Malays and Chinese. Teachers who
address the differences and add them to the curriculum will succeed in
creating a multicultural classroom that will advocate the educational goals of
all students.
833
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The basis for conflict between the ethnic groups stems from identity
contestation in the form of language and culture. In the 1970s, the Malays advocated
that the core of the national culture should be that of the Malay. This assimilative
approach was unkindly viewed by the Chinese and the Indians. Relationships between
the ethnic groups are rather complex, intricate and sensitive, especially when dealing
with matters of religion, culture and language. These features are important in identity
contestation, a phenomenon created by the British in the context of colonial
knowledge and its investigative modalities. According to Shamsul, it is through the
colonial practice of codifying, documenting and representing the social, cultural,
economic and political state in history that modern identities in Malaysia like
Malay/Malayness,
Chinese/Chineseness
and
Indian/Indianess
have
emerged,
consolidated and fortified. Realizing the danger of creating distrust among the ethnic
groups the government had rescinded the assimilation strategy and sought the policy
based on the multicultural model.
834
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
Social scientists have studied the process of national integration from three
universal theoretical perspectives. First, the general systems theory analyzes whether
there is a regular and continuing inter-connectedness in the subsets or elements of a
system. Inter-connectedness is the main ingredient in the formation of value
congruence in a system. The formation of value congruence is why all ongoing social
systems actually show a tendency toward a general system of common cultural
orientation. Second, the transactional or communication salience theory of others has
also been used to explain both the degree to which people are connected and the way
changes in the direction of communication affect the direction of integration. The
movement of mass populations into different regions of a country is a significant way
of achieving integration between a people and its territory, and also between different
groups within the population.
2.1
Education in Malaysia
environment. Some of the studies have explicitly clarified the institutional support
that has direct impact on teacher education . Learning about each others cultures, and
also learning about cultures they dont know together, like the Tainos (Dr. James A.
Banks, 2000). The really important thing I want to point out is that its not the race of
the teacher, but a set of cultural characteristics that make them effective with children
of color. It is essential to explore the efforts of a larger institution that have indirectly
and subtly affected teacher education programs. Clearly, most institutions of higher
learning are gatekeepers for the status quo, and usually are reluctant to change. Any
announced policy would have an impact on the education equity in a campus. Then,
what issues should be recognized in order to diversify an institution? What progress
has been made by other institutions approved to be useful for teacher education
programs? And why is it so difficult to make change in an institution?
The major challenges experienced in multicultural education are (a) the lack
of proper academic structure to address the different needs of students from various
cultural backgrounds and needs to forward multicultural curriculum transformation,
(b) the inability of the students to participate in meaningful academic processes and
(c) the experience of prejudice and segregation directed to students from multicultural
background by teachers, classmates, and the people from the community. Cultural
pluralism, within a democratic sense, assumes that different political, religious, or
ethnic groups can equally exist within a single society. Also, it demands that political,
economic, social, and educational opportunities are equally provided for each cultural
group. It is not an issue in this study to discuss and promote an insight into how
political, economic, and social institutions, principles and criteria, and power relations
are to be established and to be functioning in a pluralistic society (Rasit Celik, 2014).
These factors along with other factors hinder multicultural societies from achieving
high quality education especially the education provided to students not of the
dominant culture. The same thing can be said about the educational system in Turkey.
In Turkey, the attention of the educational system to the diverging cultural needs of
each student group has remained asymmetrical and inadequate resulting in
inappropriate and irrelevant education received by students in all levels of education.
837
838
2.2
One of the initial reactions to the riots of 1969 was the formation of the
national ideology or Rukenegara (the nation's ideology). The belief in God is the first
statement of the National Ideology or Rukunegara which was formulated in 1970. It
has provided the direction for education, national unity, justice, liberty, diversity and
progress. It declares that Malaysians are dedicated to achieve a greater unity of all its
people, regardless of their ethnic origins or religion affiliations. The principles of
Rukenegara are: Faith in God, loyalty to king and country, upholding the constitution,
the
839
Ethnic interaction can, among other things, promote a realistic sense of interethnic integration. This is because when groups work together toward common goals
further opportunities are presented for developing and discovering similarities of
interest and values. The vision school consists of three schools clustered in one
common area that is the Malay School, the Chinese School and the Tamil School.
Each school is given the autonomy to implement its own educational programs. The
three schools share some common physical amenities, such as the canteen, playing
fields, assembly areas and corridors. The aim is to bridge the gap amongst the
different ethnic groups as well as to inculcate a love for the country and to nurture
and sustain unity and tolerance. These three trends were landmarks in the fight
against discrimination and misunderstanding. They have achieved the greatest degree
of unity and social justice among members of the Malaysian community.
2.3
2.4
Multiculturalism
Multicultural education is designed to develop citizens in democratic societyby considering the needs of all students. It makes explicit how issues of race,
841
Over and above these, the benefits of multiculturalism have been revealed in a
number of studies. Researching on the importance of multiculturalism in higher
844
education, the above cited studies have established that multiculturalism in education
is beneficial in as far as it increases productivity because a variety of mental resources
are available for completing the same tasks and it promotes cognitive and moral
growth among all people. Over and above this, multiculturalism has been seen to
enhance creative problem-solving skills through the different perspectives applied to
same problems to reach solutions as well as increasing positive relationships through
achievement of common goals, respect, appreciation, and commitment to equality
among the intellectuals at institutions of higher education. The same authorities are
also in agreement that multicultural education renews vitality of society through the
richness of the different cultures of its members and fosters development of a broader
and more sophisticated view of the world.
2.4.2
In those teacher education classroom the elements of a strong peer culture was
apparent. Although in the beginning of this study peer culture was not one of the foci,
as the study progressed, issues related to the preservice teachers experience started to
connect with the classroom context and their shared culture. The difference between
the teachers perspectives and the students perspectives on the classroom community
indicate that there were two cultures operating in and around classroom community.
On the one hand, there was the school culture, which represented the rules,
regulations, and objectives of the teacher education program.
On many occasions, it is the cultural policies and orientation of the nationsstate that place minority communities at a disadvantage. Theorists of multiculturalism
maintain that most states, including western liberal democracies, have a majoritarian
cultural bias, i.e., their policies and practices express the culture of the majority. This
cultural orientation of the nation state places ethnic and cultural minorities at a
disadvantage in the public arena. Moreover, the continued presence of majority
culture in national and public life gives that culture certain legitimacy. Its customs
845
and practices appear to be neutral, and are often treated as symbols of the nation-state
rather than those of community.
2.5
This study examines the politics and practices of education in Malaysia within
the context of ethnicity and nation-building. The central focus in this paper is a
discussion of educational policies in terms of multi-ethnicity, multi-religions and
multi-languages. Though Jordan is not considered as multicolored as Malaysia, it
faces from time to time incidents of violence, intolerance and misunderstanding.
Lessons learned and their possible applications in the Jordanian context will be
examined.The study also explores the level of tolerance and understanding practiced
among Malaysian students regarding the diverse heritage in a multicultural classroom
environment and nation building. It stresses the government of Malaysia's efforts in
managing its complex ethnic, cultural and religious differences to bring about a sense
of national unity and a culture of peace and harmony through education. The research
seeks to examine how the ethnic, racial and cultural needs of a country's student
population are considered when creating the education policy of a country
.
3.0
METHODOLOGY
846
4.0
847
Table 4.1 : Content analysis of the national and civic education curricula in Malaysia
848
5.0
DISCUSSION
In view of the social, economic and political challenges that Jordan is facing
nowadays in light of the popular revolts in some Arab countries, the need has become
urgent to review the academic curricula in general and the national and civic
education curricula in particular. The revision would absorb the successful universal
international identity and its representation among the youth; thereby reaffirming to
them the concepts of allegiance and affiliation to become capable of dealing
positively and actively with the requirements of citizenship. I believe that the future
of Jordan lies in our ability to unite. National unity without a common identity is an
exercise in futility. People need to come to terms with the fact that we need to coexist in harmony, and this can only happen if there is genuine respect and acceptance
of differences. Public education should only serve the interests of unifying the society
and should clearly not have a divisive effect. It is the responsibility of the government
to develop and safeguard the education system which truly promotes the principle of
"unity in diversity". The goal is to maintain national integration in which all the
various cultural communities could live alongside each other while maintaining their
own original identities. Schools and institutions of education are in a unique position
to address the teaching and learning of diversity by creating an environment that will
allow positive interaction among students from different backgrounds. Unfortunately,
we are more inclined to search for differences rather than recognize commonalities.
Diversity among various groups should be a source of strength. If we can accept each
other, we can go a long way to unite Jordan and make it strong and resilient. While
stressing the whole, it is recognized that the individual has rights which should be
respected and not lightly encroached upon. We must be aware of the obstacles and
difficulties that lie in front of us in order to circumvent hurdles and strategize our
efforts in the most optimum manner. Co- curriculum activities encourage students to
interact with each other. Therefore, they will be able to get to know each other
closely. As a result, unity can be achieved. Students should be encouraged to reflect
upon their learning and be able to transfer it across the curriculum to situations
outside the curriculum. Through social cohesion, students will learn, understand,
849
accommodate and assimilate each other. Schools must act as the lighthouse of the
society, providing direction and guidance. One of the key instruments to create a
cohesive society is education. Achieving that will require resolve from the
government to remedy the causes, not just the symptoms. Nevertheless, the
educational policy alone cannot elicit tolerance, peace and cultural harmony. The
government has to rise up and play its role in bringing people to a melting pot where
everybody feels that justice and equality is fully served. There should be zero
tolerance to any ethnic or racial remarks and actions. All men are created equal, and
the government should bear that in mind.
Malaysia will remain one of the few nations in the world today, whose
experience and track record in dealing with many ethnicities and many cultures is a
useful one. It is useful for other countries to study closely and perhaps gain some
useful insights from it. Considering that we are all God's creation, we should be able
to work out ways by which we are able to live with one another in harmony and
mutual regard, just as we would with people of our own kind. The seeds of national
unity must be sown among the young. They must be taught and convinced of the
benefits of peaceful co-existence. While Malaysia can point to some measures of
success in its efforts, I would never presume to prescribe the exact Malaysian
experience to other countries since it may fail miserably when taken out of the
Malaysian context. Jordan must choose the path that suits its own circumstances.
REFERENCES
Dr. James A. Banks (2011).Multiculturalisms Five Dimensions, on Multicultural
Education
851
aqiss_highlander@yahoo.com, mailto:marina@tmsk.uitm.edu.my
ABSTRACT
This paper investigates the possible effect of applying two approaches which
is Pair Programming and Integrating Visualization Programming. Integrating
visualization programming into the programming courses have been used
increasingly in various education levels from children to higher learning
education. It is a way to increase the motivation, skills and understanding rate
among the students. There are many categories of programming learners such
as novices and expert. Most novice programmers will face some difficulties in
writing a program because they lack skills such as critical thinking and
problem solving. To overcome the incompetence problem among novices,
many teaching methods have been introduced, among which are the
visualization programming and the pair programming. The visualization
programming is installed on each PC for lab session. Meanwhile for the pair
programming process, each student in the pair plays their roles as driver and
navigator. Students need to exchange the roles between each other. Pair
programming will make the two people make the best design or optimal
solution. There are many ongoing researches that had been done to compare
the effectiveness of teaching programming and learning between the
traditional classrooms. For this study, carried out an experiment involving
visual programming and programming. Where all the students which consists
of 104 students divided into four groups, namely A ,B, C and D.Group A
representative group using traditional techniques, using techniques pair
programming is Group B, using visualization programming is Group C and
Group D programming technique uses a combination of
852
visualization
programming and pair programming. Each group consists of men and women
of a total of 26 students. Moreover, a technique that involves the selection of
pair programming must emphasize navigator and the driver. Method that used
in the selection of pairing is to consider the data and the results of CGPA
students and SPM Mathematics results. Besides that, the methods used in this
visual technique by applying the Ville as a tool for learning technique that run
for the Group C. The experiment consists of two categories: pre test and pos
test. Pre test carried out by all groups using the traditional method, while
Post Test performed according to different methods for each group.Purpose of
doing Pre and Post test to identify the level of student achievement after
answering questions quiz given.Therefore this research will investigate the
outcome of combining the two approaches that are pair programming and
visualization programming to increase the students performance in learning
programming. By involving the two approaches, a new teaching of
programming strategy can be achieved in terms of the teaching approach and
pedagogical strategies. The result and the finding from the research which
can be highlighted the performances of combining the two approaches; pair
programming and visualization programming more increase which is the
result by mean statistic is 80.0 while approach by using pair programming is
mean of statistic is 60.0 which same as well approach that use visualization
programming. Finally the result and finding for traditional method is 38.0 for
mean stastistic.The result shown that by combining the two approaches; pair
programming and visualization programming as the technique for learning
programming have been increased the performance of learning programming.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Traditional classrooms for learning and teaching programming are often set
wherein the instructor and the students interacts by listening their dialogues,
explaining by drawing in the whiteboard, Q&A session which text-based activities
and regular assessment given for students coursework. Students who are majoring in
853
There are some techniques required to involve the two approaches, the
instructor nee to prepared the setting in the lab session, where student will sit by
pairing and each one of them need to play the roles as driver and navigator(Hanks, B.
F,2004) The instructor needs to divide the pairing according to their skills level. The
division of pairing is not just simply divide because instructor need to consider based
on their previous result.Mostly,students will learn more when they are teaching
somebodyelse.Responsibility of the driver will operates the keyboard and mouse,
meanwhile the navigator set their focus and following the execution on the screen and
alert to prevent any kinds of errors. They have a set of time before they need to move
position when switching the roles(Hanks, B. F.,2004).The cooperation between
pairing are important, each partners need to give pay attention to each other, including
looking to each other when they are talking and listening. Other than that, pair
programming will improve the spirit of teamwork and communication skills by doing
discussion to solve programming tasks.
2.0
PROBLEM STATEMENT
They are used to subjects where assisting classes and studying a text book is
enough. However programming demands intense work extra classes (Gomes,
Anabela1, Mendes, A. J.,2007).
Although no
standardization of framework
visualization
design,
developers.
thousands
In the
of
software
educational
field,
E-learning
has moved forward to visualization programming. Not only in the class that can apply
the visualization tools. The main constraints in developing visualization programming
are there is no standardization of visualization tool features has become a major
problem for developers in choosing the suitable visualization tools for educational
purposes (Essi lathinen et.al, 2006). This is very important because this is the way to
capture student engagement with the programming and increasing the strengthen of
students' understanding of the programming learning process.Additionally, the growth
of mobiles technology makes visualization tools can be accessed anywhere and
anytime.
3.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
This section will discuss the review of literature of previous research that is to
investigate the varying number of learners performance learning programming. This
section also will contain the two approaches that will implement to improve learning
programming: pair programming and integrating visualization tools. This literature
will aims by implement two approaches in classrooms or lab session for learning
programming courses. The efficiency result will be found by the arrangement of
assignment and quiz.Futhermore, instructor will know and survey of learner
comprehensive in learning programming process
856
3.1
Learning Programming
There are several activities that may involve in learning programming such as
learning the language features, program design, and program comprehension.
Traditional approach that student will learn in textbooks and programming courses is
to start with declarative knowledge about a particular language.However,many studies
show the most difficulties that will faced mostly from novice programmers, so its
3.2
Pair Programming
As we can see, why pair programming works in two people because it can
make better design decision than one person to solve the programming task (Stuart
Wray, 2010).We can characterize the flow of programming as a series of design
decisions that are translated into code.
3.3
for developing visualizations are divided into different levels according to Blooms
taxonomy of the levels of cognitive development(Sorva, J et. al ,2013 ).
3.4
The concept of pair programming where involve two programmers sit side by
side at one computer, to develop or solve the programming software or tasks. Then
they are need to work as collaboratively on the same algorithm,design,solve the
programming tasks and also debug any error will occur (Sanjay Goel, Vanshi
Kathuria,2010 ).
Each of person in pair plays roles as driver and another one as navigator.
After in some period of time will switch the roles .Below is the responsible as driver
and navigator:
The responsible to driver: (Stuart Wray,2010)( Zacharis, N. Z. (2011).
a) Responsible what they write the code in the screen.
b) Tell the partner what in the mind, sharing what they thinking and give
reason why they are entering any particular element of the code.
c) Respond to the feedback from the navigator must be open to talking out
through problems
859
Jennifer
Bevan,
Linda
(2001)
Laurie
Williams,
D.Scott
McCrickar,
Lucas (2008)
Dillenbourg
(1999)
Wrays
(2010)
Greenwald
(2014)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Based on the analysis from five articles regarding features of pair programming,
there are several guidelines that need to follow ,,to ensure pair programming that we need to
implement in classroom or lab session successful delivered. It is essential to follow step by
step of ach features because it is the way to measure how successful pair programming will
improve the performance of learning programming
860
3.5
Below is Table 2: the comparison with four articles regarding principles learning
programming:
Level of
taxonomy
.
Knowledge
(Recalling of
information
Comprehension
(Interpreting,
translating
abstraction)
Application
(Identifying an
appropriate
abstraction)
Analysis
(Breaking down
a problem or
comm.into parts )
Richard
Gluga,
Judy Kay
, (2010)
Describe the representation of
numeric and character
data.
Test on the observation
And recall of information
learnt
Understand how precision and
round-off can affectnumeric
calculations./translating
concept algorithm
Discuss the use of primitive
data types and built-in data
structures.
Describe common applications
for each data structure in the
topic list.
To apply the data structure
implementing
the solution for any real world
problem/apply process and
algorithm pattern
Implement the user-defined
data structures in a high-level
Language./ Develop new
application analyze its
important
Test on the ability to
understand the information
and translate it into a different
context
Breaking a programming task
861
Shuhaida
Shuhidan
Margaret
(2009)
Husain,
M.
(2013)
Errol
Thompson
(2008)
X
X
Synthesis
(Identifying and
putting together
abstractions to
create a
Evaluation
(Commenting on
the validity of a
work)
Compare alternative
implementations of data
structures with respect to
performance.
Based on the analysis from four articles regarding the principles of learn
programming, there are several important characteristic that need to be concern. All
the principles of learning programming must be follow according the Blooms
Taxonomy.
3.6
862
4.0
METHODOLOGY
The method uses in the research are comparison study and document
review. The steps use in methodology is illustrated below :
Preliminary
Research
Analysis
Analysis
Features Pair
Programming
Identify
Principles
Learning
Programming
Finding
Visualization
Tool
5.0
FINDINGS
863
Comprehension
Application
Analysis
Principles of Learning
Programming
Describe the
representation of
numeric and character
data.
Visualization category
Illustrative visualizations
Presenting concepts,
demonstrative, used to
introduce a new subject.
Utilizing visualizations
Modify some parts of the
program code to make
certain changes to the
functionality of the
program, use visualization
to better understand the
program changes
Problem-Solving
visualization Debug
broken program code,
analyse program
behaviour, use
visualization to help
understanding
Synthesis
Evaluation
Illustrative visualizations
Presenting concepts,
demonstrative, used to
introduce a new subject
Productive visualizations
Use the visualization tool
as a visual debugger when
the student independently
writes program code, or
visualize the assignment
description
Discerning visualizations
Visualizing solutions to a
problem and comparing
or evaluating them
Features Pair
Programming
Choosing partner with
different skills level and
work ethics
Supervised setting to
experience the mechanics
of successful pairing
(divide roles as driver and
navigator)/ switch roles
periodically.
-Between pair spot the
error or the code is
syntactically correct but
semantically wrong, or
where theres a fault in
the design itself.
-Independently find
answers on their own
Fighting the Poor Practise
(choose the algorithm/
design wisely, do not
waste time to try and
error)
Independently find
answers on their own
Evaluate performance
based on individual work
and collaborative
assignment
864
From the analysis, visualization programming will virtualize the programming code,
requires the student understanding (Kirby, S, et.al, 2010).
All the features for these approaches must be follow and consistent with the
principles of learning programming. These principles of learning programming must
be match according the Bloom Taxonomy. There are six level of Bloom Taxonomy as
phases or process of learning which is Knowledge, Comprehension, Application,
Analysis, Synthesis and Evaluation (Shuhaida Shuhidan, et.al, 2009). Purpose of
following the Bloom Taxonomy to measure the learning outcome of learning
programming can improve by use these approaches (Errol Thompson, 2008). The
learning outcome is very important because it describes significant and essential
learning that learners have achieved, and can reliably demonstrate at the end of a
course or program. In other words, learning outcomes identify what the learner will
know and be able to do by the end of a course or program (Richard Gluga, 2012 ).
6.0
CONCLUSIONS
of students that learn programming may increase. This approaches can be applied
and upgrade the teaching and learning medium for programming to be fun and easy
to understand. From the research ,can conclude that by implementing the two
approaches; pair programming and visualization programming can support and
increase teaching and learning performances for novices compare with another
approaches in learning programming courses.Besides,it will help learning and
teaching more effective and get the higher retention rate of students in produce better
in learning outcome.
866
REFERENCES
Jenkins, On the difficulty of learning to program, in Proc. of the 3rd Annu.
LTSN_ICS Conf., Loughborough University, United Kingdom, August 2002.
Williams, L., Kessler, R., Cunningham, W., & Jeffries, R. (2000, July/August
2000).Strengthening the case for pair programming. IEEE Software, 17(3).
Robins. A, Janet, R. and Nathan,R. (2001).My program is correct but it doesnt run:
A review of novice programming and a study of an introductory
programming.
Hanks, B. F.(2004). Distributed pair programming: An empirical study. Extreme
Programming and Agile Methods-XP/Agile Universe 2004, Proceedings.
Yehezel C.2002 A Taxanomy Computer Architecture Visualization, Proceedings 7th
annual conference on Innovation and Technology in Computer Science
Education.
A. Gomes, L. Carmo, E. Bigotte and A. J. Mendes, Mathematics and programming
problem solving, in Proc. of the 3rd E-Learning Conf. Computer Science
Education (CD-ROM), Coimbra, Portugal, September 2006.
Jennifer Bevan, Linda Werner, Charlie Mc Dowell,(2001)Guidelines for the Use Pair
Programming in a Freshman Programming Class,IEEE,University of
California
in
CS1/2,International
Journal
of
Advanced
Computer
Science,Vol,3,No.7,Pp.355-362.
Minjie
Hu,Michael
Winikoff,Stephen
Cranefield,(2012),Teaching
Novice
Computering
Education
Conference
(ACE2012),Melbourbe,Australia.
Anthony Robins, Janet Rountree and Nathan Rountree (2003), Learning and Teaching
Programming; A Review and Discussion, Computer Science Education,
Vol.13, No.2, pp, 137-172
Isabel
Huet,Osvaldo
Rocha
Pacheco,Jose
Tavares,George
Weir(2004).New
Abdullah Mohd Zin, Sufian Idris, Nanthan Kumar Subramaniam, (2006), Improving
Learning of Programming Through E-Learning by Using Asynchronous
Virtual pair Programming,Turkish Online Journal of Distance Eductaion,Vol.7
No.3.
868
Kim Man Lui, Kyle Atikus Barnes, and Keith C.C. Chan,(2010), Pair Programming:
Issues and Challenges, Springer -Verlag Berlin Heidelberg.
Sanjay Goel, Vanshi Kathuria, (2010), A Novel Approach for Collaborative Pair
Programming, Journal of Information Technology Education, Vol.9.
Richard Gluga Judy Kay, Raymond Lister, Sabina Kleitman, Tim Lever,(2006), OverConfidence and Confusion in Using Bloom for Programming Fundamentals
Assessment, Proceedings of the Tenth International Conference on Intelligent
Tutoring Systems, Springer.
Shuhaida Shuhidan, Margaret Hamilton ,Daryl DSouza,(2009), A Taxonomic Study
of Novice Programming Summative Assessment, Eleventh Australasian
Computing Education Conference (ACE2009), Wellington, New Zealand.
Sorva, J., Karavirta, V., and Malmi, L. (2013),A review of generic program
visualization systems for introductory programming education. ACM Trans.
Computer. Educ. 13, 4, Article 15.
P. Crescenzi and C. Nocentini, (2007), Fully integrating algorithm visualization into a
869
Kaila, E., Rajala, T., Laakso, M.-J., and Salakoski, T. 2010. Effects of course-long use
of a program visualization tool. In Proceedings of the 12th Australasian
Conference on Computing Education (ACE10). 97106.
Kirby, S., Toland, B., and Deegan, C. 2010. Program visualization tool for teaching
programming in C. In Proceedings of the International Conference on
Education, Training and Informatics (ICETI10).(APVis03). 111116.
Teemu Rajala, Mikko-Jussi Laakso, Erkki Kaila, Tapio,(2007), VILLE A
Language-Independent Program Visualization Tool, Proc. of the Seventh
Baltic Sea Conference on Computing Education Research, Koli National Park,
Finland Salakoski.
870
ABSTRACT
871
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Background
Nigeria is endowed with natural resources in oil, water, land, agriculture and
human capital. Unfortunately, despite these resources, a great percentage of Nigerian
people is substantially poor. There is a high rate of unemployment as a result of
insufficient entrepreneurship development, hence making the majority of Nigerians
poor. It is regrettable that despite various government reforms such as the enactment
of Industrial Development (Income Tax Relief) Act, Cap 17, Law of the Federation of
Nigeria 2004 youth unemployment is perpetually increasing.
and
promote
entrepreneurship
(Garba,
2010;
Adejimola
and
Olufunmilayo, 2009; Gurtner and Christensen, 2008; Onwubiko, 2008; Bazo, 2008).
Okauru (2009) explains that tax incentives are some of the approaches to encourage
small scale business development in Nigeria.
Tax incentives are tools for macro- economic development. Tax incentives are
described as all measures that provide for a more favourable tax treatment of certain
activities or sectors compared to what is granted to general industry. Under this
description, a general cut in the tax rate or a generous depreciation scheme applicable
to all firms would not be considered tax incentives (Klemm, 2009, p. 3).
Many low-income countries, with high public debt and those in which the
majority of the population live below the poverty line (less than one United States of
America dollar a day), have embraced tax incentives. Their spending in tax
expenditures has decreased the revenue received, reducing these countries' capacity to
assist the needs of the poor members of the society. Ironically, Swift (2006) argues
that the poor members of the society do not benefit from tax incentives because their
income is usually below the tax thresholds.
872
Transitional nations such as Nigeria also use tax incentives, but in most cases
they have not taken sufficient steps to make tax incentives accountable for economic
development such as entrepreneurship. Nigeria has engaged in many macro-economic
reforms such as National Economic Empowerment Development Strategy (NEEDS)
(2004) and National Poverty Eradication Programme (NAPEP) (2001). These have
not yielded the desired effect, a setback identified in the literature is the lack of
enhanced cooperation between the government and the public (Litwack 2013;
Gberevbie, Duruji and Bankole 2013). Tax incentives are created by government to
encourage a stable macro- economic development, but this has failed to make any
significant impact in Nigeria (Klemm, 2009; Bazo, 2008)
Tax incentives work only if certain pre-conditions are met, and provided the
correct design is adopted. However, the benefits remain doubtful if their costs are
considered (Klemm, 2009; Bazo, 2008; Surrey, 1974). According to Bazo (2008) tax
policies are expected to be beneficial from a tax standpoint. They are expected to
favour the nations economy through the creation of jobs, environmental investment,
construction, infrastructure and creating an overall improvement which may help to
reduce poverty. But sometimes there is a problem and they are not as beneficial as
expected.
A proactive preventive approach to the problem requires a critical
evaluation of existing tax incentives available to pioneer companies to
determine the growth of entrepreneurship in the nation to ensure that tax
activities are carried out in accordance with established goals, policies
and procedures (Valenduc, 2009, p.4).
Hence, the main argument of this study is based on the pressures caused by
unemployment, and tax incentives are mainly analysed as one tool of entrepreneurship
attraction to reduce the pressure of unemployment. Empirical analysis is used to
illustrate the relationship between tax incentives and entrepreneurship development,
highlighting pioneer tax incentives and their relevance. The new and old arguments
are combined to produce a set of criteria that can be used to evaluate tax incentives.
As an additional innovation, this study inevitably repeats many well-known points in
the area of study in order to provide a self-contained discussion of the issue.
873
Five issues distinguish this research from earlier studies. First it promotes a
discussion on the link between tax incentives and economic development in terms of
employment creation, through entrepreneurship development. Second, it brings to
light the more worrisome issue of ignorance of the real likely cost of tax incentives as
an omission in the government appropriations. Third, earlier studies on tax incentives
have not paid adequate attention to transitional economy. This study breaches this
gap; it focuses on the Nigerian economy. Forth, efficient allocation of resources in
governance is emphasised to reduce the menace of tax evasion and corruption in a
transitional economy, as a scholarly contribution to employment strategy, with
emphasis on economic development and sustainability. Fifth, it modifies the method
used in Mayburov and Leontyeva (2014). It utilizes a unique methodological style in
the assessment of the relationship between tax incentives and entrepreneurship, by
using the concept of cost/benefit analysis procedure, with tax incentives as cost end
entrepreneurship development as a benefit.
1.2.
Concerns about how the connection between tax policy and state aid policy
might distort investment were central to the European Unions code of conduct, on
business taxation initiated by the European Council in December 1997. Despite
numerous studies the economic debate over the impact of tax incentives remains
controversial.
874
Beside economic issues, there are other problems like poverty, lack of
education, inadequate health care, low employment, lack of infrastructure and
corruption (Adejimola and Olufunmilayo 2009; Gurtner and Christensen 2008; Bazo
2008; Abolo 2001). Litwack (2013) argues that seventy million Nigerians are poor.
According to World Bank (2012) Nigeria country profile statistics indicates an
income inequality of 0.49; this is correlated with differential access to infrastructural
amenities.
Poverty remains
significant
with GDP
growth rate
of 7.4%
(http://www.worldbank.org/ng).
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
unfortunate problem became very serious in 2009 at 11.8% which more than doubled
the previous year 2008s figure of 5.8% and it continues to rise without regaining its
year 2008 position. This result has serious unpalatable implications on the economic
development of Nigeria and particularly the live of Nigerian youths.
2.0
2.1
Youths are to be employed, they have the energy and sometimes untapped
endowment that could be promising for a nations development. Therefore, this study
is leaving no stone unturned in the proper analysis of how far tax incentives can go in
entrepreneurship development, so that employment efforts of government would be
complemented. Tax incentives research tradition has established what constitutes tax
incentives but its efficiency over the set goal of economic development remain an
empirical question (Surrey, 1976; Klemm 2009; Valenduc, 2009).
Hence, tax
Hypothesis
The problem of high poverty rate due to youth unemployment may be solved
by the influence of policies. But the question is whether or not tax incentives are the
right and adequate approaches to solve them, especially when there is no model for
measuring the influence of tax incentives in investments.
876
Tax regulators and policy makers will find this study useful in the area of
developmental reforms and policy review. Multinationals and home countries shall
have information on other avenues to explore for tax incentives information as it
relates to their investments.
references.
2.2
Review of Literature
Tax incentives by their nature represent a revenue cost for the government and
may be a drain on the revenue of the government if it is not well focused. It is because
the government would have deprived itself of the revenue that it would have
generated if the incentives had not been granted. Stanley, Surrey and McDaniel
(1985) argue that the logic of the sacrifice is that the reduction would yield higher,
social, economic and political dividends in the long run, through increased output,
lower prices and employment generation
program and must, therefore, be analysed in spending terms. To attempt to discuss the
program as if it were a normative tax provision is to disregard this fact. The main
categories of tax incentives are shown in Tables 1 and 2.
Specification
Incentives
1.
General Incentives
2.
Export Incentives
Infrastructure
Research
Development
6
Local
raw
utilization
Foreign Investors
Capital Importation
Foreign
domiciliary account
878
Source: Industrial Development (Income Tax Relief) Act, Cap 17, LFN 2004. Pioneer status.
Gurtner and Christensen (2008) argue that tax incentives shift the burden to
workers and consumers, which reduce job creation and slow down economic
development. According to Moore (2007) there is little doubt that taxing is one of the
most important things that governments do. Correspondingly, it is widely agreed that
it is important that governments should get tax policy right. This study is not
empirical as to the likely measure of the problem identified.
Specifications
1.
Industrial
Sector
Incentives
2.
Oil
and Petroleum
Gas Sector
Gas
Extension of 3 years.
tax holiday to 5years
0% PPT& 0% Royalty on Gas Transferred
15% investment capital allowance
Oil & Gas free 100% repatriation of Capital and profit, Expatriate
zone
quota. No
foreign exchange regulation
3.
Agriculture
Solid
Minerals
5.
Tourism
6.
Energy
7.
Telecom.
8.
Non-Oil
Sector
domiciliary account
Setting up of special export development fund and
export adjustment fund scheme
Establishment of export processing Zone
Zero-rated value added tax
880
3.0.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
3.1
Research Design
The structure of the process and procedure of this study is descriptive, and this
belongs to the generic family research design type called survey design. In view of the
descriptive nature of this study that involves the perception of a large population of
participants, survey design is adopted for the study.
According to Vconnect.com (2010) there are one thousand, nine hundred and
twenty-five (1925) small scale entrepreneurial industries in Lagos state. This
constitutes the population. The sample size was three hundred and thirty-one (331).
Cluster random sampling was used to select them from the population. This research
follows the style in Unam (2012). The sample size was determined using the Slovins
formula n =
e is the margin of error. Therefore the sample size for this study was determined as
follows:
N = Population = 1925
= Margin of error of 5%
n=
n=
n=
n=
n=
2008). This sample was drawn from four industrial clusters of Lagos metropolis as
shown in Table 3 They are Akoka/Yaba/Surulere, Ikeja, Agege/Isolo/Oshodi and
Lagos Island where there are clusters of entrepreneurs. It was considered a good
representation of the respondents group since the ultimate is how representative the
sample is of the population (Gupta 2009; Asika 2008). Copies of the questionnaire
were distributed to three hundred and thirty-one respondents. Two hundred and
seventy- three (273) copies were retrieved and two hundred and fifty-five (255) were
adequately analysed.
For the purposes of this study, a questionnaire in five- point Likert scale form
was adopted. The questionnaire was designed in such a way as to provide vital
answers for the research questions and hypotheses testing.
The questionnaire
contained a set of questions classified into two major sections; section A and section
B. Section A featured seven questions on bio-data of the respondents. It includes
job sector and line of business. Section B comprised of fourteen statements of
assertion and open-ended questions in the Likert scale form. These are designed
primarily to provide information for testing the hypotheses. A Likert scale normally
measures the intensity of agreement by the respondent to a statement that asserts a
phenomenon. The categories being tested are strongly agree, agree, undecided,
disagree and strongly disagree. Therefore, the questionnaire is outlined and
interpreted with points of degree of agreement, as Strongly Agree (5), Agree (4),
Undecided (3), Disagree (2) and Strongly Disagree (1).
Ikeja
Oshodi/
Akoka/Yaba/
Lagos
Agege
Surulere
Island
Total
Population
114
100
107
79
400
80
70
75
55
280
72
76
65
60
273
18
questionnaire distributed
Copies of questionnaire
returned.
Copies of questionnaire
882
rejected.
Copies of questionnaire
67
68
64
56
255
analysed.
Source: Field survey 2010
The research instrument was subjected to content validation to ensure that the
content of the instrument measures the variables investigated in the study. The first
draft of the questionnaire was given to two Ph. D accounting students, based on
their suggestions improvements were made; the improved copy was given to two post
graduate lecturer who also made a positive input. The input was incorporated in the
final copy, which was used in carrying out the study.
3.3
4.0
4.1
Presentation of Data
Completed copies of the questionnaire are used for the analysis from two
hundred and fifty-five (255) valid respondents out of the three hundred, and thirty-one
(331) distributed. The response rate represents about 77% of the total sample. 72.2%
883
of the respondents were in the informal sector and 27.8% in the formal sector. As
shown in Table 4
Table 4 : Respondents Job sector
4.2
Frequency
Percent
Cumulative Percent
FORMAL
71
27.8
27.8
INFORMAL
184
72.2
100.0
Total
255
100.0
%
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
884
%
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
4.3
Entrepreneurship
Tax
Incentives
Entrepreneurship
Correlation
1.000
-.028
Coefficience
.570
Significance
255
255
Correlation
-.028
1.000
Coefficience
.570
Significance
255
255
N
Tax Incentives
N
Source: Field survey 2010
4.3.1 Hypothesis
Table 5 predicts a not significant and negative correlation between the tax
incentive and entrepreneurship in Nigeria at a correlation of -.028 at .570 level of
significance, two-tailed. Therefore, this study accepts the null hypothesis and
concludes that there is no significant relationship between tax incentives and
885
4.4
Result Discussions
This result is robust and interesting; this result is not disappointing, and it is
because respondents are helpless in their entrepreneurship efforts. They have to
express their dissatisfaction with the level of assistance that they are receiving from
Nigeria in the area of tax incentives that is not supportive to a large extent.
Nigerian idle youths are angry, they now kill people in cold blood, one of the
possible causes is that tax incentive initiative in Nigeria addresses only the output end
of capacity development solving problem. To address the input end, therefore, a
complementary approach in the form of entrepreneurship growth of self-employment
may be required (Inyang & Simon 2012; Oyedeji 2012; Adejimola and Olufunmilayo
2009; Bazo 2008).
886
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
5.1
This study evidences that tax incentives do not represent adequate policy in
the face of unemployment, as they do not adequately impact on entrepreneurial
development in Nigeria. A mixed system of minimum taxation regulatory standards
and policies would better harness the power of tax incentives, in developing the
Nigerian economy in a cost effective manner. In a situation where it is believed that
government is powerful and has command of a substantial level of resources, good
practice necessitates improved tax incentives strategy. The solution to effectiveness of
tax incentive lies in with the re-invention of the nature and purpose of government to
develop the nation, in order to make sustainable economic development a reality in
Nigeria.
887
5.3
Recommendations
Findings from this study call for some recommendations towards a positive
relationship of tax incentives with entrepreneurship development in Nigeria.
Specifically government, public servants and entrepreneurs
small and medium enterprises (MSMEs) with sufficient tax incentives would
go a long way to improve the countrys fortunes so that tax incentives policy
meets the peoples expectation.
2. It is in the interest of good governance to have disciplined approaches to
decisions on policy implementation and a willingness to continue with
approaches advanced in this study. It is necessary to provide a more open
government in order for tax incentives to achieve the desired relationship with
entrepreneurship development in Nigeria.
3. All citizens and organisations should appropriately pay tax according to the
existing tax laws in Nigeria in order to contribute to the funding of good
governance.
4.
The current national and regional policy thrusts like the National Economic
Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS), the New Partnership for
Africas Development (NEPAD), National Poverty Eradication Programme
(NAPEP) and Small and Medium Enterprises Development Agency of Nigeria
(SMEDAN) should continue to sensitise the public, especially the youths on
the need for self-reliance in entrepreneurship, towards poverty eradication,
employment generation and wealth creation for self and the fatherland
Nigeria.
888
5.4
feelings. Thus, it is only possible to discuss evidence based on individual opinion. For
this reason, this study does not pretend to offer exhaustive comprehensive analysis,
but instead provides some in order to show how tax incentives relate to
entrepreneurship development. The study provides a statistical interpretation of the
results to reduce this limitation. Future research should look at evidences that are
available in the public domain. In order words, there are needs for researches that
would utilize materials that can be gathered from secondary data and regulatory
reports concerning tax incentives and entrepreneurship in Nigeria.
REFERENCES
889
Gupta, S. P. (2009). Statistical Methods. New Delhi. Sultan and Sons Educational
Publishers.
Gupta, S. & Hofmann M .A. (2003).The effect of state income tax apportionment and
tax incentives on
Gurtner, B. & Christensen, J. (2008). The race to the bottom: Incentives for New
Investment. Retrieved on
September
6,
2013
from
http://www.taxjustice.com
Inyang, B. & Simon, E.D. (2012). Unemployment and Persistent Poverty in the Niger
Delta Region of Nigeria: A Constraint to Sustainable Development in the 21st
Century Nigeria, Mediterranean Journal of Social Sciences 3 (2).
Litwack, J. (2013). 70 Million Nigerians are poor says World Bank. Jigawa State
poorest in Nigeria.
Retrieved
on
September
6,
2013
from
http://www.tribune.com.ng
Moore, M. (2007). How Does Taxation Affect the Quality of Governance? Working
paper series, 280. Brighton: IDS. Retrieved on February 26, 2015, from
http://www.opendocs.ids.ac.uk.
890
Nigeria business directory index (2013). Retrieved on October 20, 2013 from
http://www.nigeriagalleria.com
Okauru, I.O. (2009) How corporate Nigerians can maximize on the provisions of tax
incentives for private sector contribution to sports development in Nigeria.
Retrieved on July 10, 2010 from http://www.dawodu.com/omoiguifl.htm.
Retrieved
on
May
15,
2010
from
http://www.cipe.org/programs/women.
Surrey, S. S (1976). The Tax Expenditure Concept and the Budget Reform Act of
1974, Boston College Law Review, Volume 17, Issue 5 Number 5 Article 1.
2014,
from
http://www.tradingeconomics.com/Nigeria/Unemployment
Unam, J. (2012), Materials Management for Business Success: The case of the
Nigerian Bottling Plc.
International
Journal
of
Economic
and
891
ABSTRAK
892
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
Pelajar Institusi Pengajian Tinggi (IPT) di negara ini digesa mempelajari dan
menguasai
kompetensi
serta
kemahiran
keusahawanan.
Menerusi
platform
graduan
yang mempunyai
kemahiran
mengenal
dimanfaatkan menjadi
pasti
peluang
ruang kerjaya
dengan sikap dan kompetensi keusahawanan yang masih tidak dapat dikuasai
sepenuhnya oleh pelajar (Hariyaty, 2014; Normah, 2014). Kurang yakin dengan
kebolehan diri sendiri, kurang berinisiatif, tidak cekal dan tidak berdaya tahan dalam
menghadapi cabaran keusahawanan membuatkan pelajar cenderung memilih kerjaya
makan gaji sebaik bergraduat (Hariyaty, 2014). Isu pengangguran ini turut
membelenggu graduan yang mengikuti program khusus dalam bidang pendidikan
893
ekoran masih ada graduan Ijazah Sarjana Muda Pendidikan (ISMP) daripada pelbagai
IPTA termasuk Universiti Pendidikan Sultan Idris (UPSI) yang masih menganggur
dan masih menunggu penempatan sebagai guru di sekolah (Sinar Harian, 2012).
Terdapat sebilangan kecil graduan dari universiti berkenaan yang gagal dalam
temuduga dan ujian INSAK. Ini menunjukkan bahawa pelajar yang mengikuti
pengajian dalam bidang pendidikan tidak diberi jaminan mendapat penempatan di
sekolah sebagai guru pada masa hadapan. Pelajar yang mengikuti program ISMP di
IPTA perlu bijak mencari alternatif pekerjaan lain atau menjadi usahawan yang
mencipta peluang kerja untuk diri dan mampu pula menawarkan pekerjaan kepada
orang lain (Normah, 2014).
cemerlang
dalam
kepimpinan
pendidikan,
UPSI
turut
menekankan
dengan
memberikan
tumpuan
terhadap
sembilan
teras
kompetensi
keusahawanan seperti yang disyorkan oleh Lucia dan Lepsinger (1999); Norita,
Armanurah, Habshah, Norashidah dan Ooi (2007) serta Slocumn, Jackson dan
Hellriegell (2008); iaitu kompetensi berinisiatif, melihat dan merebut peluang,
mencari maklumat, menitiberatkan mutu kerja, komitmen terhadap kerja, membuat
894
2.0
KAJIAN LITERATUR
Saranan Slocum dan rakannya di atas juga bertepatan dengan Addis (2003)
dan Mohd Yusop (2003) yang menegaskan bahawa kompetensi adalah tunjang utama
dalam pembentukan pekerja berpengetahuan dan berdaya saing. Hakikatnya, bakal
graduan perlu melengkapi diri dengan berbagai kemahiran generik atau kompetensi
asas seperti kompetensi keusahawanan. Kompetensi atau atribut generik tersebut
boleh dibangun dan dikembangkan oleh pelajar dengan menyertai aktiviti serta projek
yang disediakan oleh universiti (Kadderi 2010).
3.0
METODOLOGI
Reka bentuk kajian ini ialah tinjauan dengan menggunakan pendekatan kuantitatif.
Pemilihan reka bentuk dan pendekatan tersebut adalah bertepatan dengan saranan
Hair, Clark, Babin, Anderson dan Tatham (2006) yang menyatakan bahawa tinjauan
adalah satu prosedur untuk mengumpul data primer berbentuk kepercayaan, pendapat,
sikap, gaya hidup hingga kepada maklumat berkaitan latar belakang umum seperti
jantina, umur, pendidikan, dan pendapatan individu. Penggunaan kaedah tinjauan ini
turut disokong oleh Wiersma (2000) yang mengakui bahawa ia merupakan kaedah
yang sesuai dan baik jika ingin mengukur atau menilai diri, persepsi serta pencapaian.
Pengurusan dan Ekonomi, 2014; Normah, 2014). Namun, hanya 149 daripada pelajar
terbabit dilibatkan sebagai sampel kajian ini dan ini menepati saiz sampel
sebagaimana yang disarankan oleh Sabitha (2005) dan Sekaran (2006) yang
menyatakan bahawa adalah memadai jika peratusan sampel diambil melebihi 35
peratus daripada populasi (dalam Normah, 2014).
Alat kajian atau instrumen yang digunakan dalam kajian ini ialah borang soal
selidik dengan skala laporan kendiri atau skala penilaian kendiri yang menghendaki
pelajar menilai diri mereka dengan menggunakan Skala Likert lima mata (Leedy &
Ormrod 2010). Instrumen telah ditadbir kepada sampel kajian pada penghujung
minggu ke empat belas dalam semester pengajian 2013/2014 iaitu sebaik kursus
Budaya Keusahawanan bagi sesi tersebut tamat.
Data yang dikumpul dari kajian ini dianalisis secara deskriptif dengan
menggunakan perisian Statistical Package for Social Science (SPSS). Analisis
deskriptif dilaksana bagi menghasilkan taburan kekerapan dan peratusan profil latar
belakang responden. Manakala skor min dan sisihan piawai digunakan untuk
mengenal pasti tahap kompetensi keusahawanan pelajar UPSI yang menyertai Kursus
Budaya Keusahawanan. Penilaian skor min bagi tahap kompetensi pengurusan adalah
menggunakan skala seperti Jadual 1.
Tahap
1.00-1.67
1.68-3.34
3.35-5.00
4.0
Kajian ini melibatkan pelajar UPSI yang menyertai program kursus Budaya
Keusahawanan semester 2 Sesi 2014/2015 dengan objektif utama kajian untuk
897
perancangan
sistematik
(min=3.87).
Manakala
tahap
kompetensi
keusahawanan yang tinggi dan paling dominan ialah komitmen terhadap perjanjian
kerja (min=4.20). Namun, kompetensi keusahawanan yang mencatat tahap sederhana
ialah kemampuan meyakinkan orang lain (min=3.16) dan berinisiatif (min=3.23).
Kompetensi Keusahawanan
Min Sisihan
Tahap
Piawai
1
Berinisiatif
3.23
0.56
Sederhana
3.80
0.58
Tinggi
Mencari Maklumat
3.62
0.45
Tinggi
3.75
0.54
Tinggi
4.20
0.49
Tinggi
3.87
0.52
Tinggi
Penyelesaian Masalah
3.63
0.55
Tinggi
Keyakinan Diri
3.53
0.56
Tinggi
0.58
Sederhana
Menerusi kajian ini, didapati bahawa sikap pelajar yang menyertai Kursus
Budaya Keusahawanan di UPSI yang memberikan sepenuh tumpuan terhadap kerja
yang perlu siapkan perlu dicontohi oleh pelajar lain. Malah mereka juga akan
membuat apa sahaja untuk menyiapkan kerja yang diamanahkan. Mereka turut
mengaku bahawa apabila mereka membuat sesuatu kerja untuk seseorang, mereka
akan cuba sedaya upaya membuat orang itu berpuas hati dengan hasil kerja mereka.
Selain begitu komited terhadap perjanjian kerja, mereka juga pada masa yang sama
tidak akan membiarkan kerja yang mereka laksana mengganggu keluarga atau
kehidupan peribadi mereka.
898
Dapatan kajian ini adalah bertepatan dengan kajian Slocum et al. (2008) yang
menyatakan bahawa usahawan perlu memiliki komitmen terhadap perjanjian kerja
dalam sebuah pasukan kerja yang berkualiti dan rajin bagi memudahkan pelaksanaan
segala urusan berkaitan aktiviti mencipta nilai untuk organisasi serta masyarakat.
Amalan dan kebolehan menunjukkan komitmen terhadap perjanjian kerja ini amat
penting dalam menjayakan aktiviti keusahawanan. Dapatan ini juga didapati selari
dengan Norfadhilah dan Halimah (2010) yang turut mendapati bahawa
ciri
keusahawanan yang tinggi seperti komited terhadap kerja wujud dalam kalangan
pelajar institusi pengajian tinggi awam (IPTA) seperti Universiti Utara Malaysia,
Universiti Islam Antarabangsa Malaysia dan Universiti Teknologi Malaysia. Justeru,
kompetensi ini perlu terus digalak dan disuburkan dalam diri pelajar menerusi
platform pendidikan keusahawanan.
Ke arah menghasilkan kualiti kerja yang baik dan sentiasa ada peningkatan;
para pekerja perlu kerap membuat perbandingan mutu
sendiri dengan orang mutu kerja orang lain. Sikap percaya pada diri berkaitan
kebolehan dan kemampuan untuk memperoleh apa yang ingin dicapai merupakan
keperluan asas dalam menghasilkan kualiti kerja yang bermutu. Ini juga adalah selari
dengan saranan Mohd Hassan (2007) yang menyatakan bahawa seseorang yang
mempunyai keyakinan diri mempunyai motivasi untuk melakukan sesuatu selaras
dengan apa yang diinginkan dalam pemikirannya. Kebolehan ini menyebabkan
mereka tidak gentar mencuba sesuatu dan menghadapi kegagalan.
Sehubungan
itu,
disarankan
agar
tenaga
pengajar
Kursus
Budaya
Kompetensi keusahawanan yang mencatat tahap skor min yang kedua rendah
dalam kajian ini ialah berinisiatif. Kompetensi ini masih lagi di tahap sederhana
dalam kalangan pelajar yang mengikuti Kursus Budaya Keusahawanan di UPSI.
Dapatan kajian ini bercanggah dengan kajian yang dilakukan oleh Ummi Aishah,
Sheffe, Maslinda dan Norbaizura (2013) terhadap pelajar tahun akhir program
Diploma Perniagaan Tani di Kolej Profesional MARA (KPM) yang merekodkan
tahap kompetensi keusahawanan seperti berinisiatif dalam kalangan pelajarnya adalah
tinggi.
Sesungguhnya,
individu
yang
memiliki
inisiatif
yang
tinggi
akan
menunjukkan daya usaha yang kuat dan proaktif untuk meneroka keusahawanan,
bertindak awal dalam menyediakan keperluan serta gigih mencari peluang yang ada.
Inisiatif yang tinggi perlu dikuasai oleh pelajar UPSI untuk tampil kompeten dalam
pengajian mereka (Zuraidah, Suzyanty dan Asmawi, 2007). Namun, pelajar kursus
Budaya Keusahawanan di UPSI dalam kajian ini belum cukup berinisiatif ekoran
masih lagi menunggu arahan dari orang lain sebelum mengambil apa-apa tindakan
berhubung kerja yang ditugaskan itu. Namun, apabila sudah memulakan tugasan
tersebut; mereka berubah menjadi seorang yang komited.
900
Dapatan kajian ini adalah selari dengan dapatan beberapa kajian lepas yang
menyatakan bahawa pelajar perlu memiliki tahap kompetensi keusahawanan yang
tinggi untuk lebih berjaya dalam situasi pembelajaran dan kehidupan yang penuh
persaingan (Wan Hartini, Zaliha dan Zaihan, 2003; Norasmah et al., 2012, Normah,
2014). Memandangkan kesemua tujuh kompetensi keusahawanan yang lain mencatat
tahap yang memuaskan dalam kajian ini, maka kesemua komponen kritikal tersebut
perlu terus disuburkan dalam diri pelajar bagi membolehkan mereka tampil berdaya
saing dalam bidang keusahawanan sebelum menjejaki alam pekerjaan yang serba
mencabar di masa hadapan sebagaimana yang ditegaskan oleh Rohaila (2006),
Kadderi (2010) dan Rohana (2010).
adalah amat penting bagi memantapkan pelajar yang juga bakal pendidik dengan ciriciri serta kemahiran keusahawanan sebagai generasi pelapis agen perubahan negara
kelak. Pihak Kementerian Pelajaran Malaysia (KPM) khususnya Jabatan Pengajian
Tinggi dan pihak pengurusan di UPSI perlu sedar akan hakikat bahawa kursus
keusahawanan yang ditawarkan di universiti tersebut mampu menyumbang kepada
pembangunan kompetensi keusahawanan dalam kalangan bakal guru. Kepentingan
untuk memupuk kompetensi keusahawanan adalah seiring dengan kepentingan
membentuk daya tahan dan daya saing bakal pendidik tersebut. Penelitian semula dan
penambahbaikan latihan pembangunan keperibadian siswazah UPSI yang lebih efektif
menerusi kursus-kursus pembudayaan keusahawanan perlu terus dilaksana dan
diperhebat. Sebagai aset kepada negara ini, pelajar UPSI yang bakal bergraduat
adalah penyambung generasi pemimpin dan penggerak ekonomi negara kerana semua
profesion adalah bermula dengan didikan seorang pendidik bergelar guru.
5.0
RUMUSAN
RUJUKAN
Abdullah@Mat Yusof Yaakob, Azizee Aziz & Laila Musa. (2012). Keberkesanan
program karnival minggu usahawan (KMU) terhadap ciri-ciri kompetensi
keusahawanan dalam kalangan pelajar Jabatan Perdagangan Politeknik
Mukah, Sarawak. Digest Penyelidikan (1): hlmn. 8-6.
Addis, M. (2003). Basic skills and small business competitiveness: some conceptual
considerations. Education + Training 45(3): 152-161.
Fayolle, A., Benoit, G. & Narjisse, L.C. (2007). Towards a new methodology to
assess the entrepreneurship teaching programmes. Handbook of Research in
Entrepreneurship Education: A General Perspective. Edward Eldgar:
Cheltenham.
Hair, J.F., Clark, W. C., Babin, B.J, Anderson, R.E. & Tatham, R.L. (2006).
Multivaritae Data Analysis. Edisi ke-6. UK: Prentice Hall.
903
Hariyaty Ab Wahid. (2014). Keusahawanan Sosial, Daya Tahan dan Daya Saing
Pelajar Institusi Pengajian Tinggi di Malaysia. Tesis Dr. Fal. Pakulti
Pendidikan UKM. Bangi.
Hariyaty Ab Wahid, Norasmah Othman & Suria Mohd Salleh. (2013). Social
entrepreneurship contributions on the competitiveness of active students in the
Students in Free Enterprise Program (SIFE) Malaysia. Proceedings of 6th
International Seminar on Regional Education UKM-UNRI2013, hlm. 19191929.
Ibrahim Mamat, Wan Mohd. Zaifurin Wan Nawang & Noorun Nashriah Ramli.
(2009). Nilai, sikap dan amalan pegawai kanan institut pengajian tinggi
terhadap program pembangunan usahawan siswa. Jurnal Kemanusiaan 14: 96115.
Kadderi Md. Desa. (2010). Perkembangan Pelajar dan Kompetensi Generik. Dlm.
Salleh Amat, Riza Atiq Abdullah O.K. Rahmat & Zaharah Zainal (pnyt).
Mengilham Harapan, Mencipta Masa Depan: Pengalaman Pembelajaran di
UKM. Penerbit Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia. hlm. 99-109.
Leedy, P.D. & Ormrod, J.E. (2010). Practical Research Planning and Design. Edisi
ke-9. Boston: Pearson Education, Inc.
Lucia, A.D., & Lepsinger, R. (1999). The Art and Science of Competency ModelsPinpointing Critical Success Factors in Organizations. San Francisco: John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.
904
Small Business
Ming, Y.C., Wai, S.C. & Amir Mahmood. (2009). The effectiveness of
entrepreneurship education in Malaysia. Education + Training 51(7): 555566.
Gagasan
Dan
Cabaran
Merealisasikannya.
www.islamgrid.gov.my/muamalat/static/pdf/15%20JAN%202009/.
[21
September 2010].
Mohd Yusop Abd. Hadi. (2003). Measuring the infusing of generic skills in teaching
process as an effort to develop K-Workers skill upon students: a case study
among the educators. Prosiding 2nd International Conference on Measurement
and Evaluation in Education (ICMEE). hlm: 24-39.
Nor Aishah Buang & Yap, P.M. (2002). Kesediaan guru-guru perdagangan di
Wilayah Persekutuan dari aspek pengetahuan kaedah pengajaran dan sikap
terhadap pengajaran subjek pengajian keusahawanan. Jurnal Teknologi 37 (Dis
2002): 1-16.
905
Norita Deraman, Armanurah Mohamad, Habshah Bakar, Norashidah Hashim & Ooi,
Y. K. (2007). Keusahawanan : Teori dan Praktis. Kuala Lumpur: McGraw Hill
Education.
Norfadhilah Nasrudin & Halimah Harun. 2010. Aspirasi kerjaya keusahawanan dalam
kalangan pelajar institusi pengajian tinggi awam. Jurnal Pendidikan Malaysia
35 (1): 11-17.
Noor Faizah Mohd Lajin, Hardy Loh Rahim & Jamalunlaili Abdullah. 2012. Social
Entrepreneurship at Universiti Teknologi MARA: The SIFE Model. Asean
Entrepreneurship Conference.: hlm 365-370.
Rohana Abdul Rahim. (2010). Minat Kerjaya, Efikasi Kendiri Keputusan Kerjaya,
Kemahiran Employabiliti, Dan Pilihan Kerjaya Pelajar Vokasional Pertanian di
Semenanjung Malaysia. Tesis Dr. Fal, Fakulti Pendidikan, Universiti Putra
Malaysia.
Sinar Harian. (2012). PKR: Import guru, kerajaan diskriminasi graduan ISMP. (atas
talian)
http://www.sinarharian.com.my/nasional/pkr-import-guru--kerajaan-
906
Syed Zamberi Ahmad. (2013). The need for inclusion of entrepreneurship education
in Malaysia lower and higher learning institutions. Education + Training
55(2): 191-203.
Ummi Aishah Mohd Mustafa, Shaffe Mohd Daud, Maslinda Mohd Senon, Nur
Baizura Mohd Ismail. (2013). Kecenderungan kerjaya sebagai usahawan
dalam kalangan pelajar Bumiputera tahun akhir diploma perniagaan Tani.
Seminar Pasca Siswazah dalam Pendidikan. Kolej Professional Mara (KPM)
Beranang.
Wan Hartini Wan Hassan, Zaliha Hussin & Zaihan Abd Latip. (2003). Sikap Daya
Saing Siswa Siswi Di Uitm Kampus Alor Gajah Dalam Kecemerlangan
Akademik. Biro Penyelidikan dan Perundingan, Universiti Teknologi Mara,
Shah Alam, Selangor
Zuraidah Zainol, Suzyanty Mohd Shokory & Asmawi Hashim. (2007). Faktor-Faktor
Yang Mempengaruhi Pertumbuhan Perniagaan Baru Di Malaysia. Laporan
Penyelidikan. Universiti Pendidikan Sultan Idris.(tidak diterbitkan).
907
ABSTRACT
There is a need for high contribution from both supervisor and his/her supervisee
during the supervision process. This leads for mutual understanding and strong
faithful between them that draw closer to the bond development. It is believed that
both parties have to play their roles respectively. Supervision of students can be
viewed as uncertainty process. It should be enhanced with relevant support from
the supervisor. This paper explains the level of bond that develops between
students and supervisors quantitatively. 30 respondents were selected randomly
with convenience sampling and the data was analyzed descriptively. It is
suggested that the supervisor should be more concerned about the input given
during their session and the supervisee has to seek for agreement during the
process. It is hoped to provide clear picture of what a supervisor should give in
terms of students perspective.
Keywords: students supervision, bond development, supervisor.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
According to Abiddin and Ismail (2014), one of the most significant current
issues reported in students studies is the pressure towards their graduation. Disadvantage
students will feel this as a burden with lack of support from institution and supervisors.
The institutions at the same time are striving in maintaining the quality and best services
908
to the students. The students come from different ages, cultures, experience and ability
that might change over time. In addition, they need to undergo a process of developing
and creating new knowledge while proposing innovative work and submitting a report.
The relationship between student and supervisor are so significant to determine the
successful of a project. Lack of student-supervisor relationship will affect their studies
and cause the longer graduation time.
The expectation that both supervisor and supervisee bring into supervision are
important issues that often have impact upon the supervisory relationship and process
(Bahrick, 1990). The study deployed by Bahrick (1990) showed that the supervisee rated
most important a pleasant relationship with the supervisor, structured sessions and the
supervisors use of didactic method. It explained that these qualities correlated positively
with supervisees ratings of supervision with supervision. Thus, this paper will highlight
the criteria in students supervision that can be considered as weak and need to be
improved.
Their needs and problems should be concerned since they are the main factors in
project completion. The institution has a high responsibility and has students pursuing
studies in various skills. Higher education is no longer the sanctity of the elites but
accessible to students from varied backgrounds and from all levels of society. Students
would have gained places at these institutions of with varying entry-level qualifications.
Therefore, it is essential that they are exposed to the best resource and culture to ensure
that they receive optimum learning processes to help them develop and maximize their
capacity and to inspire them so that in turn they develop into the innovative and creative
workforce that the nation needs.
2.0
OBJECTIVE
This paper will look into the relationship between supervisor and supervisee
during their project supervision. The important factors on supervision outcome will be
909
determined. Besides, the effective way of supervision will be outlined based on students
perception and needs.
3.0
RESEARCH QUESTION
The research questions that will be addressed in this paper are as follows:
i. What are the factors that contribute to projects completion?
ii. What are the roles of a supervisor?
iii. What are the supervisors experiences during supervision?
4.0
METHODOLOGY
The respondent of this study were determined from Electronic and Electrical
department in a Malaysian Technical and Vocational Education and Training (TVET)
institution. 15 supervisors and 15 supervisees were selected randomly with specific
criteria (students must undergoing their final year project and supervisors with more than
5 years of experience) whom are involved in project and supervision activity. The
sampling method was convenience sampling. They were asked with a range of questions
about their experience in supervision process. These included the activity in their
meetings and what they expected from each other. The questionnaire was adapted from
Supervisory Working Alliance Inventory (SWAI) from Efstation et al. (1990). The
instrument had been sent to the expert for the content validity process. The Cronbach
alpha for the items is 0.84.
5.0
McAlpine and Weiss (2000) found that a student will become the closest
colleague with their supervisor eventually. Therefore, the experience and the perception
can be highly influenced by the cooperation and the nature of the relationship between
them. This includes the characteristic factor such as gender and ethnicity (Ellis, 2001).
The similar situation also has happened in supervisors world especially the new
910
supervisors. They are also coming from diversity of background, trying to adapt with new
environment, to achieve performance index and excellence in research work. They are
comparable with students in balancing these factors and put themselves in the new
environment that placed high quality standard (Acker & Armenti, 2004).
It is the research skills that will lead an academician to be successful in academic
world, not the teaching skills (McMahon, 2001). Nevertheless, the need to teach is still
required as it is their main job as well as supervising students at the same time. The
problems might occur if the weightage of teaching credit hour is too large that affects the
time for students supervision. Supervisor should see supervision as a teaching
responsibility or implement their teaching and learning tasks in their discipline. On the
other side, the academicians seem to have lack of chance to learn how to develop and
support the students during their studies (Golde & Dore, 2001).
6.0
911
7.0
perceived
positive
SWA,
they
also
perceived
greater
work
satisfaction. Sterner (2009) also stated that as supervisees' perceptions of the quality of
the SWA increase, their perceptions of work-related stress will decrease. The Pearson
correlation was statistically significant, r = -.56, t = -5.59, p < .001, with an alpha level of
.05. Horrocks & Smaby (2013) supported Bordins (1983) suggestion that strong SWA
are beneficial to supervisory outcomes. Thus, it is important to put the focus on SWA as
the SWA are the predictive of supervisee growth and accomplishment.
8.0
There are so many authors claim that the responsibility of a research falls to the
supervisors and some of them falls to the students. Nevertheless the amounts of
responsibilities actually differ for each of the research stage (Ismail et al., 2011). Lee
(2008) suggests that supervisors need to be aware of both the positive and negative
aspects of each of these conceptual approaches which include a desire to enthuse,
encourage, recognize achievement and offer pastoral support.
Student and supervisor have different views regarding the important factor in
projects completion. It is clear that the roles of supervisor and student are utmost
important as compared to other factors as in Table 1. Interestingly, the supervisors put
the most responsibility to the students with mean of 4.9 while the student put the
responsibility to the supervisor with mean of 4.5. According to Ismail and Abiddin
(2009), students need support from the institution in terms of support and services that
912
culminates the graduate offices, library, online services, laboratories and thesis writing
guidance. The highest cumulative mean for both students and supervisors falls to
Students Role, indicates that the most contributing factor to projects completion comes
from the student responsibility.
Table 1: Factors that are contributing to projects completion.
Mean (Supervisors
Mean (Students
view)
view)
Supervisors role
4.4000
4.6000
4.5
Equipment provided
4.2000
4.5000
4.35
Students role
4.9000
4.5000
4.7
Management of institution
4.0000
4.5000
4.25
4.0000
4.4000
4.2
Factors
Cumulative Mean
submission
Based on the study, most of the supervisor feels that it is important to interact
with students before the process of more technical in supervision being done as in Table
2. Ensuring work quality and standard falls at second important with mean of 3.9. It
follows by work monitoring with mean of 3.8. Supervisors role such as problem
anticipating, acquiring thesis writing skills and concern about research progress perceived
as Moderate -Highly important with mean of 3.5.
913
.87560
fellow students
Ensuring work quality and standard: Ensuring that work is always of a
3.9000
.31623
3.8000
.63246
Submitting drafts for review: Ensuring that drafts of every chapter are
3.7000
.67495
3.5000
.52705
3.5000
.70711
Concern about research progress: Showing interest in students work and 3.5000
.70711
they always help their supervisee to stay on track with mean of 4.1 and try to understand
their supervisee with mean of 4.00. They also think that their supervisee is comfortable
working with them and encourage them to formulate their own idea in their project with
mean of 4.00 respectively. The supervisees have reported that there are infrequent
meeting with their supervisor with 30% of them practice regular meeting while 70% of
them did not follow. It is supported by Spear (2000) that the students always complain
regarding unavailability of the supervisors in the campus or too busy with
administrative/teaching responsibilities.
To build upon the work reported in the current paper it is clear that supervision
guidelines could be introduced to help both student and supervisor to react based on their
responsibilities. The agreement and understanding between them should be designed in
their first meeting. The bond that develops between them is still at a medium level and
this can be enhanced with the openness of heart and mind during the process. Academic
staff for instance, should be exposed to certain training regarding students supervision. It
is believed that the experienced supervisors are more competent and capable in managing
the relationship. Thus, they are hoped to assist new supervisors in doing their
responsibilities. However, the students on the other hand, seem to have lack of confident
and feeling of isolation with their supervisors. They are lack of curiosity in their field and
afraid to meet their supervisor. In this context, the student himself needs to be motivated
and the supervisors should create a culture that can develop the students. The results
could help in providing the necessary rationale to the institution in this area. Another area
for attention is how the institution ensures the quality of the project outcome.
9.0
Theoretically, this study explains the scope of a supervisor and provides the real
situation in supervision practice. It also provides the best role of a supervisor. The
outcome will minimize the gap in research of supervision. It also contributes to the
practical implementation where institutions can adapt these ideas into their system.
915
Institution should take this issue seriously in maintaining their quality and to enhance the
image.
10.0
The findings presented here, although from a small scale study, show the
intricacies of the student-supervisor relationship in a research/project work. It could not
be generalized to other situation but possible to those who shares similar environment.
Since it is only confined to technical and engineering respondents, the supervision
practice of other discipline might be varied. This study only provides a holistic view of
what an effective supervision should be carried out.
11.0
CONCLUSION
This study found that both supervisor and student have equal role in supervision
process. The supervisor should allow the student to explore areas of interest. In other
words, the supervisor should strive to facilitate and encourage a spirit of adventure and
academic probing. Institution of Technical and Vocational Education needs to move on
from here or work simultaneously with these processes to ensure that there is constant
improvement which impact directly on development of knowledge workers. It has
responsibility to provide these students with an effective resource including effective
supervision. Good supervisory system are very important to smoother their study process.
If this is not precisely managed, the process of developing human capital will be
hindered.
REFERENCES
Abiddin, N.Z., Ismail, A. (2014). Exploring Service and Support Needs in Postgraduate
Education towards the Higher Education Quality. Asian Social Science, 10(17),
52.
916
Acker, S., & Armenti, C. (2004). Sleepless in academia. Gender and Education, 16 (1),
3-24.
Bahrick, A. S. (1990). Role induction for counselor trainees: Effects on the supervisory
working alliance. Dissertation Abstracts International, 392.
Bordin, E. S. (1983). A working alliance based model of supervision. The Counseling
Psychologist, 11, 35-42.
Efstation, J. F., Patton, M. J., & Kardash, C. M. (1990). Measuring the Working Alliance
in Councelor Supervision. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 37, 322-329.
Ellis, E. M. (2001). The impact of race and gender on graduate school socialization,
satisfaction with doctoral study, and commitment to degree completion. Western
Journal of Black Studies, 25 (1), 30-45.
Golde, C. M., & Dore, T. M. (2001). At cross purposes: What the experiences of doctoral
students reveal about doctoral education. Philadelphia, PA: A report for the Pew
Charitable Trusts.
Horrocks, S., & Smaby, M. H. (2013). The Supervisory Relationship: Its Impact on
Trainee Personal and Skills Development. Retrieved February 16, 2013, from
American Counseling Association: http://www.counseling.org/
917
Lee, A. (2008). How are doctoral students supervised? Concepts of doctoral research
supervision. Studies in Higher Education, 33(3), 267281.
Maxwell, T. W., & Smyth, R. (2009). Theorising about higher degree research
supervision: A tripartite view. Higher Education Research and Development.
Maxwell, T. W., & Smyth, R. (2010). Research supervision: the research management
matrix. High Educ, 59,407422.
McAlpine, L., & Weiss, J. (2000). Mostly true confessions: Joint meaning-making about
the thesis journey. Canadian Journal of Higher Education, 30 (1), 1-26.
Todd, M. J., Smith, K., & Bannister, P. (2006). Supervising a social science
undergraduate dissertation: staff experiences and perceptions. Teaching in Higher
Education, 11(2), 161 - 173.
918
ABSTRACT
Keywords:Semisolid
metal
(SSM)
Processing;
Cooling
slope
1.0
INTRODUCTION
near-net-shape
metal
components(Omar,
Palmiere,
Howe,
surface finish, free from porosity, possessing fine uniform microstructure, which may
be heat treated to give superior mechanical properties (Arif, Omar, Muhamad,
Syarif&Kapranos, 2013; Hirt, Dremer, Witulski&Tinius, 1997;Chen, Hao& Sun,
2002). The main requirement of thixoforming process is thixotropic properties where
the alloys can stand or stiff like solid if undisturbed and flow like liquid when
sheared(Kirkwood, 1994). These properties could be achieved when the
microstructure of the alloys consist of solid spheroidal structure in a liquid
matrix(Omar, Atkinson, Howe, Palmiere, Kapranos&Ghazali, 2009). There are
various methods to generate such structures, e.g., strain-induced melt activation
(SIMA), magnetohydrodynamic stirring (MHD) and cooling slope (CS) (Salleh,
Omar, Syarif, Alhawari& Mohammed, 2014).
microstructure
2007;Salleh,
Omar,
Syarif,
(Haga,
Nakamura,
Alhawari&
Tago&Watari,
Mohammed,
2014).
2010;Birol,
The
non-
dendriticmicrostructures are rounded into solid spheroidal grains due to the melting of
the eutectic phase and the spheroidisationprocess when the alloys are heated into its
semisolid range for certain holding times (Arif, Omar, Muhamad, Syarif&Kapranos,
2013).
SSM processis still ongoing (Salleh, Omar &Syarif, 2015). In this paper,
thixoformability of a novel Al-5%Si-0.8%Cu-1.2%Mg aluminium alloywas
investigated.The microstructures, yield strength and ultimate tensile strength (UTS) of
the thixoformed alloy before and after T6 heat treatment were also observed.
2.0
METHODOLOGY
The aluminium alloy used in this study was Al5Si0.8Cu1.2Mg which was
fabricated via a gravity casting process.The chemical composition of the alloy was
examined by the X-ray fluorescence (XRF) technique and listed in Table 1.
Thixoforming process was carried out on the alloy billets previously poured ontothe
CS with the pouring temperature of 650 C, 60 tilt angle and cooling length of 400
mm. Thixoforming press was equipped with a hydraulic cylinder press that provided a
load of 20 kN and had a maximum compression velocity of 85 mm/s as shown in
Figure 1. The billets were rapidly reheated (at 130 C/min) into its semisolid state at
570 C for 5 minutes in order to prevent grain growth before thixoforming into a
preheated (at 300 C) stainless steel die. The heating process was performed using a
high-frequency induction coil (3080 kHz, 35 kW) where it was placed under the die.
The heating was monitored using a calibrated K-type thermocouple located 8 mm
from the top of the slug. To prevent oxidation during thixoforming process, argon gas
wasflowed at 2.5 l/min in the thixoforming press.
921
Si
Cu
Mg
Ni
Zn
Mn
0.1
Fe
Al
0.43 Remainder
Air vent
Screw bolt
Heater
Induction coil
Semi solid billet
Refractory
material
Pressure
3.0
922
(a)
(b)
100 m
100 m
1.2
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
DSc curve
1
0.8
Liquid fraction
profile
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
923
(b)
(a)
100 m
100 m
924
Strength (MPa)
340
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
Cylinder Head
Thixoformed
Figure 5: Comparison of Yield Strength and UTS of The Cylinder Head Alloy,
Thixoformed and Thixoformed T6 Al5Si0.8Cu1.2MgAluminium Alloy
4.0
CONCLUSION
925
REFERENCES
Arif,
M.A.M.,
Omar,
M.Z.,
Muhamad,
N.,
Syarif,
J.,
&Kapranos,
P.
Haga, T., Nakamura, R., Tago, R., &Watari, H. (2010). Effects of casting factors of
cooling slope on semisolid condition. Transactions of Nonferrous Metals
Society of China, 20, s968-s972.
Hirt, G., Dremer, R., Witulski, T., &Tinius, H.C. (1997).Lightweight near net shape
components produced by thixoforming. Materials and Design, 18, 315-321.
Omar, M.Z., Atkinson, H.V., Howe, A.A., Palmiere, E.J., Kapranos, P., &Ghazali,
M.J. (2009).Solid-liquid structural break-up in M2 tool steel for semi-solid
metal processing. Journal of Materials Science, 44, 869-874.
926
Paes, M., &Zoqui, E.J. (2005). Semi-solid behaviour of new Al-Si-Mg alloys for
thixoforming. Materials Science and Engineering: A, 406, 63-73.
Salleh, M.S., Omar, M.Z., Syarif, J. (2015). The effects of Mg addition on the
microstructure and mechanical properties of thixoformed Al-5%Si-Cu alloys.
Journal of Alloys and Compounds, 621, 121-130.
Salleh, M.S., Omar, M.Z., Syarif, J., Alhawari, K.S., & Mohammed, M.N. (2014).
Microstructure and mechanical properties of thixoformed A319 aluminium
alloy. Materials and Design, 64, 142152.
927
azlinda@uum.edu.my, surendran@uum.edu.my
ABSTRAK
Kajian ini bertujuan untuk mengenal pasti hubungan antara Kemahiran ICT
dengan Pengintegrasian Bahan Pengajaran Berasaskan Web 2.0. Kajian ini
berbentuk deskriptif dengan menggunakan kaedah tinjauan. Populasi kajian
ini adalah 120 orang pensyarah universiti. Seramai 100 orang pensyarah
telah
dipilih
sebagai
sampel
kajian
dengan
menggunakan
kaedah
berada
pada
tahap
sederhana
dan
manakala
tahap
ICT
dengan
tahap
Pengintegrasian
Bahan
Pengajaran
928
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
1.1
Penyataan Masalah
atas
talian
dengan
menggunakan
Web
2.0
(UTLC,
2012).
Pengintegrasian Web 2.0 ini membantu mengubah landskap abad ke-21 dalam bidang
pendidikan. Ia membentuk pendekatan pelajar untuk belajar, pendekatan pengajar
untuk mengajar dan bagaimana pendidik berinteraksi dengan pelajar (Hargadon,
2009). Berdasarkan senario ini, kajian ini menentukan untuk mengenal pasti tahap
Kemahiran ICT dan tahap Pengintegrasian Bahan Pengajaran Berasaskan Web 2.0
dalam kalangan pensyarah. Kajian ini juga bertujuan untuk mengenal pasti hubungan
929
1.2
Objektif Kajian
1.3
Kerangka Kajian
Tahap Pengintegrasian
Pengajaran Berasaskan
Web 2.0
Kemahiran ICT
Kerangka kajian ini dibina berdasarkan kepada model TAM dan tinjauan
literatur. Variabel bebas kajian ini adalah Kemahiran ICT dan variabel bersandar
adalah tahap Pengintegrasian Bahan Pengajaran Berasaskan Web 2.0. Kerangka
kajian menjelaskan bahawa variabel Kemahiran ICT mempunyai hubungan dengan
variabel bersandar iaitu tahap Pengintegrasian Bahan Pengajaran Berasaskan Web
2.0.
2.0
TINJAUAN LITERATUR
2.1
Kemahiran ICT
adalah rendah
disebabkan oleh kurangnya kemahiran asas yang berkaitan dengan teknologi dan cara
penggunaannya. Kajian juga telah menunjukkan kegagalan dalam pengintegrasian
ICT ini berpunca dari kurang kemahiran dalam menggunakan alatan ICT dan perisian
yang semakin meningkat keupayaannya (Norizan, 2003).
2.2
3.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
Kajian ini berbentuk deskriptif dengan kaedah tinjauan. Populasi kajian ini
ialah 120 orang pensyarah. Berdasarkan Jadual Penentuan Sampel oleh Krejcie dan
Morgan (1970), bilangan minimum bagi saiz sampel yang dicadangkan untuk saiz
populasi 120 orang pensyarah adalah seramai 92 orang.
931
Bil. Item
Sumber
Cronbach Alpha
Kemahiran ICT
0.95
Tahap Penggunaan
12
Moersch (2001)
0.89
Jumlah
18
0.93
Min Skor
Tahap
0.00 2.33
Rendah
2.34 4.67
Sederhana
4.68 7.00
Tinggi
4.0
4.1
932
Frekuensi
Lelaki
33
39.3
Perempuan
51
60.7
20 - 29 tahun
21
25
30 - 39 tahun
38
45.3
40 - 49 tahun
16
19
50 - 59 tahun
10.7
14
16.7
5 - 10 tahun
27
32.1
43
51.2
Jantina
Umur
Pengalaman Mengajar
4.2
Min
3.80
0.99
933
4.3
Min
Tahap Penggunaan
3.42
0.85
4.4
Kemahiran ICT
sig.
.653
.000
Arif dan Jalalludin (2011) yang menunjukkan responden yang mempunyai tahap
Kemahiran ICT yang tinggi juga mempunyai tahap pengintegrasian ICT yang tinggi.
4.5
Implikasi Kajian
4.6
935
5.0
KESIMPULAN
RUJUKAN
Ashinida Aladdin, Afendi Hamat & Mohd. Shabri Yusof. (2004). Penggunaan PBBK
(pengajaran bahasa berbantukan computer) dalam pengajaran dan pembelajaran
Bahasa Arab sebagai bahasa asing: Satu tinjauan awal. GEMA Online Journal
of Language Studies, 4(1). Diakses pada 30 Mei 2014 dari http://www.f
pbahasa.ukm.my/linguistics/Gema/GemaVol4.1.2004Nol.pdf
Cuban, L., Kirkpatrick, H. & Peck, C. (2001). High access and low use of
technologies in high school classrooms: Explaining an apparent paradox.
American Educational Research Journal, 38 (4), 813-834
Hargadon, S. (2009). Education, Technology, Social Media, and You!. Diakses pada 5
Mei 2014 dari http://www.stevehargadon.com/p/my-work.html.
Krejcie, R. V., & Morgan, D. W. (1970). Determining sample size for research
activities. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 30, 607-610.
936
Rosnaini Mahmud, Mohd Arif Ismail, & Jalalludin Ibrahim. (2011). Tahap
Kemahiran dan Pengintegrasian ICT di kalangan Guru Sekolah Bestari. Jurnal
Teknologi Pendidikan Malaysia, 1(1), 5-13.
Wiersma, W. (2000). Research Methods in Education: An Introduction (7th Ed.).
Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
Zuraidah Saidin. (2011). Web 2.0 Dalam Pengajaran Dan Pembelajaran Bahasa
Melayu.
Diakses
pada
Jun
2014
dari
http://www.mlcs.sg
/home/images/MLCS_Gallery/seminar2011/paper1%20%20a1%20kertas%20ke
rja%20beacon%20pri%20final.pdf
937
ABSTRAK
938
1.0
PENDAHULUAN
Bruner (1966) dalam teori pengajarannya mengaitkan naluri ingin tahu dan
pencapaian kecekapan dengan motivasi terhadap minat pelajar. Teknik pengajaran
guru perlulah sentiasa dipelbagaikan, tidak membosankan dan efektif supaya pelajar
berasa seronok untuk ke sekolah dan lebih bersemangat untuk belajar apabila mereka
dapat melibatkan diri dalam banyak aktiviti yang menarik semasa proses
pembelajaran (Norhasilah Mat Nor, Aspaniza Hamzah & Nurul Farhana Junus, 2012).
Oleh yang demikian, pelaksanaan aktiviti yang menarik seperti penggunaan
Teknologi Maklumat dan Komunikasi(ICT) dilihat dapat mendorong pelajar untuk
mencuba secara rela hati dan terlibat secara aktif dalam proses pembelajaran di dalam
bilik darjah. Burnett (2010) merumuskan bahawa penggunaan ICT sebagai satu alat
yang dapat membantu guru dan memudahkan proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran.
939
1.1
Objektif Kajian
2.0
TINJAUAN LITERATUR
2.1
Minat belajar dalam konteks kajian ini merujuk kepada motivasi dan
penglibatan pelajar dalam pengajaran dan pembelajaran di bilik darjah.Noor Erma
Abu dan Leong Kwan Eu (2014) telah menjalankan kajian tentang hubungan antara
sikap, minat, pengajaran guru dan pengaruh rakan sebaya terhadap pencapaian
Matematik Tambahan Tingkatan 4.Dapatan menunjukkan bahawa sikap, minat dan
pengajaran guru merupakan faktor-faktor yang telah mempengaruhi pencapaian murid
dalam mata pelajaran Matematik Tambahan berada pada tahap yang tinggi, manakala
pengaruh rakan sebaya berada pada tahap yang rendah.Oleh itu, pengajaran guru
940
menjadi faktor penting dalam usaha murid untuk meningkatkan pencapaian mereka
dalam mata pelajaran Matematik Tambahan.
2.2
Sharifah dan Kamarul (2011) telah menjalankan kajian bagi mengenal pasti
tahap kesediaan guru menggunakan ICT dalam pengajaran dan kesannya terhadap
hasil kerja dan tingkah laku murid prasekolah.Dapatan kajian menunjukkan bahawa
kesediaan guru melaksanakan pengajaran dengan menggunakan ICT memberi kesan
signifikan terhadap hasil kerja dan tingkah laku murid.Dapatan ini adalah selari
dengan kajian oleh Saridah (2006) yang mendapati terdapat hubungan yang sangat
positif di antara penggunaan perisian multimedia dengan prestasi pelajar.Kajian ini
merumuskan bahawa penggunaan perisian multimedia di dalam pengajaran dan
pembelajaran dalam tajuk Lokus dalam Dua Matra telah dapat menarik minat
pelajar dan seterusnya meningkatkan prestasi mereka.
Selain itu, Rossafri dan Shabariah (2011) yang membuat kajian tentang
penggunaan laman sosial Facebook sebagai salah satu kaedah perbincangan dalam
proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran subjek Sejarah tingkatan empat bagi topik
Tamadun Yunani dan Tamadun Rom juha
3.0
METODOLOGI KAJIAN
Reka bentuk kajian ini adalah kajian kuantitatif jenis tinjauan, berbentuk
deskriptif.Soal selidik, digunakan sebagai instrumen utama untuk mengumpul data
kajian.Populasi kajian adalah seramai 36,530 orang pelajar sekolah menengah dalam
daerah Kuala Muda/Yan
Menurut Krejcie dan Morgan (1970), sekiranya saiz populasi adalah seramai 36,530
orang, maka bilangan sampel minimum perlu dipilih adalah seramai 380 orang.
941
Sampel kajian ini seramai 400 orang dipilih dengan menggunakan persampelan rawak
muda.Kajian ini menggunakan kaedah soal selidik terpiawai. pembahagian item
adalah seperti yang ditunjukkan dalam Jadual 1 berikut;
Sumber
Jumlah item
Cronbach alpha ( )
0.854
10
ICT Attitudes
B.
Minat belajar
0.762
Questionnaire
10
(ICTAQ) , (2010)
20
0.892
4.0
4.1
4.2
Pemboleh Ubah
Min
SP
Tahap
Penggunaan ICT
3.52
.508
Sederhana
942
4.3
Pernyataan
Min
SP
Tahap
4.01
.624
Tinggi
Jadual 4: Keputusan Ujian Kolerasi Pearson antara Penggunaan ICT dengan Minat
Belajar
Pemboleh ubah
Minat Belajar
Penggunaan ICT
.609**
Sementara itu, pengkelasan nilai korelasi yang dicadangkan oleh Hair et. al.
(2007) menunjukkan bahawa hubungan antara penggunaan ICT dengan minat belajar
dalam kajian ini mempunyai hubungan yang sederhana.Walau bagaimanapun, dapatan
ini tetap berjaya menyangkal beberapa dapatan kajian lalu yang menunjukkan tiada
hubungan antara penggunaan ICT dengan minat dan pencapaian pelajar.
Kajian
Sharifah dan Kamarul (2011) dan Abdul Halim Masnan (2008) menunjukkan bahawa
tiada hubungan antara penggunaan komputer dengan hasil kerja, tingkah laku dan
pencapaian kanak-kanak sama ada menggunakan ICT ataupun tanpa ICT. Selain itu,
dapatan kajian ini juga adalah bertentangan dengan dapatan beberapa kajian luar
negara yang lebih maju dan lebih awal yang mengintegrasikan ICT dalam pendidikan.
943
Kajian oleh Swanson (2013), Chaterine dan Maria (2011) melihat kebarangkalian
pelajar lebih tertumpu kepada teknologi yang digunakan daripada pengajaran yang
ingin disampaikan adalah tinggi.
4.4
Seiring dengan kemajuan teknologi masa kini, guru-guru harus peka dengan
perkembangan teknologi terkini dan meningkatkan kemahiran melalui kursus-kursus
yang disediakan.Guru-guru perlu lebih kreatif mengaplikasikan kemahiran yang sedia
ada untuk merancang pengajaran yang mampu menarik minat belajar dalam kalangan
pelajar. Penggunaan ICT dalam proses pengajaran guru secara maksimum akan
memberi impak yang positif terhadap pembelajaran dan prestasi pelajar.
944
5.0
KESIMPULAN
Kesimpulannya, hasil kajian ini mendapati penggunaan ICT di sekolahsekolah menengah di daerah Kuala Muda/Yan berada pada tahap yang tinggi. Dapatan
ini membuktikan bahawa guru-guru menggunakan kemudahan ICT di sekolah
masing-masing dalam proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran di dalam dan di luar bilik
darjah. Ujian pekali korelasi Pearson juga mendapati bahawa tahap minat belajar alam
kalangan pelajar adalah dipengaruhi oleh tahap penggunaan ICT dalam pengajaran
dan pembelajaran. Justeru, menjadi tanggungjawab Kementerian Pelajaran Malaysia
dan pihak berwajib untuk memastikan setiap sekolah sama ada bandar atau luar
bandar dilengkapi dengan kemudahan ICT secara maksimum.
Pentadbir sekolah dan guru juga perlu memainkan peranan dalam usaha
membudayakan penggunaan ICT secara optimum untuk menarik minat belajar dalam
kalangan pelajar sekolah. Guru perlu mengenal pasti strategi pelaksanaan penggunaan
ICT yang sesuai dalam pengajaran subjek masing-masing dan menambahbaik
rancangan pengajaran dengan menggunakan pelbagai media ICT. Selain itu, pentadbir
sekolah juga berperanan memastikan keperluan asas aplikasi dan kemudahan ICT
adalah mencukupi dan berfungsi dengan baik agar dapat dimanfaatkan secara
maksimum oleh guru dan pelajar.
RUJUKAN
945
Catherine Attard & Maria Northcote. (2011). Mathematics on the move: Using mobile
technologies to support student learning (Part 1). Teaching with Technology
Article.APMC 16(4) 2011: 29-31.
Krejcie, R.V. & Morgan,D.W. (1970). Determining sample size for research
activities. Educational and Psychological Measurement.1970,30,607-610.
Norhasilah Mat Nor, Aspaniza Hamzah & Nurul Farhana Junus. (2012).Faktor-faktor
yang mempengaruhi gejala ponteng di kalangan pelajar sekolah menengah
kebangsaan taman selesa jaya 2, skudai. Journal of Educational Psychology &
Counseling, Volume 5 March 2012, Pages 12-29 / ISSN: 2231-735X.
Rosnaini Mahmud, Mohd Arif Ismail& Jalalludin Ibrahim. (2011). Tahap kemahiran
dan pengintegrasian ICT di kalangan guru sekolah bestari.Jurnal Teknologi
Pendidikan Malaysia.Jilid 1, Nombor 1, Mac 2011.5-13.
Sharifah Nor Puteh &Kamarul Azman Abd Salam. (2011). Tahap Kesediaan
Penggunaan ICT dalam Pengajaran dan Kesannya Terhadap Hasil Kerja dan
Tingkah Laku Murid Prasekolah. Jurnal Pendidikan Malaysia,36(1)(2011):
25-34.
Zahari Ishak & Low Suet Fin. (2013).Monograph senario pelajar ponteng di
malaysia: suatu analisis statistikal jabatan psikologi pendidikan dan
kaunseling, Fakulti Pendidikan,UM. Kuala Lumpur:Penerbit Universiti
Malaya.
947
ABSTRAK
Kajian ini dijalankan ialah untuk meninjau persepsi guru terhadap dimensi
kepimpinan dan amalan pemantauan pengetua dan hubungannya dengan
komitmen kerja guru berdasarkan demografi iaitu pengalaman mengajar dan
kelulusan akademik. Responden bagi kajian ini terdiri daripada 139 orang guru
dari tujuh buah sekolah menengah di daerah Kota Belud, Sabah. Teori LaluanMatlamat House dan Mitchell telah digunakan dalam kajian ini. Instrumen kajian
ialah soal selidik LBDQ (Leadership Behaviour Description Questionnaire).
Analisis statisitik deskriptif, ujian ANOVA sehala dan ujian korelasi Pearson
telah digunakan untuk menguji hipotesis kajian dengan penetapan aras 0.05.
Keputusan kajian menunjukkan gaya kepimpinan menyokong lebih dominan
diamalkan di sekolah kajian. Selain itu, pengetua turut mengamalkan
pemantauan di sekolah. Daripada aspek komitmen, didapati komitmen kerja
guru-guru adalah di tahap yang sangat memuaskan. Secara keseluruhannya,
terdapat hubungan antara gaya kepimpinan dan amalan pemantauan pengetua
dengan komitmen kerja guru. Akhir sekali, beberapa cadangan dikemukakan
untuk kajian lanjut.
948
1.0
PENGENALAN
Pemimpin tidak wujud dalam satu vakum, melainkan dalam persekitaran yang
organisasinya merupakan manusia yang dipanggil subordinat dan subordinat ini pula
mempunyai latar belakang sejarah, falsafah, agama, budaya, pengaruh sosial yang
mempengaruhinya dalam tingkah laku. Latar belakang inilah yang dibawa oleh
subordinat dalam interaksi dengan pemimpin mereka. Oleh itu, kepimpinan bukan
sekadar delegasi tugas dan tanggungjawab. Bagaimana saintifik pun kajian dilakukan,
kepimpinan tetap merupakan aktiviti kemanusiaan yang melibatkan kompleksiti dalam
interaksi kemanusiaan (Lashway, 2004).
Bidang kurikulum di sekolah menengah terbahagi kepada empat iaitu bidang sains
dan matematik, bidang bahasa, bidang kemanusiaan dan bidang teknik dan vokasional.
Setiap bidang ini diketuai oleh seorang ketua bidang yang mempunyai panitia-panitia
mata pelajaran. Tugas utama guru dalam setiap panitia ialah menguruskan aktiviti
pengajaran dan pembelajaran dalam bilik darjah berdasarkan perancangan tahunan dan
harian yang dicatat dalam buku Rancangan Pengajaran Harian (RPH).
949
Salah satu komponen yang penting di sekolah adalah proses pengajaran dan
pembelajaran. Kualiti dan keberkesanan pelaksanaan proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran
seseorang guru di dalam bilik darjah dapat dikesan dan dipantau melalui amalan
penyeliaan atau pencerapan guru. Kementerian Pelajaran Malaysia, melalui Surat
Pekeliling Ikhtisas Bil. 1/1987, telah memberi garis panduan pelaksanaan penyeliaan
pengajaran tetapi tidak ada format khusus yang diberikan berkenaan perkara yang harus
diselia atau dicerap. Pada tahun 2003, Jemaah Nazir Sekolah telah memperkenalkan
Standard Kualiti Pendidikan Malaysia (SKPM) sebagai panduan penyeliaan pengajaran
dan pembelajaran yang dilakukan di dalam bilik darjah.
Pemantauan dan penyeliaan oleh pihak pengurusan sekolah amat perlu dalam
memastikan kualiti kerja guru berterusan. Pemantauan dan pemantauan akan dapat
membantu guru menyelaraskan aktiviti pengajaran dan merangsang guru untuk mencapai
prestasi kerja yang cemerlang serta dapat memperkembangkan potensi diri dan mengatasi
sebarang kekurangan. Menurut Aminuddin (2005), penyeliaan oleh pengetua atau guru
besar dapat membantu guru meningkatkan mutu pengajaran guru supaya menjadi
bertambah berkesan. Pemantauan dan penyeliaan pentadbir sekolah dapat melihat dengan
lebih dekat lagi apa yang sebenarnya berlaku di dalam dan di luar bilik darjah agar
kelemahan dapat diperbaiki dan amalan-amalan yang baik dapat dikukuhkan.
2.0
PERNYATAAN MASALAH
Bidang keguruan adalah bidang profesional. Menurut Onstein dan Levine (1993),
konsep profesional merujuk kepada ciri-ciri yang terdapat dalam kalangan ahli sesuatu
profesion. Antara ciri-ciri tersebut adalah cekap dan mempunyai pengetahuan yang
mendalam dalam bidang yang diceburi dan mempunyai kod etika yang mengawal tingkah
laku ahli. Ini bermakna guru-guru adalah profesional kerana mereka mendapat latihan
khusus, berpengetahuan luas dan pakar dalam bidang yang diceburi serta mempunyai kod
etika tersendiri. Dewasa ini, banyak perkembangan yang berlaku khususnya yang
melibatkan guru. Profesion keguruan dilihat semakin goyah kerana ada segelintir guru
yang sanggup melanggar kod etika keguruan yang telah sedia termaktub.
Salah satu dari banyak kes pelanggaran kod etika tersebut adalah berkenaan
dengan penyalahgunaan masa. Dalam sistem pendidikan negara kita waktu persekolahan
umum adalah dari pukul 7.30 pagi hingga 1.15 petang, iaitu lebih kurang enam jam tidak
termasuk aktiviti ko-kurikulum pada sebelah petang. Sepanjang tempoh ini, guru-guru
dan murid-murid terlibat secara langsung dalam proses pengajaran dan pembelajaran. Isu
penyalahgunaan masa ini timbul walaupun jarang disiarkan di media massa kerana ini
lebih menjurus kepada hal dalaman sekolah tetapi isu ini perlu dilihat dan ditangani
secara profesional sebelum menjadi kritikal.
Antara contoh penyalahgunaan masa guru di sekolah adalah seperti guru tidak
menepati masa memasuki kelas, guru tidak menyampaikan isi pengajaran secara
bersungguh-sungguh, guru mengajar tidak mengikut sukatan pelajaran yang ditetapkan
oleh kementerian, guru tidak menepati masa keluar daripada kelas, guru menggunakan
masa di sekolah dengan melakukan kerja yang tidak berkaitan dengan pendidikan seperti
melayari laman sosial seperti Facebook, melepak di kantin, guru melakukan kerja
sambilan di malam hari seperti mengajar tuisyen, berniaga di pasar malam) sehingga
menjejaskan produkivitinya dalam aktiviti-aktiviti di sekolah seperti dalam penyampaian
pengajaran dan pembelajaran di sekolah dan sebagainya.
951
Laporan e-Hadir Pejabat Pendidikan Daerah Kota Belud pada bulan Mei, 2012
menunjukkan bahawa daripada 106 orang guru yang bertugas di Sekolah Menengah
Kebangsaan Narinang, Kota Belud, terdapat 1.7 peratus daripada 99.4 peratus kehadiran
adalah lewat hadir ke sekolah. Pada bulan yang sama, 2.5% daripada guru tidak
menghantar Buku Rekod Mengajar bertugas ialah 12.5 orang setiap bulan. Analisis rekod
keluar sekolah semasa bertugas untuk jangka masa Januari hingga Oktober, 2013,
menunjukkan bahawa purata guru keluar sekolah semasa bertugas ialah 12.5 orang setiap
bulan. Laporan kehadiran untuk setiap mesyuarat staf di sekolah tersebut menunjukkan
rekod kehadiran tidak pernah mencapai 100%. Dalam perjumpaan ko-kurikulum,
kehadiran guru adalah juga tidak pernah penuh, iaitu 85% pada tahun 2013 (Unit KoKurikulum, 2013).
Berdasarkan kepada laporan dan data yang dinyatakan di atas, kajian ini
diharapkan dapat mengenal pasti keberkesanan kepimpinan pengetua terhadap perkaraperkara yang berkait rapat dengan peranan guru-guru di sekolah. Pengkaji ingin meninjau
amalan pemantauan yang diamalkan oleh pengetua dari perspektif guru. Selain itu,
kajian ini turut meninjau persepsi atau tanggapan khususnya komitmen kerja guru
berkaitan dengan kepimpinan pengetua dan amalan pemantauan pengetua.
952
3.0
OBJEKTIF KAJIAN
i)
ii)
iii)
4.0
Dalam kajian ini, reka bentuk kajian yang digunakan adalah berbentuk deskriptif
secara kaedah kuantitatif kerana bersesuaian dengan objektif dan persoalan kajian. Mohd
Majid (2000) berpendapat bahawa penyelidikan deskriptif mampu menjelaskan sesuatu
fenomena. Manakala kaedah kuantitatif dilaksanakan melalui penggunaan borang soal
selidik untuk memudahkan penyelidik mengumpul dan memperoleh data melalui min dan
sisihan piawai. Pada masa yang sama, penggunaan borang selidik memiliki kelebihan
tersendiri iaitu mudah memperolehi maklumat, berfaedah untuk sampel yang besar,
berbentuk piawai dan mewujudkan ketepatan dan ketepatan dan kebenaran refleksi
daripada responden.
Selain itu, soal selidik merangkumi satu rentetan soalan yang digubal khas untuk
menjawab soalan kajian dan berupaya memudahkan responden mengingati semula faktafakta yang telah berlaku. Malah, urutan soal selidik adalah selari dan penyelidik mudah
melaksanakan analsis serta perbandingan data yang diperoleh melalui soal selidik (Abdul
Rahim Abdul Rashid. (2006).
953
5.0
DAPATAN KAJIAN
Ho2
Ho3
Ho4
Ho5
Ho6
Keputusan
954
Ditolak
Ditolak
Ditolak
Diterima
Diterima
Ho7
Ho8
Ho9
Ditolak
Diterima
Ditolak
Ditolak
6.0
aspirasi Falsafah Pendidikan Negara akan hanya menjadi sekadar paparan di pejabat
sahaja. Selain itu, perbelanjaan kerajaan yang begitu besar dibazirkan dan akan hilang
begitu sahaja. Justeru, untuk menzahirkan wawasan pendidikan negara, pengetua
menggalas tanggungjawab yang sangat penting selaku pentadbir sekolah bagi
melaksanakan tugas dan amanah dengan pelbagai pihak terus memberikan kerjasama.
Dapatan kajian ini penting kerana dapat dijadikan sebagai panduan kepada para
pengetua dan bakal pengetua kerana mereka berhadapan dengan fungsi kepimpinan di
sekolah. Persepsi guru terhadap kepimpinan pengetua di sekolah menengah di Kota
Belud didapati sangat memuaskan dan lebih cenderung kepada kepimpinan partisipatif
berbanding
kepimpinan
menyokong,
kepimpinan
pencapaian
dan
kepimpinan
pencapaian.
dilaksanakan tepat pada waktunya dan seterusnya waktu instruksional dapat dilindungi.
Ini amat penting bagi memastikan waktu hak murid dapat diberikan kepada mereka dan
murid dapat menerima ilmu dan kemahiran sebagaimana yang telah ditetapkan oleh
Pekeliling Iktisas Bilangan 2/1981.
RUJUKAN
Abdul Aziz Ibrahim. Oktober, (2003). Membentuk Nilai Positif dan Komitmen Pekerja
Dalam Organisasi. Jurnal Pendidikan. Jilid 3. UTM, Johor Darul Takzim.
Abdul Rahim Abdul Rashid. (2006). Agenda Perubahan: Pengurusan Sumber Manusia
dan Kerjaya. Kuala Lumpur : Utusan Publications & Distributors Sdn Bhd.
Aminuddin Mohd Yusof. (2005). Kepimpinan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan
Pustaka.
Azizah Md. Isa. (2001). Adakah pengetua-pengetua di Malaysia menjalankan tugas
pemimpin pengajaran atau pemimpin pentadbiran atau kedua-duanya? Jurnal
Institut Pengetua Universiti Malaya 1(1) : 29-39.
Creswell, J. W. (2005). Educational Research. New Jersey: Pearson Merill Prentice Hall.
Lashway, L., Mazzarella, J and Grundy, T. (2004). School Leadership: Handbook for
Excellence. Edisi Ke-3. http://eric.uoregon.edu/publications/text/sl/ch1/html.
957
Mohd Majid Konting. (2000). Kaedah Penyelidikan Pendidikan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan
Bahasa dan Pustaka.
Onstein, A. C and Levine, D. U. (1993). Foundations in Education. 5th Ed. Boston
:Houghton Miffin.
Tuckman, B. W. (1999). Conducting Education Research. (5th edition). New York
:Harcout Brace Jovanovich Inc.
Unit Data, (2013). Laporan e-Hadir. Pejabat Pendidikan daerah Kota Belud, Sabah.
958
1,3
1
ABSTRACT
Owing to progression in mobile technology and their increasing affordability,
mobile devices have become most ubiquitous piece of technology in the world,
thus creating a new paradigm on how people transact. A major concern and
worry that leads to ban on using mobile devices in classrooms is distraction and
cheating. The objectives of this study are; to identify how undergraduate students
in the Faculty of Creative Media and Innovative Technology (FCMIT),
Infrastructure University Kuala Lumpur (IUKL) are presently using mobile
devices for educational purposes, also to investigate the relevance of mobile
devices in classrooms from educators perspective. The study was conducted
using mixed research method. Quantitative data were acquired through a closeended survey in order to infer the depth of emerging topics. Qualitative data were
acquired through a semi structured interview with randomly selected FCMIT
educators. Grounded theory was used to analyze qualitative data, which implies
using inductive and deductive reasoning. Recommendations made were; to
develop a mobile app that will cater for mobile learning needs for both in-and-out
of classrooms. Whenever users login to the app, it will disable all other apps on
the device, except the device core processes apps that are needed for the device to
operate and the mobile learning app itself; this can prevent distraction and
cheating. The findings of this study indicate that all the respondents are willing to
embrace mobile learning if provided.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Recent rapid advancement in the capacities of mobile devices that goes along with
a decrease in price has enabled the mobile phones to become ubiquitous. To use fact and
figures, there are at present over 5.3 billion mobile subscriptions globally, which
constitute 77 percent of the worlds population. Although in rural areas estimates are
lower, it is projected that 80 percent of people living in rural communities have access to
a mobile network. In places where infrastructure barriers have prevented developing
countries from accessing Internet, majority of people get access to Internet from their
mobile devices (International Communication Union, 2010). Even where infrastructure is
not an issue, majority of people prefer to perform tasks on their mobile phones. Without
any doubt, mobile devices are changing how people are living, working, and socializing.
People can instantly do the following with their mobile devices; access emails, read
journals, settle bills, transfer funds, do shopping, play online games, relate with others,
and even check into a flight with a mobile boarding pass among others. Mobile devices
are allowing users to execute different and multiple tasks that once took numerous ways
to accomplish, with the ease of a few clicks and touches, anytime, anywhere.
960
society; mobile devices are still banned in many classrooms in institutions of higher
learning. If a dichotomy continues to exist between society and education, how will
education ultimately fair? The challenges for education are proceeding to grow as
students born in the digital and mobile age are approaching learning from a very different
perspective than their predecessors. Learners are increasingly using digital tools,
constructing and sharing knowledge in new ways (Looney & Sheehan, 2001).
Thus, educators must rethink on current pedagogical strategies, how they view
technology, and how they define spaces dedicated to learning. Ultimately, shifting
paradigms will benefit both students by increasing achievement and learning outcomes
and universities by helping them remain competitive with alternative educational outlets
(Prensky, 2001). Incorporating mobile learning is just one potential way to meet the
needs of both students and universities in the digital age. (Chen & Denoyelles, 2013).
Conclude in their research with the under listed key takeaway points:
The survey also found that mobile learning typically occurs outside the
classroom, with only limited guidance from instructors.
1.1
RESEARCH QUESTIONS
i.
ii.
What are FCMIT educators insights about integrating mobile learning in their
classrooms?
iii.
961
iv.
1.2
RESEARCH OBJECTIVES
2.0
LITERATURE REVIEW
In the past decades, mobile devices have evolved from a luxury item into a
necessity. As the need for devices has increased, the price has fallen. Blended with an
increase in technological abilities, mobile devices have turn into multi-functional tools
capable of doing chores that were once the task of multiple devices. These multifunctional tools are commonly known as smartphones; however, some products like the
iPod Touch offer its user with similar capacities but without telephone services. Today,
mobile devices are so ubiquitous that they are invading all fields of human endeavors,
including education. Mobile devices are being used both informally, by users who seek
out their own learning experiences, and formally, by users who are motivated to act so as
part of a class. Both formal and informal usage is taking place in classrooms across the
globe.
962
In a survey conducted by Pew Research Center, found that; 85% of adults in the
United States own a cell phone, with much higher percentages in younger age categories
(Lenhart, Ling, Campbell, & Purcell, 2010). The study also revealed that 96% of adult
ages 18-29 who uses the device are the device owners, and 90% of adult ages 30-49 that
uses the device are owners. The International Telecommunication Union estimated that
by the end of 2010; 77% of the worlds population would be mobile subscribers
(Mobithink, 2011). According to (Kennedy, Krause, Judd, & Churchward, 2006), mobile
phones are even more pervasive with university students, with over 97% of students born
since 1980 being owners. Due to the increase in capabilities of most mobile phones, the
number of users using their phones to access Internet is also increasing. The Malaysian
Communications and Multimedia Commission (SKMM) estimated that in Malaysia as
many as 68.8% of smartphone users accessed the net through their devices. (SKMM,
2012). In many countries, especially developing countries that often lack wired
infrastructures, much of the population only use their mobile phones for Internet access.
Whether its purpose is as a primary or secondary access device, nevertheless, it is clear
that mobile devices are pervasive in most regions of the globe. It is this pervasiveness
inspired researchers to investigate how these devices should be utilized in learning.
963
3.0
METHODOLOGY
Based on observation, every student carry at least one mobile device all the time.
To this end, a preliminary study was carried out to examine the impact of using mobile
devices for learning. The results provide motivation to employ a full study to further
examine how mobile devices can influence learning. This work used a mixed research
method, i.e. a combination of both quantitative and qualitative research approaches.
Quantitative data were acquired through a survey and were gathered up through a closeended question in order to infer the depth of emerging topics. Qualitative data were
acquired through semi structured interview with randomly selected FCMIT educators.
Grounded theory was used to analyze qualitative data, which implies using inductive and
deductive reasoning. All elements of grounded theory were used, that is, open coding,
axial coding and selective coding. Semi structured interview was recorded, listened over
and over, then it was written down as well as listen and read to verify everything the
interviewers said was written down correctly. Patterns were identified, categorized and
named into codes. Relationships were identified between the category of codes and one
core code was selected and relates to all categories of codes. The quantitative data
gathered from the survey were analyzed using descriptive statistics. Using GoogleDocs
software, results were analyzed and tables that illustrate responses to each query and each
factor have been produced. The qualitative data gathered was probed and explored
according to responses of the focus group to identify and define perceptions, opinions and
964
feelings about the topic or idea being discussed and to determine the degree of agreement
that exists in the group. Participants for the purpose of this study were FCMIT
undergraduate students, FCMIT educators and/or administrators. A random sample of
both faculty educators and undergraduate students population were acquired through
online survey. They were invited to take part in the survey via email that contained within
a link to the web-based survey (published using Google Form). Adoption was measured
by utilizing a five-point Likert scale with Strongly Disagree and Strongly Agree as
anchors. Selected number of faculty educators form a focus group, they were interviewed
using semi structured interview.
4.0
ANALYSIS
To ensure accuracy and consistency of data, methodological triangulation was
used. The data gathered from the survey were first analyzed descriptively for both
groups. In order to understand the differences, they were compared using mean between
groups. Likewise, data gathered from educators semi structured interview survey were
analyzed in order to have in depth understanding of the results. For students, survey email
is randomly sent. The survey link was also posted in FCMIT Facebook group. The
number of students responded were 144, student respondents age was ranged from 18
35, 36 and above. The mean age of respondents was 49.55. The population comprises
57% males and 43% females. 25% Software Engineering, 30% Network Technology,
16% Computer Science and 29% Information Technology.
4.1
Educators Analysis
Using Likert scale, educators responses were elicited to provide mobile devices
perception that would affects their students participation and commitment. 5-point Likert
scale was used where: 1=Strongly Disagree, 2=Disagree, 3=Neutral, 4=Agree, and
5=Strongly Agree. Standard deviations as well as Mean were calculated. Mean beyond 3
designate a positive response whereas Mean lower than 3 signifies a negative response to
the question. The table 4.1 below illustrates the questions with their respective mean and
standard deviation.
965
Mean STDEV
My students would be more likely to participate in class if they could use 3.67
0.98
My students would spend more time on classwork if they could access 3.80
0.86
My students would be more likely to engage in class discussion inside and 4.07
0.71
outside of class if they could post their thoughts from their mobile device
4
My students would be more likely to ask for help if they could communicate 4.13
0.52
3.68
0.82
My students should be able to easily view course materials (syllabus, notes, 4.60
0.51
0.64
3.33
0.97
It would not require a lot of efforts for students to learn how to use mobile 4.01
0.75
The findings indicate S/N 6 has the highest mean which points out that educators
come to an agreement that students would engage more when they can be able to easily
view course materials (syllabus, notes, assignments) on their mobile device. Second
highest was S/N 7 which the educators also positively point toward students accessing
Learning Management System in a mobile format on their mobile device would allow
them participate more. S/N 8 was for students to partake in quizzes on their mobile
devices, has the least mean, although the result is positive since it is above 3.
966
4.2
Student Analysis
It is clear that from table 4.2 overleaf that: 43% consider students would use their
mobile devices inappropriately when incorporated in classrooms. 87% pointed out is an
opportunity for students to cheat for their assessments. If mobile learning where to be
incorporated in classroom, it will positively reduce cost of devices as 100% of students
do have. Thus bring your own device (BYOD) shall be encouraged.
Percentage
100%
98%
Have you ever login to your student portal with your mobile device?
90%
Do you ever download an application that help you learn something new?
94%
90%
90%
89%
Do you think if students were able to use their mobile devices in class that 43%
they would use them inappropriately?
49%
10
Have you ever taken a picture or video that you used for assignment?
72%
11
Do you use your mobile device to look up something you dont understand 90%
during class?
12
Do you think mobile devices can provide an avenue for students to cheat in 87%
quiz/test/exam?
Source: Survey
967
Additionally 94% accepted to have downloaded an application that makes them learn
something new. 72% acknowledge to have taken a photo or video that they used for an
assignment.
Mean STDEV
0.97
device
2
0.85
0.91
0.89
0.77
4.20
0.78
0.68
0.65
help me study
9
3.35
1.36
Source: Survey
968
4.3
Interview Analysis
Open, axial and selective coding were used to analyze the qualitative data from
the semi structured interview. Steve Borgatti defined open coding as the part of the
analysis concerned with identifying, naming, categorizing and describing phenomena
found in the text.
Table 4.4: Open Coding
Code
Definition
Add-on
Access
Respondents identifies that mobile devices could provide flexible and easy
access to learning management system (LMS). Thus it should be available in
mobile format or app.
Auxiliary
Distraction
Autodidacts
Impart
Respondents have confidence that through mobile learning they would reach out
to their students more easily, rapidly and effectively.
Limitation
Respondents point out that they are not using up to date mobile devices and
getting one is expensive.
Infrastructure
969
Essentially, each line, sentence, paragraph etc. is read in search of the answer to
the repeated question "what is this about? What is being referenced here?" (Borgatti). In
a blog by (Tiffany, 2013), stated that basically, one can read through data several times
and then start to create tentative labels for chunks of data that summarize what is
happening (not based on existing theory just based on the meaning that emerges from
the data).
The participants realize the potentials in the usage of mobile devices for teaching
and learning in classroom as to complement the existing method as well as have
confidence that course content materials and learning management systems (LMS) ought
to be easily accessible through mobile devices. However the respondents shows their lack
of confidence that mobile devices might provide a new way for students to cheat.
Axial codes
Selective Codes
Add-on
Access
Confidence in readiness
Autodidacts
Auxiliary
Keep with trend
Impact
Distraction
Limitation
Cost implications
Infrastructure
Source: Survey
answer all research questions. The outcomes played a role in coming up with conclusions
about gathered data and also provide a recommendations for future work. From the
analysis of student learning, participation and commitment, both educators and students
have 0.98 and 0.97 standard deviation respectively (Tables: 4.1 & 4.3). This implies that
both categories of participants have similar opinion regarding perception and
engagement. These consistencies, combined with awareness and knowledge about
abilities of present mobile technology and the available apps already in market (Google
play, App Store etc.) that may be relevant for class use have been acknowledged.
Students performs educational tasks with the aid of apps like Google, Safari, reference
apps (Dictionary, Wikipedia), school portal, and resource management applications like
Dropbox, Google Drive, Google Scholar, Evernote, Notes, word processing. Both
educators and students are indirectly and informally using their mobile devices and some
relevant apps for learning. Nonetheless, students decided on adopting the use of mobile
devices for educational purposes both in and out the classes.
some students do believe that mobile devices can provide a new way for cheating in their
assessments. Some educators pointed out that internet is the main thing that distract
students and make them wonder around looking information and losing concentration
while class is going on. Some of the recognized and accepted technologies like laptops
and PCs that are used presently in most classes for educational purpose are claimed by
students to be as equally or more distracting.
Most of the educators are not using the LMS attendance for the reason that its not
user friendly and yet student must meet 75%. To simply this using the LMS mobile app,
students should login using their mobile devices when they reach their respective classes.
Then sign attendance as present from their devices, respective lecturer will
immediately receive approve notification of students. Lecturer will confirm and approve,
with immediate effect it will be updated to all respective personnel like HODs, deans,
international student office and so on. Although students mentioned in the survey that
they carry their smartphones all the time, there is alternative approach for the attendance.
When student are not with their smartphones, they can dial a code from ordinary phone
like *777*MatricNumber#. An approve notification will be sent to respective lecturer for
confirmation and approval.
A major concern and worry that solely leads to banning of mobile devices in
classrooms is distraction and cheating. A solution to this is; as soon as users login to the
app, it will disable all other apps except the device core processes apps that are needed
for the device to operate and the mobile learning app itself. This can prevent students
from wondering the internet or googling for an answer to assessment. In the apps license
agreement, it should be made clear that the app will disable users other apps in other to
prevent future arguments or quarrels. When there is complain from users regarding such,
they will be reminded that they already agree to that.
5.0
CONCLUSIONS
1. Students of the study area independently use mobile devices for both academic
and non-academic learning purposes.
2. Educators across the study area believe that mobile learning encourages cheating
and distraction.
3. The findings indicate that all the respondents are willing to embrace mobile
learning if provided.
4. A mobile app can be designed to cater for mobile learning needs of the
respondents.
6.0
RECOMMENDATIONS
This study recommends that a mobile app should be developed that will cater for
mobile learning needs for both in-and-out of classrooms. It should be designed in such a
way that users could accomplish so much from their finger tips. The way forward is to
make the content of existing Learning Management System (LMS) to support mobile
format.
It is also recommended that more awareness should be created on the benefits of
mobile learning and mobile learning app among the stake holders.
REFERENCES
Borgatti, S. (n.d.). Introduction to Grounded Theory. Retrieved from Analytic Tech:
http://www.analytictech.com/mb870/introtogt.htm
Chen, B., & Denoyelles, A. (2013, October 7). Exploring Students Mobile Leraning
Practices
in
Higher
Education.
Retrieved
from
EDUCAUSE:
http://www.educause.edu/ero/article/exploring-students-mobile-learningpractices-higher-education
International Communication Union. (2010). The rise of 3G. The World in 2010, pp. 1-8.
Retrieved from http://www.itu.int/ITU-D/ict/material/FactsFigures2010.pdf
973
Joanne, C. (2014). mLearning: The way of Learning tomorrow. Retrieved from eLearning
industry: http://elearningindustry.com/mlearning-the-way-of-learning-tomorrow
Kennedy, G., Krause, K. L., Judd, T., & Churchward, A. G. (2006). First year Students
Experiences with technology: Are they really digital natives? Melbourne:
University of Melbourne.
Lenhart, A., Ling, R., Campbell, S., & Purcell, K. (2010, April 20). PewResearch Center.
Retrieved
from
Teens
and
Mobile
Phones:
http://www.pewInternet.org/2010/04/20/Teens-and-Mobile-Phones/
Looney, M., & Sheehan, M. (2001). Digitizing Education: A Premier on e-Books (Vol.
XIV). Community College Week. Retrieved November 2014
Mobithink.
(2011).
Mobile
Statistics.
Retrieved
from
Mobithinking:
http://mobithinking.com/mobile-marketing-tools/latest-mobile-stats
Najmi, A., & Lee, J. (2009). Why and How Mobile Lerning can make a Difference in the
K-16 Class room? Society for Information Technology and Teacher Education
International Conference, (pp. 2903-2910). Retrieved November 25, 2014
Prensky, M. (2001). Teaching Digital Natives Partenering for Real Learning. Marc
Prensky.
Retrieved
from
Marc
Prensky:
www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%2020Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part1.pdf
SKMM. (2012). Hand Phone Users Survey: Statistical Brief Number Fourteen. Putrajaya
Malaysisa: Legasi Press Sdn Bhd.
Tiffany, G. (2013). An example of how to perform open coding, axial coding and
selective
coding.
Retrieved
from
PR
Post:
http://prpost.wordpress.com/2013/07/22/an-example-of-how-to-perform-opencoding-axial-coding-and-selective-coding/
974
ABSTRACT
The traffic light system is a device that controls the movement of traffic on any
route that is experiencing traffic problems. The suitability of the signal light was
composed in terms of the design or a suitable phase that meets requirements of
the road especially single carriageway road types. Portable traffic light system
designed to replace manual controls performed by flaggers at road construction
sites. Physical design and system found in mobile traffic lights are adaptations
from existing traffic light system based on Road Engineering Command (optimum
cycle time, 45 seconds to 120 seconds) and using Webster & Cobbe. This study
was conducted based on election of three locations. Through these studies, the
determination of the green time cycle and interval time of all red is based on a
distance of the road surfaces that suffer with construction activities. Installation
of portable traffic lights and a fixed time system is a solution of conventional that
contributes hazardous to the construction site and to standardize with the rules
set by the contractor. The system automatically reduces the potential direct cost
in human energy consumption and increase the safety of road users and road
construction workers. Furthermore, it is suitable for road construction project
that require overtime work until evening, also when weather conditions are
unpredictable and that require traffic control work for a day.
975
Keywords: Portable Traffic Signal, Webster & Cobbe, Optimum cycle time (40s
120s), fixed time
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The traffic signal is an indispensable device in the highway network. The main
function of signal light system is to conducting and controlling the traffic without
requires any individual workers. Each trip at highway will be more systematic, organized
and to deflect collision. The varieties of traffic signal has been design and adapted
according to the suitability and road needs. December, 1980, Police Commissioner
Bingham was given the responsibility to solve the traffic problems with permissions to
create a tool for solving traffic congestion at that time.
Due the legal regulations that have been made by government, no summons for
the person who has violated traffic regulations. So, until 1910 the first traffic light has
been created. Before the creation of the traffic light, there are certain individuals who
control the traffic by holding a sign Stop and Go. Until now, the system is still used to
control the condition. With the concept of the existing traffic light system, the new
portable traffic light will be creating as a function to replaces the flagger.
2.0
BACKGROUND STUDY
The traffic lights operation system allows a number of vehicle entering or through
a road to avoid collision between the vehicles when traffic conflicts appear. Installation
of traffic lights is an effective way to control traffic at intersection either construction
activity and during road maintenance instead of using the conventional flagman which
may create unsafely situation for the flagman.
976
2.1
The agencies was applying to install the traffic signal must ensure that their application
are reasonable. Several criteria must as follow (Arahan Teknik Jalan, 13/87)
a.
location
b.
more
There is any other rules that can be enforced to ensure traffic safer and
efficient than traffic lights.
c.
in a
According to the standard of Arahan Teknik Jalan, traffic light installation fmust
following the several rules:
a.
Vehicle operation
b.
Pedestrian safety
c.
Accidental history
977
Condition 1
Condition 2
High
High
Moderate
Moderate
High
High
Table 2: The comparisons between flagman and traffic signal system during construction
Factors
Flagman
Working hours
Limited
Unlimited
Weather condition
Not reliable
Reliable
Effectiveness
Vary
Consistence
Fatal risk
High
Low
The study from Ida s.md Isa et al., (2014) International Journal of Research in
Engineering and Technology, IJRET three edition issue two. The conflict road at single
carriageway able to having collision and jammed on the traffic flow. The problem comes
up because one of the routes was closed during construction work. So, the vehicle driver
will tolerate with another person.
978
Max. green
0 at
30 traffic
stop lines
2
(seconds)
30
period
30 45
signals
(m)
45 75
5
10
35
(seconds)
35
75 105
15
40
105 135
20
40
135 165
25
45
165 195
30
45
195 250
40
50
250 310
50
50
310 365
60
60
365 415
70
70
415 465
80
80
465 525
90
90
525 575
100
100
Yellow time
Below 70 km/h
4 seconds
Above 70km/h
5 seconds
979
3.0
METHODOLOGY
The research methodology is an important part which used to ensure that the
study was follow the common procedure. Matters to be discussed consist of a method to
identify problems, method to determine parameters, determining the phase of the signal
light and create a signal drawings design. The first step is to conduct the traffic flow
study and then calculate the phasing.
3.1
The maximum saturation flow also can be determined by taking the observed data
(pcu/hr) on the road. The number and types of vehicle must be classified to find the
coefficient on every vehicle type. Saturation flow is defined as the maximum flow,
expressed as equivalent passenger cars. Basic saturation flow (S) expressed in passenger
car units per hour with no parked vehicles is given by
980
= 525 . . ./
(W>5.5m)
(1)
3.2
DETERMINATION OF Y VALUE
The Y value define as flow ratio to saturation flow, there are very important value
to determine the value of optimum cycle.
y = q/s
Where,
Y = ratio of flow to saturation flow
q = actual flow on a traffic signal approach converted in pcu/hr
s = saturation flow for the approach in pcu/hr
The Y value for a phase is the highest Y value from the approaches within that
phase.
3.3
3.4
a = (V/2A) + ((W+L)/V)
(2)
981
3.5
(3)
This optimum cycle time, Co, gives the minimum average delay for the
intersection. But this delay is not greatly increased if the cycle time varies within the
range of 0.75 to 1.50 of the calculated Co. For the practical purposes cycle time should be
between 45 seconds to 120 seconds, although an absolute minimum of 25 seconds can be
used
3.6
(4)
Effective green time is the green time plus the change interval minus the lost time for a
designated phase. The total effective green time=cycle time minus total lost time
4.0
The studying conducted from three locations, but preferring just one location. The
picture showed us the volume and saturation of vehicle per hour. Using Webster &
982
Cobbe method the two phase of portable traffic signal was cycle around 80 seconds. Each
of green time will be around 30 second and also the amber was 3 second according to the
JKR standard. From that, the all red interval is based on the length of road construction.
983
5.0
CONCLUSION
The current finding is to determine the traffic phasing for two phase at two-lane
two-way roads. The types of roads were choosed by considering the complexity of the
traffic movement/conflicts during the road construction. The study found that the phasing
were different from one to other location due to the traffic volume and length of
constructions area. These studies conclude the portable traffic signal with two phases can
be use as traffic control at road. The differences of optimum cycle, real green time and all
red intervals are based on the volume and distance of road construction. Overall, these
devices are very important to locate at any single carriageway road in Malaysia. These
devices expect to improving safety for all road users and also the road workers based on
the JKR specifications.
REFERENCES
Arahan Teknik (Jalan) 13-87. Jabatan Kerja Raya, JKR (1987). A Guide to the Design of
Traffic Signal, 1987.
Buletin Senggara Fasiliti Jalan, JKR 20412-0012089, Bil. 7, September 2009, ms. 7-9.
Department for Transport Under License from the Controller of Her Majestys Stationery
Office. First edition, ISBN-9780115519581, 2001. 52-54.
Ida S.Md Isa, N.Latif A.Shaari, A.T.I Fayeez, N.Azlin (2014). Portable Wireless Traffic
Light System (PWLTS). International Journal of Research in Engineering and
Technology, IJRET. eISSN: 2319-1163/pISSN: 2321-7308, Volume: 03
Issue: 02, Feb. 2014.
984
Lyle Stout and Arlen Yost of OMJC Sign al, Inc. (2011). Portable Traffic Signals in the
Work Zone. IMSA Journal, National Work Zone Awareness Week, April 4-8,
2011.
Roads and Traffic Authority RTA (2008). Sec 7-Phasing and signal group display
sequence, Version 1.0, Feb 2008.
Road and Traffic Authority RTA. Traffic Control at Work Sites (2010). Sec 10-Portable
Traffic Signal (AS 4.11), Issue 1, June 2010, 10-16 10- 21.
Smart Traffic Engr 499 Project-Supervisor Dr. Fayez Gebali.(2014). The portable traffic
light
system.
Reached
on
April
20,
2014
doi;
http://www.engr.uvic.ca/~ntallen/499/
Traffic Advisory Leaflet 2/11.(2011). Portable Traffic Signals for the Control of
Vehicular Traffic. Department for Transport, April 2011.
985
POSTER
PRESENTATION
iii
ABSTRACT
literature.
986
suraini@fpe.upsi.edu.my, Hariyaty@fpe.upsi.edu.my
ABSTRACT
987
ABSTRACT
Plant tissue culture teaching kit has been developed for teaching and learning basic
plant biotechnology in educational organizations, where it does not require
sophisticated equipment. The tissue culture kit has been developed where it does not
require sophisticated equipment. This kit uses only readily available materials and
using existing equipment. This study was conducted to develop a tissue culture kit for
school laboratory (TC@SchoLab kit) in order to give exposure to secondary school
students in the technique of tissue culture as in the subtopic cell division of form 4
biology syllabus. The TC@SchoLab kit is a complete set to conduct a practical
session in plant tissue culture laboratory classes. This study started with the
development of TC@SchoLab kit using low cost media options for tissue culture and
tools that are commonly available in the school, followed by laboratory
experimentation to test its feasibility. The finding shows that the kit proves not only
feasible to use in school laboratories but also able to give positive results. As a
conclusion, the TC@SchoLab kit can become one of the learning approaches that is
able to attract students interest in biology syllabus especially in cell division, which
is a fundamental topic in Biotechnology.
Key words: TC@SchoLab kit; Tissue culture kit; Teaching and Leraning;
Biotechnology
988
Green Supply Chain Management has become more popular in Malaysia. However,
there are still plenty of companies that are implementing traditional and
conventional supply chain management. ISO 14001 is one of the indicators that a
company is environmentally conscious, but literature has proven that it is just a
framework for internal practices. The purpose of this research is to identify the
level of Green Supply Chain Management practices that an ISO 14001 company is
implementing in their practices. This is a quantitative research. The data was
collected using a questionnaire. The questionnaire was adopted from a previous
study, and purposive sampling was used to select the respondents. The results were
graded based on an Agreement Level of Mean Measurement to identify the level of
implementation. The results of the research showed that the ISO 14001 Company
that participated showed a medium implementation level of Green Supply Chain
Management practices. The research also indicated that the company indicated
promising signs of competency and desire to increase the companys
implementation level of Green Supply Chain Management practices. The findings
are able to help policy makers come up with better policies in the future to help
increase the awareness of GSCM. It also helps in adding to the existing literature
on GSCM practices in Malaysia.
989
ABSTRACT
Dredging is a necessary measure to create and maintain shipping channels for the safe
navigation of vessels. Considering the robust growth of the shipping and maritime sector,
with 90 % of world trade sustained by the industry, dredging is inevitable and expected to
expand with time. The dislodged and removed sediments from the seabed, termed dredged
soils, are generally classified as a waste material requiring special disposal procedures.
This is due to the potential contamination risks of transporting and disposing the dredged
soils, and the fact that the material is of poor engineering quality, unsuitable for usage as a
conventional good soil in construction. Also, taking into account the incurred costs and
risk exposure in transferring the material to the dump site, whether on land or
offshore, it is intuitive to examine the possibilities of reusing the dredged soils,
especially in coastal development where the transportation route would be of shorter
distance between the dredged site and the construction location. The economic sense is
further enhanced by the exponentially growing population inhabiting coastal regions,
which inadvertently transforms the coastline naturally and artificially, with occurrence of
erosion, scouring and sedimentation recorded at unprecedented pace. As the material is
essentially soil-based, it is perhaps most apt to harness its inherent properties as a soil
and to reuse it as a geometrical. In civil engineering and construction terms, this would
involve reusing the soils as backfill materials, for creating new land bases or restoring
eroded ones in near-shore areas, for instance. The recycling and reuse of the material
requires some pre-treatment though, i.e. pseudo-solidification, which transforms the
weak, soft soils into a sound geometrical of good engineering properties, fit to be reused
as backfill materials. This revived material is named GREEN SOILS.
990
991